FTK Ug PDF

Forensic Toolkit
(FTK)
User Guide
| 1
AccessData
Legal and Company Information
AccessData Legal Information

Document date: November 19, 2018
Legal Information
©2018 AccessData Group, Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, photocopied,
stored on a retrieval system, or transmitted without the express written consent of the publisher.
AccessData Group, Inc. makes no representations or warranties with respect to the contents or use of this
documentation, and specifically disclaims any express or implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any
particular purpose. Further, AccessData Group, Inc. reserves the right to revise this publication and to make
changes to its content, at any time, without obligation to notify any person or entity of such revisions or changes.
Further, AccessData Group, Inc. makes no representations or warranties with respect to any software, and
specifically disclaims any express or implied warranties of merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose.
Further, AccessData Group, Inc. reserves the right to make changes to any and all parts of AccessData
software, at any time, without any obligation to notify any person or entity of such changes.
You may not export or re-export this product in violation of any applicable laws or regulations including, without
limitation, U.S. export regulations or the laws of the country in which you reside.
AccessData Group, Inc.
588 West 400 South Suite 350
Lindon, UT 84042
USA
AccessData Trademarks and Copyright Information

The following are either registered trademarks or trademarks of AccessData Group, Inc. All other trademarks are
the property of their respective owners
.
AccessData® AD Summation® Mobile Phone Examiner Plus®
AccessData Certified Examiner® (ACE®) Discovery Cracker® MPE+ Velocitor™
AD AccessData™ Distributed Network Attack® Password Recovery Toolkit®
AD eDiscovery® DNA® PRTK®
AD RTK™ Forensic Toolkit® (FTK®) Registry Viewer®
LawDrop® Summation®
| 2
A trademark symbol (®, ™, etc.) denotes an AccessData Group, Inc. trademark. With few exceptions, and
unless otherwise notated, all third-party product names are spelled and capitalized the same way the owner
spells and capitalizes its product name. Third-party trademarks and copyrights are the property of the trademark
and copyright holders. AccessData claims no responsibility for the function or performance of third-party
products.
Third party acknowledgements:
AFF® and AFFLIB® Copyright® 2005, 2006, 2007, 2008 Simson L. Garfinkel and Basis Technology
Corp. All rights reserved.
Copyright © 2005 - 2009 Ayende Rahien
FreeBSD ® Copyright 1992-2011. The FreeBSD Project.
BSD License:
Copyright (c) 2009-2011, Andriy Syrov. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary
forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the
following disclaimer; Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of
conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the
distribution; Neither the name of Andriy Syrov nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse
or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND
ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE
DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE
FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR
SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
WordNet License:
This license is available as the file LICENSE in any downloaded version of WordNet.
WordNet 3.0 license: (Download)
WordNet Release 3.0 This software and database is being provided to you, the LICENSEE, by Princeton
University under the following license. By obtaining, using and/or copying this software and database,
you agree that you have read, understood, and will comply with these terms and conditions.: Permission
to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and database and its documentation for any purpose and
without fee or royalty is hereby granted, provided that you agree to comply with the following copyright
notice and statements, including the disclaimer, and that the same appear on ALL copies of the software,
database and documentation, including modifications that you make for internal use or for distribution.
WordNet 3.0 Copyright 2006 by Princeton University. All rights reserved. THIS SOFTWARE AND
DATABASE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND PRINCETON UNIVERSITY MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS
OR WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. BY WAY OF EXAMPLE, BUT NOT LIMITATION,
PRINCETON UNIVERSITY MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF MERCHANT-
ABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR THAT THE USE OF THE LICENSED
SOFTWARE, DATABASE OR DOCUMENTATION WILL NOT INFRINGE ANY THIRD PARTY PATENTS,
COPYRIGHTS, TRADEMARKS OR OTHER RIGHTS. The name of Princeton University or Princeton
may not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software and/or database.
Title to copyright in this software, database and any associated documentation shall at all times remain
with Princeton University and LICENSEE agrees to preserve same.
XMLmind XSL-FO Converter Professional Edition Developer License Agreement:
Distribution
Licensee may not distribute with the Application any component of the Software other than the binary
class library (xfc.jar) for the JavaTM version and the Dynamic Link Library file (xfc.dll) for the .NET
version.
Licensee shall include the following copyright notice: "XMLmind XSL-FO Converter Copyright © 2002-
| 3
2009 Pixware SARL", with every copy of the Application. This copyright notice may be placed together
with Licensee's own copyright notices, or in any reasonably visible location in the packaging or
documentation of the Application.
Licensee may use, distribute, license and sell the Application without additional fees due to Licensor,
subject to all the conditions of this License Agreement.
"Amazon Web Services", "AWS" "AWS Aurora" "AWS Relational Database Service" are trademarks of
Amazon.com, Inc. or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries and is used with permission
https://aws.amazon.com/aispl/trademark-guidelines/.
Apache(r), Apache Cassandra and the flame logo is a registered trademark of the Apache Software
Foundation in the United States and/or other countries. No endorsement by the Apache Software
Foundation is implied by the use of these marks.
Company Information
Documentation Conventions
In AccessData documentation, a number of text variations are used to indicate meanings or actions. For
example, a greater-than symbol (>) is used to separate actions within a step. Where an entry must be typed in
using the keyboard, the variable data is set apart using [variable_data] format. Steps that require the user to
click on a button or icon are indicated by Bolded text. This Italic font indicates a label or non-interactive item in
the user interface.
A trademark symbol (®, ™, etc.) denotes an AccessData Group, Inc. trademark. Unless otherwise notated, all
third-party product names are spelled and capitalized the same way the owner spells and capitalizes its product
name. Third-party trademarks and copyrights are the property of the trademark and copyright holders.
AccessData claims no responsibility for the function or performance of third-party products.
Registration
The AccessData product registration is done at AccessData after a purchase is made, and before the product is
shipped. The licenses are bound to either a USB security device, or a Virtual CmStick, according to your
purchase.
Subscriptions
AccessData provides a one-year licensing subscription with all new product purchases. The subscription allows
you to access technical support, and to download and install the latest releases for your licensed products during
the active license period.
Following the initial licensing period, a subscription renewal is required annually for continued support and for
updating your products. You can renew your subscriptions through your AccessData Sales Representative.
Use License Manager to view your current registration information, to check for product updates and to
download the latest product versions, where they are available for download. You can also visit our web site,
www.accessdata.com anytime to find the latest releases of our products.
For more information, see Managing Licenses in your product manual or on the AccessData website.
| 4
AccessData Contact Information
Your AccessData Sales Representative is your main contact with AccessData. Also, listed below are the general
AccessData telephone number and mailing address, and telephone numbers for contacting individual
departments
Mailing Address and General Phone Numbers

You can contact AccessData in the following ways:
AccessData Mailing Address, Hours, and Department Phone Numbers
Corporate Headquarters: AccessData Group, Inc.

588 West 400 South Suite 350
Lindon, UT 84042 USA
Voice: 801.377.5410; Fax: 801.377.5426
General Corporate Hours: Monday through Friday, 8:00 AM – 5:00 PM (MST)

AccessData is closed on US Federal Holidays
State and Local Voice: 800.574.5199, option 1; Fax: 801.765.4370

Law Enforcement Sales: Email: [email protected]
Federal Sales: Voice: 800.574.5199, option 2; Fax: 801.765.4370

Email: [email protected]
Corporate Sales: Voice: 801.377.5410, option 3; Fax: 801.765.4370

Training: Voice: 801.377.5410, option 6; Fax: 801.765.4370

Accounting: Voice: 801.377.5410, option 4
Technical Support
Technical support is available on all currently licensed AccessData solutions.
You can contact AccessData Customer and Technical Support in the following ways:
AccessData Support Portal
You can access the Chat, Knowledge Base, Discussion Boards, White Papers and more through the
AccessData Support Portal:
https://support.accessdata.com
E-Mail Support:
[email protected]
Telephone:
Americas/Asia-Pacific:
800-658-5199 (North America)
| 5
Support Hours: Mon-Fri, 7:00 AM – 6:00 PM (MST), except corporate holidays.
NOTE: Emergency support is available on weekends:
Saturday and Sunday 8:00am – 6:00pm MST via [email protected]
Documentation
Please email AccessData regarding any typos, inaccuracies, or other problems you find with the documentation:
[email protected]
Professional Services
The AccessData Professional Services staff comes with a varied and extensive background in digital
investigations including law enforcement, counter-intelligence, and corporate security. Their collective
experience in working with both government and commercial entities, as well as in providing expert testimony,
enables them to provide a full range of computer forensic and eDiscovery services.
At this time, Professional Services provides support for sales, installation, training, and utilization of Summation,
eDiscovery, FTK, FTK Pro, Enterprise, and Lab. They can help you resolve any questions or problems you may
have regarding these solutions.
Contact Information for Professional Services

Contact AccessData Professional Services in the following ways:
AccessData Professional Services Contact Information
Contact Method Number or Address

Phone North America Toll Free: 800-489-5199, option 7
International: +1.801.377.5410, option 7

Email [email protected]
| 6
Table of Contents
AccessData
Legal and Company Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
AccessData Legal Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Company Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Table of Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Part 1: Introducing Forensic Toolkit® (FTK®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Chapter 1: Introducing AccessData® Forensic Toolkit® (FTK®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Overview of Investigating Digital Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
About Acquiring Digital Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Types of Digital Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Acquiring Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
About Examining Digital Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
About Managing Cases and Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
What You Can Do With the Examiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
About Indexing and Hashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
About the Known File Filter Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
About Searching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
About Bookmarking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
About Presenting Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
About Cloud Based and Virtualization Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Chapter 2: Getting Started with the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Part 2: Administrating Forensic Toolkit® (FTK®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Chapter 3: FTK Application Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Initializing the Database and Creating an Application Administrator Account . . . 36
Changing Your Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Recovering a Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Creating a Password Reset File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Resetting your Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
Setting Database Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Managing Database Sessions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Optimizing the Database for Large Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Table of Contents | 7
Creating Databases for Individual Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Managing KFF Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Recovering and Deleting Processing Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Restoring an Image to a Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Adding New Users to a Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Managing Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
About Assigning Roles to Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
About Additional Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
About Predefined Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Assigning Initial Database-level Roles to Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Assigning Additional Case-level Roles to Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Adding New Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Modifying Roles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Email Notifications for Case-Level Permissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Assigning Users Shared Label Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Setting Additional Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Choosing a Temporary File Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Providing a Network Security Device Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Setting Theme Preferences for the Visualization Add on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Setting Agent Conifguration Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Optimizing the Case Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Configuring KFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Managing Global Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Managing Shared Custom Carvers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Managing Custom Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Managing Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Managing File Extension Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Managing Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Part 3: Case Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Chapter 4: Creating and Configuring New Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Opening an Existing Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Opening a Case in iSubmit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating a Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Configuring Detailed Options for a Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
About Processing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Configuring Default Processing Options for a Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Using Processing Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Customizing the Processing Profile Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Manually Customizing a set of Detailed Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Evidence Processing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
Expanding Compound Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Using dtSearch Text Indexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Configuring Case Indexing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Data Carving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Running Optical Character Recognition (OCR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Using Explicit Image Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Including Registry Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Send Email Alert on Job Completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Custom File Identification Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Creating Custom File Identifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Configuring Evidence Refinement (Advanced) Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Refining Evidence by File Status/Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Selecting Index Refinement (Advanced) Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Selecting Lab/eDiscovery Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Adding Evidence to a New Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Working with Volume Shadow Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Converting a Case from Version 2.2 or Newer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Chapter 5: Managing Case Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Backing Up a Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
About Performing a Backup and Restore on a Multi-Box Installation . . . . . . . 96
Performing a Backup of a Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Performing a Database-only Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Archiving a Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Archiving and Detaching a Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Attaching a Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Restoring a Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Deleting a Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Storing Case Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Migrating Cases Between Database Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Chapter 6: Working with Evidence Image Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Verifying Drive Image Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Mounting an Image to a Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Benefits of Image Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Characteristics of a Logically Mounted Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Characteristics of a Physically Mounted Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Mounting an Image as Read-Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Mounting a Drive Image as Writable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Unmounting an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Restoring an Image to a Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Performing Final Carve Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Recovering Processing Jobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Chapter 7: Introducing FTK Case Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

About Case Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
The User Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
About the Cases List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Menus of the Case Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Chapter 8: Working with Static Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Static Evidence Compared to Remote Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Acquiring and Preserving Static Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Adding Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Working with Evidence Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Selecting Evidence Processing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Selecting a Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Examining Data in Volume Shadow Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
About Restore Point Processing Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Managing Restore Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Viewing Restore Point Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Using Additional Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Hashing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Data Carving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Viewing the Status and Progress of Data Processing and Analysis . . . . . . . . 135
Viewing Processed Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Editing the Processing Management Queue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Viewing Evidence Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Evidence Tracking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Chapter 9: Working with Live Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

About Live Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
About Local Live Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Adding Local Live Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Chapter 10: Filtering Data to Locate Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

About Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Types of Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
What You Can Do with Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Understanding How Filters Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Viewing the Components of Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Viewing Details about Attributes that Filters use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Using Simple Filtering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Using Global Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Using Tab Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
How Global Filters and Tab Filters can work Together . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Using Filters with Category Containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Using Filters with Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Viewing the Filters that you have Applied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Using Filtering with Searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Adding a Search Filter to Live Searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Adding a Search Filter to Index Searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Using Compound Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Applying Compound Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Using Custom Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
About Nested Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Creating a Custom Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Copying Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Editing a Custom Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Sharing, Importing, and Exporting Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Sharing Custom Filters Between Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Importing Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Exporting Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Types of Predefined Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Filtering Data Prior to Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Using the Persons of Interest Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Creating a List of Communication Participants. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Creating a Rule within People Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Searching for Data within People Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Creating a Communication Filter within People Finder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Fields Searched when using Persons of Interest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Chapter 11: Working with Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

What You Can Do With Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Creating a Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Applying a Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Managing Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Managing Label Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Chapter 12: Decrypting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

About Decrypting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
About the Encrypted File Passwords List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Identifying the Encrypted Files in a Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Using PRTK/DNA Integration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Decrypting Files Using the Automatic Decryption Processing Option . . . . . . 170
Decrypting Files Using Right-Click Auto Decryption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Recovering Unknown Passwords of Encrypted Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
About Recovering Passwords using the PRTK/DNA Integrated Tool with Examiner
172
Recovering Passwords using the PRTK/DNA Integrated Tool . . . . . . . . . . 172
Decrypting Other Encryption Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Decrypting EFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Decrypting Microsoft Office Digital Rights Management (DRM) Protected Files 175
Decrypting Dropbox DBX Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Decrypting Lotus Notes Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Decrypting S/MIME Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Decrypting Dell Encryption Files (Dell Data Protection | Encryption Server) . . 178
Decrypting Bitlocker Partitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Decrypting Safeguard Utimaco Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Decrypting SafeBoot Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Decrypting SecureDoc WinMagic AES Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Decrypting Guardian Edge Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Decrypting an Image Encrypted With
PGP® WDE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Viewing Decrypted Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Chapter 13: Exporting Data from the Examiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Copying Information from the Examiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Exporting Files to a Native Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Exporting Files to an AD1 Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Exporting an Image to an Image . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Exporting File List Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Exporting a Word List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Exporting Recycle Bin Index Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Exporting Hashes from a Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Exporting KFF Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Exporting All Hits in a Search to a CSV file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Exporting Emails to PST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Exporting the Properties Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Exporting Geolocation Data to KML or KMZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Chapter 14: About Cerberus Malware Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

About Cerberus Malware Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
About Cerberus Stage 1 Threat Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
About Cerberus Score Weighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
About Cerberus Override Scores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
About Cerberus Threat Score Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Cerberus Stage 1 Threat Scores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Cerberus Stage 1 File Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
About Cerberus Stage 2 Static Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
About Cerberus Stage 2 Report Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Cerberus Stage 2 Function Call Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
File Access Call Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Networking Functionality Call Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Process Manipulation Call Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Security Access Call Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Windows Registry Call Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Surveillance Call Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Uses Cryptography Call Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Low-level Access Call Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Loads a driver Call Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Subverts API Call Categories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Chapter 15: Running Cerberus Malware Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Running Cerberus Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
About Reviewing Results of Cerberus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Cerberus Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Reviewing Results of Cerberus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Using Index Search with Cerberus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Exporting a Cerberus Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Chapter 16: Getting Started with KFF (Known File Filter) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Introducing KFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
About the KFF Server and Geolocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
About KFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Introduction to the KFF Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Components of KFF Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
How KFF Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
About KFF Data Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Installing the KFF Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
About Installing the KFF Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
About KFF Server Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Process for Installing KFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Downloading the Latest KFF Installation Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Determining Where to Install the KFF Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Installing the KFF Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Configuring the Location of the KFF Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Configuring the KFF Server Location on AD Lab and AD Enterprise . . . . . . 237
Configuring the KFF Server Location on Summation or eDiscovery . . . . . . . 238
Manually Configuring Remote Setting for Cassandra . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Migrating Legacy KFF Data from Previous Versions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Migrating Legacy KFF Data from versions 5.6 - 6.2 to 6.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Migrating Legacy KFF Data from versions 5.5 and earlier . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Importing KFF Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
About Importing KFF Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Using the KFF Import Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Using the KFF Import Utility versions 6.3 and later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Importing Pre-defined KFF Data Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Uninstalling KFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Installing KFF Updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
KFF Library Reference Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
About KFF Pre-Defined Hash Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
What has Changed in Version 6.3 and Later . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
What Changed in Version 6.3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
What Changed in FTK and Lab Version 6.4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
What Changed in March of 2018 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
What Changed in Enterprise Version 6.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
What Changed in Version 7.0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Chapter 17: Using the Known File Filter (KFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Process for Using KFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
About the KFF Admin page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Adding Hashes to the KFF Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Importing KFF Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Manually Managing Hashes in a Hash Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Adding Hashes From Files in Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Using KFF Groups to Organize Hash Sets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
About KFF Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Creating a KFF Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Viewing the Contents of a KFF Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Managing KFF Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Enabling a Case to Use KFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
About Enabling and Configuring KFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Enabling and Configuring KFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Reviewing KFF Results in the Examiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
About KFF Data Shown in the Item List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Using the KFF Information Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Using KFF Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Using the Overview Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Re-Processing KFF Using Additional Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Exporting KFF Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
About Exporting KFF Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Exporting KFF Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Chapter 18: Using Project VIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

About Project VIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
About PhotoDNA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
About Project VIC and KFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Overview of Using Project VIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Downloading Project VIC Hash Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Installing and Configuring the KFF Server . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Importing Project VIC Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Creating a Case and Enabling Project VIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Enabling and Configuring Project VIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Viewing Project VIC Results in the Examiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Using the Overview Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Using the Project VIC and PhotoDNA Information Columns . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Using the Graphics Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Using the Video Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Bookmarking Files to Export to Project VIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Exporting Bookmarked Files to Project VIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Part 4: Reviewing Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
Chapter 19: Using the FTK Examiner Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

About the Examiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Creating Screen Captures in the Examiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Menus of the Examiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Chapter 20: Exploring Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Explorer Tree Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
File List Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
About the File List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Customizing the Colors of the File List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Using the File List’s Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Icons of the File List Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
File List View Right-Click Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
The File Content Viewer Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
The Filter Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Using QuickPicks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Chapter 21: Examining Evidence in the Overview Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Using the Overview Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Evidence Groups Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
File Items Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
File Extension Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
File Category Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
File Status Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Cluster Topic Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Processing and Displaying Evidence Counts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Disabling the Calculation and Display of the Total Logical Size . . . . . . . . . 319
Chapter 22: Examining Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Using the Email Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Email Status Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Email Archives Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Email Tree . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Examining Windows 10 Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Processing Windows 10 Email and Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Viewing Windows 10 Email and Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Exporting Windows 10 Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Chapter 23: Examining Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Using the Graphics Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
About the Graphics Tab Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
The Thumbnails Size Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Moving the Thumbnails Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Using the Thumbnails Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Evaluating Explicit Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Filtering EID Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
EID Scoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Chapter 24: Examining Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Generating Thumbnails for Video Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Generating Video Thumbnails from the Natural Viewer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Creating Common Video Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Using the Video Tree Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Using the Video Thumbnails Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Playing a Video from a Video Thumbnail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
The Thumbnail Size Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Moving the Thumbnails Pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Chapter 25: Examining Miscellaneous Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Identifying Processing-Generated Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Relating Generated Files to Original Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Viewing Windows Prefetch Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Viewing Data in Windows XML Event Log (EVTX) Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
About Viewing EVTX Log Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Viewing IIS Log File Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Viewing Registry Timeline Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Viewing Log2Timeline CSV File Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Identifying Document Languages. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Examining Internet Artifact Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352
About Extensible Storage Engine (ESE) Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
About Expanding Google Chrome, Firefox, and IE 9 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
About Expanding Data from Internet Explorer (IE) Version 10 or Later . . . . . 355
Expanding Internet Artifact Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Viewing Internet Artifact Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Examining Mobile Phone Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
About Expanding Mobile Phone Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
Viewing Mobile Phone Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Standard Messaging Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Working with Cellebrite UFDR Images . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Working with iOS Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Working with Facebook Messenger (Android) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Mobile Chat Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Android Parsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Android Phone Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Android Calendar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Android Call Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Android SMS/MMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Support for Gmail on Android . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Support for Kik Files on Android . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Support for Google Hangouts on Android . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Python Scripting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Viewing Data in Volume Shadow Copies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Viewing Microsoft Office and Adobe Metadata . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
About Windows 8 and 10 Keyword Searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Parsing Data Using Belkasoft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Belkasoft Parsers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
SQLite Query Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Expanding Unsupported SQLite Databases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Creating Queries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Viewing SQLite Database Schema Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Chapter 26: Bookmarking Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

About Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
About Timeline Bookmarks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Creating a Bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
About Empty Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Bookmarks Dialog Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Bookmark Comments HTML Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Viewing Bookmark Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Creating a Timeline Bookmark Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Using the Bookmarks Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Bookmarking Selected Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Bookmarking Video Thumbnails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Adding a Video Thumbnail to a New or Existing Bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Adding to an Existing Bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Creating Email or Email Attachment Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Adding Email and Email Attachments to Existing Bookmarks . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Moving a Bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Copying a Bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Deleting a Bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Deleting Files from a Bookmark . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Chapter 27: Searching Evidence with Live Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Conducting a Live Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Live Text Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Live Hex Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Live Pattern Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Using Pattern Searches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Predefined Regular Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Social Security Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
U.S. Phone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Creating Custom Regular Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Chapter 28: Searching Evidence with Index Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Conducting an Index Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Using Search Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Using Unicode Characters in Search Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Expanding Search Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Adjusting the Weighting Criteria for an Index Search Term . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
Defining Search Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Exporting and Importing Index Search Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Selecting Index Search Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Viewing Index Search Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Using dtSearch Regular Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
TR1 Regular Expressions For Text Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
TR1 Regular Expressions For Number Patterns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Documenting Search Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Using Copy Special to Document Search Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
Bookmarking Search Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Chapter 29: Viewing System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427

About Viewing System Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
Populating the Data in the System Information Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Viewing System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
Exporting System Information Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Available System Information Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 430
Chapter 30: Analyzing Document Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435

Using Entity Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
About Entity Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Enabling Entity Extraction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Viewing Entity Extraction Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438
Using Document Content Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Filtering Documents by Document Content Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Prerequisites for Cluster Topic . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
How Document Content Analysis Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Filtering with Cluster Topic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Considerations of Cluster Topic . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
Performing Cluster Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 441
Words Excluded from Cluster Analysis Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Chapter 31: Using Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443

About Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Launching Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 444
About the Visualization page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
About Visualization Time Line Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
About the Base Time Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Setting the Base Time Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Changing the View of Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Modifying the Bar Chart Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Changing the Theme of Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Visualizing File Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Configuring Visualization File Dates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Visualizing File Extension Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451
Visualizing File Category Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
Using the File Data List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Visualizing Email Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Narrowing the Scope with the Email Time Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Viewing Mail Statistics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Using the Email Details List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
About the Detailed Visualization Time Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Using the Detailed Visualization Time Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Understanding How Data is Represented in the Detailed Time Line . . . . . . 464
About Time Bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Modifying the Time Line Using Time Bands and Zoom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Understanding How Grouping Works in the Detailed Visualization Time Line . 467
Visualizing Internet Browser History Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Visualizing Other Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
Chapter 32: Using Visualization Social Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470

About Social Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Accessing Social Analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Social Analyzer Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Analyzing Email Domains in Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Analyzing Individual Emails in Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
Chapter 33: Using Visualization Heatmap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Chapter 34: Using Visualization Geolocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478

About Geolocation Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
About Viewing Geolocation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
General Geolocation System Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Processing Geolocation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Viewing Geolocation EXIF Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Using Geolocation Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
The Geolocation Map Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
Using the Geolocation Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Filtering Items in the Geolocation Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Using Geolocation Columns in the Item List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Using Geolocation Column Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Using Geolocation Visualization with Forensics Products to View Security Data .
486
Prerequisites for Using Geolocation Visualization to View Security Data . . . . 486
Configuring the Geolocation Location Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Viewing Geolocation IP Locations Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Using the Geolocation Network Information Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Chapter 35: Customizing the Examiner Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489

About Customizing the Examiner User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
The Tab Layout Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Moving View Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Creating Custom Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
Managing Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Customizing File List Columns. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Creating User-Defined Custom Columns for the File List view . . . . . . . . . . 495
Deleting Custom Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Navigating the Available Column Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Chapter 36: Working with Evidence Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499

Creating a Case Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500
Adding Case Information to a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
Adding Bookmarks to a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
Bookmark Export Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503
Adding Graphics Thumbnails and Files to a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Adding a Video to a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
Adding a File Path List to a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
Adding a File Properties List to a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Adding Registry Selections to a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
Adding Screen Captures from Examiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
Selecting the Report Output Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510
Creating a Load File. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Customizing the Report Graphic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
Using Cascading Style Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Viewing and Distributing a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 514
Modifying a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Exporting and Importing Report Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
Writing a Report to CD or DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
Part 6: Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .517
Chapter 37: Working with Windows Registry Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518

Understanding the Windows Registry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
Windows 9x Registry Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Windows NT and Windows 2000 Registry Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
Windows XP Registry Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 520
Possible Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Additional Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
Windows XP Registry Quick Find Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
Networking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
User Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 524
User Application Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
Chapter 38: Supported File Systems and Drive Image Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
File Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 527
Whole Disk Encrypted Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
Hard Disk Image Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
CD and DVD Image Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
Chapter 39: Recovering Deleted Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530

FAT 12, 16, and 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
NTFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Ext2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Ext3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
HFS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
Chapter 40: Managing Security Devices and Licenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532

Installing and Managing Security Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
Installing LicenseManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Starting LicenseManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
Using LicenseManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
Updating Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541
Sending a Dongle Packet File to Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Virtual CodeMeter Activation Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Setup for Online Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
Setting up VCM for Offline Systems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
Creating a Virtual CM-Stick with Server 2003/2008 Enterprise Editions . . . . 544
Additional Instructions for AD Lab WebUI and eDiscovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 545
Virtual CodeMeter FAQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Network License Server (NLS) Setup Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Preparation Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Setup Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
Network Dongle Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
NLS Server System Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
NLS Client System Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 549
Chapter 41: Configuring a Multi-box Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551

Configuration for a Multi-box Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Configuration Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Create a Service Account . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 551
Share the Case Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Configure Database Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 552
Share the Backup Destination Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Test the New Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Chapter 42: AccessData Distributed Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

Distributed Processing Prerequisites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
Using PostgreSQL with Distributed Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Installing Distributed Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
Configuring Distributed Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
Using Distributed Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Checking the Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
Monitoring Distributed Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
About the Status Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
Part 1
Introducing Forensic Toolkit®

(FTK®)
This part contains introductory information about AccessData® Forensic Toolkit® (FTK®)and contains the
following chapters:
Introducing AccessData® Forensic Toolkit® (FTK®) (page 25)

Getting Started with the User Interface (page 32)
Introducing Forensic Toolkit® (FTK®) | 24

Chapter 1
Introducing AccessData® Forensic Toolkit®
(FTK®)
AccessData® Forensic Toolkit® (FTK®) lets you do thorough computer forensic examinations. It includes
powerful file filtering and search functionality, and access to remote systems on your network.
AccessData forensic investigation software tools help law enforcement officials, corporate security, and IT
professionals access and evaluate the evidentiary value of files, folders, and computers.
This chapter includes the following topics
Overview of Investigating Digital Evidence (page 25)

About Acquiring Digital Evidence (page 26)
About Examining Digital Evidence (page 28)
About Managing Cases and Evidence (page 28)
What You Can Do With the Examiner (page 29)
Overview of Investigating Digital Evidence

This section describes acquiring, preserving, analyzing, presenting, and managing digital evidence and cases.
Forensic digital investigations include the following process
Acquisition
Acquisition involves identifying relevant evidence, securing the evidence, and creating and storing a
forensic image of it.
About Acquiring Digital Evidence (page 26)
Analysis
Analysis involves creating a case and processing the evidence with tools to properly investigate the
evidence.
About Examining Digital Evidence (page 28)
Presentation
Presentation involves creating a case report that documents and synthesizes the investigation.
About Presenting Evidence (page 30)
Management
Management involves maintenance tasks such as backing up, archiving, detaching, attaching, restoring,
and deleting cases and evidence.
About Managing Cases and Evidence (page 28)
Introducing AccessData® Forensic Toolkit® (FTK®) Overview of Investigating Digital Evidence | 25

About Acquiring Digital Evidence
The admissibility of digital evidence in a court of law, can be dependent on preserving the integrity of the source
data when it is acquired.
When digital evidence is acquired, forensic examiners create clones of the digital evidence to prevent any
possibility of the digital evidence being changed or modified in any way. This acquired duplication is called a
forensic image. If there is question to the authenticity of the evidence, the image can be compared to the original
source data to prove or to disprove its reliability.
To create a forensic image, the data must be acquired in such a way that ensures that no changes are made to
the original data or to the cloned data. The acquired data must be an exact “bit-by-bit” duplication of the source
data. You can use AccessData’s Imager tool to acquire exact duplicates of digital evidence.
Preserving the evidence is accomplished both in the method of acquisition and the storage of the acquired data.
Creating an exact replica of the original source is critical in forensic investigations. Keeping that replica safe from
any source of corruption or unauthorized access involves both physical and electronic security. Once a case is
created and the evidence is added to it, the case becomes just as critical. Acquired 001, E01, S01, and AD1
images can be encrypted using AD Encryption.
Types of Digital Evidence

Digital evidence is data such as documents and emails that can be transmitted and stored on electronic media,
such as computer hard drives, mobile phones, and USB devices.
The following are types of digital evidence
Static evidence
The data that is imaged before it is added to a case is known as static evidence because it stays the
same. Images can be stored and remain available to the case at all times because the image is an exact
replica of evidence data in a file format.
Live evidence
Live evidence can be data that is acquired from a machine while it is running. It is often saved to an
image as it is acquired. Sometimes, this is necessary in a field acquisition. Other times, it can be an
original drive or other electronic data source that is attached to the investigation computer.
Local live evidence
An example of local live evidence is an original drive or other electronic data source that is attached
to the investigation computer. It can also be data acquired from a device on a remote computer while
the device is mounted to the system as Read/Write. All connections to the evidence should be made
through a hardware write-blocking device. Live evidence that is attached to the investigation
computer must remain connected throughout the entire investigation. It is best to create an image of
any evidence source outside of your network, rather than risk having the source removed during the
course of the investigation.
Remote live evidence
Another type of live evidence is data acquired directly from machines that are connected to your
corporate network. This live evidence is referred to as remote evidence. The process of adding it to
your case for investigation is known as Remote Data Acquisition. To aquire remote live evdidence,
you must use AccessData Enterprise.
Introducing AccessData® Forensic Toolkit® (FTK®) About Acquiring Digital Evidence | 26

Acquiring Evidence
Some aspects of acquiring evidence are dependent on local or federal law. Be aware of those requirements
before you acquire the evidence. You can utilize static evidence as well as acquire and use live and remote
evidence from computers on your network.
About Acquiring Static Evidence

For digital evidence to be valid, it must be preserved in its original form. The evidence image must be
forensically sound, in other words, identical in every way to the original. The data cannot be modified by the
acquisition method used.
The following tools can do such an acquisition
Hardware Acquisition Tools

Duplicate, or clone, disk drives and allow read-only access to the hard drive. They do not necessarily use
a CPU, are self-contained, and are often hand-held.
Software Acquisition Tools
Create a software duplication of the evidence called a disk image. Imager lets you choose the image file
format, the compression level, and the size of the data segments to use.
AccessData Imager is a software acquisition tool. It can quickly preview evidence. If the evidence warrants
further investigation, you can create a forensically sound disk image of the evidence drive or source. It makes a
bit-by-bit duplicate of the media, rendering a forensic disk image identical in every way to the original, including
file slack and allocated or free space.
You should use a write-blocking device when using software acquisition tools. Some operating systems, such as
Windows, make changes to the drive data as it reads the data to be imaged.
You can process static evidence, and acquire live data from local network machines for processing. You can also
view and preview evidence on remote drives, including CDs and DVDs.
See Working with Static Evidence on page 116.
About Acquiring Live Evidence

You can collect evidence from a live machine when you must. For criminal investigations, it is especially
important to be aware of the data compromises you will face in such a situation, however sometimes there is no
other choice. One such example is when the suspect drive is encrypted and you must acquire the image in-place
while the machine is running. Another example is when imaging a RAID array; it must be live to be properly
acquired.
See Acquiring Live Evidence on page 158.
About Acquiring Remote Evidence

With the AccessData Enterprise license, you can acquire live evidence from your active networked computers,
including information in RAM, and drive data. In addition, using Remote Drive Management System (RDMS),
you can mount any drive through a mapping and browse its contents, then make a custom image of what you
Introducing AccessData® Forensic Toolkit® (FTK®) About Acquiring Digital Evidence | 27

find. This type of evidence is known as remote evidence because it is not stored on the examiner computer but
is within your network.
See Acquiring Live Evidence on page 158.
About Examining Digital Evidence

Analyzing evidence is a process to locate and identify meaningful data to make it available to the appropriate
parties in an easy-to-understand medium.
After you have completed installation and created a case, you can add evidence for analysis. Evidence can
include images of hard drives, floppy drives, CDs and DVDs, portable media such as USB drives, and/or live
(un-imaged) data from any common electronic source.
The data can be hashed and indexed. You can run searches in the index for specific words like names and email
addresses, or you can run live searches.
You can use the Known File Filter (KFF) library to categorize specific information during evidence analysis. The
KFF lets you automatically assign files a status of Alert, Ignore, or Disregard.
About Managing Cases and Evidence

As you work with cases, it is a best practice to back up the cases and the evidence. Back up of evidence files is
as easy as copying them to a secure location on a secure media. Back up of cases can be more complicated,
but is equally important in the event of a crash or other catastrophic data loss.
Back up of a case requires the same amount of drive space as the case itself. This is an important consideration
when planning your network resources for investigations.
Some of the case management features include: Archive, Archive and Detach, and Attach. These features give
you control over your cases.
See Managing Global Features (page 50).
Introducing AccessData® Forensic Toolkit® (FTK®) About Examining Digital Evidence | 28

What You Can Do With the Examiner
You can use tab views to locate data such as the following
The Overview tab lets you narrow your search to look through specific document types, or to look for
items by status or file extension.
The Graphics tab lets you quickly scan through thumbnails of the graphics in the case.
The Email tab lets you view emails and attachments.
As you find items of interest, you can do the following
Create, assign, and view labels in a sorted file list view.

Use searches and filters to find relevant evidence.
Createbookmarks to easily group the items by topic or keyword, find those items again, and make the
bookmarked items easy to add to reports.
Export files as necessary for password cracking or decryption, then add the decrypted files back as
evidence.
Add external, supplemental files to bookmarks that are not otherwise part of the case.
About Indexing and Hashing

During case creation and evidence import, you have the option to create an index of the data and to create hash
numbers of all the files contained in the data.
Indexing is the process of creating an index with a searchable list of the words or strings of characters in a case.
The index instantaneously provides results. However, it is sometimes necessary to use a live search to find
things not contained in the index.
Hashing a file or files refers to the process of using an algorithm to generate a unique value based on a file’s
contents. Hash values are used to verify file integrity and identify duplicate and known files. Known files can be
standard system files that can be ignored in the investigation or they can be files known to contain illicit or
dangerous materials. Ignore and alert statuses provide the investigator with valuable information at a glance.
Three hash functions are available: Message Digest 5 (MD5), Secure Hash Algorithms 1 (SHA-1), and Secure
Hash Algorithms 256 (SHA-256).
Typically, individual file hashes (each file is hashed as it is indexed and added to a case) compare the results
with a known database of hashes, such as the KFF. However, you can also hash multiple files or a disk image to
verify that the working copy is identical to the original.
About the Known File Filter Database

The Known File Filter (KFF) is an AccessData utility used to compare file hashes in a case against a database of
hashes from files known to be ignorable (such as known system and program files) or with alert status (such as
known contraband or illicit material), or those designated as disregard status (such as when a search warrant
does not allow inspection of certain files within the image that have been previously identified). The KFF allows
quick elimination or pinpointing of these files during an investigation.
Introducing AccessData® Forensic Toolkit® (FTK®) What You Can Do With the Examiner | 29
Files which contain other files, such as ZIP, CAB, and email files with attachments are called container files.
When KFF identifies a container file as either ignorable or alert, the component files are not extracted. If
extraction is desired, the files must be manually extracted and added to the case.
See Using the Known File Filter (KFF) on page 259.
About Searching
You can conduct live searches or index searches of acquired images.
A live search is a bit-by-bit comparison of the entire evidence set with the search term and takes slightly more
time than an Index search. Live searches allow you to search non-alphanumeric characters and to perform
pattern searches, such as regular expressions and hex values.
See Searching Evidence with Live Search (page 400)

The Index search compares search terms to an index file containing discrete words or number strings found in
both the allocated and unallocated space in the case evidence. The investigator can choose to generate an
index file during preprocessing.
See Searching Evidence with Index Search (page 411)
AccessData products use dtSearch, one of the leading search tools available, in the index search engine.
dtSearch can quickly search gigabytes of text.
About Bookmarking
As important data is identified from the evidence in the case, bookmarking that data enables you to quickly find
and refer to it, add to it, and attach related files, even files that are not processed into the case. These files are
called “supplementary files.” Bookmarks can be included in reports at any stage of the investigation and
analysis.
See Bookmarking Evidence (page 388)
About Presenting Evidence

You can present digital evidence by creating a case report containing the evidence and investigation results in a
readable, accessible format.
Use the report wizard to create and modify reports. A report can include bookmarks (information selected during
the examination), customized graphic references, and selected file listings. Selected files, such as bookmarked
files and graphics, can be exported to make them available with the report. The report can be generated in
several file formats, including HTML and PDF and can be generated in multiple formats simultaneously.
See Working with Evidence Reports (page 499).
About Cloud Based and Virtualization Support
Cloud Based Relational Database Services (RDS) Support

The AccessData Suite can now be run on Amazon Web Services (AWS) using the new Cloud Based option.
Users will log in using a link to the web service and all services and processing will be located online. Users have
the option to use the AWS™ provided PostgreSQL engine or the AWS Aurora™ service. AWS PostgreSQL
RDS is wire-compatible with PostgreSQL 9.6.x.
For information, see the Release Notes.
Virtualization Support
AccessData will support its products in a virtual environment running on supported operating systems and
environments by both the Vendor/manufacturer and AccessData.
For information, see the Release Notes.
Chapter 2
Getting Started with the User Interface
You can use two primary interfaces to work with cases and evidence:
Case Manager
Examiner
The Case Manager

You can use the Case Manager to manage application settings that apply to multiple cases.
The following is an example of the Case Manager:
See Introducing FTK Case Management on page 109.
Getting Started with the User Interface | 32

The Examiner
You can use the Examiner to locate and interpret case data.
The following is an example of the Examiner:
The Examiner
For more information, see the following
See Using the FTK Examiner Interface (page 285)
Getting Started with the User Interface | 33

Part 2
Administrating Forensic
Toolkit® (FTK®)
This part contains information about administrating and configuring Forensic Toolkit® (FTK®) and contains the
following chapters:
FTK Application Administration (page 35)
Administrating Forensic Toolkit® (FTK®) | 34

Chapter 3
FTK Application Administration
This chapter includes topics that discuss administration tasks that you can do within the Case Manager
interface.
See the following
See Initializing the Database and Creating an Application Administrator Account on page 36.
See Changing Your Password on page 37.
See Recovering a Password on page 37.
See Setting Database Preferences on page 39.
See Managing Database Sessions on page 39.
See Optimizing the Database for Large Cases on page 39.
See Creating Databases for Individual Cases on page 40.
See Managing KFF Settings on page 40.
See Recovering and Deleting Processing Jobs on page 41.
See Restoring an Image to a Disk on page 41.
See Adding New Users to a Database on page 42.
See About Assigning Roles to Users on page 42.
See Email Notifications for Case-Level Permissions on page 48.
See Assigning Users Shared Label Visibility on page 48.
See Setting Additional Preferences on page 49.
See Managing Global Features on page 50.
Important: It is strongly recommended to configure antivirus to exclude the database (PostgreSQL, MS SQL) AD
temp, source images/loose files, and case folders for performance and data integrity.
FTK Application Administration | 35

Initializing the Database and Creating an Application
Administrator Account
The database and application must already be installed prior to this step.
The first time you launch the application, you specify the database to use. The application then creates the
database schema which is required before any case data can be loaded into the database. You will be prompted
to give the location of the database. This option allows a non-local database to be specified even if a local
database is present.
After initializing the database, you are prompted to create an Application Administrator account. This account
lets you create other user accounts and perform other administrative tasks.
To initialize the database and create an Application Administrator account

1. Click the shortcut icon to open the application
2. If it does not detect a configured database connection for this version, you will be prompted to Add
Database.
3. In the RDBMS drop-down menu, select the brand of database that you are connecting to.
4. Specify the server hosting the database in the Host field.
If the database is on the same computer as FTK, you can leave this field empty.
5. (Optional) Give the database connection a nickname in the Display name field.
6. Specify the database name by doing one of the following:
If you are using PostgreSQL or MS SQL Server, for the PostgreSQL dbname or mssql sa, you can
use the default values or enter your own value. If you enter your own value, make sure that you
record it so that you know the database name.
7. Do not change the Port number fields unless you have a custom database configuration.
8. If you are using MS SQL Server, you can check Use Integrated Security to use your Windows
authentication credentials.
9. Click OK.
If the connection attempt to the database was successful, the database will be initialized.
10. In the Please Authenticate dialog, log into the database using you database administrator account
credentials.
Ifyou used the default installation, enter the following credentials:
Username: postgres
Password: AD@Password
Ifyou used the advanced installation or installed a different database, enter your credentials.
A successful login initializes the database and opens the Case Manager window.
11. In the Add New User dialog, create an Application Administrator account for this version of the database
schema.
Enter a name and password.
Record this information in a secure place.
12. Click OK.
FTK Application Administration Initializing the Database and Creating an Application Administrator Account | 36
Changing Your Password
Once logged into the system, you can change your password.
To change your password

1. In Case Manager, click Database > Change Password.
2. In the Change Password dialog box, enter your current password.
3. Enter your new password in the New Password text box.
4. Verify your new password by entering it again in the Re-enter text box.
5. Click OK.
Recovering a Password
You can recover an Administrator database password using a Password Reset File. Only the Administrator
logged into the program can create the reset file and only the Administrator that created the reset file can use the
file to reset the password. Before recovering your Administrator password, you will create a Password Reset
File. Once you reset a password, the Password Reset File you used is no longer valid.
There are two main components to recover an Administrator’s password:
See Creating a Password Reset File on page 37.

See Resetting your Password on page 38.
Creating a Password Reset File

You can use one of the following methods to create a Password Reset file:
When creating a user with the Application Administration role and assigning a new password
When changing the password for a user with the Application Administration role
Accessing the Create Password Reset File option in the Administer Users dialog.
When creating/changing a password

1. After entering the new password, click OK.
2. A prompt appears that asks you to create a Password Reset File. Click Yes.
3. Navigate to a secure location and enter the name of the Password Reset File.
Important: Choose a location for the Password Reset File that only you know and to which others do not
have immediate access. Keep its location confidential.
4. Click OK.
From the Administer Users dialog

1. In Case Manager, click Database > Administer Users.
2. Highlight your User Name (that is, the User Name under which you are logged in).
3. Click Create Password Reset File.
4. Navigate to a secure location and enter the name of the Password Reset File.
FTK Application Administration Changing Your Password | 37

Important: Choose a location for the Password Reset File that only you know and to which others do not
have immediate access. Keep its location confidential.
5. Click OK.
Resetting your Password

To reset your password, enter the Password Reset File you created previously.
Note: Any Password Reset Files that have already been used to reset passwords are no longer valid and will
not work. Password Reset Files from other users or other databases also will not work. Only the
Password Reset File that you created previously with your User Name and Password will work.
To enter the Password Reset File

1. When prompted for your password, enter your User Name.
2. Click OK.
The Reset Password button appears in the Please Authenticate dialog.
3. Click Reset Password.
4. Locate the Password Reset File, highlight it, and click OK.
5. Enter a new password, verify the new password, and click OK.
FTK Application Administration Recovering a Password | 38

Setting Database Preferences
The Preferences dialog lets you specify where to store the temporary file, the location of a network license and
whether you want to optimize the database after you process evidence.
To set database preferences

1. In the Case Manager, click Tools > Preferences. Type in or browse to the folder you want temporary
files to be written to.
2. Select a location for the temporary file folder.
The Temporary File Folder stores temporary files, including files extracted from ZIP and email archives.
The folder is also used as scratch space during text filtering and indexing. The Temporary File Folder is
used frequently and should be on a drive with plenty of free space, and should not be subject to drive
space allocation limits.
3. If your network uses AccessData Network License Service (NLS), you must provide the IP address and
port for accessing the License Server.
4. Specify if you want to optimize the case database.
This is set to optimize by default. Unmark the check box to turn off automatic optimization. This causes
the option to be available in Additional Analysis for those cases that were processed with Optimize
Database turned off initially. The Restore Optimization option in Additional Analysis does not appear if
Database Optimization is set in the New Case Wizard to be performed following processing, or if it has
been performed already on the current case from either place.
5. In the Preferences dialog, click OK.
Managing Database Sessions

You can use the Sessions Management dialog to manage and track database sessions from within the Case
Manager. You can also use the Manage DB Sessions dialog to terminate cases that are open and consuming
sessions, but are inactive. This lets open file handles close so that processing can be restarted.
To open the Manage DB Sessions dialog, in the Case Manager, click Database > Session Management.
Optimizing the Database for Large Cases
Note: This feature currently only supports installations using PostgreSQL.
The database can be configured to optimize the handling of large cases. Specifically it may decrease the
processing time for large cases. However, if you choose to optimize the database, it will require additional disk
resources on the database host computer.
To optimize the database for large cases

1. In the Case Manager, click Database > Configure.
2. Click Optimized for large cases.
3. Click Apply.
FTK Application Administration Setting Database Preferences | 39

Creating Databases for Individual Cases
Note: This feature only applies to MS SQL and PostgreSQL databases.
To improve performance, when you create new cases in FTK 6.0 or newer, a new database is created for each
new case.
In addition to improved performance, if you configured the database location to be in the case folder, the
database files are located under the case folder. This allows you to easily back up a case at the folder level as
the case data and the database for the case are all under one case folder.
For example, if you create a case called Investigation, select the In the case folder option for the database
location, and want to find the database files for that case, you could go to your FTK Cases folder (this is the file
you listed as the case folder directory), click on the Investigation folder (this is the individual case folder), and
open the DB folder, which contains all the database files for this case. If the In the case folder option is not
selected, the database will be found in the appropriate Case folder located within the main MS SQL or
PostgreSQL database files.
Important: Previous to FTK 6.0, all database files were stored within the main database and must be accessed
through either the MS SQL or PostgreSQL database folder.
This feature is enabled by default.
To disable the individual case database feature

In the Case Manager, click Database > Put each case in its own DB
This will deselect the option and cases will be stored within the main database.
Managing KFF Settings

The AccessData Known File Filter (KFF) can be managed from the Case Manager > Manage menu. Click KFF
to open the KFF Admin dialog box.
This functionality is also found in the Examiner main window under Manage > KFF.
The functionality is the same regardless of how you launch KFF Admin.
This shows the KFF Server Type and Server Address. You can test communication with the KFF Server.
For infomration about configuring a KFF Server, see Getting Started with KFF (Known File Filter) (page 225).
FTK Application Administration Creating Databases for Individual Cases | 40

Recovering and Deleting Processing Jobs
Jobs that are started but unable to finish can be restarted or deleted.
To recover and delete processing jobs

1. Click Tools > Recover Processing Jobs. If no jobs remain unfinished, an error message pops up.
Click Continue to see the Recover Processing Jobs dialog. It is be empty. Click Close. If there are jobs
in the list, you can choose whether to Restart or Delete those jobs.
2. Click Select All, Unselect All, or mark the check box for each job to be recovered.
3. Do one of the following:
Click Restart. In the Recovery Type dialog, choose the recovery type that suits your needs.
Click Delete. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the job permanently.
4. Click Close.
Restoring an Image to a Disk

You can restore a disk image (001 (RAW/dd), E01, or S01) to a physical disk. The target disk must be the same
size or larger than the original, uncompressed disk.
To restore an image to a disk

1. In the Case Manager or in the Examiner, click Tools > Restore Image to Disk. The Restore Image to
Disk dialog opens.
2. Browse to and select the source image (must be RAW-dd/001, E01, or S01).
3. Click the Destination drive drop-down to choose the drive to restore the image to.
If you have connected an additional target drive and it does not appear in the list, click Refresh to
update the list.
4. If the target (destination) drive is larger than the original, uncompressed data, and you don’t want the
image data to share the drive space with old data, mark the Zero-fill remainder of destination drive
check box.
5. If you need the operating system to see the target drive by drive letter, mark the Notify operating
system to rescan partition table when complete check box.
6. Click Restore Image.
FTK Application Administration Recovering and Deleting Processing Jobs | 41

Adding New Users to a Database
The Application Administrator can add new users to a database. The Add New User dialog lets you add users,
disable users, change a user’s password, set roles, and show disabled users.
To add a new user

1. Click Database > Administer Users > Create User.
2. In the Add New User dialog, enter information for the following:
Field Description
User Name Enter the name that the user is known as in program logs and other system
information.
Full Name Enter the full name of the user as it is to appear on case reports.
Password Enter and verify a password for this user.
Email Address Enter a valid email address; this will be used for any notifications.
Role Assign rights to the selected user name using roles. The default roles are:
 Application Administrator: Can perform all types of tasks, including add-
ing and managing users.
 Case/Project Administrator: Can perform all of the tasks an Application
Administrator can perform, with the exception of creating and managing
users.
 Case Reviewer: Cannot create cases; can only process cases.
3. Click OK to apply the selected role to the new user.

4. Click OK to exit the Add New User dialog.
Managing Roles
A role is a user group with a specific set of permissions to perform defined investigative tasks. The Administrator
can add new roles, modify existing roles, and view a role’s permissions.
About Assigning Roles to Users

A user can have two levels of roles assigned to him or her. A user can have initial roles granted that apply
globally across all cases in a database, and a user can also have specific roles granted for a specific case.
Roles can be granted as follows
Roles that apply to all cases in a database are granted from the Database > Administer Users dialog.
Roles that apply to a specific case are granted from the Case > Assign Users dialog.
The permissions that are applied through roles are cumulative, meaning that if you apply more than one, the
greatest amount of rights and permissions become available.
When you assign roles that apply globally across the database, you cannot reduce the rights on a case-by-case
basis.
AccessData recommends that when you first create a user account, save the account and close the dialog
without setting a role. Then click Case > Assign Users to assign roles on a case-by-case basis. You can also
FTK Application Administration Adding New Users to a Database | 42

assign all new users the Case Reviewer role for the database and, then selectively add additional roles as
needed on a case-by-case basis.
There are pre-defined roles and you can create your own.
About Permissions
Permissions are like user rights on a network. They define what types of information and which machines a user
in a specific role can access, and what tasks can be performed by users with that Role.
Tips for Assigning Permissions to Users

It is important to understand that when you create user accounts (Database > Administer Users) and
assign roles to users from that dialog, the roles you assign are global for this database; you cannot
reduce their rights on a case-by-case basis.
If you decide to limit a user’s rights by assigning a different role, you must return to the Database >
Administer Users dialog, select a user and choose Set Roles. Unmark the current role and click OK
with no role assigned here, or choose a different role that limits access, then click OK to save the new
setting.
AccessData recommends that you first create the user account, save the account and close the dialog
without setting a role. Then, click Case > Assign Users to assign roles on a case-by-case basis.
Or you could assign all new users the global Case Reviewer role, then selectively add the Case/Project
Administrator or Application Administrator role as needed. The permissions that are applied through roles
are cumulative, meaning that if you apply more than one, the greatest amount of rights and permissions
become available.
About Additional Roles

You can use the Case Manager to assign specific roles to users on a case-by-case basis. You can do this by
using the Additional Roles feature.
For example, you may have a user who has a general role of Case Reviewer. However, you may want to give
that user additional rights to a specific case. You can assign that user an Additional Role for that specific case.
You could assign them a Project/Case Administrator role to grant some management rights, or you could assign
them the Application Administrator role to grant them all rights for the case.
It is important to note that the rights granted through an Additional Role only apply once the user has opened the
case in the Examiner. It does not grant them rights to the case using the Case or Management menus in the
Case Manager. For example, this user cannot backup the case. To grant them rights at the Case Manager level,
you would need assign them the regular Project/Case Administrator role, not as an Additional Role.
About Predefined Roles

The following roles are predefined and can easily be used:
Application Administrator - has all rights

Project/Case Administrator - has most rights to manage assigned cases and to create and manage new
cases. (This role can only manage cases that the user is assigned to or has created themselves.)
Case Reviewer - has rights to view data in assigned cases.
You can manage the rights that any role has.
FTK Application Administration About Assigning Roles to Users | 43

Important: The Administrator role overrides all other permissions granted to a user.
The following tables display the default rights that the roles have or don’t have.
Restrictions to the Case Reviewer Role

The case reviewer role does not have all of the permissions as the application administrator and the database
administrator.
Permissions Denied to Case Reviewer Users

Create, Add, or Delete cases Use Imager
Administer Users Use Registry Viewer
Data Carve Use PRTK
Manually Data Carve Use Find on Disk
Assign Users to Cases Use the Disk Viewer
Add Evidence View File Sectors
Access Dell Encryption Decryption from the Define, Edit, Delete, Copy, Export, or Import Filters
Tools Menu
Decrypt Files from the Tools Menu Export Files or Folders
Mark or View Items Flagged as Access the Additional Analysis Menu
“Ignorable” or “Privileged”
Manage the KFF Backup or Restore Cases
Enter Session Management Create Custom Data Views
Differences Between the Case Administrator and Application Administrator Roles in the
Examiner
Default Case Administrator and Application Administrator Role Comparison (In the Examiner)
Examiner Project/Case Application

Menu Feature Administrator Administrator
File Export x x
Export to Image x x
Export Word List x x
Reports x x
Timeline Report x x
Job Summary Report x x
Export Event Audit Log x x
Evidence Add/Remove x x
Additional Analysis x x

Default Case Administrator and Application Administrator Role Comparison (In the Examiner)
Examiner Project/Case Application

Menu Feature Administrator Administrator
Process Manually Carved Items x
Manage Evidence Group x x
Import Custom Column File x
Import Custom Column Data x
Delete Custom Column Data x
Merge Case Index x x
Filter New x x
On x x
Import x x
Tab Filter x x
Tools Decrypt Files x x
Verify Image Integrity x
Restore Image to Drive x
Mount Image to Drive x x
Disk Viewer x x
Other Applications > x x

Imager, PRTK, Registry Viewer
Disconnect Agents x x
Recover Processing Jobs x x
Execute SQL x
Select Audit Events x x
Manage KFF x x
PhotoDNA x x
Labels > Manage Shared Labels x
Carvers > Manage Carvers x x
Carvers > Manage Shared Carvers x
Filters > Manage Filters x x
Filters > Manage Shared Filters x
Columns > Manage Columns x x
Columns > Manage Shared Columns x

Assigning Initial Database-level Roles to Users
You can use the case manager to assign roles to users. Although the default roles can all be selected
concurrently, AccessData recommends that only one of these be selected for any user to avoid granting either
redundant or excessive permissions.
To assign initial database-level roles to users

1. In the Case Manager, click Database > Administer Users.
If the user does not yet exist in the system click Create User to create the user.
If the user does exist in the system, select the user's name and click Set Roles.
3. Click Set Roles to assign a role that limits or increases database and administrative access.
4. To assign a default role, mark the check box next to that role. The default roles are as follows:
Application Administrator: Can perform all types of tasks, including adding and managing users.
Case/Project Administrator: Can perform all of the tasks an Application Administrator can perform,
with the exception of creating and managing users.
Case Reviewer: Cannot create cases; can only process cases.
5. Click OK to apply the selected role to the new user, save the settings, and return to the Add New User
dialog.
Assigning Additional Case-level Roles to Users

You can use the Case Manager to assign specific roles to users on a case-by-case basis. You can do this by
using the Additional Roles feature.
To assign additional case-level roles to users

1. In the Case Manager, select the case for which you want to grant additional roles to a user.
2. Click Case > Assign Users.
3. In the Assigned Users pane, select the user that you want to grant additional roles to.
4. Click Additional Roles.
5. In the Additional Roles dialog, under Additional Roles for this Case, select the roles that you want to
grant.
6. Click OK.
7. Click Done.
Adding New Roles

You can add new, customized roles to your system.
To add a new role

1. Click Database > Administer Roles.
2. Click New Role at the bottom of the Define Roles window.
3. Enter a name for the role in the Role name field at the top of the window. Enter a description if desired.
4. Click OK.
5. Select the Rights check boxes that you want to associate with this role. When satisfied with the settings
you have selected, click Save.

Important: Be sure to view all pages of the Rights field by using the drop down menu to toggle between pages.
Modifying Roles
You can modify a role to meet your needs.
To modify (edit) an existing role

1. Locate the role to modify in the Define Roles window.
2. In the Roles field, highlight the role you would like to edit.
3. Select or deselect the appropriate rights associated with the role.
4. Click Save.
Viewing a Role’s Permissions

You can view the permissions assigned to a particular role.
To view the Permissions assigned to a role

1. Locate the role to view in the Define Roles window.
2. In the Roles field, highlight the role you would like to view. All assigned permissions will be checked in
the Rights field.
Note: Be sure to view all pages of the Rights field. Use the drop down menu to toggle between pages.

Email Notifications for Case-Level Permissions
You can send email notifications to alert a user when they have been granted permissions to a case. This
feature will use the email entered into the user profile to send a message alert for each case they have been
allowed to access. You may also add a message to the standard email alert if desired. These notifications can be
sent to multiple email addresses at the same time.
Important: A functional email address must be associated with each user being added to the case or the
notification will not be sent.
To send a notification email when adding a user(s) to a case

1. In the Case Manager, select the case for which you want to add and notify a user.
2. Click Case > Add Users/Groups and add users or groups, being sure to include a functional email
address for each user. For more information, see Adding New Users to a Database (page 42).
3. Check the box next to Notify users.
4. If you wish to include additional information other than the default notification that the user has been
added to the selected case, you may type your text into the Message box. This information will then
appear in the body of the email notification.
5. Click Done. This will automatically send an email to each user’s associated email address alerting them
of his or her addition to the case.
To set up email notification information

1. In the Case Manager, select a database and log in.
2. Navigate to Manage > Email notification settings. The Manage Email Alert Settings dialog will open.
3. Fill in the Manage Email Alert Settings dialog with the appropriate information.
4. If you choose to send a Test Alert, enter the appropriate addresses into the Send Test Alert box and
press Send.
5. Click OK.
Note: Outgoing TCP traffic must be allowed on port 25.
Assigning Users Shared Label Visibility

Shared Labels give Application Administrators the added benefit of assigning visibility to only specific users on a
case-by-case basis.
To assign Label Visibility

1. In Case Manager, click Case > Assign Users. The Assign Users for Case dialog opens, and a list of
users that have permissions in the currently selected case appears.
2. Highlight a User.
3. Click Label Visibility to open the Manage Label Visibility dialog.
FTK Application Administration Email Notifications for Case-Level Permissions | 48

To show or hide Labels
1. Select a user in the User List pane. The Shared Labels dialog opens. Initially all are set as Visible.
2. Move labels as needed, based on the following:
Select a label you want that user not to see in any case, and click the > button.
To move a hidden label into the Visible Labels pane, select it, and click the < button.
Setting Additional Preferences
Choosing a Temporary File Path

The Temporary File Folder stores temporary files, including files extracted from ZIP and email archives. The
folder is also used as scratch space during text filtering and indexing. The Temporary File Folder is used
frequently and should be on a drive with plenty of free space, and should not be subject to drive space allocation
limits.
To specify a location for the Temporary File Folder

1. In the Case Manager, click Tools > Preferences. Type in or browse to the folder you want temporary
files to be written to.
2. Select the folder, then click OK.
3. In the Preferences dialog, verify the path is what you wanted.
4. In the Theme to use for Visualization section, you can also choose a color scheme to apply to the
visualization windows.
5. Click OK.
Providing a Network Security Device Location

If your network uses AccessData Network License Service (NLS), provide the IP address and port for accessing
the License Server.
Setting Theme Preferences for the Visualization Add on

To change the appearance of the Visualization window
1. In the Case Manager, click Tools > Preferences.
2. In the Theme to use for Visualization section, select a color scheme to apply to the Visualization
windows.
3. Click OK.
FTK Application Administration Setting Additional Preferences | 49

Setting Agent Conifguration Settings
This feature is for AD Enterprise only.
Optimizing the Case Database

This is set to optimize by default. Unmark the check box to turn off automatic optimization. This causes the
option to be available in Additional Analysis for those cases that were processed with Optimize Database turned
off initially.
Note: The Restore Optimization option in Additional Analysis will not appear if Database Optimization was set
in the New Case Wizard to be performed following processing, or if it has been performed already on the
current case from either place.
Configuring KFF
To use the Known File Filter feature (KFF), you must configure a KFF Server.
In this dialog, you specify the type of KFF Server and its location.
For information on configuring the KFF Server, see Getting Started with KFF (Known File Filter) (page 225).
After the KFF server has been configured, you can click Test Server to test the communication with the KFF
Server.
Managing Global Features

Several features that were previously available only in a case are now fully implemented for global application,
and are known as “Shared.” Since they are available globally, they are managed from the Case Manager
interface, under the Tools menu.
The Application Administrators manage all Shared features. It is a good practice to set these up to the extent you
are able, before you create your first case. Of course, new ones can be added at any time and copied to existing
cases. Shared features can be created within cases by both Application and Case Administrators, and Shared
(added to the global list).
Since each Shared feature has been documented to some extent in other chapters of the User Guide, only the
parts of the features that apply specifically to Application Administrators are explained here. Cross-references
are added to provide quick access to more complete information.
FTK Application Administration Managing Global Features | 50

Managing Shared Custom Carvers
Carvers provide a comprehensive tool that allows you to customize the carving process to access hidden data
exactly the way you need it. You can create new, and edit or delete existing shared carvers. In addition, you can
import and export carvers, and copy carvers to cases that were previously processed without a particular custom
carver.
There are no default carvers listed in the Manage Shared Custom Carvers dialog. It contains only custom-
designed carvers that are shared.
See also Custom Carvers (page 80)
To create a Shared Custom Carver

1. In the Case Manager, click Manage > Carvers.
2. From the Manage Shared Custom Carvers dialog, click New.
3. Set the data carving options that you want to use.
4. Click Save when the new carver has been defined to meet your needs. You will see the new carver in
this list and when you mark the Carving option in the New Case Wizard.
5. In the Manage Shared Carvers dialog, click the appropriate button to:
Create New shared custom carvers
Edit existing shared custom carvers
Delete shared custom carvers
Import shared custom carvers that have been exported from cases
Export shared custom carvers
Copy shared custom carvers to a case
6. Click OK to close the Carving Options dialog.

Managing Custom Identifiers
Custom File Identifiers let you specify which file category or extension should be assigned to files with a certain
signature. While Custom Identifiers can be created and/or selected by a Case Administrator in the New Case
Wizard, Shared Custom Identifiers are created and managed from a separate menu.
See also Creating Custom File Identifiers (page 85).
To Create a Shared Custom Identifier

1. In the Case Manager, click Manage > Custom Identifiers.
Initially, the Custom Identifiers List pane is empty, and the rest of the window is grayed-out.
2. Click Create New. The window activates.
3. Enter a name for the new Custom Identifier. The name you enter is added into the Custom Identifiers
List.
4. Enter a description to help define the identifier’s purpose.
5. Create the Custom Identifier by defining Operations and using the AND and OR buttons.
6. When you are done defining this Custom Identifier, click Apply.
You can also do the following
Click Delete to delete an unwanted or outdated identifier.
Click Export to save the selected identifier as a TXT file.
Click Import to add an external identifier file.
Click Close to close the Custom Identifiers dialog.

Managing Columns
Shared Columns use the same windows and dialogs that Local Columns use.
To create a Shared Column Template

1. In Case Manager, click Manage > Columns.
The Manage Shared Column Settings dialog opens.
2. Highlight a default Column Template to use as a basis for a Custom Column Template.
3. Click New.
4. Enter a new name in the Column Template Name field.
5. Select the Columns to add from the Available Columns pane, and click Add >> to move them to the
Selected Columns pane.
6. Select from the Selected Columns pane and click Remove to clear an unwanted column from the
Selected Columns.
7. When you have the new column template defined, click OK.
See also Customizing File List Columns (page 494).
Managing File Extension Maps

Extension Maps can be used to define or change the category associated to any file with a certain file extension.
For example, files with BAG extension which would normally be categorized as “Unknown Type” can be
categorized as an AOL Bag File, or a files with a MOV extension that would normally be categorized as Apple
QuickTime video files can be changed to show up under a more appropriate category since they can sometimes
contain still images.
To create a Shared Custom Extension Mapping

1. In the Case Manager, click Manage > File Extension Maps.
2. In the Custom Extension Mapping dialog, click Create New.
3. Enter a name for the new mapping.
4. Enter a description for easier identification.
5. In the Category pane, select a file type you want to map an extension to.
6. Click Add Extension.
The Add New Extension dialog box opens.
7. Enter the new extension to add.
8. Click OK.
You can also do the following:
Click Delete to remove an unwanted or outdated mapping.

Click Import to add an external Custom Extension Mapping file for Shared use.
Click Export to save a Custom Extension Mapping file.
Click Close to close the Custom Extension Mapping dialog.
See also Custom Case Extension Maps (page 86).

Managing Filters
Filters consist of a name, a description, and as many rules as you need. A filter rule consists of a property, an
operator, and one or two criteria. (You may have two criteria in a date range.)
To create a new Shared filter

1. From Case Manager, click Manage > Filters.
The Manage Shared Filters dialog opens.
If there is an existing filter in the Filters list that you want to use as a pattern, or template, highlight
that filter and click Copy.
If there is no filter that will work as a pattern, Click New.
3. Enter a name and a short description of the new filter.
4. Select a property from the drop-down menu.
5. Select an operator from the Properties drop-down menu.
6. Select the applicable criteria from the Properties drop-down menu.
7. Each property has its own set of operators, and each operator has its own set of criteria. The possible
combinations are vast.
8. Select the Match Any operator to filter out data that satisfies any one of the filter rules or the Match All
operator to filter out data that satisfies all rules of the filter.
You can test the filter without having to save it first. Check the Live Preview box to test the filter as you
create it.

Part 3
Case Management
This part contains information about managing cases. It contains the following chapters:
Introducing FTK Case Management (page 109)
Creating and Configuring New Cases (page 56)
Managing Case Data (page 95)
Working with Evidence Image Files (page 103)
Working with Static Evidence (page 116)
Working with Live Evidence (page 139)
Filtering Data to Locate Evidence (page 141)
Working with Labels (page 161)
Decrypting Files (page 165)
Exporting Data from the Examiner (page 186)
Getting Started with KFF (Known File Filter) (page 225)
About Cerberus Malware Analysis (page 201)
Running Cerberus Malware Analysis (page 219)
Case Management | 55
Chapter 4
Creating and Configuring New Cases
This chapter explains how to create a new case and configure the case options. If you have cases that were
created in version 2.2 or later, you can convert them to the latest version.
Opening an Existing Case (page 56)

Opening a Case in iSubmit (page 57)
Creating a Case (page 58)
Configuring Detailed Options for a Case (page 59)
Evidence Processing Options (page 67)
Adding Evidence to a New Case (page 94)
Converting a Case from Version 2.2 or Newer (page 94)
Opening an Existing Case

You can open a case that has previously been created and closed.
To open an existing case

1. Open the Case Manager.
2. In the Case Manager, highlight and double-click a case to open it.
Note: If you attempt to open a case you have not been assigned to, you will receive a message saying, “You
have not been assigned to work on this case.” This is because you must be authenticated to open the
case.
Creating and Configuring New Cases Opening an Existing Case | 56

Opening a Case in iSubmit
Users have the ability to pull pertinent information from iSubmit and auto-create a case with that information,
allowing investigators to track a case from start to completion within the iSubmit program.
This feature requires an add-on license for iSubmit. Please see your sales representative for details.
A key will need to be created before you can connect to the iSubmit database.
To create an iSubmit key in the registry

Create the following REG_SZ key:
[HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\AccessData\Products\Forensic Toolkit\6.3]
“iSubmitLicense”=[The iSubmit license number you have obtained from iSubmit]
Note: The version of AccessData software must match the current version you are using. For example FTK 6.3
and 6.3.1 will both use 6.3.
To connect to an iSubmit database

1. In the Case Manager, navigate to Case > iSubmit Forms.
The iSubmit Forms dialog will open, allowing you to search for an existing form by entering the Form
Type and Date Range.
2. Click Update Forms List and select the desired iSubmit form. Click Create.
3. Select the proper Form ID and click Create.
The New Case dialog will open and the new case will then be tracked within iSubmit.
The form number is shown in the Reference Field and is automatically populated from the iSubmit
database.
Note: You will need to put the iSubmit key in the registry for this to work.
Creating and Configuring New Cases Opening a Case in iSubmit | 57

Creating a Case
Case information is stored in a database, and allows case administration as each new case is created.
To start a new case

1. Open the Case Manager.
2. Click Case > New. The New Case Options dialog opens.
3. Enter a name for the case in the Case Name field.
4. (Optional) Enter any specific reference information in the Reference field.
5. (Optional) Enter a short description of the case in the Description field.
6. You can use the Description File option to attach a file to the case. For example you can use this field to
attach a work request document or a warrant to the case.
7. In the Case Folder Directory field specify where to store the case files. If you wish to specify a different
location for the case, click the Browse button.
Note: If the case folder directory is not shared, an error occurs during case creation.
8. (Optional) In the Database Directory field you can specify a location for where to store database
directory files. You can check the In the case folder option to save the database directory in the case
folder. If you do not specify these options, the database directory is saved to the default location of the
database.
Note: The location that you specify for Database Directory is relative to your database computer. If you
intend to specify a location that is on a different computer than your database, for example in a
multi-box scenario, then you must enter a network path.
Important: If using a UNC path for the case folder, and selecting the In the case folder option for the
database directory, and if the database process isn't running as a network user, it will not be able to
access the UNC path and will therefore fail to create the database files.
9. Configure the default processing options for the case by either using a processing profile or using
custom settings.
See Configuring Detailed Options for a Case on page 59.
10. If you wish to open the case as soon as it is created, mark Open the case.
11. Click OK to create the new case.
Creating and Configuring New Cases Creating a Case | 58

Configuring Detailed Options for a Case
When you configure Detailed Options for a case, there are options for doing the following:
Configuring Default Processing Options for a Case (page 60)

Configuring Evidence Refinement (Advanced) Options (page 87)
Selecting Index Refinement (Advanced) Options (page 89)
Managing Custom Identifiers (page 52)
About Processing Options

To help you in investigating the evidence in a case, the evidence data is processed. When evidence is
processed, data about the evidence is created and stored in the database. You can view the processed data in
the Examiner.
Evidence is processed at the following times:
When adding evidence to a case

After the initial processing, when performing an additional analysis
There are many different types of processing options. You can choose which processing options are relevant to
your case.
The following are some examples of how your data can be processed:
Generate hash values for all of the files in the evidence.

Categorize the types of files in your evidence, such as graphics, office documents, encrypted files, and so
on.
Expand the contents of compound files, such as ZIP or TAR files.
Create an index of the words that are in the evidence files for quick searches and retrieval.
Create thumbnails for the graphics and videos in the evidence.
Decrypt encrypted files.
Compare files in your evidence against a list of known files that you may want to be alerted about (such
as contraband images) or files that you want to ignore (such as Windows system files).
You can select processing options at the following times:
When you create a case (Detailed Options) -- these become the default options for the case.
See Evidence Processing Options (page 67)
When you add evidence to an existing case (Refinement Options) -- you can either use or override the
case defaults.
See Configuring Evidence Refinement (Advanced) Options (page 87)
When you perform an Additional Analysis on a case.
See Using Additional Analysis (page 128)
Each processing option that you enable increases the time that it take to process the evidence. Depending on
your situation, you may want to select more or fewer options.
For example, in one scenario, you may want to process the evidence as quickly as possible. In this case, you
can use a pre-defined “Field Mode” that deselects almost all processing options and therefore takes the shortest
Creating and Configuring New Cases Configuring Detailed Options for a Case | 59
amount of time. After the initial processing, you can perform an Additional Analysis and enable additional
processing options.
In another scenario, you may want to take the time to categorize and index files during the initial processing, so
you can enable those options. This will take a significant amount of time for a large evidence set.
There is a Pause button available in the Data Processing Status window for situations where you need to
interrupt evidence processing. Once you are ready to continue, select the Resume option.
Configuring Default Processing Options for a Case

When you create a case, you define the default processing options that are used whenever evidence is added to
that case. By specifying default processing options for a case, you do not have to manually configure the
processing options each time you add new evidence. The case-level defaults can be overridden and customized
when you add new evidence or when you perform an additional analysis.
You configure the default processing options for a case in one of the following ways:
Using Processing Profiles (page 61)

Customizing the Processing Profile Buttons (page 65)
Note: One factor that may influence which processing options to select is your schedule. If you disable
indexing, it shortens case processing time. The case administrator can return at a later time and index the
case if needed. The fastest way to create a case and add evidence is to use Field Mode.
Using Processing Profiles
About Processing Profiles

As an investigator, you may want to be able to save a set of processing options as a profile so that they can be
easily reused. Processing profiles are a saved list of processing options that are stored in the database.
Processing profiles are created at the global level and are available anytime you create a case.
For example, you may need to focus on certain types of data in a case, such as images and videos. In this
example, you can create a processing profile that enables the following processing options:
KFF
Expand Compound Files

Flag Bad Extensions
Create Thumbnails for Graphics
Create Thumbnails for Video
Generate Common Video File
Explicit Image Detection
PhotoDNA
Each time you create this kind of case, you can use a profile with these options set as default and you won't
need to manually specify them again.
Processing profiles are used at the case level. Specifically, when you create a case, you can select a processing
profile from a drop-down list as the default processing options for that case. Any time that you add evidence to
that case, the profile's setting will be the default "Refinement Options". This saves you time by not having to
reconfigure processing options each time you add evidence to the case. However, when you add evidence to a
case, you can modify the processing options for that evidence set. The profile is simply a set of default settings
for the case.
Processing profiles are stored in the database. It is important to note that the profile itself does not get saved
with the case but only the processing options that are in the profile.
There are five pre-defined, one-click processing profiles:
Forensic processing (these were the Factory Defaults in version 4.x and earlier)
eDiscovery processing
Summation processing
Basic assessment
Fieldmode
See About Pre-configured Processing Profiles on page 62.
When you create a case, you can use one of the pre-configured profiles or create/select a custom profile. If you
create a custom profile, you can save it with a unique name so that you can re-use it in a different case.
See Creating a Custom Processing Profile (page 64)

Important: When you create a custom profile, the settings for Custom File Identification or Event Audit Log
options are not stored in the processing profile. The Send Email Alert and Decrypt Dell Encryption
Files settings on the Evidence Processing tab are also not stored in the processing profile.
You can choose which profiles populate in the five one-click processing profile buttons for ease of use. The pre-
configured profile options and your other custom profiles will still be available in the drop down menu.
You can also edit, delete, import, or export custom processing profiles.
See Managing Processing Profiles (page 65)
You can also set custom processing options for a case without saving them to a profile.
See Customizing the Processing Profile Buttons on page 65.
About Pre-configured Processing Profiles

There are five pre-defined, one-click processing profiles. You cannot edit, delete, or export these profiles.
However, you can use them as a template for a new custom profile.
The following are the pre-configured profiles.
Forensic This profile includes the following processing options:

processing  MD5 Hash
 SHA-1 Hash
 SHA-256 Hash
 Expand common compound files
This will expand many types of compound files.
See Expanding Compound Files (page 70)
 File Signature Analysis
 Flag Bad Extensions
 dtSearch Test Index
 Create Thumbnails for Graphics
 Include Deleted Files
 Include File Slack
 Include Free Space
 Include Message Headers
 Create Email Threads
This list of processing options is the same as the Factory Defaults in version 4.x.
For a description of processing options, see Evidence Processing Options (page 67)
eDiscovery The eDiscovery profile allows the processed evidence to be easily imported into AD eDiscovery.
processing
These options include:
 MD5 Hash
 Flag Duplicate Files
 Expand Compound Files
 dtSearch Text Index
 Document Content Analysis
 Don’t Expand Embedded Graphics
 Do not include document metadata in filtered text
 Enable Advanced De-duplication Analysis
 Propagate Email Attributes
 Cluster Analysis
 Include Extended Information in the Index
Summation The Summation profile allows the processed evidence to be easily imported into AD Summation.
processing
These options include:
 Flag Duplicate Files
 Expand Compound Files
 Flag Bad Extensions
 dtSearch Text Index
 Create Thumbnails for Graphics
 Generate Common Video File
 Document Content Analysis
 Entity Extraction (Doc. Content)
 Don’t Expand Embedded Graphics
 Do not include document metadata in filtered text
 Enable Advanced De-duplication Analysis
 Propagate Email Attributes
 Cluster Analysis
 Include Extended Information in the Index
 Enable ‘Standard Viewer’
Basic This profile includes the following processing options:
assessment  Expand Compound Files
 Include Deleted Files
 Include File Slack
 Include Free Space
Field mode FTK Field Mode disables the standard processing options when processing evidence. This speeds
up processing. You can then re-enable processing options through Additional Analysis.
See Using Additional Analysis (page 128)
The Job Processing screen always shows 0 for Queued when Field Mode is enabled, because
items move directly from Active Tasks to Completed.
Creating a Custom Processing Profile
You can create a processing profile by selecting a set of processing options and then saving them as a profile.
You can create a processing profile at one of the following times:
Before creating a case

While configuring processing options for a new case
To create a custom processing profile

1. From the Case Manager do one of the following:
To create a profile before creating a case, do the following:
1a. Click Manage > Evidence Processing Profiles.
1b. Click New Profile.
You can use the Profile dropdown to select an existing profile as a template.
To create a profile while creating a new case, do the following:
1a. Click Case > New.
1b. In the Processing profile field, select one of the built-in options and click Customize.
2. Do the following:
2a. Click the Evidence Processing icon in the left pane, and select the processing options to be the
default options for the case. For more information, see Evidence Processing Options (page 67).
2b. Click the Evidence Refinement (Advanced) icon to select the evidence refinement options to use
on this case. For more information, see Configuring Evidence Refinement (Advanced) Options
(page 87).
2c. Click the Index Refinement (Advanced) icon to select the index refinement options to use on this
case. For more information, see Selecting Index Refinement (Advanced) Options (page 89).
2d. Click the Evidence Lab/eDiscovery icon to select the advanced options to use on this case. For
more information, see Selecting Lab/eDiscovery Options (page 91).
Important: When you create a custom profile, the settings for Custom File Identification or Event Audit Log
options are not stored in the processing profile. When you configure these options, the Save As...
profile button is grayed out to signify that they are not saved as part of a profile.
See Managing Custom Identifiers (page 52).
3. When you are satisfied with your options, click Save As... or Save user Profile... to create the profile.
4. Enter a name for the profile.
To create a new profile, enter a unique name.
You cannot use AD Standard, AD Field Mode, or Custom.
To update an existing custom profile, enter the profile name.
5. (Optional) Enter a description of the profile.
6. Click Save.
Managing Processing Profiles
You can do the following to manage processing profiles.
Edit You can edit an existing custom profile. You cannot edit the five pre-configured profiles.
To edit a profile, you select an existing profile, make the desired changes, save the profile, and
confirm that you want to replace the existing profile.
Set as Default You can set a processing profile as the global default. Whenever you create a new case, the
default profile is listed. If a profile not associated with a button has been set as the default,
none of the buttons will appear greyed out and the default profile name will appear in the
Profiles drop down.
The default profile is denoted by a green check mark.

Delete You can delete an existing custom profile. You cannot delete the five pre-configured profiles.
If you delete a custom profile that has been selected as the default, the profile is deleted and
the Forensic processing profile becomes the default.
Lock/Unlock You can lock a profile so that others cannot edit or delete it. Any pre-defined profiles cannot
be unlocked.
Export You can export a custom profile so that you can archive it or use it on a different computer. The
exported settings are saved in xml format.
Import You can import a profile that has been previously exported.
To manage processing profiles

1. In the Case Manager, click Manage > Evidence Processing Profiles.
2. In the Manage Evidence Processing Profiles dialog, select a profile to manage.
3. Select an action to perform on the profile.
4. Click Close.
Customizing the Processing Profile Buttons

It is possible to customize the profiles that appear on the quick-start profile buttons in the New Case Options
dialog. This will allow you to access your most commonly used processing profiles with one click. You will need
to have already created your custom profiles before associating them with a button. For more information, see
Creating a Custom Processing Profile (page 64). These changes are global and will be seen by all users.
Note: These changes can only be made by an Application Administrator.
To customize the quick-start profile buttons

1. In the Case Manager, select Manage > Evidence Processing Profiles.
In the Manage Evidence Processing Profiles dialog you will see a list of all the current profiles along
with a short description, if added; a locked indicator; and the button number assigned, if any. The green
check mark indicates the default profile.
2. Highlight a profile in the grid and click Set Button.
A window will appear allowing you to choose a number for that button. The numbers correspond to the
button location, 1 being all the way to the left and 5 being all the way to the right.
3. Once you have selected a position, click Save.
The new option will now be shown on the selected button. The profile option formerly in that position will
no longer be associated with a button, but will still be shown in the Profile drop down list.
Manually Customizing a set of Detailed Options

You can configure default processing options for a case without saving it as a profile.
To manually customize the evidence processing options

1. From the New Case Options dialog, click Custom.
1a. Click the Evidence Processing icon in the left pane, and select the processing options to be the
default options for the case. For more information, see Evidence Processing Options (page 67).
1b. Click the Evidence Refinement (Advanced) icon to select the evidence refinement options to use
on this case. For more information, see Configuring Evidence Refinement (Advanced) Options
(page 87).
1c. Click the Index Refinement (Advanced) icon to select the index refinement options to use on this
case. For more information, see Selecting Index Refinement (Advanced) Options (page 89).
1d. Click Custom File Identification to configure Custom Identifiers. For more information, see
Managing Custom Identifiers (page 52).
2. Click OK.
In the Processing Profile field, it will display Custom to show that you did not save the options as a
profile.
3. When you are satisfied with your evidence refinement options, click OK to create the case and continue
to the Evidence Processing screen.
Evidence Processing Options
The following table outlines the Evidence Processing options.
Evidence Processing Options
Process Description
MD5 Hash Creates a digital fingerprint using the Message Digest 5 algorithm, based on the
contents of the file. This fingerprint can be used to verify file integrity and to
identify duplicate files.
SHA-1 Hash Creates a digital fingerprint using the Secure Hash Algorithm-1, based on the
identify duplicate files.
SHA-256 Hash Creates a digital fingerprint using the Secure Hash Algorithm-256, based on the
identify duplicate files. SHA-256 is a hash function computed with 32-bit words,
giving it a longer digest than SHA-1.
Flag Duplicate Files Identifies files that are found more than once in the evidence. This is done by
comparing file hashes.
KFF Enables the Known File Filter (KFF) that lets you identify either known
insignificant files that you can ignore or known illicit or dangerous files that you
want to be alerted to.
When you enable KFF, you must select a KFF Template to use. You can select
an existing KFF Template from the drop-down menu or click ... to create a new
one.
See Using the Known File Filter (KFF) on page 259.
Expand Compound Files Automatically opens and processes the contents of compound files such as ZIP,
email, and OLE files.
See Expanding Compound Files on page 70.
The option File Signature Analysis is not forced to be selected. This lets you
initially see the contents of compound files without necessarily having to process
them. Processing can be done later, if it is deemed necessary or beneficial to the
case by selecting File Signature Analysis.
Include Deleted Files Checked by default. Un-check to exclude deleted files from the case.
File Signature Analysis Analyzes files to indicate whether their headers or signatures match their
extensions. This option must be selected if you choose Registry Summary
Reports.
Flag Bad Extensions Identifies files whose types do not match their extensions, based on the file
header information. This option forces the File Signature Analysis option to be
checked.
Entropy Test Identifies files that are compressed or encrypted.

Compressed and encrypted files identified in the entropy test are not indexed.
Creating and Configuring New Cases Evidence Processing Options | 67

Evidence Processing Options (Continued)
Process Description
dtSearch® Text Index Stores the words from evidence in an index for quick retrieval. Additional space
requirement is approximately 25% of the space required for all evidence in the
case.
Click Indexing Options for extensive options for indexing the contents of the
case.
Generated text that is the result of a formula in a document or spreadsheet is
indexed, and can be filtered.
Create Thumbnails for Creates thumbnails for all graphics in a case.

Graphics Thumbnails are always created in JPG format, regardless of the original graphic
file type.
See Examining Graphics on page 324.
Create Thumbnails for Creates thumbnails for all videos in a case.

Videos You can also set the frequency for which video thumbnails are created, either by
a percent (1 thumbnail every “n”% of the video) or by interval (1 thumbnail every
“n” seconds.
See Examining Videos on page 333.
Generate Common When you process the evidence in your case, you can choose to create a
Video File common video type for videos in your case. These common video types are not
the actual video files from the evidence, but a copied conversion of the media
that is generated and saved as an MP4 file that can be previewed on the video
tab.
HTML File Listing Creates an HTML version of the File Listing in the case folder.
CSV File Listing The File Listing Database is now created in CSV format instead of an MDB file
and can be added to Microsoft Access.
Data Carve Carves data immediately after pre-processing. Click Carving Options, then
select the file types to carve. Uses file signatures to identify deleted files
contained in the evidence. All available file types are selected by default.
For more information on Data Carving, see Data Carving (page 78).
Meta Carve Carves deleted directory entries and other metadata. The deleted directory
entries often lead to data and file fragments that can prove useful to the case,
that could not be found otherwise.
Optical Character Scans graphics files for text and converts graphics-text into actual text. That text
Recognition (OCR) can then be indexed, searched and treated as any other text in the case.
For more detailed information regarding OCR settings and options, see Running
Optical Character Recognition (OCR) (page 82).
Explicit Image Detection Click EID Options to specify the EID threshold for suspected explicit material
found in the case.
See Evaluating Explicit Material on page 330.
EID is an add-on feature. Contact your sales representative for more information.

Process Description
Registry Reports Creates Registry Summary Reports (RSR) from case content automatically. Click
RSR Directory to specify the location of the RSR Templates. When creating a
report, click the RSR option in the Report Wizard to include the RSR reports
requested here. RSR requires that File Signature Analysis also be selected. If
you try to select RSR first, an error will pop up to remind you to mark File
Signature Analysis before selecting RSR.
Include Deleted Files Enabled by default; to force exclusion of deleted files, unmark this check box.
Send Email Alert on Job Opens a text box that allows you to specify an email address where job
Completion completion alerts will be sent.
Important: These Emails are often filtered into Spam folders.
Decrypt Dell Encryption See Decrypting Dell Encryption Files (Dell Data Protection | Encryption Server)
Files on page 178.
If you select to decrypt Dell Encryption files, the File Signature Analysis option
will automatically be selected as well.
Process Internet Processes internet browser history files so that you can see them in the detailed
Browser History for visualization timeline.
Visualization See Visualizing Internet Browser History Data on page 469.
Perform Automatic Disabled by default. Attempts to decrypt files using a list of passwords that you
Decryption provide
See About Decrypting Files on page 165.
Language Identification Disabled by default. Analyzes the first two pages of every document to identify
the languages contained within. The user will be able to filter by a Language field
within review and determine who needs to review which documents based on the
language contained within the document.
See Identifying Document Languages on page 350.
Document Content Disabled by default. Analyzes the content and groups it according to topic in the
Analysis Overview tab. When selected, the DCA Options button is also activated and
opens the Document Content Analysis Options.
See Analyzing Document Content on page 435.
Entity Extraction Disabled by default. Identifies and extracts specific types of data in your
(Document Content) evidence. You can select to process one or all of the following types of entity
data:
 Credit Card Numbers
 Phone Numbers
 Social Security Numbers
In the Examiner, under the Document Content node in the Overview tab, you can
view the extracted data.
See Using Entity Extraction on page 435.

Process Description
Generate System Extracts data and populates the System Information tab.
Information See Viewing System Information on page 427.
If you expand data, you will have files that are generated when the data was processed and was not part of the
original data. There are tools to help you identify generated data.
See Identifying Processing-Generated Data on page 340.
See Relating Generated Files to Original Files on page 340.
Expanding Compound Files
About Expanding Compound Files

You can expand individual compound file types. This lets you see child files that are contained within a container
such as ZIP files. You can access this feature from the Case Manager’s new case wizard, or from the Add
Evidence or Additional Analysis dialogs.
See Evidence Processing Options on page 67.
You can filter the list of file types.
See Filtering the Compound File Expansion Options List on page 74.
Some file types are selected to be expanded by default.
Important: If you expand data, you will have files that are generated when the data was processed and were not
part of the original data. There are tools to help you identify generated data.
See Examining Miscellaneous Evidence on page 339.
You can expand the following compound files:
Compound File Types

7-ZIP
Active Directory Not expanded by default.
Android Calendar Database Not expanded by default.
Android Call History Log Not expanded by default.
Android Contacts Database Not expanded by default.
Android Facebook Messenger Not expanded by default. See Working with Facebook Messenger
(Android) on page 368.

Compound File Types (Continued)
Android Gmail Database Not expanded by default.
Android Hangouts Databases Not expanded by default.
Android Instagram Databases Not expanded by default.
Android Kik Databases Not expanded by default.
Android SMS/MMS Database Not expanded by default.
Android Viber Databases Not expanded by default.
Android WeChat Databases Not expanded by default.
Android WhatsApp Databases Not expanded by default.
AOL Files Not expanded by default.
Belkasoft All-in-One Not expanded by default.
Belkasoft is an add-on feature. Contact your sales representative for
more information.
Blackberry IPD backup file Not expanded by default.
BZIP2
Cellebrite UFDR Not expanded by default.
See Examining Mobile Phone Data on page 359.
Chrome Bookmarks Not expanded by default. See About Expanding Google Chrome,
Firefox, and IE 9 Data on page 354.
Chrome Cache Not expanded by default. See About Expanding Google Chrome,
Chrome SQLite Not expanded by default. See About Expanding Google Chrome,
DBX
ESE DB Expands ESE (Extensible Storage Engine) databases. See About
Extensible Storage Engine (ESE) Databases on page 353.
EMFSPOOL Not expanded by default.
EVT Not expanded by default.
EVTX Not expanded by default. See Viewing Data in Windows XML Event Log
(EVTX) Files on page 341.
EXIF Not expanded by default.
Firefox Cache Not expanded by default. See About Expanding Google Chrome,
Firefox JSON Not expanded by default. See About Expanding Google Chrome,
Firefox SQLite Not expanded by default. See About Expanding Google Chrome,
GZIP
IE Cookie Text Not expanded by default. See About Expanding Data from Internet
Explorer (IE) Version 10 or Later on page 355.
IE Recovery Not expanded by default. Expands IE Recovery data that was stored
when access to a Web site was lost.
See Expanding Internet Artifact Data on page 357.

IE WebCache Not expanded by default. Expands the Web cache data for IE 10 and
later IE versions. See About Expanding Data from Internet Explorer (IE)
Version 10 or Later on page 355.
IIS Log Not expanded by default. See Viewing IIS Log File Data on page 343.
Internet Explorer Files Not expanded by default.
Expands Internet Explorer internet artifact data.
iOS Backup Not expanded by default. See Working with iOS Backup on page 367.
iOS WeChat Not expanded by default.
iOS WhatsApp Not expanded by default.
Log2t CSV Not expanded by default. This processing option will recognize CSV files
that are in the Log2timeline format and parses the data within the single
CSV into individual records within the case. The individual records from
the CSV will be interspersed with other data, giving you the ability to
perform more advanced timeline analysis across a very broad set of
data. In addition you can leverage the visualization engine to perform
more advanced timeline based visual analysis.
See Log2timeline CSV fields on page 349.
Lotus Notes (NSF) Not expanded by default.
MBOX
Mail.ru Chat Parses Mail.RU Agent chat history files and email (mra.dbs).
McAfee Log Not expanded by default.
Microsoft Exchange
MS Office, OLE and OPC documents Not expanded by default.
MSG
OpenSSH known_hosts File Not expanded by default.
Outlook for Mac OLM Not expanded by default.
PDF
Pidgin Chat Log Not expanded by default.
PKCS7 and S/MIME Files
PST
RAR
Registry (full) Not expanded by default.
Registry (timeline) Not expanded by default. See Viewing Registry Timeline Data on
page 345.
RFC822 Internet Email
Skype SQLite Not expanded by default. See Expanding Internet Artifact Data on
page 357.
SQLite Databases Not expanded by default.
TAR
Unistore Database (Windows 10 Mail) Not expanded by default. See Processing Windows 10 Email and
Contacts on page 322.

Windows Firewall Log Not expanded by default.
Windows Registry.pol Not expanded by default.
Windows Thumbnails Not expanded by default.
XRY Not expanded by default.
ZIP, including ZIPX
Be aware of the following before you expand compound files:
If you have labeled or hashed a family of files, then later choose to expand a compound file type that is
contained within that label or family, the newly expanded files do not inherit the labeling from the parent,
and the family hashes are not automatically regenerated.
Many Lotus Notes emails, *.NSF, are being placed in the wrong folders in the Examiner.
This is a known issue wherein Lotus Notes routinely deletes the collection indexes. Lotus Notes client
has the ability to rebuild the collections from the formulas, but Examiner cannot. So if Lotus Notes data is
acquired shortly after the collections have been cleared, then the Examiner does not know where to put
the emails. These emails are all placed in a folder named "[other1]."
To work around: Open the NSF file in the Lotus Notes client, and then close (you may need to save), then
acquire the data and process it. The emails will all be in the right folder because the view collections are
recreated.
Compound file types such as AOL, Blackberry IPD Backup, EMFSpool, EXIF, MSG, PST, RAR, and ZIP
can be selected individually for expansion. This feature is available from the Case Manager new case
wizard, or from the Add Evidence or Additional Analysis dialogs.
Only the file types selected are expanded. For example, if you select ZIP, and a RAR file is found within
the ZIP file, the RAR is not expanded.

Filtering the Compound File Expansion Options List
It is possible to filter the Compound File Expansion Options list by category. Use the Categories dropdown at the
top of the list to select a category. Use the Select All and Clear All buttons to select or clear all options within the
selected category.
The following categories can be used to filter:
Compound File Expansion Options Category List

Category Definition
All This is the full list of supported Compound File Expansion Options.
All Communications This option includes all supported file types that are used for communication.
All Mobile This option includes all supported file types found on any mobile device.
Android This option includes all supported file types found on Android devices.
Archives This option includes all supported archive file types.
Browsers This option includes all supported file types used within a browser.
Email This option includes all supported email file types.
iOS This option includes all supported file types found on Apple devices.
Logs This option includes all supported log file types.
Windows This option includes all supported file types used within a Windows system.
Selecting the Cancel button will erase all changes and the default options will populate if the dialog is re-opened.
Selecting FIle Type to Expand

To expand compound files
For new cases, in the New Case Options dialog click Detailed Options.
For existing cases, in the Examiner, click Evidence > Additional Analysis.
2. Select Expand Compound Files.
The option File Signature Analysis is no longer forced to be checked when you select Expand
Compound Files. This lets you see the contents of compound files without necessarily having to
process them. You can choose to process them later, if it is deemed necessary or beneficial to the case.
3. Select Include Deleted Files if you also want to expand deleted compound files.
4. Click Expansion Options.
5. In the Compound File Expansions Options dialog do the following:
Ifyou do not want to expand office documents that do not have embedded items, select Only
expand office documents with embedded items.
Select the types of compound files that you want expand.
Only the file types that you select are expanded. For example, if you select ZIP, and a RAR file is
contained within the ZIP file, then the RAR is not expanded.

Note: The option File Signature Analysis is not forced to be selected. This lets you initially see the
contents of compound files without necessarily having to process them. Processing can be done
later, if it is deemed necessary or beneficial to the case by selecting File Signature Analysis.
6. In the Compound File Expansions Options dialog, click OK.

7. Click OK.
Using dtSearch Text Indexing

You can use the following indexing options to choose from when creating a new case.
Indexing a Case
All evidence should be indexed to aid in searches. Index evidence when it is added to the case by checking the
dtSearch Text Index box on the Evidence Processing Options dialog, or index after the fact by clicking and
specifying indexing options.
Scheduling is another factor in determining which process to select. Time restraints may not allow for all tasks to
be performed initially. For example, if you disable indexing, it shortens the time needed to process a case. You
can return at a later time and index the case if needed.
dtSearch Indexing Space Requirements

To estimate the space required for a dtSearch Text index, plan on approximately 25% of the space needed for
each case’s evidence.
Configuring Case Indexing Options

Case Indexing gives you almost complete control over what goes in your case index. These options can be
applied globally from Case Manager.
Note: Search terms for pre-processing options support only ASCII characters.

These options must be set prior to case creation.
To set Indexing Options as the global default

1. In Case Manager, click Case > New > Detailed Options.
2. In the Evidence Processing window, mark the dtSearch Text Index check box.
3. Click Indexing Options to bring up the Indexing Options dialog box.
4. Set the options using the information in the following table:
dtSearch Indexing Options
Option Description
Letters Specifies the letters and numbers to index. Specifies Original, Lowercase,
Uppercase, and Unaccented. Choose Add or Remove to customize the list.
You may need to add characters to this list for specific index searches to function
properly. For example, you may want to do an index search for
‘[email protected]’. By default, the @ symbol is treated as a space and is not
indexed.
See Spaces on page 77.
To have the @ symbol included in the index, you would need to do two things:
 Remove the @ from the Spaces list.
Add the @ to the Letters list.
Noise Words A list of words to be considered “noise” and ignored during indexing. Choose Add
or Remove to customize the list.
Hyphens Specifies which characters are to be treated as hyphens. You can add standard
keyboard characters, or control characters. You can remove items as well.
Hyphen Treatment Specifies how hyphens are to be treated in the index. Options are:
 Ignore
Hyphens will be treated as if they never existed. For example, the term “coun-
ter-culture” would be indexed as “counterculture.”
 Hyphen
Hyphens will be treated literally. For example, the term “counter-culture”
would be indexed as “counter-culture.”
 Space
Hyphens will be replaced by a non-breaking space. For example the term
“counter-culture” would be indexed as two separate entries in the index being
“counter” and “culture.”
 All
Terms with hyphens will be indexed using all three hyphen treatments. For
example the term “counter-culture” will be indexed as “counterculture”, “coun-
ter-culture”, and as two separate entries in the index being “counter” and “cul-
ture.”

dtSearch Indexing Options (Continued)
Option Description
Spaces Specifies which special characters should be treated as spaces. Remove
characters from this list to have them indexed as any other text. Choose Add or
Remove to customize the list.
You may need to remove characters from this list for specific index searches to
function properly. For example, you may want to do an index search for
‘[email protected]’. By default, the @ symbol is treated as a space and is not
indexed.
To have the @ symbol included in the index, you would need to do two things:
 Remove the @ from the Spaces list.
Add the @ to the Letters list.
Ignore Specifies which control characters or other characters to ignore. Choose Add or
Remove to customize the list.
Max Word Length Allows you to set a maximum word length to be indexed.
Index Binary Files Specify how binary files will be indexed. Options are:
 Index all
 Skip
 Index all (Unicode)
Enable Date Recognition Choose to enable or disable this option.
Presumed Date Format If date recognition is enabled, specify how ambiguous dates should be formatted
For Ambiguous Dates when encountered during indexing. Options are:
 MM/DD/YY
 DD/MM/YY
 YY/MM/DD
Set Max Memory Allows you to set a maximum size for the index.
Auto-Commit Interval Allows you to specify an Auto-Commit Interval while indexing the case. When the
(MB) index reaches the specified size, the indexed data is saved to the index. The size
resets, and indexing continues until it reaches the maximum size, and saves
again, and so forth.
Note: The Indexing Options dialog does not support some Turkish characters.
5. When finished setting Indexing Options, click OK to close the dialog.

6. Complete the Detailed Options dialog.
7. Click OK to close the Detailed Options dialog.
8. Specify the path and filename for the Default Options settings file.
9. Click Save.
10. In the Case Manager, click Case > New.
11. Proceed with case creation as usual. There is no need to click Detailed Options again in creating the
case to select options, unless you wish to use different settings for this case.
In addition to performing searches within the case, you can also use the Index to export a word list to use as a
source file for custom dictionaries to improve the likelihood and speed of password recovery related to case files

when using the Password Recovery Toolkit (PRTK). You can export the index by selecting File > Export Word
List. See also Searching Evidence with Index Search (page 411)
Data Carving
Data carving is the process of looking for data on media that was deleted or lost from the file system. Often this
is done by identifying file headers and/or footers, and then “carving out” the blocks between these two
boundaries.
AccessData provides several specific pre-defined carvers that you can select when adding evidence to a case.
In addition, Custom Carvers allow you to create specific carvers to meet your exact needs.
Data carving can be selected in the New Case Wizard as explained below, or from within the Examiner. In
addition, because Custom Carvers are now a Shared feature, they can be accessed through the Manage menu.
These are explained below.
Pre-defined Carvers
The following pre-defined carvers are available. Some carvers are enabled by default.
Pre-defined Carvers
Carver Enabled by default?
AOL bag files Yes
BMP files Yes
EMF files Yes
GIF files Yes
HTML files Yes
JPEG files Yes
LNK files Yes
OLE files (MS Office) Yes
PDF files Yes
PNG files Yes
TIFF files Yes
ZIP files Yes
AIM Chat Logs No
EML No
Facebook Status Updates No
Facebook Chat No
Facebook Email Artifact No
Facebook Mail Snippets No
Facebook Fragment No
Gmail Email Message No
Gmail Parsed Email No
Google Talk Chats No

Pre-defined Carvers (Continued)
Hotmail Email Artifact No
Bebo Chat No
Firefox Form History No
Firefox Places No
Firefox Session Store No
Frostwire Props Files No
GigaTribe Chat No
IE8 Recovery URL No
Limewire Props No
Limewire/Frostwire Keyword Search No
mIRC Chat Log No
MySpace Chat No
Twitter Status No
Windows Messenger Plus w/chat logging No
MSN/WLM Chat No
Yahoo Diagnostic No
Yahoo Webmail Chat No
Yahoo Mail No
Yahoo Group Chat Recvd No
Yahoo Group Chat Sent No
Yahoo Chat No
Yahoo Chat UnAllocated No
Yahoo Unencrypted Active No
Selecting Data Carving Options

If you are unfamiliar, please review Creating a Case (page 58) and Configuring Detailed Options for a Case
(page 59) before beginning this section.
When you are in the New Case Wizard in Detailed Options > Evidence Processing, click Data Carve >
Carving Options to open the dialog shown below.
If you already have a case open with evidence added and processed, click the following:
Evidence > Additional Analysis > Data Carve > Carving Options
Standard Data Carving gives you a limited choice of which file types to carve.
Choose which types of data to carve according to the information below.
To set Data Carving options

1. Select Data Carve.
2. Click Carving Options.

3. Select the types of files you want carved.
Click Select All to select all file types to be carved.
Click Clear All to unselect all file types.
Click on individual file types to toggle either selected or unselected.
Note: It may help to be aware of the duplicate files and the number of times they appear in an evidence
set to determine intent.
4. Depending on the file type highlighted, the Selected Carver Options may change. Define the optional
limiting factors to be applied to each file:
Define the minimum byte file size for the selected type.
Define the minimum pixel height for graphic files.
Define the minimum pixel width for graphic files
5. Mark the box, Exclude KFF Ignorable files if needed.
6. If you want to define Custom Carvers, click Custom Carvers. (Custom Carvers are explained in the
next section.) When you are done with Custom Carvers, click Close.
7. In the Carving Options dialog, click OK.
Custom Carvers
The Custom Carvers dialog allows you to create your own data carvers in addition to the built-in carvers. Custom
Carvers can be created and shared from within a case, or from the Case Manager.
Application Administrators have the necessary permissions to access the Manage Shared Carvers dialog. Case
Administrators can manage the Custom Carvers in the cases they administer. Case Reviewers are not allowed
to manage Custom Carvers.
Shared Custom Carvers are automatically available globally; but can be copied to a case when needed. Carvers
created within a case are automatically available to the case, but can be shared and thus made available
globally.
To access Manage Custom Carvers dialogs, click Manage > Carvers > Manage Custom Carvers (or Manage
Shared Carvers if you are an Application Administrator).
The Manage Shared Custom Carvers and Manage Custom Carvers dialogs are very similar. The difference is
whether you can copy the carvers to a case or make the carvers shared.
The Custom Carvers dialog allows you to define carving options for specific file types or information beyond
what is built-in. Once defined, these carving options files can be Shared with the database as well as exported
and imported for use in other cases. The original, local copy, remains in the case where it was created, for local
management.
To create a Custom Data Carver

1. Click New.
2. Complete the data fields for the Custom Carver you are creating. Options are as follows:
Name Name of the Carver

Author Name of the Creator
Description Summarizes the intended use of the carver

Minimum File Size (Optional)
in bytes
Maximum File Size (Optional) The default Custom Carver Maximum File Size is 2147483647 bytes.
in bytes The carver Max File Size in bytes must be populated with any size larger than the
defined Minimum File Size in bytes (default is 0). A Maximum File Size equal to or
less than the minimum size, or <no entry>, results in an error prompting for a valid
number to be entered.
File extension Defining the extension of the carved file helps with categorization, sorting, and
filtering carved files along with other files in the case.
Key Signature(s) Enter the ASCII text interpretation of the file signature as seen in a hex viewer.
and Other Many can be defined, but at least one key signature must be present in the file in
Signature(s) order to be carved.
Click the + icon to begin defining a new Key Signature or Other Signature.
Click the - icon to remove a defined Key Signature or Other Signature.
File Category The File Category the carved item will belong to once it is carved. The specified
category must be a leaf node in the Overview tab.
Offset Use decimal value.
Length The length in bytes.
Little Endian If not marked, indicates Big Endian.
Signature Enter the ASCII text interpretation of the file signature as seen in a hex viewer.
Case Insensitive Default is case sensitive. Mark to make the end File Tag Signature not case
sensitive.
3. When done defining the Custom Carver, click Close.
Note: When adding signatures to a carver, the Signature is case sensitive check box is used when
carving for signatures that can be both upper or lower case. For example, <HTML> and <html>
are both acceptable headers for HTML files, but each of these would have a different signature in
hex, so therefore they are case sensitive.
The objects and files carved from default file types are automatically added to the case, and can be
searched, bookmarked, and organized along with the existing files.
However, custom carved data items are not added to the case until they are processed, and they
may not sort properly in the File List view. They are added to the bottom of the list, or at the top
for a Z-to-A search, regardless of the filename.

Running Optical Character Recognition (OCR)
The Optical Character Recognition (OCR) process lets you extract text that is contained in graphics files. The
text is then indexed so that it can be, searched, and bookmarked.
Running OCR against a file type creates a new child file item. The graphic files are processed normally, and
another file with the parsed text from the graphic is created. The new OCR file is named the same as the parent
graphic, [graphicname.ext], but with the extension OCR, for example, graphicname.ext.ocr.
You can view the graphic files in the File Content View when it is selected in the File List View. The Natural tab
shows the graphic in its original form. The Filtered tab shows the OCR text that was added to the index.
Before running OCR, be aware of the following:
OCR is only a helpful tool for the investigator to locate images from index searches. OCR results should
not be considered evidence without further review.
OCR can have inconsistent results. OCR engines by nature have error rates. This means that it is
possible to have results that differ between processing jobs on the same machine with the same piece of
evidence.
Some large images can cause OCR to take a very long time to complete. Under some circumstances,
they may not generate any output.
Graphical images that have no text or pictures with unaligned text can generate bad output.
OCR is best on typewritten text that is cleanly scanned or similarly generated. All other picture files can
generate unreliable output that can vary from run to run.
To run Optical Character Recognition

For new cases, in the New Case Options dialog click Detailed Options.
For existing cases, in the Examiner, click Evidence > Additional Analysis.
2. Select Optical Character Recognition. OCR requires File Signature Analysis and dtSearch Indexing
to be selected. When Optical Character Recognition is marked, the other two options are automatically
marked and grayed-out to prevent inadvertent mistakes, and ensure successful processing.
3. Click OCR Options.
4. In the OCR Options dialog, select from the following options:
Options Description
File Types Lets you specify which file types to include in the OCR process during case
processing. For PDF files, you can also control the maximum filtered text size
for which to run OCR against.
Filtering Options Lets you specify a range in file size to include in the OCR process. You can
also specify whether or not to only run OCR against black and white, and
grayscale. The Restrict File Size option is selected by default. By default, OCR
file generation is restricted to files larger than 5K. If you do not want to limit the
size of OCR files, you must disable this option.
Engine Lets you choose the OCR engine to use.
5. In the OCR Options dialog, click OK.

6. In the Evidence Processing dialog, click OK.
Optical Character Recognition (OCR) Confidence Score

There is an option to show the confidence score for each file that has been processed with OCR. It is
recommended to use this feature to sort documents processed using OCR to determine which files may need to
be manually reviewed for the desired keywords.
The OCR Confidence Score value may be one of the following:
Options Description
1-100% The OCR confidence % score for a document that had a successful OCR
process; the higher the score, the higher the confidence.
No Score Available (2) The OCR results are from a previous version.
Minimal Confidence (1) The OCR extraction is not in a supported language or is not clear.
No Text Found (0) The OCR process did not identify any text to extract.
OCR Skipped (-1) The OCR process was skipped due to some condition.
OCR Extraction Error (-2) The OCR process failed for that file.
Blank The file does not need the OCR process; for example, a .DOC file or email.
Note: For data that is upgraded from a previous version, if a file has been previously processed with OCR, it will
show a value of 2. You can use the Additional Analysis tool, found in the Evidence menu, to re-OCR the
document and you will get the new OCR confidence score.
To use the OCR Confidence Score

1. Process your data using the Optical Character Recognition option.
See Running Optical Character Recognition (OCR) on page 82.
2. Add the OCR Graphic column to the File List.
See Managing Columns on page 494.
3. Sort the File List using the OCR Graphic column
Use the scores shown in the File List to determine which items should be reviewed for keywords.
Using Explicit Image Detection
About Explicit Image Detection

Explicit Image Detection (EID) is an add-on feature. Contact your sales representative for more information. EID
reads all graphics in a case and assigns both the files and the folders they are contained within a score
according to what it interprets as being possibly illicit content. The score ranges are explained later in this
section.

To add EID evidence to a case
1. Click Evidence > Add/Remove.
2. In the Detailed Options > Evidence Processing dialog, ensure that File Signature Analysis is
marked.
3. Select Explicit Image Detection
4. Click EID Options.The three EID options are profiles that indicate the type of filtering that each one
does. You can choose between any combination of the following profiles depending on your needs:
Profile
Name Level Description
X-DFT Default This is the most generally accurate. It is always selected.
(XS1)
X-FST Fast (XTB) This is the fastest. It scores a folder by the number of files it contains that meet
the criteria for a high likelihood of explicit material.
It is built on a different technology than X-DFT and does not use “regular” DNAs.
It is designed for very high volumes, or real-time page scoring. Its purpose is to
quickly reduce, or filter, the volume of data to a meaningful set.
X-ZFN Less False This is a profile similar to X-FST but with more features and with fewer false
Negatives negatives than X-DFT.
(XT2) You can apply this filter after initial processing to all evidence, or to only the
folders that score highly using the X-FST option. Check-mark or highlight those
folders to isolate them for Additional Analysis.
In Additional Analysis, File Signature Analysis must be selected for EID options to
work correctly.
5. When the profile is selected, click OK to return to the Evidence Processing dialog and complete your
selections.
AccessData recommends that you run Fast (X-FST) for folder scoring, and then follow with Less False
Negatives (X-ZFN) on high-scoring folders to achieve the fastest, most accurate results.
After you select EID in Evidence Processing or Additional Analysis, and the processing is complete, you must
select or modify a filter to include the EID related columns in the File List View.
Including Registry Reports

The Registry Viewer supports Registry Summary Report (RSR) generation as part of case processing.
To generate Registry Summary Reports and make them available for the case report
1. Ensure that File Signature Analysis is marked.
2. Mark Registry Reports.
3. Click RSR Directory.
4. Browse to the location where your RSR templates are stored.
5. Click OK.

Send Email Alert on Job Completion
You can choose to send an email notification when a job completes. This encompasses both evidence being
added to or removed from a case.
This option is also available from Evidence > Additional Analysis. Select Send Email Alert on Job Completion,
click on the Email Alert Options button, and enter the email address of the recipient(s) in the Job Completion
Alert Address box, then click OK. To alert all case users, check the Email notification to all case users box.
To set up email notification information

1. In the Case Manager, select a database and log in.
2. Navigate to Manage > Email notification settings. The Manage Email Alert Settings dialog will open.
3. Fill in the Manage Email Alert Settings dialog with the appropriate information.
4. If you choose to send a Test Alert, enter the appropriate addresses into the Send Test Alert box and
press Send.
5. Click OK.
Custom File Identification Options

Custom File Identification provides the examiner a way to specify which file category or extension should be
assigned to files with a certain signature. These dialogs are used to manage custom identifiers and extension
maps specific to the case.
In Detailed Options, the Custom File Identification dialog lets you select the Custom Identifier file to apply to the
new case. This file is stored on the system in a user-specified location. The location can be browsed to, by
clicking Browse, or reset to the root drive folder by clicking Reset.
Creating Custom File Identifiers

Custom File Identifiers are used to assign categories to files that may or may not already be automatically
categorized in a way that is appropriate for the case. For example, a file that is discovered, but not categorized,
will be found under the “Unknown Types” category. You can prevent this categorization before the evidence is
processed by selecting a different category and sub-category.
Custom Identifiers provide a way for you to create and manage identifiers, and categorize the resulting files into
any part of the category tree on the Overview tab. You can select from an existing category, or create a new one
to fit your needs.
You can define identifiers using header information expected at a specific offset inside a file, as is now the case,
but in addition, you can categorize files based on extension.
Note: PDF files are now identified through the PDF file system and will no longer be identified through Custom
File Identification.

To create a Custom Identifier file
1. In the Case Manager, click Case > New > Detailed Options.
2. Click Custom File Identification.
3. Below the Custom Identifiers pane on the left of the Custom File Identification dialog, click New. The
Custom Identifier dialog opens.
4. Fill in the fields with the appropriate values. The following table describes the parameters for Custom
File Identifiers:
Parameter Description
Name The value of this field defines the name of the sub-category that will appear below the
selected Overview Tree category and the category column.
Description Accompanies the Overview Container’s tree branch name.
Category The general file category to which all files with a matching file signature should be
associated.
Offset The decimal offset of where the unique signature (see Value) can be found within the file
given that the beginning of the file is offset 0.
Value Any unique signature of the file expressed in hexadecimal bytes.
Note: The Offset must be in decimal format. The Value must be in hexadecimal bytes. Otherwise, you will see
the following error: Hex strings in the Offset field cause an exception error.
“Exception: string_to_int: conversion failed was thrown.”

Important: After creating a Case Custom File Identifier, you must apply it, or it will not be saved.
5. When you are done defining the Custom File Identifier, click Make Shared to share it to the database.
This action saves it so the Application Administrator can manage it.
6. Click OK to close the dialog. Select the identifier you just created and apply it to the case you are
creating. Otherwise it will not be available locally in the future.
Custom Case Extension Maps

Extension Maps can be used to define or change the category associated to any file with a certain file extension.
For example, files with BAG extension, which would normally be categorized as “Unknown Type,” can be
categorized as an AOL BAG file, or files with a MOV extension, that would normally be categorized as Apple
QuickTime video files, can be changed to show up under a more appropriate category since they can sometimes
contain still images.
To create a Case Custom Extension Mapping

1. Within the Detailed Options dialog of the New Case wizard, select Custom File Identification on the
left hand side.
2. Under the Extension Maps column, click New.
3. Fill in the fields with the appropriate values.

4. Mark Make Shared to share this Custom Extension Mapping with the database.
Shared features such as Custom Extension Mappings are managed by the Application Administrator.
Your copy remains in the case for you to manage as needed.
The following table describes the parameters for Custom Extension Mappings
Parameter Description
Name The value of this field defines the name of the sub-category that will
appear below the selected Overview Tree category and the category
column.
Category The general file category to which all files with a matching file
signature should be associated.
Description Accompanies the Overview Container’s tree branch name.
Extensions: Any file extension that should be associated to the selected Category.
Note: You must use at least one offset:value pair (hence the [...]+), and use zero or more OR-ed
offset:value pairs (the [...]*). All of the offset:value conditions in an OR-ed group are OR-ed
together, then all of those groups are AND-ed together.
Configuring Evidence Refinement (Advanced) Options

The Evidence Refinement Options dialogs allow you to specify how the evidence is sorted and displayed. The
Evidence Refinement (Advanced) option allows you to exclude specific data from being added to the case when
found in an individual evidence item type.
Many factors can affect which processes to select. For example, if you have specific information otherwise
available, you may not need to perform a full text index. Or, if it is known that compression or encryption are not
used, an entropy test may not be needed.
Important: After data is excluded from an evidence item in a case, the same evidence cannot be added back
into the case to include the previously excluded evidence. If data that was previously excluded is
found necessary, the user must remove the related evidence item from the case, and then add the
evidence again, using options that will include the desired data.
To set case evidence refining options

1. Click the Evidence Refinement (Advanced) icon in the left pane.
The Evidence Refinement (Advanced) menu is organized into two dialog tabs:
Refine Evidence by File Status/Type
Refine Evidence by File Date/Size
2. Click the corresponding tab to access each dialog.
3. Set the needed refinements for the current evidence item.
4. To reset the menu to the default settings, click Reset.
5. To accept the refinement options you have selected and specified, click OK.

Refining Evidence by File Status/Type
Refining evidence by file status and type allows you to focus on specific files needed for a case.
Refine by File Status/Type Options
Options Description
Include File Slack Mark to include file slack space in which evidence may be found.
Include Free Space Mark to include unallocated space in which evidence may be found.
Include KFF Ignorable (Recommended) Mark to include files flagged as ignorable in the KFF for
Files analysis.
Include OLE Streams and Mark to include Object Linked and Embedded (OLE) data streams, and Office
Office 2007 package 2007 (DOCX, and XLSX) file contents that are layered, linked, or embedded.
contents
Deleted Specifies the way to treat deleted files.

Options are:
 Ignore Status
 Include Only
 Exclude
Defaults to “Ignore Status.”
Encrypted Specifies the way to treat encrypted files.

Options are:
 Ignore Status
 Include Only
 Exclude
From Email Specifies the way to treat email files.

Options are:
 Ignore Status
 Include Only
 Exclude
File Types Specifies which types of files to include and exclude.
Only add items to the case Applies selected criteria from both File Status and File Types tabs to the
that match both File Status refinement. Will not add items that do not meet all criteria from both pages.
and File Type criteria If this option is not checked, and if you set a File Status, such as From Email >
Include Only, then only the File Status value will be used and the File Type will
be ignored.

Refining Evidence by File Date/Size
Refine evidence further by making the addition of evidence items dependent on a date range or file size that you
specify. However, once in the case, filters can also be applied to accomplish this.
Refine by File Date/Size Options
Exclusion Description
Refine Evidence To refine evidence by file date:
by File Date
1. Check Created, Last Modified, and/or Last Accessed.
2. In the two date fields for each date type selected, enter beginning and
ending date ranges.
Refine Evidence To refine evidence by file size:

by File Size
1. Check At Least and/or At Most (these are optional settings).
2. In the corresponding size boxes, specify the applicable file size.
3. In the drop-down lists, to the right of each, select Bytes, KB, or MB.
Selecting Index Refinement (Advanced) Options

The Index Refinement (Advanced) feature allows you to specify types of data that you do not want to index. You
may choose to exclude data to save time and resources, or to increase searching efficiency.
Note: AccessData strongly recommends that you use the default index settings.
To refine an index
1. Within the Detailed Options dialog of the New Case wizard, click Index Refinement (Advanced) in the
left pane.
The Index Refinement (Advanced) menu is organized into two dialog tabs:
Refine Index by File Status/Type
Refine Index by File Date/Size
2. Click the corresponding tab to access each dialog.
3. Define the refinements you want for the current evidence item.
4. Click Reset to reset the menu to the default settings.
5. Click OK when you are satisfied with the selections you have made.
Refining an Index by File Status/Type

Refining an index by file status and type allows the investigator to focus attention on specific files needed for a
case through a refined index defined in a dialog.

At the bottom of the two Index Refinement tabs you can choose to mark the box for Only index items that
match both File Status AND File Types criteria, if that suits your needs.
Refine Index by File Status/Type Options
Options Description
Include File Slack Mark to include free space between the end of the file footer, and the end of a
sector, in which evidence may be found.
Include Free Space Mark to include both allocated (partitioned) and unallocated (unpartitioned)
space in which evidence may be found.
Include KFF Ignorable Mark to include files flagged as ignorable in the KFF for analysis.
Files
Include Message Headers Marked by default. Includes the headers of messages in filtered text. Unmark
this option to exclude message headers from filtered text.
Do not include document Not marked by default. This option lets you turn off the collection of internal
metadata in filtered text metadata properties for the indexed filtered text. The fields for these metadata
properties are still populated to allow for field level review, but the you will no
longer see information such as Author, Title, Keywords, Comments, etc in the
Filtered text panel of the review screen. If you use an export utility such as ECA
or eDiscovery and include the filtered text file with the export, you will also not
see this metadata in the exported file.
Include OLE Streams Includes Object Linked or Embedded (OLE) data streams that are part of files
that meet the other criteria.
Deleted Specifies the way to treat deleted files. Options are:

 Ignore status
 Include only
 Exclude
Encrypted Specifies the way to treat encrypted files. Options are:

 Ignore status
 Include only
 Exclude
From Email Specifies the way to treat email files. Options are:
 Ignore status
 Include only
 Exclude
Include OLE Streams Includes Object Linked or Embedded (OLE) files found within the evidence.
File Types Specifies types of files to include and exclude.
Only add items to the Index Applies selected criteria from both File Status and File Types tabs to the
that match both File Status refinement. Will not add items that do not meet all criteria from both pages.
and File Type criteria

Refining an Index by File Date/Size
Refine index items dependent on a date range or file size you specify.
Refine Index by File Date/Size Options
Exclusion Description
Refine Index by File Date To refine index content by file date:
1. Select Created, Last Modified, or Last Accessed.
2. In the date fields, enter beginning and ending dates within which to
include files.
Refine Index by File Size To refine evidence by file size:

1. Click in either or both of the size selection boxes.
2. In the two size fields for each selection, enter minimum and maximum
file sizes to include.
3. In the drop-down lists, select whether the specified minimum and
maximum file sizes refer to Bytes, KB, or MB.
Selecting Lab/eDiscovery Options

This option is available for those with AD Lab and Summation licenses.
AD Lab and eDiscovery have additional options available for advanced de-duplication analysis.
De-duplication is separated by email items and non-email items. Within each group, the available options can be
applied by case or by Custodian.
Note: This option is not enabled by default when using the eDiscovery Default processing profile.
The following table provides more information regarding each option and its description.
AD Lab/eDiscovery Detailed Options
Option Description
Enable Advanced De-duplication Analysis
Email Items De-duplication Scope
Choose whether you want this de-duplication process to be applied at the Case
level, or at the Custodian level.
 Case Level
 People (Custodian) Level

AD Lab/eDiscovery Detailed Options (Continued)
Option Description
De-duplication Options
For each item type you check, AD Lab eliminates duplicates from the case as it
processes through the collected evidence. Uncheck an item type to keep all
duplicate instances in your case.
Available item types
 Email To
 Email From
 Email CC
 Email BCC
 Email Subject
 Email Submit Time
 Email Delivery Time
 Email Attachment Time
 Email Attachment Count
 Email Hash
Body Only
Body and Attachments
Non-email Items De-duplication Scope
Choose whether you want this de-duplication process to be applied to the entire
case or at the custodian level.
 Case Level
 People (Custodian) Level
De-duplication Option
There is only one option available for non-email items; either you are going to de-
duplicate just the actual files, or if unmarked, you will de-duplicate actual files only,
or all files, including children, zipped, OLE, and carved files.
 Actual Files Only
Propagate Email When an email has attachments or OLE items, marking this option causes the
Attributes email’s attributes to be copied and applied to all “child” files of the email “parent.”
Cluster Analysis Invokes the extended analysis of documents to determine related, near duplicates,
and email threads.
See Viewing Data in Volume Shadow Copies on page 381.
Configure the details by clicking NDA Options.
Cluster Analysis This lets you specify the options for Cluster Analysis.
Options You can specify which document types to process:
 Documents
 Presentations
 Spreadsheets
 Email
You can also specify the similarity threshold, which determines the level of similarity
required for documents to be considered related or near duplicates.

AD Lab/eDiscovery Detailed Options (Continued)
Option Description
Include Extended If you create a case in FTK and are going to review it in Summation or eDiscovery,
Information in the select this option to make the index data fully compatible with Summation/
Index eDiscovery.
Enable ‘Standard If you create a case in FTK and are going to review it in Summation or eDiscovery,
Viewer’ select this option to automatically create a set of SWF files for all document files
found during processing. These SWF files will be used as the default file rather
than the original file when annotating and redacting within the case and will be
created during processing for any file 1 MB or larger. Smaller files will be created
on-the-fly when selected in Review.
When opened in the Standard Viewer in eDiscovery or Summation, the converted
SWF file is displayed by default, rather than the original file. This enables users to
work on a file without first having to manually create a SWF file.
Note: This option is disabled by default, and when enabled, slows processing
speeds.
Create Email Threads Sorts and groups emails by conversation threads.

Adding Evidence to a New Case
If you marked Open the Case before clicking OK in the New Case Options dialog, when case creation is
complete, the Examiner opens. Evidence items added here will be processed using the options you selected in
pre-processing, unless you click Refinement Options to make changes to the original settings.
Working with Volume Shadow Copies

You can examine data that is contained in NTFS Volume Shadow Copies.
See Examining Data in Volume Shadow Copies on page 124.
Converting a Case from Version 2.2 or Newer

If you have cases that were created in version 2.2 or later, you can convert them to the latest version. Refer to
the following guidelines for migrating 2.x cases.
Important: Consider the following information:

Any case created with a version prior to 2.2 must be re-processed completely in the latest version.
AccessData recommends reprocessing active cases instead of attempting to convert them, to
maximize the features and capabilities of the new release.
AccessData recommends that no new evidence be added to any case that has been converted from
an earlier version. This is because newer versions of processing gathers more information than was
done in versions prior to 2.x.
Therefore, if evidence is added to a converted 2.2 case, the new evidence will have all the info
gathered by the newest version; however, the data from the converted 2.2 case will not have this
additional information. This may cause confusion and bring forensic integrity into question in a
court of law.
For more information, see the webinar that explains Case Portability in detail. This webinar can be found under
the Core Forensic Analysis portion of the webpage: http://www.accessdata.com/Webinars.
The AccessData website works best using Microsoft Windows Explorer. You will be required to create a
username and password if you have not done so in the past. If you have used this website previously, you will
need to verify your email address. The website normally remembers the rest of the information you enter.
For instructions on converting cases, see the Migrating Cases document located at
http://www.accessdata.com/support/product-downloads/ftk-download-page
Creating and Configuring New Cases Adding Evidence to a New Case | 94

Chapter 5
Managing Case Data
Backing Up a Case (page 96)

Archiving and Detaching a Case (page 99)
Attaching a Case (page 100)
Restoring a Case (page 101)
Migrating Cases Between Database Types (page 102)
Managing Case Data | 95

Backing Up a Case
About Performing a Backup and Restore on a Multi-Box Installation

If you have installed the Examiner and the database on separate boxes, or if you have case folders on a different
box than the applicaiton, there are special considerations you must take into account. For instructions on how to
back up and restore in this environment, see Configuring a Multi-box Setup in the User Guide.
Performing a Backup of a Case

At certain milestones of an investigation, you should back up your case to mitigate the risk of an irreversible
processing mistake or perhaps case corruption.
Case backup can also be used when migrating or moving cases from one database type to another. For
example, if you have created cases using 4.1 in an Oracle database and you want to upgrade to 5.0.x and
migrate the case(s) to a PostgreSQL database. Another example is if you have created cases using 5.0.x in an
Oracle database and you want to move the case(s) to the same version that is running a PostgreSQL database.
When you back up a case, the case information and database files (but not evidence) are copied to the selected
destination folder. AccessData recommends that you store copies of your drive images and other evidence
separate from the backed-up case.
Important: Case Administrators back up cases and must maintain and protect the library of backups against
unauthorized restoration, because the user who restores an archive becomes that case’s
administrator.
Note: Backup files are not compressed. A backed-up case requires the same amount of space as that case’s
database table space and the case folder together.
Starting in 4.2, all backups are performed using the database independent format rather than a native format.
The database independent format facilitates migrating and moving cases to a different database application or
version. You can perform a backup using a native format using the dbcontrol utility. For more information, contact
AccessData Technical Support.
Important: Do not perform a backup of a case while any data in that case is being processed.
To back up a case
1. In the Case Manager window, select the case to back up. You can use Shift + Click, or Ctrl + Click to
select multiple cases to backup.
Click Case > Backup > Backup.
Right-click on the case in the Cases list, and click Backup.
3. In the field labeled Backup folder, enter a destination path for the backup files.
Important: Choose a folder that does not already exist. The backup will be saved as a folder, and when
restoring a backup, point to this folder (not the files it contains) in order to restore the case.
4. (Option) Use database independent format.
All backups are performed using the database independent format. You cannot change this option.
Managing Case Data Backing Up a Case | 96

5. (Optional) Back up the Summation or Resolution1 application database.
If you have a licencse for Summation or Resolution1, when you back up a case, you can also select to
backup the Summation or Resolution1 application database by doing the following:
5a. Click App DB...
5b. Specify the App DB properties and credentials.
6. Click OK.
Note: The following information may be useful:
Each case you back up should have its own backup folder to ensure all data is kept together and
cannot be overwritten by another case backup. In addition, AccessData recommends that backups
be stored on a separate drive or system from the case, to reduce space consumption and to reduce
the risk of total loss in the case of catastrophic failure (drive crash, etc.).
The absolute path of the case folder is recorded. When restoring a case, the default path is the
original path. You can choose the default path, or enter a different path for the case restore.
Performing a Database-only Backup

There is a new -backuponly switch that you can use with DBControl.exe that will only backup the database
portion of the case, but does not backup the case folder.
To perform a database-only backup

1. Open a Command Prompt in Windows.
2. Go to the following path:
C:\Program Files\AccessData\Forensic Toolkit\version\bin
3. Enter the following:
dbcontrol.exe pgdb=adg port=<port#> -backuponly caseid=<case#> backuppath=<path to backup the
db>
Note: You will need to have the port number, case ID, and backup path before you begin the database-only
backup process.
Managing Case Data Backing Up a Case | 97

Archiving a Case
When work on a case is completed and immediate access to it is no longer necessary, that case can be
archived.
The Archive and Detach function copies that case’s database table space file to the case folder, then deletes it
from the database. This prevents two people from making changes to the same case at the same time,
preserving the integrity of the case, and the work that has been done on it. Look for filename DB fn. Archive
keeps up to four backups, DB f0, DB f1, DB f2, and DB f3.
To archive a case
1. In the Case Manager, select the case to archive.
2. Click Case > Backup > Archive.
3. A prompt asks if you want to use an intermediate folder.
The processing status dialog appears, showing the progress of the archive. When the archive
completes, close the dialog.
To view the resulting list of backup files

1. Open the cases folder.
Note: The cases folder is no longer placed in a default path; instead it is user-defined.
2. Find and open the sub-folder for the archived case.

3. Find and open the sub-folder for the archive (DB fn).
4. You may view the file names as well as Date modified, Type, and Size.
Managing Case Data Archiving a Case | 98

Archiving and Detaching a Case
When work on a case is not complete, but it must be accessible from a different computer, archive and detach
that case.
The Archive and Detach function copies that case’s database table space file to the case folder, then deletes it
from the database. This prevents two people from making changes to the same case at the same time,
preserving the integrity of the case, and the work that has been done on it.
To archive and detach a case

1. In the Case Manager, click Case > Backup > Archive and Detach.
The case is archived.
2. You will see a notice informing you that the specified case will be removed from the database. Click OK
to continue, or Cancel to abandon the removal and close the message box.
3. A prompt asks if you want to use an intermediate folder.
The processing status dialog appears, showing the progress of the archive. When the archive
completes, close the dialog.
To view the resulting list of files

1. Open the folder for the archived and detached cases.
2. Find and open the sub-folder for the archived case.
Note: The cases folder is no longer placed in a default path; instead it is user-defined.
3. Find and open the sub-folder for the archive (DB fn).
You may view the file names as well as Date Modified, Type, and Size.
Managing Case Data Archiving and Detaching a Case | 99

Attaching a Case
Attaching a case is different from restoring a case. You would restore a case from a backup to its original location
in the event of corruption or other data loss. You would attach a case to the same or a different machine/
database than the one where it was archived and detached from.
The Attach feature copies that case’s database table space file into the database on the local machine.
Note: The database must be compatible and must contain the AccessData schema.
To attach a detached case

1. Click Case > Restore > Attach.
Important: Do NOT use “Restore” to re-attach a case that was detached with “Archive.” Instead, use
“Attach.” Otherwise, your case folder may be deleted.
2. Browse to and select the case folder to be attached.
3. (Optional) Select Specify the location of the DB files and browse to the path to store the database
files for this case.
3a. Select In the case folder to place the database files in subfolder of the case folder.
4. Click OK.
Managing Case Data Attaching a Case | 100

Restoring a Case
When your case was backed up, it was saved as a folder. The folder selected for the backup is the folder you
must select when restoring the backup.
Note: Do not use the Restore... function to attach an archive (instead use Attach...).
To restore a case
1. Open the Case Manager window.
2. Do either of these:
Click Case > Restore > Restore.
Right-click on the Case Manager case list, and click Restore > Restore.
3. Browse to and select the backup folder to be restored.
4. (Optional) Select Specify the location of the DB files and browse to the path to store the database
files for this case.
4a. Select In the case folder to place the database files in subfolderof the case folder.
5. You are prompted if you would like to specify a different location for the case folder. The processing
status dialog appears, showing the progress of the archive. When the archive completes, close the
dialog.
Managing Case Data Restoring a Case | 101

Deleting a Case
To delete a case from the database
1. In the Case Manager window, highlight the name of the case to be deleted from the database.
2. Do either of these:
Click Case > Delete.
Right-click on the name of the case to deleted, and click Delete
3. Click Yes to confirm deletion.
W A R N I N G: This procedure also deletes the case folder. It is recommended that you make sure you have a
backup of your case before you delete the case or else the case is not recoverable.
Storing Case Files

Storing case files and evidence on the same drive substantially taxes the processors’ throughput. The system
slows as it saves and reads huge files. For desktop systems in laboratories, you can increase the processing
speed by saving evidence files to a separate server. For more information, see the separate installation guide.
If taking the case off-site, you can choose to compromise some processor speed for the convenience of having
your evidence and case on the same drive, such as a laptop.
Migrating Cases Between Database Types

You can migrate or move cases from one database to another. For more information, see the Quick Install Guide
and the Upgrading Cases guide.
Managing Case Data Deleting a Case | 102

Chapter 6
Working with Evidence Image Files
This chapter contains the following topics
Verifying Drive Image Integrity (page 103)

Mounting an Image to a Drive (page 104)
Benefits of Image Mounting (page 104)
Characteristics of a Logically Mounted Image (page 105)
Characteristics of a Physically Mounted Image (page 105)
Mounting an Image as Read-Only (page 105)
Mounting a Drive Image as Writable (page 106)
Unmounting an Image (page 107)
Restoring an Image to a Disk (page 107)
Performing Final Carve Processing (page 107)
Recovering Processing Jobs (page 108)
Verifying Drive Image Integrity

A drive image can be altered or corrupted due to bad media, bad connectivity during image creation, or by
deliberate tampering. This feature works with file types that store the hash within the drive image itself, such as
EnCase (E01) and SMART (S01) images.
To verify an evidence image’s integrity, a hash of the current file is generated and allows you to compare that to
the hash of the originally acquired drive image.
To verify that a drive image has not changed

1. Select Tools > Verify Image Integrity.
In case the image file does not contain a stored hash, one can be calculated. The Verify Image Integrity
dialog provides the following information:
Column Description
Image Name Displays the filename of the evidence image to be verified.
Path Displays the path to the location of the evidence image file.
Command Click Verify or Calculate to begin hashing the evidence image

file.
Working with Evidence Image Files Verifying Drive Image Integrity | 103
2. Click either Calculate, or Verify according to what displays in the Command column, to begin hashing
the evidence file.
The Progress dialog appears and displays the status of the verification. If the image file has a stored hash, when
the verification is complete, the dialog shows and compares both hashes. Completing these processes may take
some time, depending on the size of the evidence, the processor type, and the amount of available RAM.
Mounting an Image to a Drive

Image Mounting allows forensic images to be mounted as a drive or physical device, for read-only viewing. This
action opens the image as a drive and allows you to browse the content in Windows and other applications.
Supported types are RAW/dd images, E01, S01, AD1, and L01.
Full disk images RAW/dd, E01, and S01 can be mounted Physically. Partitions contained within full disk images,
as well as Custom Content Images of AD1 and L01 formats can be mounted Logically. The differences are
explained in this section.
Note: Encrypted images cannot be mounted as either a drive or physical device.
Benefits of Image Mounting

The ability to mount an image with AccessData forensic products provides the following benefits:
Mount a full disk image with its partitions all at once; the disk is assigned a Physical Drive name and the
partitions are automatically assigned a drive letter beginning with either the first available, or any
available drive letter of your choice.
A full disk image mounted physically, and assigned a Physical Drive name that can be read using Imager
or with any Windows application that performs Physical Name Querying.
Mount images of multiple drives and/or partitions. The mounted images remain mounted until unmounted
or until Imager is closed.
Mounted images can be easily unmounted in any order, individually, or all at once.
A logically mounted image may be viewed in Windows Explorer as though it were a drive attached to the
computer, providing the following benefits:
File types with Windows associations can be viewed in their native or associated application, when
that application is installed locally.
Anti-virus applications can be run on the mounted image.
Because the logically mounted image is seen as a drive in Windows Explorer, it can be shared, and
viewed from remote computers when Remote Access has been configured correctly.
Files can be copied from the mounted image to another location.
Mount NTFS / FAT partitions contained within images as writable block devices. This feature caches
sections of a read-only image to a temporary location allowing the user to “write” to the image without
compromising the integrity of the original image.
Once mounted via the write cache mount method, the data can then be leveraged by any 3rd party tools
which require write access.
Working with Evidence Image Files Mounting an Image to a Drive | 104

Characteristics of a Logically Mounted Image
AD1 and L01 are both custom content images, and contain full file structure, but do not contain any drive
geometry or other physical drive data. Thus, these images do not have the option of being mounted Physically.
Note: When Logically mounting an image, the drive or partition size displays incorrectly in the Windows Start >
Computer view. However, when you open the “drive” from there, the folders and files contained within the
mounted image do display correctly.
Characteristics of a Physically Mounted Image

When you mount an image physically, while it cannot be viewed by Windows Explorer, it can be viewed outside
of Imager using any Windows application that performs Physical Name Querying.
E01, S01, and RAW/dd images are drive images that have the disk, partition, and file structure as well as drive
data. A physical disk image can be mounted Physically; the disk image partitions can be mounted Logically.
Mounting an Image as Read-Only

To mount an image
1. If you already have the desired image added as evidence in the case, select that item, then do Step 2 to
auto-populate the Source box with the image file to be mounted, as shown in Step 3.
If you do not already have the desired image added as evidence, begin with Step 2.
Right-click and choose Mount Image to Drive.
Select the image from the Evidence tree. Right-click and choose Mount Image to Drive.
Click Tools > Mount Image to Drive, then browse to the image on your local drive or on a network
drive you have access to.
3. Enter the path and filename, or click Browse to populate the Source box with the path and filename of
the image to be mounted.
After selecting an image, the Mount Type will default to the supported mapping based on the image type
selected. Click the drop-down to display other available mount types. After selecting an image, the Map
Type will default to the supported mapping based on the image type selected. Click the drop-down to
display other available map types.
4. Select the Mount Type to use for mounting.
Available Mount Types are Physical & Logical, Physical Only, and Logical Only.
If the Mount Type selected includes Logical, you can select the Drive Letter to assign as the mount
point.
5. Click the Drive Letter drop-down to see all drive letters that are available for assignment to the mounted
image.
6. Click the Mount Method drop-down to select Block Device / Read Only or
File System / Read Only.
Working with Evidence Image Files Characteristics of a Logically Mounted Image | 105
Note: If you are mounting an HFS image of a Mac drive, you must choose
File System / Read Only to view contents of the drive. Otherwise, it will appear empty, and may
prompt you to format the drive.
7. Click Mount.
All the related mount information will be displayed in the Mapped Image List.
To mount another image, repeat the process. You can continue to mount images as needed, until you
run out of evidence to add, or mount points to use. Mounted images remain available until unmounted,
or until the program is closed.
8. Click Close to return to the main window.
Mounting a Drive Image as Writable

When mounting an image as writable, you must be working with a physical image, and the mount type you select
must be Physical & Logical. This is the only option that provides the Block Device /Writable Mount Method.
To mount a drive image as writable

1. In the Examiner, click Tools > Mount Image to Drive.
2. Select a full disk image such as 001/Raw dd, E01, or S01 file type.
3. In the Mount Type drop-down, select Physical & Logical.
4. In the Drive Letter drop-down, select Next Available (default), or select a different drive letter.
Note: Check your existing mappings. If you map to a drive letter that is already in use, the original will
prevail and you will not be able to see the mapped image contents.
5. In the Mount Method drop-down, select Block Device / Writable.

6. In the Write Cache Folder text box, type or click Browse to navigate to the folder where you want the
Write Cache files to be created and saved.
7. Click Mount.
You will see the mapped images in the Mapped Image List.
To view or add to the writable mapped drive image

1. On your Windows desktop, click Start > Computer (or My Computer).
2. Find the mapped drive letter in your Hard Disk Drives list. It should be listed by the name of the Image
that was mounted, then the drive letter.
3. Double-click on it as you would any other drive.
4. As a test, right-click and choose New > Folder.
5. Enter a name for the folder and press Enter.
6. The folder you created is displayed in the Folder view.
7. Mapped images remain mapped until unmapped, or until the application is shut down.
Working with Evidence Image Files Mounting a Drive Image as Writable | 106
Unmounting an Image
To unmount a mounted image
1. Click File > Image Mounting. The Map Image to Drive dialog opens.
2. Highlight the images to unmount, click Unmount. To unmount multiple mappings, click the first, then
Shift-click the last to select a block of contiguous mappings. Click a file, then Ctrl-click individual files to
select multiple non-contiguous mappings.)
3. Click Done to close the Map Image to Drive dialog.
Restoring an Image to a Disk

A physical image such as 001 (RAW/dd), E01, or S01, can be restored to a drive of equal or greater size to the
original, un-compressed drive.
To restore an image to a disk

1. Connect a target drive to your computer.
2. In the Examiner, click Tools > Restore Image to Disk.
3. Click Browse to locate and select the source image. It must be a full-disk image such as 001 (Raw/dd),
E01, or S01.
The source image must be a disk image. A custom content image such as AD1 will not work for this
feature.
4. Click the Destination Drive drop-down, select the target drive you connected in Step 1. If you do not see
that drive in the list, click Refresh.
5. Mark the Zero-fill remainder of destination drive check box if the drive is larger than the original un-
compressed drive.
6. Mark the Notify operating system to rescan partition table when complete check box to allow the
new drive to be seen by the OS. If you plan to connect the drive in a different computer there is no need
to do this step.
When you are finished selecting options, click Restore Image to continue.
Performing Final Carve Processing

When you have selections saved as carved files from any file in the Hex viewer, performing Final Carve
Processing carves the files, saves them, adds them to the case, and even creates or assigns them to bookmarks
you specified when the data was selected.
Final Carve Processing jobs can be monitored in the Progress Window as Additional Analysis Jobs.
Working with Evidence Image Files Unmounting an Image | 107

Recovering Processing Jobs
Jobs that are started but unable to finish for whatever reason can be deleted or restarted. Click Tools > Recover
Processing Jobs. If no jobs remain unfinished, the Recover Processing Jobs dialog box is empty. Click Close.
If there are jobs in the list, you can choose whether to Restart or Delete those jobs.
To recover incomplete processing jobs

1. Click Select All, Unselect All, or mark the check box for each job to be recovered.
2. Click Restart.
3. In the Recovery Type dialog, choose the recovery type that suits your needs:
Continue processing from where the job ended.
Restart the job from the beginning.
4. Click Close.
5. To verify the progress of a restarted or continued job, click Tools > Show Progress Window.
To remove incomplete processing jobs

1. Click Select All, Unselect All, or mark the check box for each job to discard.
2. Click Delete.
3. Click Yes to confirm that you want to delete the job permanently.
4. Click Close.
Working with Evidence Image Files Recovering Processing Jobs | 108

Chapter 7
Introducing FTK Case Management
About Case Management (page 109)

The User Interfaces (page 109)
About the Cases List (page 110)
Menus of the Case Manager (page 110)
About Case Management

Case management includes creating new cases, as well as backing up, archiving, detaching, restoring,
attaching, deleting cases from the database, and managing case and evidence files.
Case management tasks are performed from the Case Manager.
Note: Multiple user names in a case are automatically assigned to Original User Names when a case is
Archived, or Archived and Detached, and then restored. They can also be reassigned if necessary.
See Creating a Case (page 58)
See Managing Case Data (page 95)
The User Interfaces

The Case Manager lets you add and manage cases, users, roles and permissions, and do other management
tasks. You can use the Case Manager to apply settings globally to all cases in the system.
Menus of the Case Manager (page 110)
You can use the Examiner to locate, bookmark, and report on evidence.
Menus of the Examiner (page 287)
Introducing FTK Case Management About Case Management | 109

About the Cases List
The Cases List shows all of the cases that are available to the currently logged in user. The right pane displays
information about the cases. The information that is shown for Case File, Description File, and Description are
determined by the either the Application Administrator or the Case Administrator.
Menus of the Case Manager

Case Manager Menus
Menu More Information

File The File menu lets you exit the Case Manager.
See Options of the Case Manager File Menu (page 111)
Database The Database menu lets you administer users and roles.
See Options of the Case Manager Database Menu (page 111)
Case The Case menu lets you create, backup, and delete cases. You can also assign users
to roles.
See Options of the Case Manager Case Menu (page 111)
Tools The Tools menu lets you configure the processing engine, recover interrupted jobs and
restore images to a disk.
See Options of the Case Manager Tools Menu (page 113)
Manage The Manage menu lets you administrate shared objects such as columns, labels and
carvers.
See Options of the Case Manager Manage Menu (page 114)
Help The Help menu lets you access the user guide as well as view version and copyright
information.
See Options of the Case Manager Help Menu (page 115)
Introducing FTK Case Management About the Cases List | 110

Options of the Case Manager File Menu
Options of the Case Manager File Menu
Option Description
Exit Exits and closes the program.
Options of the Case Manager Database Menu

Options of the Case Manager Database Menu
Option Description
Log In/ Log Out Opens the authentication dialog for users to log into the database. You can log out the
currently authenticated user without closing the program.
Put each case in Creates a new database for each new case. This is enabled by default.
its own DB
Change password Opens the Change Password dialog. The currently authenticated user can change their
own password by providing the current password, then typing and re-typing the new
password.
See Changing Your Password on page 37.
Administer Users Lets you manage user accounts. The Application Administrator can change users’
roles.
See Adding New Users to a Database on page 42.
Session Opens the Manage Database Sessions dialog. Click Refresh to update the view of
Management current sessions. Click Terminate to end sessions that are no longer active.
See Managing Database Sessions on page 39.
Configure Opens the Configure Database dialog.

See Optimizing the Database for Large Cases on page 39.
Options of the Case Manager Case Menu

Options of the Case Manager Case Menu
Option Description
New Start a new case with the currently authenticated user as the Case Administrator. Case
Reviewers cannot create a new case.
See Creating a Case (page 58)
Open Opens the highlighted case with its included evidence.
Introducing FTK Case Management Menus of the Case Manager | 111

Options of the Case Manager Case Menu (Continued)
Assign Users Allows the Application Administrator or the Case Administrator to adjust or control the
rights of other users to access a particular case. Also allows the Administrator to control
which users can see which of the Shared Labels that are available.
See What You Can Do With Labels (page 161)
Backup Opens a dialog for specifying names and locations for backup of selected cases. You
can select multiple cases in the Case Manager to backup.
Options are:
 Backup
 Archive
 Archive and Detach
See Managing Case Data on page 95.
Restore Opens a Windows Explorer instance for locating and restoring a selected, saved case.
Options are:
 Restore an archived case
 Attach an archived and detached case
See Managing Case Data on page 95.
Delete Deletes the selected case. Pop-up appears to confirm deletion.

See Deleting a Case on page 102.
Copy Previous Copy a case from a previous version (4.2 or later) into the database.
Case The use of a UNC folder path is no longer required beginning with version 4.2 and
newer.
To use copy from previous case you don't backup the case in the previous version, you
simply use the “Copy Previous Case” feature. If you want to use Backup, you can
backup the case in a previous version, such as 4.2 then restore it to the new version.
Copy Previous Case doesn’t recognize backed-up cases.
Remove This option lets you select a case and delete its index. If you remove a case’s index, you
Generated Index cannot use index searches until you create a new index. To create a new index, in the
Examiner, click Evidence > Additional Analysis. Select dtSearch® Text Index and
click OK.
ISubmit Forms Users have the ability to pull pertinent information from iSubmit and auto-create a case
with that information, allowing investigators to track a case from start to completion
within the iSubmit program.
See Opening a Case in iSubmit on page 57.
Refresh Case List Right-click in the Case List area and select Refresh Case List, or click F5 to refresh the
case list with any new information.

Options of the Case Manager Tools Menu
Options of the Case Manager Tools Menu
Option Description
Processing Engine Opens the Processing Engine Configuration dialog. Configure Remote Processing
Config Engines here. Specify Computer Name/IP Address, and Port. Add New, Remove,
Enable or Disable configured Processing Engines.
Recover Processing Allows you to recover jobs that were interrupted during processing so the processing
Jobs can be completed.
Show Progress Opens the Progress window so you can check the Processing Status.
Window
Restore Image to Copies a disk image to a disk other than the original.
Disk
Dell Encryption Lets you configure Dell Encryption server settings.

Server Settings See Decrypting Dell Encryption Files (Dell Data Protection | Encryption Server) on
page 178.
Preferences Opens Preferences dialog.

See Setting Additional Preferences on page 49.

Options of the Case Manager Manage Menu
Options of the Case Manager Manage Menu
Option Description
Carvers Manage Shared Custom Carvers. Custom Carvers created here can be copied to
cases.
See Managing Shared Custom Carvers on page 51.
Custom Identifiers Manage Shared Custom Identifiers. Custom Identifiers created here are automatically
made available to all new cases, but cannot be copied directly to earlier cases. They
must be exported and then imported into such cases.
See Managing Custom Identifiers on page 52.
Columns Manage Shared Column Settings. Custom Columns created here can be copied to
cases.
File Extension Manage Shared File Extension Mappings. File Extension Maps created here are
Maps automatically made available to all new cases, but cannot be copied directly to earlier
cases. They must be exported and then imported into such cases.
See Managing File Extension Maps on page 53.
Filters Manage Shared Filters. Custom Filters created here can be copied to cases.
See Managing Filters on page 54.
Labels Manage Shared Labels. Custom Labels created here can be copied to cases.
See Working with Labels on page 161.
KFF To use the Known File Filter feature (KFF), you must configure a KFF Server. In this
dialog, you specify the type of KFF Server and its location.
For information on configuring the KFF Server, see Getting Started with KFF (Known
File Filter) (page 225).
After the KFF server has been configured, you can click Test Server to test the
communication with the KFF Server.
Evidence Lets you configure Evidence Processing Profiles.

Processing See Using Processing Profiles on page 61.
Profiles
Email Notification See Email Notifications for Case-Level Permissions on page 48.
Settigns
Indexed Serch See Adjusting the Weighting Criteria for an Index Search Term on page 414.
Term Weights

Options of the Case Manager Help Menu
Options of the Case Manager Help Menu
Option Description
User Guide To access the latest documentation, download the zip file from www.accessdata.com/
productdocs/ftk/ftk.zip.
About Provides version and build information, copyright and trademark information, and other
copyright and trade acknowledgements.

Chapter 8
Working with Static Evidence
Static Evidence Compared to Remote Evidence (page 116)

Acquiring and Preserving Static Evidence (page 117)
Adding Evidence (page 117)
Working with Evidence Groups (page 121)
Selecting Evidence Processing Options (page 122)
Selecting a Language (page 123)
Examining Data in Volume Shadow Copies (page 124)
Using Additional Analysis (page 128)
Data Carving (page 133)
Hashing (page 133)
Viewing the Status and Progress of Data Processing and Analysis (page 135)
Viewing Processed Items (page 136)
Editing the Processing Management Queue (page 136)
Viewing Evidence Information (page 137)
Static Evidence Compared to Remote Evidence

Static evidence describes evidence that has been captured to an image before being added to the case.
Live evidence describes any data that is not saved to an image prior to being added to a case. Such evidence is
always subject to change, and presents risk of data loss or corruption during examination. For example, a
suspect’s computer, whether because a password is not known, or to avoid the suspect’s knowing that he or she
is under suspicion, may be imaged live if the computer has not yet been or will not be confiscated.
Remote evidence describes data that is acquired from remote live computers in the network after the case has
been created.
This chapter covers working with static evidence.
Working with Static Evidence Static Evidence Compared to Remote Evidence | 116
Acquiring and Preserving Static Evidence
For digital evidence to be valid, it must be preserved in its original form. The evidence image must be
forensically sound, in other words, identical in every way to the original.
See also About Acquiring Digital Evidence (page 26)
Adding Evidence
When case creation is complete, the Manage Evidence dialog appears. Evidence items added here will be
processed using the options you selected in pre-processing. Please note the following information as you add
evidence to your case:
You can now drag and drop evidence files from a Windows Explorer view into the Manage Evidence
dialog.
You can repeat this process as many times as you need to, for the number of evidence items and types
you want to add.
DMG (Mac) images are sometimes displayed as “Unrecognized File System.” This happens only when
the files are not “Read/Write” enabled.
If the DMG is a full disk image or an image that is created with the read/write option, then it is identified
properly. Otherwise the contents will not be recognized properly.
After processing, the Evidence Processing selected options can be found in the case log. You can also
view them by clicking Evidence > Add/Remove. Double-click on any of the evidence items to open the
Refinement Options dialog.
Popular mobile phone formats (found in many MPE images) such as M4A, MP4, AMR, and 3GP can be
recognized. These file types will play inside the Media tab as long as the proper codecs are installed that
would also allow those files to play in Windows Media Player.
To add static evidence (an exact image, or “snapshot” of electronic data found on a hard disk or other data
storage device) to an existing case, select Evidence > Add/Remove from the menu bar and continue.
Note: Use Universal Naming Convention (UNC) syntax in your evidence path for best results.
Click Refinement Options to override settings that were previously selected for evidence added to this case. If
you do not click Refinement Options here, the options that were specified when you created the case will be
used.
Configuring Default Processing Options for a Case (page 60)
Working with Static Evidence Acquiring and Preserving Static Evidence | 117
After evidence has been added, you can perform many processing tasks that were not performed initially.
Additional evidence files and images can be added and processed later, if needed.
Manage Evidence Options
Option Description
Add Opens the Select Evidence Type dialog. Click to select the evidence type, and a Windows
Explorer instance will open, allowing you to navigate to and select the evidence you
choose.
Remove Displays a caution box and asks if you are sure you want to remove the selected
evidence item from the case. Removing evidence items that are referenced in bookmarks
and reports will remove references to that evidence and they will no longer be available.
Click Yes to remove the evidence, or click No to cancel the operation.
Display Name The filename of the evidence being added.
State The State of the evidence item:

 “ ” (empty) Indicates that processing is complete.
 “+” Indicates the item is to be added to the case
 “–” Indicates the item is to be removed from the case.
 “*” Indicates the item is processing.
 “!” Indicates there was a failure in processing the item.
If you click Cancel from the Add Evidence dialog, the state is ignored and the requested
processing will not take place.
Note: If the State field is blank and you think the item is still processing, from any tab
view, click View > Progress Window to verify.
Path The full pathname of the evidence file.

Note: Use universal naming convention (UNC) syntax in your evidence path for best
results.
ID/Name The optional ID/Name of the evidence being added.
Description The options description of the evidence being added. This can be the source of the data,
or other description that may prove helpful later.
Evidence Group Click the drop-down to assign this evidence item to an Evidence Group. For more
information regarding Evidence Groups, see Working with Evidence Groups (page 121).
Time Zone The time zone of the original evidence. Select a time zone from the drop-down list.
Merge Case Merges fragmented index segments to improve performance of index-related commands,
Index such as Index Searching.
Note: The application automatically merges the case index when system resources allow
whether or not Merge Case Index is selected. Selecting this option forces the merge to
execute regardless of system resources.
Language Select the code page for the language to view the case in. The Language Selection dialog
Setting contains a drop-down list of available code pages. Select a code page and click OK.
Case KFF Opens the KFF Admin box for managing KFF libraries, groups, and sets for this case.
Options
Working with Static Evidence Adding Evidence | 118

Manage Evidence Options (Continued)
Option Description
Refinement Displays the Refinement Options for Evidence Processing. This dialog has limited options
Options compared to the Refinement Options selectable prior to case creation.
Select the options to apply to the evidence being added, then click OK to close the dialog.
Configuring Default Processing Options for a Case (page 60)
When you are satisfied with the evidence options selected, click OK.
Note: To remove evidence from the list either before processing, or after it has been added to the case, select
the evidence item in the list, then click Remove.
Note: When you export data from a case as an image, and then add that image as evidence in either the same
case or a different case, the name of the image is renamed using a generic term. This prevents a user
generated image name from being indexed with evidence.
To add new evidence to the case

Drag and drop the evidence file into the Manage Evidence > Evidence Name list field.
Click Add to choose the type of evidence items to add into a new case.
Important: Consider the following:
Evidence taken from any physical source that is removable, whether it is a “live” drive or an image,
will become inaccessible to the case if the drive letters change or the evidence-bearing source is
moved. Instead, create a disk image of this drive, save it either locally, or to the drive you specified
during installation, then add the disk image to the case. Otherwise, be sure the drive will be available
whenever working on the case.
To add physical or logical drives as evidence on any 64-bit Windows system you must run the
application as an Administrator. Otherwise, an empty drive list displays. If you encounter this
problem on a 64-bit system, log out, then run again as Administrator.
While it is possible to add a CUE file as a valid image type, when adding a CUE file as “All images in
a directory”, although adding the BIN and the CUE are actually the same thing the user gets double
of everything.
Workaround: Remove duplicates before processing.
2. Mark the type of evidence to add, and then click OK.
3. Click the Browse button at the end of the Path field to browse to the evidence folder. Select the
evidence item from the stored location.
4. Click OK.
Note: Folders and files not already contained in an image when added to the case will be imaged in the
AD1 format and stored in the case folder. If you select AD1 as the image type, you can add these
without creating an image from the data.
5. Fill in the ID/Name field with any specific ID or Name data applied to this evidence for this case.
6. Use the Description field to enter an optional description of the evidence being added.
7. Select the Evidence Group that this evidence item belongs to. Click Manage to create and manage
evidence groups.

8. Select the Time Zone of the evidence where it was seized from the drop-down list in the Time Zone
field. This is required to save the added evidence.
After selecting an Evidence Type, and browsing to and selecting the evidence item, the selected
evidence displays under Display Name. The Status column shows a plus (+) symbol to indicate that the
file is being added to the case.
To pause evidence processing

In the Data Processing Status window, select the Pause button.
An entry will appear in the Messages box stating that the processing has been paused and listing the
date and time it was paused.
To resume evidence processing

In the Data Processing Status window, select the Resume button.
An entry will appear in the Messages box stating that the processing has resumed and listing the date
and time it resumed.

Working with Evidence Groups
Evidence Groups let you create and modify groups of evidence. You can share groups of evidence with other
cases, or make them specific to a single case.
To create an evidence group

1. In Examiner, click Evidence > Add/Remove.
2. With an evidence item selected in the Display Name box, click Manage to the right of Evidence Group.
3. In the Manage Evidence Group dialog, click Create New to create a new Evidence Group.
4. Provide a name for the new evidence group, and mark the Share With Other Cases box to make this
group available to other cases you may be working on.
5. Click Create to create and save this new group.
6. Click Close.
To modify an evidence group

3. To modify a group, highlight it in the list, and click Modify.
4. Make the changes to the group, then click Update.
5. Click Close.
To delete an evidence group

3. To delete a group, highlight it in the list, and click Delete.
4. Click Close.
Working with Static Evidence Working with Evidence Groups | 121

Selecting Evidence Processing Options
The Evidence Processing options allow selection of processing tasks to perform on the current evidence. Select
only those tasks that are relevant to the evidence being added to the case.
See Configuring Default Processing Options for a Case on page 60.
After processing, the Evidence Processing options selected for this case can be found in the case log. You can
also view them by clicking Evidence > Add/Remove. Double-click on any of the evidence items to open the
Refinement Options dialog.
Some pre-processing options require others to be selected. For example:
Data Carving depends on Expand

KFF depends on MD5 hashing
Flag Duplicates depends on MD5 hashing
Indexing depends on Identification
Flag bad extension depends on File Signature Analysis.
Different processing options can be selected and unselected depending on the specific requirements of the
case.
At the bottom of every Refinement Options selection screen are the following options:
OK: accepts current settings without saving for future use.

Cancel: cancels the entire Detailed Options dialog without saving settings or changes, and returns to the
New Case Options dialog.
If you choose not to index in the Processing Options page, but later find a need to index the case, click
Evidence > Additional Analysis. Choose All Items, and check dtSearch* Index.
To set Evidence Refinement Options for this case

1. Click Refinement Options to open the Refinement Options dialog. Refinement Options are much the
same as Detailed Options.
The sections available are:
Evidence Processing: For more information on Evidence Processing options, see Selecting Evidence
Processing Options (page 122).
Evidence Refinement (Advanced): For more information on Evidence Refinement (Advanced)
options, see Configuring Evidence Refinement (Advanced) Options (page 87).
Index Refinement (Advanced): For more information on Index Refinement (Advanced), see Selecting
Index Refinement (Advanced) Options (page 89).
2. Click OK to accept the settings and to exit the Manage Evidence dialog.
3. Select the KFF Options button to display the KFF Admin dialog.
Note: The AD Alert and the AD Ignore Groups are selected by default.
4. Click Done to accept settings and return to the Manage Evidence dialog.
5. Click Language Settings to select the code page for the language to be used for viewing the evidence.
More detail is given in the following section.
6. Click OK to add and process the evidence.
Working with Static Evidence Selecting Evidence Processing Options | 122

Selecting a Language
If you are working with a case including evidence in another language, or you are working with a different
language Operating System, click Language Settings from the Manage Evidence dialog.
The Language Setting dialog appears, allowing you to select a code page from a drop-down list. When the
setting is made, click OK.
Working with Static Evidence Selecting a Language | 123

Examining Data in Volume Shadow Copies
You can examine data that is contained in NTFS Volume Shadow Copies. In NTFS partitions, the Volume
Shadow Copy Service (VSS) maintains a copy of every 16 KB block that is changed. These blocks are packaged
up at predetermined times (which differ depending on the operating system being run) as a Volume Shadow
Copy (VSC) or restore point. These restore points can contain data that has been renamed or deleted. They can
also contain hidden malware, especially persistent code.
Encrypted drives are supported.
You can mount and process restore points as a separate evidence items within a case. When restore points are
processed, a unique file system image for each restore point is created under the source NTFS partition.
You can view the files in the different file system images to analyze the difference between each restore point
and the files that are unique to each one. This helps you see how a system has changed over a period of time.
You can identify and parse files within the restore points and can search for evidence or malware hidden there.
You configure the processing of restore points when you add new evidence to a case. You can do this for a new
case or an existing case. If the evidence that you are adding contains an NTFS partition with Volume Shadow
Copy restore points, a Select Restore Points option is available. You can view all of the available restore points
and select the ones that you want to process.
When viewing the restore point data, you can use the following VSC-related columns the provides details about
the data.
VSC-related Columns
VSC-Delta Restore Point End Date of second restore point of a delta file
VSC-Delta Restore Point Start Date of first restore point of a delta file
VSC-Delta State The state of a delta file as compared in two restore points
VSC-Renamed From The name this file was renamed from
VSC-Renamed To The name this file was renamed to
VSC- Restore Point Date Date of restore point this file came from
Working with Static Evidence Examining Data in Volume Shadow Copies | 124
About Restore Point Processing Options
When you select restore points to process, you select the following options:
Which restore points to include

The restore point expansion options (Delta/Full)
Restore Points Selection

If an NTFS partition has restore points, you can select which restore points to to expand as file system images.
Each restore point that you select is represented by a unique file system. You can select the Current files as well
as any previous restore points.
Important: You can select to process one or more restore point. If you do not select a restore point, you cannot
add it later within the same evidence item. You must re-add the NTFS partition as a new evidence
item and then select the desired restore points.
Restore Point Expansion Options

You choose from the following expansion options.
Full All restore points are added as full file systems. The benefit of this option is that you can
view all of the files in all of the restore points. However, you will potentially have duplicate
files, making the data set large. It can also make it more difficult to find the files that have
been deleted or modified.
If "Full" restore option is selected, you are warned if more than one restore point is checked.
You can add the evidence item again if you don’t choose to add it as a restore point image
originally. You can then choose restore points.
Delta - Oldest to Instead of creating a full partition for each restore point, one full partition is created for the
latest oldest restore point selected while all newer restore points are created as deltas. The
advantage of this option is that you do not have duplicate files and the contents of the other
restore points are smaller, making it is easier to find the files or folders that have been
deleted or modified.
Delta - Latest to The latest restore point selected is created as a full image while all older restore points are
Oldest created as deltas.
Managing Restore Points

To process restore point file systems
1. In either a new or an existing case, add new evidence, and select evidence that has an NTFS partition.
2. On the Manage Evidence page, click Choose Restore Points.
If the button is active, then the evidence has an NTFS partition.
If the button is grayed out, the evidence does not have an NTFS partition.
When you click the button, if the NTFS partition does not have any restore points, a message is
displayed.
3. Select the restore points that you want to process as file systems.
See About Restore Point Processing Options on page 125.
4. Select the expansion option.
5. Click OK.
Viewing Restore Point Data

After the evidence with the restore points has been processed, you can view the data. You can view the created
file systems for the restore points that you selected.
You can also add columns to the File List to display
To view restore point file systems

1. In the Examiner, click the Explore tab.
2. Select the evidence item and the the NTFS partition.
3. You can view a file system image for each restore point.
4. You can view the content of each restore point to compare folders and files.
5. You can use VSC-related columns to view detailed data.
See VSC-related Columns on page 124.
6. You can also use searches, filters, and so on to find and analyze the files in the share points.
Note: If you selected “Latest to Oldest”, the tree will show Current first, but then the deltas are sorted by the
oldest to the newest. If you selected “Oldest to Latest” the folders are sorted in the correct order.
Using Additional Analysis
After evidence has been added to a case and processed, you may wish to perform other analysis tasks. To
further analyze selected evidence, click Evidence > Additional Analysis.
Most of the tasks available during the initial evidence processing remain available with Additional Analysis.
Specific items can also be targeted. Multiple processing tasks can be performed at the same time.
Make your selections based on the information in the table below. Click OK when you are ready to continue.
Additional Analysis Options
Field Item Description

Hashing / Job Options Tab
File Hashes These options create file hashes for the evidence. The Options are:
MD5 Hash: This hash option creates a digital fingerprint based on the
contents of the file. This fingerprint can be used to verify file
integrity and to identify duplicate files.
SHA-1 Hash: This hash option creates a digital fingerprint based on the
SHA-256: This hash option creates a digital fingerprint based on the

Flag Duplicates: Mark to flag duplicate files. This applies to all files in the case,
regardless of the Target Items selected.
Note: A blank hash field appears for unallocated space files, the same as if the files had not
been hashed at all. To notate in the hash field the reason for it being blank would slow the
processing of the evidence into the case.
KFF Enables the Known File Filter (KFF) that lets you identify either known insignificant files that
you can ignore or known illicit or dangerous files that you want to be alerted to.
When you enable KFF, you must select a KFF Template to use. You can select an existing
KFF Template from the drop-down menu or click ... to create a new one.
See Getting Started with KFF (Known File Filter) on page 225.
You can select to Recheck previously processed items when searching for new information,
or when a KFF group is added or changed.
Mark Recheck previously processed items if changes have been made to the KFF since the
last check.
Target Items Select the items on which to perform the additional analysis. Highlighted, and Checked items
will be unavailable if no items in the case are highlighted or checked. The following list shows
the available options:
Highlighted Items: Performs the additional analysis on the items highlighted in the
File List pane when you select Additional
Analysis.
Working with Static Evidence Using Additional Analysis | 128

Additional Analysis Options (Continued)

Checked Items: Performs the additional analysis on the checked evidence items
in the File List pane when you select Additional Analysis.
Currently Listed Items: Performs the additional analysis on all the evidence items
currently listed in the File List pane when you select Additional
Analysis.
All Items: Performs the additional analysis on all evidence items in the
case.
PhotoDNA Enables PhotoDNA which lets you compare images in your evidence against known images in
a library.
See About PhotoDNA on page 275.
Refinement Include OLE Streams: Includes Object Linked or Embedded (OLE) items that are part of files
that meet the other criteria.
Job Options Send Email Alert on Job Completion: Opens a text box for the entry of an email address
destination for a notification email when these jobs complete.
Important! These Emails are often filtered into Spam folders.
Indexing / Tools tab
Indexed dtSearch® Index Choose dtSearch® Index to create a dtSearch index that
Search enables instantaneous index searches. Marking dtSearch Index
activates the Entropy Test check box.
Entropy Test Select Entropy Test to exclude compressed or encrypted items

from the indexing process.
Decryption Decrypt Dell Encryption See Decrypting Dell Encryption Files (Dell Data Protection |
Files: Encryption Server) on page 178.
If you select to decrypt Dell Encryption files, the File Signature
Analysis option will automatically be selected as well.
Perform Automatic Attempts to decrypt files using a list of passwords that you
Decryption: provide
See Decrypting Files Using Right-Click Auto Decryption on
page 171.
Other Tools:
Optical Character Parses text from graphics images and adds them to the Index.
Recognition: Creates an additional file with the OCR extension. Click OCR
Options to select specific graphics files to run the OCR process
on, or to set limiting factors such as size, or grayscale.
For more detailed information regarding OCR settings and
options, see Running Optical Character Recognition (OCR)
(page 82).


Explicit Image Detection: Enables EID Options button. The EID license is purchased
separately. This item will be disabled unless the license is
detected on your CmStick. Click EID Options to select the
processes to run. Choose default, speed, or accuracy settings.
See Evaluating Explicit Material on page 330.
Registry Reports: Enables Registry Summary Reports (RSRs) to be used directly

from Registry Viewer if it is installed. Click RSR Directory to
specify the location of any RSR templates you have saved or
downloaded from the AccessData web site.
Cerberus Analysis Performs a malware analysis on executable binaries.

See About Cerberus Malware Analysis on page 201.
See Running Cerberus Malware Analysis on page 219.
Cerberus Analysis: Lets you run the add on module for Cerberus Malware Triage.
You can click Cerberus Options to access additional options.
For more information see About Cerberus Malware Analysis
(page 201)
Language Identification Analyzes the first two pages of every document to identify the
languages contained within. The user will be able to filter by a
Language field within review and determine who needs to
review which documents based on the language contained
within the document.
See Identifying Document Languages on page 350.
Document Content Analyzes the content and groups it according to topic in the
Analysis Overview tab. When selected, the DCA Options button is also
activated and opens the Document Content Analysis Options.
See Using Document Content Analysis on page 439.
Entity Extraction Identifies and extracts specific types of data in your evidence.
(Document Content) You can select to process one or all of the following types of
entity data:
 Credit Card Numbers
 Phone Numbers
 Social Security Numbers
In the Examiner, under the Document Content node in the
Overview tab, you can view the extracted data.
See Using Entity Extraction on page 435.
Cluster Analysis (AD Lab and Summation license only)

Invokes the extended analysis of documents to determine
related, near duplicates, and email threads.
See Performing Cluster Analysis on page 441.
Configure the details by clicking Analysis Options.


Cluster Analysis Options (AD Lab and Summation license only)
This lets you specify the options for Cluster Analysis.
You can specify which document types to process:
 Documents
 Presentations
 Spreadsheets
 Email
You can also specify the similarity threshold, which determines
the level of similarity required for documents to be considered
related or near duplicates.
Generate System Extracts data and populates the System Information tab.
Information See Viewing System Information on page 427.
Miscellaneous tab
File Type File Signature Analysis: Analyzes files to indicate whether their headers or signatures match
Identification their extensions.
Before version 5.1, when performing additional analysis, if you selected certain processing
options, such as Flag Bad Extensions, dtSearch Text Index, Data Carve, OCR, Explicit Image
Detection, or Decrypt Dell Encryption Files, the File Signature Analysis option was
automatically selected and the option was disabled so that you could not un-select it. Stating
in version 5.1, if you select one of those options, the File Signature Analysis option is still
automatically selected, but the option is not disabled and you can manually un-select it.
Disable this option with care.
This does not apply to the initial processing options.
Carving Carves data immediately after pre-processing. Click Carving Options, then select the file
types to carve. Uses file signatures to identify deleted files contained in the evidence. All
available file types are selected by default.
For more information on Data Carving, see Data Carving (page 78).
Selecting this will also enable the Expand Compound Files option.
Miscellany
Expand Compound Files Expands and indexes files that contain other files.
(Email, OLE, ZIP, etc.): Include Deleted Files. Checked by default. Uncheck to exclude
deleted files from the case.
See Expanding Compound Files on page 70.
Create Thumbnails for Generates thumbnails for graphic files found in the evidence.
Graphics: Thumbnails are always .JPG format, regardless of the original
graphic format.
See Examining Graphics on page 324.


Create Thumbnails for Creates thumbnails for all videos in a case.
Videos You can also set the frequency for which video thumbnails are
created, either by a percent (1 thumbnail every “n”% of the
video) or by interval (1 thumbnail every “n” seconds.
Generate Common Video When you process the evidence in your case, you can choose to
File create a common video type for videos in your case. These
common video types are not the actual video files from the
evidence, but a copied conversion of the media that is
generated and saved as an MP4 file that can be previewed on
the video tab.
Flag Bad Extensions: Flags files that have extensions that do not match the file
headers.
HTML File Listing: Generate a list of files contained in the case, in HTML format.
CSV File Listing: Generate a list of files contained in the case, in CSV format. This
list can be used in any CSV supported spreadsheet application.
Don’t Expand Embedded This option lets you not process embedded graphics from email
Graphics. items. The default behavior has not changed. This option only
applies if you select it in the processing options.
Process Internet Browser Processes internet browser history files so that you can see
History for Visualization them in the detailed visualization timeline.
See Visualizing Internet Browser History Data on page 469.

Hashing
When the MD5 Hash option is chosen for evidence processing, the MD5 hash value for every file item
discovered within the evidence is computed. The same is true for SHA-1 Hash and SHA-256 options. In general,
a hash value can be used (in most situations) to uniquely identify a digital file - much like a finger print can
uniquely identify the person to whom it belongs.
Several specific purposes are served by enabling hashing during processing. First and foremost, when the MD5
Hash and/or SHA-1 Hash options are chosen along with the KFF option, each file item’s MD5 (and/or SHA-1)
value can be found within the KFF Library. The KFF Library does not contain any SHA-256 values. All of the file
items within the evidence that have been encountered and reliably cataloged by other investigators or US
Federal Government archivists can be identified. This feature lets you find the “known” files within the evidence,
which brings some intriguing advantages to the investigator.
These are described in Using the Known File Filter (KFF) (page 259).
Data Carving
Data carving is the process of locating files and objects that have been deleted or that are embedded in other
files.
You can recover and add embedded items and deleted files that contain information that may be helpful in
forensic investigations.
The data carving feature allows the recovery of previously deleted files located in unallocated space. Users can
also carve directory entries to find information about data or metadata.
Note: You can create custom carvers. In addition, you can manually carve for any file type for which you have
the correct header/footer/file length information, then save that file and add it to the case. In addition, you
can carve any data from any file, and save the selected data as a separate file and add it to the case.
See also Custom Carvers (page 80).

To recover embedded or deleted files, the case evidence is searched for specific file headers. Using the data
from a file header for a recognized file type the length of that file is determined, or the file footer is found, and
“carves” the associated data, then saves it as a distinct file. A child object is created with a name reflecting the
type of object carved and its offset into the parent object’s data stream. Embedded or deleted items can be found
as long as the file header still exists.
Data carving can be done when adding evidence to a case, or by clicking Evidence > Additional Analysis >
Data Carve from within a case.
Recognized File Types for Data Carving

 AOL Bag Files  LNK Files
 BMP Files  OLE Archive Files (Office Documents)
 EMF Files  PDF Files
 EML Files  PNG Files
 GIF Files  TIFF Files
Working with Static Evidence Hashing | 133

Recognized File Types for Data Carving (Continued)
 HTML Files  Zip Files
 JPEG Files
You can set additional options to refine the data carving process for the selected file types.
Data Carving Files When Processing a New Case

Data Carving can be done during initial case creation by setting preprocessing options, or later, as an Additional
Analysis task.
Working with Static Evidence Data Carving | 134

Viewing the Status and Progress of Data Processing and
Analysis
The Data Processing Status screen lets you view the status of any processing, analysis, or searching that is
being done on evidence in a case. This screen is also called the Progress Window.
To view the status and progress of data processing and analysis

1. In the Examiner, click View > Progress Window to open the Data Processing Status screen.
Processing is categorized according to the following job types:
Add Evidence
Additional Analysis
Live Search
Other
2. Click on a job type in the left pane, to view aggregate progress statistics for all of the items in a job type.
3. Click the expand icon to the left of a job type and then select an individual job or task to view the status
of jobs and tasks.
Details about each task in a job are displayed in the right hand pane under Messages.
You can also view the following status information about job processing:
Information Description
Overall The percentage complete as each task progresses.
Discovered The number of items that have been discovered.
Processed The number of items that have been processed. If you compare
the numbers in the Data Processing Status screen with the
numbers shown in Overview tab > Case Overview > File
Category, for example, you may notice that the numbers are not
the same. If there is a difference, the numbers in the case are
accurate; the numbers in the Data Processing screen on the
progress bar items are not.
Indexed The number of items that have been indexed.
Process State The current status of a job’s processing. When the job is
complete, this field displays Finished, and the Message box in the
right pane also displays Job Finished.
Name The file name of the evidence item that is processing in a task.
Path The path to where the evidence item is stored.
Process Manager The Process Manager computer is listed by its name or by its IP
Address. If your Evidence Processing Engine runs on the same
computer as the Examiner and the database, then “localhost” is
the default Process Manager. If you are using Distributed
Processing, the Process Manager or the Remote Processing
computer is listed.
Working with Static Evidence Viewing the Status and Progress of Data Processing and Analysis | 135
4. You can select from the following options:
Job Folder lets you open the location where the JobInformation.log for this job is stored. You can
view detailed information about the processing tasks and any errors or failures in the
JobInformation.log file.
Remove when finished lets you remove a task or job from the job list when it has completed
processing.
Pause lets you pause the current evidence processing task and adds an entry in the Messages box
listing the date and time it was paused.
Resume lets you resume the current processing task after having paused it and adds an entry in the
Messages box listing the date and time processing was resumed. This option only appears after the
Pause option has been enabled.
Cancel lets you stop the current task from running.
5. Click Close to close the display but not cancel any current tasks.
Viewing Processed Items

It is not necessary to wait for the program to finish processing the case to begin viewing data. The metadata—
the information about the evidence—can be viewed in several modes before the evidence image has completed
processing.
Important: Do not attempt to do any search prior to processing completion. You can view processed items from
the tabbed views, but searching during indexing may corrupt the index and render the case useless.
Editing the Processing Management Queue

It is possible to adjust the processing queue in order to move high priority evidence items to the top of the list.
This can be done by the Application Administrator.
To edit the evidence processing queue

1. Add evidence items to the processing queue as normal. For more information, see Adding Evidence
(page 117).
2. Once the items are in line for processing, navigate to Evidence > Manage Processing.
3. In the Manage Evidence Processing window, select the desired evidence items and click either the
Move Up or Move Down buttons, depending on how you’d like to arrange the items in the processing
queue.
Note: Processing will have already begun by the time you change the processing priorities and your
desired item may not be first on the list. It will be the first priority once the item(s) currently
processing complete.
Working with Static Evidence Viewing Processed Items | 136

Viewing Evidence Information
Evidence Tracking
Evidence information for all evidence items created using Imager, MPE+, or Cellebrite are available for export.
This allows for proper tracking of evidence.
To view Imager or MPE+ processed evidence information

1. In the Manage Evidence dialog, click on the desired evidence item in the list on the left to highlight it.
2. Click the View Evidence Info button.
A text file will open displaying the following information for the selected evidence item.
TABLE 8-1 Evidence Tracking Data
General Information
Name of the evidence item
Case information
Product and version of the software used to acquire the evidence image
Case number
Evidence number
Unique description
Examiner who processed the case
Any notes entered when the case was acquired
Physical Evidentiary Item

(Source) Information
Device Information Source type
Drive Geometry Bytes per sector
Sector count
Image Image type
Source data size
Sector count
Computed Hashes MD5 checksum
SHA1 checksum
Image Information Acquisition started
Acquisition finished
Working with Static Evidence Viewing Evidence Information | 137

General Information
Segment list
Image Verification Results Verification started
Verification finished
MD5 checksum
SHA1 checksum
To view Cellebrite-processed evidence information

1. Select the Cellebrite image (UFDR) from the Evidence Items panel on the Explore Tab.
2. In the File List, select the file named Extraction Summary.
3. The evidence tracking information for the selected file will appear in the File Content pane, in Cool
HTML. It is also contained in the report.xml file, found in the File List, which can be exported.
Working with Static Evidence Viewing Evidence Information | 138

Chapter 9
Working with Live Evidence
About Live Evidence

Data that you gather and process from an active data source is called live evidence. You can gather this data
from local sources.
You can acquire live evidence from only one computer at a time.
See also About Acquiring Digital Evidence (page 26) for details on the ways that evidence can be acquired, and
precautions to take before acquiring evidence.
About Local Live Evidence

An example of local live evidence is an original drive or other electronic data source that is attached to the
investigation computer. It can also be data acquired from a device on a remote computer while the device is
mounted to the system as Read/Write.
When adding live evidence you can select from the following evidence types:
The contents of a directory (local or network share)

An individual file
A Physical drive
A Logical drive
Adding Local Live Evidence

You can add live evidence and then create a static image of that data. You can also add the data without creating
an image, but realize that as the files are read, the operating system makes changes to the file statuses, the
Read date and time stamps, and the Accessed time and date stamps. You can add the entire contents of a folder
or a single file from a device that is attached to the Examiner machine.
To add local live evidence to a case

2. In the Manage Evidence dialog box, click Add.
Working with Live Evidence About Live Evidence | 139

Click Contents of a Directory, then click OK. Browse to and select the directory. Read the warning. To
continue click Yes.
Click Individual Files, then click OK. Browse to the location, select one or more files. You can use
Shift-Click or use Ctrl-Click to select multiple files. Read the warning. To continue click Yes.
Click Physical Drive, then click OK. Read the warning. To continue, click Yes. Select a drive. The
drives are listed in UNC format and are pre-pended with the string: PHYSICALDRIVE. Click OK.
Click Logical Drive, then click OK. Read the warning. To continue, click Yes. Select a drive. The
drives are listed by drive letter. Click OK.
4. A job is created and the Data Processing Status window opens. Live Evidence Jobs are displayed
under Other Jobs.
5. Click Close.
Working with Live Evidence About Live Evidence | 140

Chapter 10
Filtering Data to Locate Evidence
About Filtering
Filters let you leverage item attributes to locate specific data very quickly. They reduce the amount of time that
you must examine data because they can narrow a large data set down to a very specific focus.
The Examiner includes a Filter toolbar, and a Filter Manager utility to help you work with filters. When you apply
a filter it limits the files that are displayed in the Examiner match the criteria of the filter.
See also Types of Filters (page 142)
See also What You Can Do with Filters (page 142)
Examiner’s Filter Dropdown Menu
Filtering Data to Locate Evidence About Filtering | 141

Types of Filters
The Examiner includes several different types of filters to help you to locate and to exclude specific data.
Types of Filters
Filter Type Description

Predefined Predefined filters are filters that AccessData has created. For example, there is a
Filters predefined filter called Graphic Files that limits the displayed data to graphics files only.
You cannot delete or modify a predefined filter, however you can copy them to use as
templates when you create your own custom filters.
See also Types of Predefined Filters (page 153)
Global Filters Global filters apply across the entire Examiner interface. For example, if you globally
apply the filter Checked Files, only checked files are displayed, regardless of the tab,
pane, or window that you are viewing.
See also Using Global Filters (page 145)
Tab Filters Tab filters apply only to a specific tab. For example if you apply the Checked Files filter as
a tab filter specific to the Overview tab, when you switch to the Explore tab files that are
not checked are still displayed.
See also Using Tab Filters (page 145)
Custom Filters Custom filters are filters that you create. For example if an AccessData predefined does
not meet your exact needs, you can use the Filter Manager utility to create your own
custom filter.
See also Creating a Custom Filter (page 150)
Nested Filters A nested filter is a filter that contains filters within it. Nested filters let you leverage
several filters together to accomplish a specific goal. Nested filters prevent you from
having to create a complicated custom filter each time you need to use multiple filters
together. For example, a simple nested filter could include both Graphic Files and KFF
Alert Files as filters.
See also About Nested Filters (page 150)
Compound Compound filters are created in the Filter Manager utility. In the Filter Manager you can
Filters add many filters together. You choose to include and exclude a files that meet criteria.
Compound filters let you apply boolean logic to your compound filter.
See also Using Compound Filters (page 149)
Search Filters Search filters are added to a live search or an index search. They limit a search to only
display results that match the criteria contained within the search. You can use static
search filters in conjunction with global filters to very quickly apply two levels of filtering to
your search results.
See also Using Filtering with Searches (page 148)
What You Can Do with Filters

You can use filters to quickly locate specific item types. You can also use filters to exclude data that you do not
want displayed. For example, if you only want to see encrypted items, you can apply a filter to show you those. If

you do not want to see files that were created after a certain date, you can also use a filter to exclude those files
from being displayed.
See also About Filtering (page 141)
What You Can Do with Filters
Task Description
Apply filters globally Using Global Filters (page 145)
Apply filters to specific tabs Using Tab Filters (page 145)
Apply filters in categories Using Filters with Category Containers (page 146)
Add filters to live searches Adding a Search Filter to Live Searches (page 148)
Add filters to index searches Adding a Search Filter to Index Searches (page 148)
Use filters when you create reports Using Filters with Reports (page 146)
Create, copy, and customize your own Creating a Custom Filter (page 150)
filters
Share filters between cases Sharing Custom Filters Between Cases (page 152)
Export filters Exporting Filters (page 152)
Import filters Importing Filters (page 152)

Understanding How Filters Work
Filters are composed of various components that are stored in your database.
Filter Component
Component Description
Name Filter names help you to locate a filter that you want to use.
Description Filter descriptions help you to understand what a filter is designed to accomplish.
Rule Filter rules instruct filters of the goal that you want to accomplish. Filters can have a single
rule or filters can also have multiple rules. Filter rules are the logic that help you make your
filters accomplish a specific task.
Filter rules are comprised of the following components:
Property Filter properties are the attributes that are associated with a data record. An
example of a property is File Type.
Operator Filter operators are the decision that you want to run against a property. Each
property has specific operators that are applicable to it. An example of an
operator that applies to the property “File Type” is the operator “Is Not”
Criteria Filter criteria let you define the conditions of the operator. Each operator has
specific criteria that are applicable to it. An example of criteria that applies to
the property Is Not is the criteria Word Template 2010.
Note: When working with time-based filters, the case time zone is used for date and times offsets.
Viewing the Components of Filters

You can use the Filter Manager to see how any filter is constructed.
To view the definitions of a filter

1. In the Examiner, click Filter Manager.
2. In the Filter Manager, under the Filters list, select a filter.
3. Click Define. In the Filter Definition dialog, you can see the Name, Description, and any of the Rules
that the filter uses.
Viewing Details about Attributes that Filters use

Each filter uses rules that leverage various attributes that are stored in the database. If you are unsure of what a
particular filter attribute is, you can you can view descriptions about each of these attributes. To view these
descriptions you must use the Column Settings utility.
To view details about attributes that are used by filters

1. In the Examiner, in the File List pane, click the column settings icon.
2. In the Manage Column Settings dialog, click New.
Filtering Data to Locate Evidence Understanding How Filters Work | 144

3. In the Column Settings dialog, under Available Columns, expand All Features.
4. Locate and select the attribute that you want to view details about.
5. Click Add >>.
6. In the Selected Column pane, the Name, Short Name, and Description are provided for the attribute.
7. When you are done viewing attribute descriptions, click Cancel.
Using Simple Filtering

You can accomplish the following simple tasks with filtering:
Using Global Filters (page 145)

Using Tab Filters (page 145)
Using Filters with Category Containers (page 146)
Using Filters with Category Containers (page 146)
Using Filters with Reports (page 146)
Using Global Filters

You can apply filters globally across the files in the Examiner. Each filter limits which files are displayed in the
Examiner pane according to the rules of the filter.
In the Examiner, you can keep a filter selected, and still turn it on and off.
To use a global filter

1. In the Examiner, in the upper-left menu bar, select the Filter drop-down menu.
2. In the Filter drop-down menu, locate the filter that you want to apply.
3. Click the filter.
The results that are displayed in the Examiner, are limited to show only the files that are applicable to
the filter that you select.
To turn global filters on and off

1. In the Examiner, do one of the following:
To turn a filter on or off, click the icon: that is next to the Filter drop-down menu. This leaves the
filter that you have currently selected in place but activates or deactivates it.
If you no longer want to use any global filter, in the Filter drop-down menu, click -unfiltered-.
Using Tab Filters

You can create filters that are only applicable to a specific tab. These filters only apply to the tab that you create
them in. If you have applied a tab filter its name is displayed at the bottom of the Examiner window.
Filtering Data to Locate Evidence Using Simple Filtering | 145

To use a tab filter
1. In the Examiner, click Filter > Tab Filter.
2. In the Tab Filter Selection dialog, use the drop-down menu to select the filter that you want to apply.
3. Click OK.
If you have a tab filter applied, and no longer want to use it you can turn it off.
To remove a tab filter

1. In the Examiner, click Filter > Tab Filter.
2. In the Tab Filter Selection dialog, use the drop-down menu, select the empty field in the drop-down list.
It is the first field in the drop-down menu.
3. Click OK.
How Global Filters and Tab Filters can work Together

Global filters and tab filters can be used together to further narrow down the data set that you are viewing. Using
Global filters and Tab filters together is a quick way of apply two levels of filtering without creating or defining
either a nested filter or a compound filter. For example, you can apply a global filter across all items in the case,
and then create a specific tab filter to again further refine the data set to meet a criteria.
See also Using Global Filters (page 145)
See also Using Tab Filters (page 145)
Using Filters with Category Containers

The Examiner includes a tab called the Overview tab. The Overview tab groups items into categories. There are
several different categories such as Documents, Executable files, Folders, and Graphics. You can use the
Overview tab to first select a category, and then also apply a filter.
To use filters with category containers

1. In the Examiner, click the Overview tab.
2. In the Case Overview pane, locate and then click the category that you want to focus on.
For example you could select, File Category > Documents. The File List pane would only display
document files.
3. In the Filter drop-down select a filter that you want to apply.
For example, you could select the filter Encrypted Items. The File List pane would then display only
document files that are also encrypted.
Using Filters with Reports

You can apply filters when you create your reports.

To use filters with reports
1. In the Examiner, click File > Report.
2. In the Report Options dialog, select one of the following options:
Bookmarks
Graphics
File Paths
File Properties
3. In the upper portion of the Report Options dialog, click the Filter drop-down menu and select the filter
that you want to apply.
You can apply specific filter for each of the report options.
4. After you have finished defining the report, click OK.
Viewing the Filters that you have Applied

If you see results in the File List pane that don’t match what you expect to see, it may because you inadvertently
have filters applied that you didn’t expect.
Check the following:
To see if you have a global filter applied, in the upper-left portion of the Examiner, check the Filter field to
see if a filter is applied. You can also check the filter icon to see if perhaps the filter is turned on or off.
To see if you have a tab filter applied, in the lower bar of the Examiner, check to see if a tab filter is
applied.

Using Filtering with Searches
You can apply global filters to modify the search results window. When you apply a global filter to a search, the
search results window is modified to match the criteria of the global filter. Using global filters with searches lets
you filter against a single search, without having to create a special search criteria for each filter type.
You can add search specific filters to a live search or to an index search. They limit a search to only display
results that match the criteria contained within the search. When you add a search specific filter to a search, the
search results window continues to limit the search results to apply to the filter.
You can use search filters in conjunction with global filters to very quickly apply two levels of filtering to your
search results.
See Adding a Search Filter to Live Searches (page 148)
See Adding a Search Filter to Index Searches (page 148)
Adding a Search Filter to Live Searches

You can define a live search query, and add filter to limit the search results to meet your criteria.
To use a filter with a Live Search

1. In the Examiner, click the Live Search tab.
2. Use the tools in the Live Search tab to create and define your search query.
Searching Evidence with Live Search (page 400)
3. In the Search Filter drop-down menu, select the filter that you want to apply to the search. The Search
Filter drop-down menu is located in lower portion of the search pane. This operation limits the search
results to only files that both meet the criteria of your search and the criteria of the filter.
4. In the lower-right portion of the search window, click Search.
The search query is displayed in the Live Search Results pane.
Adding a Search Filter to Index Searches

You can define an index search query, and add filters to limit the search results to meet your criteria.If you have
applied a filter, the filter’s name is displayed in the Search Results pane.
To use a filter with an Index Search

1. In the Examiner, click the Index Search tab.
2. Use the tools in the Index Search tab to create and define your search query.
Searching Evidence with Index Search (page 411)
3. Click Search Now.
4. In the Indexed Search Filter Option dialog, select Apply filter.
5. In the filter drop-down menu, select the filter that you want to use.
Filtering Data to Locate Evidence Using Filtering with Searches | 148

6. Click OK.
The search query is displayed in the Index Search Results pane. If you have added a filter to the
search, the search displays the follow string: dtSearch® Indexed Search {Prefilter:(The Filter’s Name)
Query:(The Search’s Syntax).
Using Compound Filters

Filters can be combined to more easily locate data. You can select and apply multiple filters at the same time.
Such filters are called compound filters. The Filter Manager dialog provides a display of your compound filter to
help you to visualize the resulting Include filter, or Exclude filter. You can choose AND/OR options to make your
compound filters more effective.
Compound filters are not saved. They are only combined and applied as needed. As they are applied, the File
List pane automatically displays the results of the applied filter. The filter remains applied until it is changed.
See also Applying Compound Filters (page 149)
Applying Compound Filters

Compound filters are applied in the Filter Manager.
See also Using Compound Filters (page 149)
To apply a compound filter

1. On the Filter toolbar, click Filter Manager.
2. Select a filter from the list of predefined filters to use as a template.
3. Choose from the following as needed:
Click the >> button, or drag and drop into the Include or Exclude box.
Click the << button to remove an individual item from either the Include or Exclude box.
Click Clear in either the Include or Exclude box to clear all items from that box and start over.
4. Click Apply at the bottom of the dialog. The results are displayed in the File List pane.
Filtering Data to Locate Evidence Using Compound Filters | 149

Using Custom Filters
You can create your own customized filters to meet your exact needs.
To save you the time and effort of creating filters, AccessData has created many predefined filters that you can
leverage to accomplish the majority of your filtering tasks.
For more information see Types of Predefined Filters (page 153)
Before you create a new filter, you may be able to save time by copying a preexisting filter and modifying it to
meet your specific criteria.
See also Copying Filters (page 151)
About Nested Filters

You can use the Filter Manager to create nested filters. A nested filter is a filter that contains multiple filters within
it. You can add rules to a filter that check against other filters.

For example, the following illustrates the logic of a nested filter:
An Example of Rules for a Nested Filter
Properties Operators Criteria

Filter Matches Graphics Files
Filter Does Not Match Flagged Ignorable
Filter Does Not Match KFF Ignore Files
Creating a Custom Filter

You can create your own custom filters. Filters are created from either the Filter Definition dialog or the Filter
Manager.
To create a custom filter

1. In the Examiner, click Filter > New.
2. In the Filter Definition dialog, enter Name for the filter.
3. Enter a Description that explains what the filter does.
4. In the Rules section do the following to create a rule:
4a. Select a Property from the drop-down menu.
4b. Select an Operator from the drop-down menu.
4c. Select a Criteria from the drop-down menu.
5. To add additional rules to the filter, click the + icon. To remove a rule, click the - icon.
6. If you want to turn a rule on, or turn a rule off, select the check box next to the rule.
Note: Select the checkbox at the top of the list to select all of the listed properties in the rules box at once.
Filtering Data to Locate Evidence Using Custom Filters | 150

7. In the lower portion of the Filter Definition dialog, do one of the following:
Select Match Any to force the filter to include or exclude files if they match any of the rules that you
have defined in the filter.
Select Match All to force the filter to include or exclude files only if they match all of the rules that you
have defined in the filter.
8. After you define the filter, click Live Preview to test that the filter is working as you expect. When you
click Live Preview the contents in the File List pane adjusts to match the definition of the filter.
9. Click Save.
10. Click Close.
Copying Filters
You can copy any existing filter to use as a basis to create a new filter.
See also Types of Predefined Filters (page 153)
To copy a filter
2. In the Filter Manager, under the Filters list, select a filter.
3. In the lower portion of the Filter Manager, click the icon: Create a copy of the selected filter.
4. In the Filter Definition dialog, modify the filter according to your requirements.
5. Click Save.
Editing a Custom Filter

You can edit your own custom filters. You can edit the description and rules of a custom filter.
You cannot rename a custom filter. However, you can copy a filter, give the copy a new name, and then delete
the original filter, if desired.
To edit a custom filter

1. In the Examiner, click Manage > Filters > Manage Filters.
2. In the Manage Filters dialog, select the filter that you want to edit.
3. Click Edit.
4. After editing the filter, click Save.
Filtering Data to Locate Evidence Using Custom Filters | 151

Sharing, Importing, and Exporting Filters
You can share filters between cases. You can import filters that have been created from other systems. You can
also export custom filters that you have created to use in other systems.
See the following:
Sharing Custom Filters Between Cases (page 152)

Importing Filters (page 152)
Exporting Filters (page 152)
Sharing Custom Filters Between Cases

After you create a custom filter for a case, you can share that filter to make it available to other
cases. You can also copy filters from other cases to use in your case.
To share a filter with other cases

1. In the Examiner, click Manage > Filters > Manage Filters.
2. In the Manage Filters dialog, select the custom filter that you want to share with other cases.
3. Click Copy to Shared.
4. Click Close.
To copy a Shared filter into your Case

1. In the Examiner, click Manage > Filters > Manager Shared Filters.
2. In the Manage Shared Filters dialog, select the custom filter that you want to copy to your case.
3. Click Copy to Case.
4. Click Close.
Importing Filters
You can import filters that have been saved as XML files into your system.
See also Exporting Filters (page 152)
To import filters
2. In the Filter Manager dialog, click the Import a filter from a xml file icon.
3. In the Open dialog, browse to the location where the filter XML file is stored. Select the filter and click
Open.
4. In the Filter Import dialog, click OK.
Exporting Filters
You can export filters into XML files to use in other systems.
See also Importing Filters (page 152)
Filtering Data to Locate Evidence Sharing, Importing, and Exporting Filters | 152
To export filters
2. In the Filter Manager dialog, select the filter that you want to export.
3. Click the Export selected filter to a xml file icon.

4. In the Save As dialog, browse to the destination location where you want to save the exported filter file
5. Click Save.
6. In the Export Filter dialog, click OK.
Types of Predefined Filters

The Examiner includes several predefined filters that you can use for common filtering tasks. If these filters do
not quite meet the criteria that you require, you can create a copy of these to create your own custom filters
See also Copying Filters (page 151)
Predefined Filters
Predefined Filter Description

Actual Files Shows the actual files, as opposed to All Files. All Files is the default and includes
metadata, OLE files, and alternate data stream files.
Alternate Data Shows files with alternate data streams (additional data associated with a file
Streams object).
Archive Files Shows only archive-type file items, such as ZIP and THUMBS.DB.
Bad Extension Files Shows only the files with extensions that don’t match the file header.
Bookmarked Shows only the items that are contained in a bookmark.
Carved Files Shows only the items that have been carved.
Checked Files Shows only the items that you have selected with a check mark.
Decrypted Files Shows only the items that have been decrypted by AccessData tools within the
case. This indicates that AccessData decryption tools have had control of this file
and its decryption since it was added to the case in its original encrypted form.
Deleted Files Shows only those items that have the deleted status.
Duplicate Files Shows only files that have duplicates in the case. This filter requires that you select
the Flag Duplicate Files processing option.
eDiscovery Duplicates A filter for eDiscovery duplicates.
eDiscovery Includes files and folders that are not useful for most eDiscovery cases.
Refinement
Email Attachments Shows all email items that are not email messages.
Email Delivery Time Allows definition of specific date/time range of email deliveries.
Filtering Data to Locate Evidence Types of Predefined Filters | 153

Predefined Filters (Continued)

Email Files Shows only those items that have the email status.
Email Files and Shows all email items, both messages and attachments.
Attachments
Encrypted Files Shows only those items flagged as EFS files or other encrypted files.
Evidence Items Shows all evidence items added to the case.
Excluded eDiscovery Excludes files and folders that are not useful for most eDiscovery cases
Refinement
Explicit Images Folder Shows folders with EID scores of 60 or higher using FST or ZFN (high) criteria.
(High Score)
Explicit Images Folder Shows folders with EID scores of 40 or higher using FST or ZFN (medium) criteria.
(Medium Score)
File Category Allows user to set a filter by file category (is a member of). Relates to File Category
tree under Overview tab.
File Created Time Allows definition of specific date/time range of file creation.
File Extension Allows filtering of files by a defined extension or set of extensions.
File Modified Time Allows definition of specific date/time range of file modification.
Files with Alternate Shows files that contain Alternate Data Streams (additional data associated with a
Data Streams file system object).
Flagged Ignorable Shows only those items you have identified as Ignorable.
Flagged Privileged Shows only those items you have identified as Privileged.
Folders Shows only folder items.
From Free Space Shows only those items found in (carved from) free space.
From Recycle Bin Shows only those items taken from the recycle bin.
Graphic Files Shows only those items that have been identified as graphics.
Indexed Shows items that have been indexed.
Is Forwarded Shows any email item that has been forwarded.
Is Reply Shows any email item that is a reply to another email.
KFF Alert Files Shows all files with KFF Alert status that are in a case.
KFF Ignore Files Shows all files with KFF Ignore status that are in a case.
Labeled Files Shows files that have a Label assigned to them.
Microsoft Office Files Shows Word, Access, PowerPoint, and Excel files.
Mobile Phone: Shows calendar information acquired from a mobile phone.

Calendar


Mobile Phone: Call Shows call information acquired from a mobile phone.
History
Mobile Phone: Shows message information acquired from a mobile phone

Messages
Mobile Phone: Shows contact information acquired from a mobile phone.

Phonebook
Mobile Phone Files Shows files and data from mobile devices added to the case using AccessData
Mobile Phone Examiner.
MS Office 2007/2010 Includes MS Office 2007/2010 Subfolders and Subfolders.

Unimportant Subitems
No Deleted Shows all except deleted items.
No Duplicate Shows only one instance of every item in the case.
No Email Related Shows files that are not Email related files.
Files or Attachments
No File Slack Shows all except files found in (carved from) file slack.
No Files with Shows only files that have no duplicates in the case.
Duplicates
No KFF Ignore Files Shows all items except KFF ignore files.
No KFF Ignore or OLE Shows all items except KFF ignore files or OLE subitems.
Subitems
No KFF Ignore or OLE Shows all items except KFF ignore files, OLE subitems, or duplicate items.
Subitems or
Duplicates
No MS Office 2007/ Excludes unimportant files and folders contained in MS Office 2007/2010 OPC files
2010 Unimportant (DOCX, XLSX PPTX etc)
Subitems
No OLE Subitems Shows all items except OLE subitems.
No Unimportant OLE Shows all items including OLE subitems, except that unimportant OLE data
Data Streams streams are not shown.
Not Flagged Ignorable Shows all items except those you indicated Ignorable.
Not Flagged Privileged Shows all items except those you flagged Privileged.
NSF Notes Shows Emails, views, and other notes from Lotus Notes NSF databases.
OCR Extractions Shows files that were extracted from graphics with OCR.
OCR Graphics Graphic files that have been parsed by the OCR engine.
OLE Subitems Shows only OLE archive items and archive contents.
Reclassified Files Shows only those items whose classification you have changed.


Registry Files Shows Windows 9x, NT, and NTFS registry files.
Subfilter for EID FST This is a subfilter that is used by the explicit images folder (high score) filter.
OR ZFN (high)
Subfilter for EID FST This is a subfilter that is used by the explicit images folder (medium score) filter.
OR ZFN (medium)
Thumbs.db Files Shows Thumbs.db files.
Unchecked Files Shows only those items that you have not checked.
Unimportant OLE Shows only Unimportant OLE Stream Categories.

Stream Categories
Unimportant OLE Shows only Unimportant OLE Streams.

Streams
User-decrypted Files Shows only those items that you have decrypted and added to the case. Decrypted
by User status is always applied to files added using the Add Decrypted Files
feature. The Examiner cannot confirm validity, content, or origin of such files.
Video Conversion or Shows only generated video thumbnails or common video files.
Thumbnails See Examining Videos on page 333.
Video Thumbnails Shows only generated video thumbnails.

See Generating Thumbnails for Video Files on page 334.
Video Conversion Shows only generated video common video files.

See Creating Common Video Files on page 335.
Web Artifacts Shows HTML, Index.dat, and empty Index.dat files.

Filtering Data Prior to Review
It is possible to create and apply a data filter before reviewing evidence. This allows users to filter out
unnecessary items, items not included in a warrant, or other data they wish to exclude from their evidence
review. This shortens the amount of time spent processing and allows users to get into a case faster than if the
full data set were processed.
Items can be filtered out based on File Type, File Size, and Date.
To apply filter sets before evidence processing

1. When creating a new case, select the Customize button in the New Case Options dialog.
2. Select the Evidence Refinement (Advanced) option from the left hand menu.
3. On the Refine by File Status/Type tab, in the Exclude by Category section, select the parameters you
desire. Click OK.
When the case opens, the items you have excluded will not be in the data set.
Note: It is not possible to alter this particular refinement option from within the case.
Filtering Data to Locate Evidence Filtering Data Prior to Review | 157

Using the Persons of Interest Filter
Users can now scrape contact information from signatures in emails. Once a profile is created for the person of
interest, investigators can use filters to search for data within the evidence. This allows investigators to pull
contact information from disparate sets of evidence (laptop, mobile phone, email account) and connect
information found in all items to one suspect. For example, investigators can pull contact information from an
email signature, then filter based on the mobile phone number found there to connect phone calls, chats, or
SMS communications to the same person of interest.
Visualization can be used once the People Finder filter has been applied for a visual picture of how the data
relate.
Note: Persons of Interest Filters cannot be edited in the Filter Manager. They must be edited within the Persons
of Interest windows.
To Process Data for Use with the Persons of Interest Filter:

1. In the Evidence Processing window, check the box next to the Persons of Interest option.
2. Click on the Persons of Interest Options box and select the Scrape email signatures option.
If you would like to create your list of communication participants before the case is created, you may do
so by clicking the Persons of Interest button within this window. But the data will not populate until after
the evidence has been processed.
3. Click Ok and process the evidence.
Creating a List of Communication Participants

You must first add people to the Communication Participants list before you can create and run a filter.
To Add a Person Manually:

1. Open the Persons of Interest filter by clicking on the sillhouette icon in the menu bar. The
Communication Participants window will open.
2. Click on the green plus icon at the bottom of the window. The Add/Edit Person window will open.
3. Type the desired name in the Display Name field.
4. Click Ok. The person will appear in the Communication Participants list.
To Edit a Person:
2. Click the Edit button.
3. Add or edit data as desired.
4. Click Ok.
To Delete a Person:
1. Select a name in the Communication Participants list.
2. Click on the red minus icon at the bottom of the window. A warning will appear asking if you are sure
you want to delete the selected name.
3. Click Yes. The name will be deleted.
Filtering Data to Locate Evidence Using the Persons of Interest Filter | 158
Creating a Rule within People Finder
To Create a Rule Manually within the Persons of Interest Filter:
2. Select or add a Display Name for your rule.
3. In the Add/Edit Person window, click the small plus icon in the left pane.
4. Select a Type in the dropdown menu.
5. Add an email or phone number to the Data field.
6. Click Ok.
Searching for Data within People Finder

To Add a Person Using Search:
2. Click on the green plus icon at the bottom of the window. The Add/Edit Person window will open.
3. Type the desired name in the Find Person field.
4. Click Search. The data will populate in the panel in grid form. These results will list everything that
includes the search term in the email signature.
5. Select your desired email result. The data found in that email will be shown in list format underneath the
results grid.
6. Select the data you want to include by checking the associated box and click the Import button.
A filter rule (or rules) will be created for each selected item. It is also possible to add additional rules
manually at this point.
7. Click Ok in the Filter Rule List pane. The person related to the selected data will be added to your
Communication Participants list, along with all of their associated rules.
Creating a Communication Filter within People Finder

Once you have found the people, phone numbers, and email addresses you are searching for, you can create a
filter to show all communications between specific persons of interest. Once created, the filter will appear in the
Filter dropdown list and can be applied at any time.
To Create a Communication Filter:

1. Select one or more persons from the Communication Participants list.
Select one participant if you want to see all of their communications.
Select two or more participants to see how they communicate with each other.
2. Click Create Filter.
3. In the Create Communication Filter window, select the communication types to use in your filter.
4. Click Ok. A window will appear letting you know the filter was created, the name of the new filter, and
asking if you would like to apply it to the current view.
5. Select Yes or No, then click Close.
If you select Yes, the Examiner will show all communications that fit the applied filter.
If you select No, you may apply the filter at any time using the Filter dropdown box in the Menu Bar.
Note: A yellow background will appear when a filter has been applied. This serves as a visual reminder that a
filter is in effect.
To Edit a Person of Interest Communication Filter:

2. Select the same people that are included in the filter you wish to edit and click the Edit button.
3. Add or edit data as desired.
4. Click Ok.
Fields Searched when using Persons of Interest

Persons of Interest filters use an OR operator between the entries in accounts (phone numbers), and an AND
operator between the people. The filter will only look for phone numbers specified for the listed people.
Email
The following fields are used to search for email addresses:
 To  From
 CC  BCC
Chapter 11
Working with Labels
Labels let you group files in the way that makes the most sense to you. Initially, there are no default labels. All
are customized. Labels you create are saved locally and you have complete control over them within your case.
However, labels can be created and shared to the database for use by all who have been granted access to do
so.
What You Can Do With Labels (page 161)

Creating a Label (page 162)
Applying a Label (page 162)
Managing Labels (page 163)
Managing Label Groups (page 164)
What You Can Do With Labels

You can use labels to do the following
Create bookmarks that contain only files with the labels that you specify.
Apply labels according to common criteria, such as the following:
All Highlighted
All Checked
All Listed
Extend labels to associated (family) files; i.e., a label applied to a child file can also be easily applied
to its parent. Thus, labels applied to a parent file can easily be applied to all of its children.
Customize a column template to contain a labels column and sort on that column to view all of your case
files according to the labels that are applied to them.
Apply multiple labels to a single file.
Multiple local labels can be selected and shared in one operation.
Create group labels according to specific criteria.
View labels in the Overview tab by the labels category and see all files with labels applied in the File List
view.
Share labels you create with the database to make them available for other cases, according to user
permissions.
Shared labels do not affect existing local labels.
Working with Labels What You Can Do With Labels | 161

Once a label is shared, it is managed by either the Application Administrator, or the Case
Administrator.
Shared labels can be pushed to cases, and can be saved (exported) and then added (imported) into
other databases.
Only Application Administrators can delete, import, or export Shared labels.
 Shared labels, once pushed to a case, become local, and are fully managed by the Case
Administrator.
Administrators can specify which shared labels are visible to which users.
Case Administrators can change local labels and re-share them. If there is a duplicate name, you are
given the choice to rename or cancel the operation.
Case Administrators can update Shared labels from the database to their cases.
Case Reviewers do not have permissions to Share local labels.
Creating a Label
You can use the File List view to create a new label.
To create a label
1. In the File List view, click Create Labels.
2. Click Manage Local. The Manage Labels dialog opens.
3. Click New. A text entry box opens on the first available line.
4. Enter a name for the label, and press enter. The label is saved with the default color; black.
5. Click Change Color. The Color dialog opens. You can use any color from the default palette, or click
Define Custom Colors to create a unique color for this label. Use the cross-hairs and the slide to
create the color you want, then click Add to Custom Colors, then select the custom color from the
Custom colors palette.
6. Click OK. The Manage Labels dialog reopens. You can see your new label listed with the color you
defined or selected.
7. Click Close.
8. Click OK.
Applying a Label
You can apply a label to a file or group of files to make them easy to locate.
To apply a label
1. In the File List view, highlight, check, or select the files you want to apply a label to.
2. Click the Apply Label To drop-down.
3. Choose whether to apply the label that you will select to Highlighted, Checked, or Listed files.
4. Click the Apply This Label drop-down and click on the label to apply to the selected files.
The name of the label is displayed in that label’s color.
Working with Labels Creating a Label | 162

Managing Labels
When you click the Labels button on the File List toolbar, and the Labels dialog opens, you see four buttons
across the bottom.
The two buttons open separate dialogs that appear very much alike.
Aside from the different list of labels you may see, the only other difference you will see is the button that in
Manage (Local) Labels says Make Shared, and in the Manage Shared Labels says Copy to Case.
Managing (Local) Labels and Managing Shared Labels Dialog Options
Button Description
New Click New to create another label.
Rename Click Rename to change the name of any label you select.
Change Color Click Change Color to select a different color for any label you select.
Delete Click Delete to remove a label from the case. Deleting a label removes all instances
of the label’s application. The files remain, but the label itself is gone.
Import Click Import to bring a label definition into your list from another source.
Export Click Export to save a selected label definition for use in a different case.
Make Shared Click Make Shared (from Manage (Local) labels) to Share a label definition to the
database for others to use.
Copy to Case Click Copy to Case (from Manage Shared labels) to copy a global label to a case that
was created before that label was available.
Group Click Group to create a labels Group that can be used locally or Shared to the
database for others to use according to their permissions.
Working with Labels Managing Labels | 163

Managing Label Groups
Label groups are created by selecting labels that are shown in the Label Groups pane. Selection is done by a
toggle method: click once to select, click again to deselect.
To create a new label Group

1. In the Manage Label Groups dialog, click New.
2. Provide a name for the new group.
3. Click OK.
Select any or all of the Groups to create new Groups. However, to add individual labels to groups, work in the
Group Definition area, where there are two windows. On the left is Labels Available to Add to Group, and on the
right is Labels in Current Group.
You must create a label before you can add it to the group. If the label you need is not listed in the Group
Definition area, click Close. In the Manage Labels dialog, click New and create a label.
To add a label to a group

1. In the Label Groups window, select the group you want to add labels to.
2. Select a label in the left window and click the >> button to move it into the right window.
3. Repeat until the labels in the Current Group list are how you want.
4. Changes are saved as they are made. When you are finished adding labels to the group, click Close.
To remove a label from a Group

1. In the Manage Label Groups dialog, from the Labels in Current Group pane, highlight the label to be
removed.
2. Click the << button to move the label back to the Labels Available to Add pane.
Working with Labels Managing Label Groups | 164

Chapter 12
Decrypting Files
About Decrypting Files

If you have the correct credentials, you can decrypt many types of encrypted files in your cases.
Note: If you do not know the passwords for encrypted files, you can use tools to try to recover the password.
See Recovering Unknown Passwords of Encrypted Files on page 172.

When files are decrypted, the original encrypted files are maintained and a child object is created for the
decrypted file. This results in two files that affects your file counts: one for the original file and one for the
decrypted file.
The following tables list the methods you can use to decrypt files and the type of encrypted files that are
supported
Decryption Methods
Encryption Type Description

Automatic Decryption AccessData Password Recovery Toolkit has been integrated so that you can
decrypt several types of encrypted files. This integration is included and you
do not need to have PRTK or DNA installed.
For more information, see Decrypting Files Using the Automatic Decryption
Processing Option (page 170)
Tools > Decrypt Files From the Examiner interface, you can use the Decrypt Files option to decrypt
one or more files.
See Decrypting Files Using the Automatic Decryption Processing Option on
page 170.
See Decrypting EFS on page 174.
See Decrypting Lotus Notes Files on page 177.
See Decrypting S/MIME Files on page 177.
See Decrypting Dropbox DBX Files on page 176.
Decrypting Dell Encryption You can configure Dell Encryption decryption either at the global application
files level or at the case level.
See Decrypting Dell Encryption Files (Dell Data Protection | Encryption
Server) (page 178)
Decrypting Files About Decrypting Files | 165

Decryption Methods

When adding an encrypted When you add an image as evidence, if the image is encrypted with one of
image as evidence the supported types of encryption, it is automatically detected and you are
prompted to enter the credentials.
The following table provides a list of the supported types that can be decrypted and the method used:
Files that can be Decrypted

 ABICoder Use the Automatic Decryption feature to decrypt these types of files.
 AdvancedFileLock See Decrypting Files Using the Automatic Decryption Processing
 Apple DMG Option (page 170)
 AShampoo
 BCArchive
If you do not know the passwords for these encrypted files, you can
 BCTextEncoder
use tools to try to recover passwords.
 BestCrypt
 CryptoForge See Recovering Unknown Passwords of Encrypted Files on page 172.
 Cypherus Note: When decrypting TrueCrypt files, it is decrypted as a filesystem
 iOS backup files image. You are not able to drill down into the image. As a
workaround, export the decrypted file and re-add it as additional
 Microsoft Office files evidence.
 OpenOffice Note: While BestCrypt BCArchive and BCTextEncoder are supported,
 PDF BestCrypt encrypted volumes are not supported.
 PGP password file
 RAR
 StuffIt
 TrueCrypt
 WinZip adv.encryption
 YAFFS (1 and 2)
 ZIP
 7-Zip
 Windows Rights Management You can decrypt DRM files at the case level.
(RMS) for Microsoft Office files
and Outlook email files See Decrypting Microsoft Office Digital Rights Management (DRM)
Protected Files (page 175)
 Dell Encryption You can configure Dell Encryption decryption either at the global
application level or at the case level.
See Decrypting Dell Encryption Files (Dell Data Protection |
Encryption Server) (page 178)
 Dropbox After initial evidence processing, you can use the Decrypt Files tool.
 Lotus Notes (whole NSF) See Decrypting Dropbox DBX Files on page 176.
 Lotus Notes (notes/email)
See Decrypting Other Encryption Types on page 174.
 Microsoft EFS, Office
See Decrypting Lotus Notes Files on page 177.
 S/MIME PKCS7
See Decrypting S/MIME Files on page 177.

Files that can be Decrypted

 Bitlocker (Windows Vista, 7, 8) When you add an image as evidence, if the image is encrypted with
 Checkpoint/PointSec R73 7.4.5 one of these types of encryption, it is automatically detected and you
 Checkpoint 7.6.150 with token are prompted to enter the credentials.
challenge See the following for more information:
 McAfee Endpoint Encryption
(formerly Safeboot) 5.x and 6.0  Decrypting Bitlocker Partitions (page 180)
 Safeguard Easy 4.40.9 and  Decrypting Safeguard Utimaco Files (page 181)
Enterprise 5.40 and 5.50  Decrypting SafeBoot Files (page 183)
 SecureDoc WinMagic AES:  Decrypting Guardian Edge Files (page 183)
Secure Doc Enterprise  Decrypting an Image Encrypted With PGP® WDE (page 183)
Server Version 8.2
Standalone Installer Version
7.5
 Symantec Endpoint Encryption
(formerly Guardian Edge)
8.1.1, 9.1.6, 9.3.0, 9.4.1, 9.5.3,
SEE version 8.0.1
 Symantec Drive Encryption
(PGP WDE) 10.0 (only)
About the Encrypted File Passwords List

When you encrypt individual files, you create a list of passwords to use to try to decrypt the files. You configure a
password list for each case.
When you enter passwords into the list, you can type them or paste them from a text file. Each password must
be on its own line.
You can add passwords to the list at any time. The password list is saved with the case. The passwords are
present any other time that you access the list in that case.
When compiling a list of passwords, you can use the following sources:
Passwordsthat were recovered using AccessData PRTK or DNA
Passwords that you have learned about as part of an investigation
Lists of known commonly used passwords

Identifying the Encrypted Files in a Case
After you have added evidence to a case, you can identify which files are encrypted. In the Examiner interface,
you can use the Overview tab or apply the Encrypted Files filter.
To view the encrypted files in a case

1. Open the Examiner.
To use the Overview tab, do the following:
2a. Click the Overview tab.
2b. Expand File Status.
2c. Click Encrypted Files
To use a filter, do the following:
2a. Click the QuickPick icon for Evidence to view all or some of the of the evidence in the case.
2b. Using the Filters drop-down menu, select Encrypted Files.
In the File List, all decrypted files will be displayed.
After decrypting files, you can see which files have been decrypted.
Note: In the File List, all decrypted files will be displayed in text. Several decryption key files are identified and
categorized for ease of use. Find them in the Overview tab under File Category > Other Encryption
Files > Certificates. Having these files identified and available makes it easier to quickly access files that
may have been unavailable before.
Decrypting Files Identifying the Encrypted Files in a Case | 169

Using PRTK/DNA Integration
Decrypting Files Using the Automatic Decryption Processing Option

You can decrypt many types of encrypted files using Automatic Decryption, which uses code from AccessData
Password Recovery Toolkit (PRTK).

To decrypt files, you supply a list of passwords. When the decrypted files are processed, those passwords are
used to try to decrypt the files. If the passwords match, the files are decrypted.
You can configure and use this feature at any of the following times:
As a processing option when doing one of the following:
Creating a case and configuring the default processing options for the case
You can enable Automatic Decryption to be a default processing option for a case. As a default
option, every time that you add evidence to the case, the default setting will be to try to decrypt files
using the passwords that you provide. You can add passwords to the list at any time. This option is
not enabled by default and will add time to the evidence processing.
Adding evidence to a case and configuring the refinement options for processing
Any time that you add evidence to a case, you can configure the refinement options to enable file
decryption using Automatic Description. Each time you enable decryption, you can modify that
password list as needed.
After the evidence has been processed and using Additional Analysis
Any time that you perform Additional Analysis, you can configure the refinement options to enable file
decryption using Automatic Decryption. Each time you enable decryption, you can modify that
password list as needed.
After the evidence has been processed, from the Examiner interface using Tools > Decrypt files
The following encrypted file types cannot be decrypted using the Perform Automatic Decryption option during
processing:
EFS, Lotus Notes (whole), Lotus Notes/emails, SMIME, and Dell Encryption
Instead, you must use the Tools > Decrypt Files option in the Examiner.
To configure Automatic Decryption as a processing option

1. Access the Processing Options for either a new case, new evidence or for performing Additional
Analysis.
2. On the options page, check Perform Automatic Decryption.
3. Click Passwords.
4. Enter the passwords that you want to use.
See About the Encrypted File Passwords List on page 167.
5. Click OK.
To perform Automatic Decryption from the Decrypt Files page

1. In a case, click Tools > Decrypt Files.
2. In the Decrypt Files dialog, check Perform Automatic Decryption.
3. Click Passwords.
Decrypting Files Using PRTK/DNA Integration | 170

4. Enter the passwords that you want to use.
5. Select Attempt Blank Password to decrypt files with no password, or whose password is blank.
6. Click OK.
7. Click Decrypt.
A processing job is started to decrypt files.
When using PRTK/DNA integration or recover a password, a dialog is displayed showing the progress
of the recovery job. When a password has been recovered, the status in the dialog will turn green and it
will display “A password has been recovered. Attempting to decrypt the file.”
Note: You may briefly see a progress dialog appear. The dialog is not applicable to this data and will
disappear quickly.
8. If needed, you can cancel the decryption process.

After decrypting files, you can see which files have been decrypted.
Decrypting Files Using Right-Click Auto Decryption

The integration with PRTK/DNA includes an Auto Decrypt option. You can use a right-click option on an
encrypted file in the File List and it will send the file to PRTK/DNA for password recovery. If the password is
found, it will be returned automatically to the FTK interface, which will begin the FTK decryption process.
To perform auto-decryption, you must have PRTK or DNA 7.3 or higher installed on the same computer as the
Examiner.
To auto decrypt files

1. In the Examiner, use the Quick Filters to select Encrypted Files.
2. Right-click an encrypted file and select Auto Decrypt.
A password recovery job is then started in PRTK/DNA.
The Data Processing Status dialog shows the process of the job.
You can view the status in the PRTK/DNA UI as well.
When the job is completed, the status displays the following message:
“The password has been recovered; attempting to decrypt the file.”
3. In the Examiner, use the Quick Filters to select Decrypted Files.
If the file was decrypted, it will show in the File List.
Decrypting Files Using PRTK/DNA Integration | 171

Recovering Unknown Passwords of Encrypted Files
You may find encrypted files with unknown passwords in your case.
See Identifying the Encrypted Files in a Case on page 169.
If you have a license, you can use AccessData Password Recovery Toolkit (PRTK) or Distributed Network Attack
(DNA) to attempt to recover passwords for encrypted files. You can use PRTK or DNA in the following ways:
As a stand-alone product

As an integrated tool with the Examiner
About Recovering Passwords using the PRTK/DNA Integrated Tool

with Examiner
Using PRTK/DNA integration, you can easily send encrypted files to PRTK/DNA to attempt to recover unknown
passwords. These passwords can then be used with the decryption tools to decrypt the encrypted files.

In order to use this PRTK/DNA integrated tool to recover passwords, you must install version 7.2 or higher of
PRTK or the DNA host on the same computer as the Examiner. (You cannot install both PRTK and DNA on the
same computer.
Important: When an item is sent to PRTK/DNA for automatic decryption, a dictionary is automatically generated
based on the case’s wordlist in FTK. This dictionary is used “As Is” in conjunction with the English
dictionaries and “PRTK” profile to attempt password recovery on the selected item.
For details about PRTK/DNA, see the PRTK/DNA User Guide.
As a workflow, you can do the following:
Identifyencrypted files in your case.

Using the Examiner, select and send encrypted files to PRTK/DNA.
A password recovery job is started in PRTK/DNA for each file that you send.
Important: PRTK is a resource-intensive application. If you send more than 3 files at a time, you may
significantly reduce the resources available to the Examiner. Because DNA uses distributed
jobs, you can send more files without impacting the Examiner.
You view the PRTK/DNA interface to view the status and results of the password recovery jobs.
After jobs have been run in PRTK/DNA, you can use PRTK/DNA to copy all of the recovered passwords
to the clipboard.
See Copying Recovered Passwords From PRTK/DNA to the Windows Clipboard on page 173.
You can then use the list of passwords with the decryption tools to decrypt the encrypted files.
Recovering Passwords using the PRTK/DNA Integrated Tool

You can attempt to recovery unknown passwords for encrypted files in your case.
Decrypting Files Recovering Unknown Passwords of Encrypted Files | 172

To Recover Passwords using the PRTK/DNA Integrated Tool with Examiner
1. Use the Examiner to identify encrypted files.
2. In the File List, select the files that you want to sent to PRTK/DNA.
3. Click Tools > Send to PRTK/DNA for password recovery...
If this option is not active, then PRTK or DNA is not installed on the same computer as the Examiner.
4. In the Send Files to PRTK/DNA dialog, confirm the file or files that you want to send.
The dialog will display if PRTK or DNA is installed on the computer and will be used.
5. Click OK.
6. Use the PRTK/DNA interface to view job status and results.
7. Copy the list of recovered passwords to use to decrypt files.
Copying Recovered Passwords From PRTK/DNA to the Windows Clipboard

You can copy the list of recovered passwords to the Windows clipboard. This can be useful is creating a list of
known passwords for other uses. For example, if you are using AccessData Forensics Toolkit (FTK), you can
use this list to decrypt files in in your FTK cases.
The passwords are copied in text format, one password per line.
To copy recovered passwords to the clipboard

1. Complete at least one password recovery job.
2. In the toolbar, click the icon.

The passwords are copied to the Windows clipboard.
3. Open a text editor and paste the list in the file.
4. Copy the list into the Passwords list.
Decrypting Files Recovering Unknown Passwords of Encrypted Files | 173

Decrypting Other Encryption Types
Decrypting EFS
Understanding EFS
Versions of Windows developed for business environments from Windows 2000 onwards include the ability to
encrypt files and folders. This feature is known as Encrypting File System (EFS). It is not supported in Windows
XP Home Edition.
EFS files, as well as Microsoft® Office, and Lotus® Notes (NSF) files and folders can be decrypted. To do so,
the password must already be known.
In Windows, EFS-encrypted files or folders can be viewed only by the user who encrypted them or by the user
who is the authorized Recovery Agent. When the user logs in, encrypted files and folders are decrypted and the
files are automatically displayed.
Note: There are certain files that cannot be encrypted, including system files; NTFS compressed files, and files
in the [drive]:\[Windows_System_Root] and its subdirectories.
Important: When a user marks an encrypted file as privileged and that file is later decrypted, all associated data
with the newly decrypted file are able to be found in an index search as hits. When a user attempts to
view the hits in a different list, an error is displayed that the path is invalid.
Decrypting EFS Files and Folders

To find EFS passwords, export encrypted files and add them as jobs in PRTK or DNA. When passwords are
found, you are ready to decrypt the encrypted files.
Requirements
Different versions of Windows OS have different requirements for decrypting EFS.
Windows 2000 and XP Systems Prior to SP1

EFS files on Windows 2000 prior to Service Pack 4 and Windows XP systems prior to Service Pack 1 are
automatically decrypted. Simply select the Decrypt EFS Files option when adding evidence to a case and
PRTK technology decrypts the EFS files.
Windows XP SP1 or Later

For systems running Windows XP Service Pack 1 or later, or Windows 2000 Service Pack 4 or later, the user’s
or the Recovery Agent’s password is needed before the EFS files can be decrypted.
Decrypting Files Decrypting Other Encryption Types | 174

Decrypting EFS
To decrypt EFS
2. In the Decrypt Files dialog, if EFS had been detected in your evidence, the EFS option will be active.
3. Select the EFS.
4. In the Decrypt Files dialog, click Set Passwords.
5. Enter the password.
6. Select Attempt Blank Password to decrypt files with no password, or whose password is blank.
Note: EFS encrypted files in the case are automatically detected. Decrypt File Types will automatically
be marked according to the file types found. Unselect any file types that you do not want to
decrypt.
7. Choose one of the following:

Click Decrypt to begin the decryption process.
Click Cancel to abandon the decryption and return to the case.
Note: The Decrypt button is disabled until at least one password is entered, or until Attempt Blank
Password is marked.
8. When decryption is complete, click Cancel to return to the case.
Decrypting Microsoft Office Digital Rights Management (DRM)

Protected Files
If your organization uses Windows Rights Management (RMS) to protect your Microsoft Office files, you can use
the Examiner to decrypt them. If you are investigating Microsoft Office files from within your organization, this
saves you time by decrypting and indexing DRM protected files in batch. By using this feature you no longer
have to first export each document and then decrypt them individually with the RMS server.
Important: This feature only applies to files that are DRM protected from within your Domain. You cannot use
this feature to decrypt files that are protected by other organization's RMS systems.
To decrypt DRM protected files, the following prerequisites must exist:
Your Examiner computer and the Microsoft RMS server must be in the same domain.
The Examiner computer must be able to authenticate with the RMS server. The machine activation
happen when you first attempt to open or to protect a document for the first time.
You must be logged into the Examiner computer with a Domain account that has Super User access to
the Microsoft RMS server.
To Decrypt DRM Protected Office Files

1. In the Examiner, click Tools > Decrypt Files.
2. Click Decrypt.
3. Enter your RMS credentials.

Decrypting Dropbox DBX Files
Dropbox is a cloud-based storage system that can be configured to retain some files on your personal computer
and sync whenever you connect to the Internet. Full contents of the Dropbox cannot be recovered at this time;
however, you can decrypt dropbox database (DBX) files in order to view database contents and artifacts.
Viewable data can include, but is not limited to:
Host_id
User display name

List of files found in the Dropbox folder
List of files deleted from the Dropbox folder, if any
Email associated with the Dropbox account
Path to where Dropbox resides on the imaged machine
To decrypt a Dropbox DBX file

1. Process the encrypted Dropbox DBX file as evidence.
2. When processing is complete, click Tools > Decrypt Files.
3. Enter the password for the Dropbox file.
Note: Dropbox DBX files can only be decrypted if you have the password.
4. Click Save Password.

5. Click Decrypt.
To locate Dropbox account data

1. Decrypt the Dropbox DBX files.
2. In the Explore tab, expand the config.dbx database file.
3. Expand the tables folder.
4. Select the config folder.
5. Select the rows... item in the File List pane
The data will populate in the File Content pane.
To locate Dropbox file lists

2. In the Explore tab, expand the filecache.dbx database file.
4. Select the file_journal folder.
5. Select an item in the File List pane.
To locate deleted Dropbox file lists, if available

2. In the Explore tab, expand the filecache.dbx database file.
4. Select the deleted_fileids folder.

5. Select an item in the File List pane.
Important: Be sure the Quick Picks arrow is not highlighted when performing the above tasks. This will make it
so only the files within the specific folder you have selected appear in the File List pane.
Decrypting Lotus Notes Files

Lotus Notes stores files in a container called an NSF file. Both the NSF container file and the individual files and
emails within the NSF file can be encrypted. To decrypt Lotus Notes files, you may need to first decrypt the NSF
container file, and then decrypt its contents.
When an NSF file is created, Lotus Notes also creates a user.id file. Lotus Notes uses the user.id file to identify
the user. You must have the user.id file to decrypt the NSF container file and to decrypt its contents.
Lotus Notes versions 7 through 8.5, including NSF and ODS formats 48 and 51 are supported.
To decrypt a Lotus Notes NSF file

1. Process the encrypted NSF file and its corresponding user.id file as evidence in the same case.
When an NSF file is created, the user.id file is created at the same time. You need both files.
3. Enter the password to the user.id file.
Note: Some files do not have a password applied. In these cases, you should click Attempt Blank
Password.

5. Enable Lotus Notes (whole NSF).
6. Click Decrypt.
To decrypt Lotus Notes and emails

1. Process the encrypted notes and emails and the corresponding user.id file as evidence in the same
case.
3. Enter the password to the user.id file
Note: Some files do not have a password applied. In these cases, you should click Attempt Blank
Password.

5. Enable Lotus Notes (notes/emails).
6. Click Decrypt.
Decrypting S/MIME Files

You can decrypt RSA standard PKCS7 S/MIME email items. This includes MBOX, DBX, RFC822, and some
PST/EDB archives. You cannot decrypt PGP encrypted emails, Lotus Notes proprietary encryption, and items
with S/MIME signatures — only the S/MIME encryption.

The Key files are PFX and PEM. The Key files are flagged and kept track of during processing in the same way
as EFS and NSF key files.
To decrypt S/MIME
2. In the Decrypt Files dialog, click Set Passwords.
4. Mark Attempt Blank Password to decrypt files with no password, or whose password is blank.
Note: S/MIME encrypted files in the case are automatically detected. Decrypt File Types will
automatically be marked according to the file types found. Unselect any file types you wish not to
decrypt.
5. Click Decrypt to begin the decryption process,
Note: The Decrypt button is disabled until at least one password is entered, or until Attempt Blank
Password is marked.
6. When decryption is complete, click OK to return to the case.
Decrypting Dell Encryption Files (Dell Data Protection | Encryption

Server)
Dell Encryption is file-based and works much like EFS. The Dell Encryption Decryption option in the tools menu
is unavailable unless the image contains Dell Encryption.
Dell Encryption version 7.7 is supported in both online and offline key bundle modes.
The integration allows two options for decryption: offline, and online. For a key bundle located on the user’s local
machine or network, use the offline option. For a key bundle located on a remote server within your network, use
the online option.
The first time a user decrypts Dell Encryption files and provides the Dell Encryption server credentials, that
information is encrypted and stored in the database. Later, if that user needs to decrypt Dell Encryption files in
that or another case, the credentials field populates automatically.
The credentials are stored separately for each user, so while one user may have the credentials stored, others
may not until the others have processed a case with Dell Encryption files that need to be decrypted.
Both the Online and Offline Dell Encryption Decryption dialog boxes have a Decryption Threads drop-down box.
This dictates the total number of threads assigned to decryption, not the number of decryption threads per core.
If you have a high-end system, you may benefit from a higher setting. At this time, it is not possible to cancel the
processing once it has begun.
Important: If you click Cancel to process the evidence without decrypting, you will not be able to decrypt at a
later time. Also, the evidence cannot be added to the same case a second time. You will have to
create a new case to decrypt and process this evidence.
You can configure Dell Encryption server settings in the following ways:
Globally, for all cases, in the Case Manager interface under the Tools menu.

For a specific case. You can configure Dell Encryption decryption in one of the following ways:
When configuring Processing Options.
On the Additional Analysis page
On Tools > Decrypt Files
Important: This option uses an offline key bundle only. This method does not create any parent-child
relationships, and as a result, produces fewer counts than the other methods of doing Dell
Encryption decryption.
See Using an Offline Key Bundle on page 179.
Note: From the Processing Options or the Additional Analysis page, you can select to decrypt Dell Encryption
files. If you select to decrypt Dell Encryption files, the File Signature Analysis option will automatically be
selected as well.
See Using Additional Analysis on page 128.
You can now do a Live Search on Dell Encryption files on the fly after performing a drive preview.
Using an Offline Key Bundle

Offline decryption is a quicker and more convenient option if the key bundle can be placed on the investigator’s
local computer. To decrypt an encrypted image offline, select the key bundle file and enter the password used to
decrypt it.
Important: This method does not create any parent-child relationships, and as a result, produces fewer counts
than the other methods of doing Dell Encryption decryption.
To decrypt Dell Encryption files using an offline key bundle

1. Click Tools > Dell Encryption Decryption to open the Dell Encryption Decryption Options dialog.
2. Select the key bundle file by entering its location or browsing to it.
4. Re-enter the password.
5. Click OK.
Using an Online Key Bundle

Online decryption can occur only when the computer processing the image can directly access the server over
the network.
Usually the Machine ID and Shield ID fields are automatically populated. The Machine ID can be found on the
server as the Unique ID on the Properties tab. The Shield ID can be found as the “Recovery ID” on the “Shield”
tab. It looks similar to this: “ZE3HM8WW”. If the Shield ID is not working, you have the option to use the SDE
Key ID, which will auto-populate when available and should only be used after you have tried the Shield ID.
The Server Data group box contains information on how to contact the server. It includes the Dell Encryption
Server user name, password, and IP address. The port should be 8081, and is auto-populated.
Offline decryption requires you to get a key bundle file from the server. Then, select the key bundle file and enter
the password used to decrypt it. Get the key bundle file by executing the CFGetBundle.EXE file with a
command like that looks like this:

CFGetBundle -Xhttps://10.1.1.131:8081/xapi -asuperadmin -Achangeit
-dxp1.accessdata.lab -sZE3HM8WW -oKeyBundle.bin -ipassword
-X for the server address
-a for administrator name
-A for the administrator password
-d for the Machine ID
-s for the Shield ID
-o for the output file
-i for the password used to encrypt the key bundle
Note: All command line switches are case sensitive. Also, as in the example above, there is no space between
the switch and the accompanying data.
Once you have used either the online or the offline method, the files will be decrypted immediately and the
decrypted file will become a child of the encrypted file. After decryption, the files will be processed with the same
settings last used to process a file.
Once the key has been added and the appropriate partitions selected, click OK to return to the Manage
Evidence dialog. Select a time zone from the Time Zone drop-down, then click OK to begin processing.
Decrypting Bitlocker Partitions

If you have the proper credentials, you can decrypt Bitlocker encrypted partitions. You can decrypt the Bitlocker
partitions from Windows Vista and Windows 7 computers. You can provide the unique credentials for multiple
encrypted partitions. After you provide Bitlocker credentials, files in the encrypted partitions are decrypted while
the evidence is processed.
To decrypt Bitlocker partitions

1. Add evidence that has Bitlocker encryption to a case.
If Bitlocker encryption is detected, you are prompted to enter credentials in the following dialog:

2. Enter one of the following credentials:
Boot Key File
Recovery Password.
3. If there are multiple partitions, a dialog will be displayed saying that the password for the first partition is
valid, and that additional partitions remain encrypted.
4. Click OK and the credential dialog is again displayed for the next partition.
This sequence continues until you have entered the credentials for all encrypted partitions.
Decrypting Safeguard Utimaco Files

You can use either Imager or the Examiner interface to decrypt boot drives that were encrypted with SafeGuard
by Utimaco.
Safeguard Easy
Safeguard Easy works only with an image of a complete drive or a live drive. Imaged partitions cannot be
decrypted because the information needed to decrypt the partition exists in the boot record of the drive.
When a live drive or drive image is added as evidence, it is checked to determine if SafeGuard Easy encryption
is used on the drive. If it is used, a dialog will appear asking for the user name and password required to access
the drive. If the correct user name and password are entered, the drive will be decrypted transparently during
processing and the user can access information on the drive as though the drive were not encrypted. Incorrect
passwords will result in long waits between attempts -- waits that grow exponentially for each failure. Hitting the
cancel button on the dialog will allow the drive to be added as evidence, but the encrypted portions will not be
processed.
Secondary hard drives and removable media that has been encrypted with SafeGuard Easy are not currently
supported. The problem with secondary drives and removable media is that they contain NO information that
indicates how they are encrypted. The encryption information for secondary drives and removable media is
contained on the boot drive of the computer that encrypted them.
Versions 2.x and later, and all Imager versions since then support SafeGuard Easy drives encrypted with the
following algorithms: AES128, AES256 (the default), DES, 3DES, and IDEA.
The Safeguard dialog box appears only when a valid Utimaco-encrypted image is read.
The username and password used to create the encrypted image are required for decryption. Once the
credentials have been added, click OK to return to the Manage Evidence dialog. Select a time zone from the
Time Zone drop-down, then click OK to begin processing.
Important: The following important information applies when using SafeGuard Decryption:

Enter the User Name and Password carefully and verify both before clicking OK. If this information is
entered incorrectly, the entire image is checked for matching information before returning with an error
message. Each wrong entry results in a longer wait.
If you click Cancel to process the evidence without decrypting, you will not be able to decrypt at a later
time. Also, the evidence cannot be added to the same case a second time. You will have to create a new
case to decrypt and process this evidence.
SafeGuard Enterprise
SafeGuard Enterprise (SGN) is supported. Utimaco supplied libraries to access the decryption keys for SGN via
their recovery mechanism. This involves a somewhat cumbersome challenge/response system with the server
to access the decryption keys. Each partition may be decrypted with a different key. The challenge/response
process needs to be done for each encrypted partition. In order to enable the challenge/response system, a file
called recoverytoken.tok needs to be retrieved from the server and selected in the decryption dialog. A
recoverytoken.tok file is automatically selected if it is in the same directory as the evidence file.
SafeGuard Enterprise decryption was developed using version 5.x.
AccessData uses SafeGuard-provided BE_Sgn_Api.DLL and BE_KBRDLLn.DLL. These libraries are 32-bit
libraries. The 32-bit process is used to retrieve keys in 64-bit. The actual decryption of the drive is done in the
Examiner, but the SafeGuard libraries are needed to generate the key from the username/password.
To recognize that a drive is encrypted with SafeGuard Enterprise, “UTICRYPT” is searched for at the beginning
of the first sector of each partition.
Retrieving the Recovery Token

Before the decryption process can occur, the recoverytoken.tok file must be retrieved from the server.
To retrieve the Recovery Token

1. From the server, you must create a virtual client.
2. Then you must export the virtual client. This is where the recoverytoken.tok file is created.
3. This file must be copied to a place where the Examiner can access the file.
4. Click the Recovery button next to each partition to retrieve that partition’s key. A dialog will open, telling
you which key to retrieve:
4a. On the server, select Tools > Recovery from the menu.
4b. Select the virtual client you exported (the recoverytoken.tok file)
5. Select Key requested.
6. Find the requested key (in this case 0x1C3A799F48FB4B199903FB5730314ABF). You can use Find >
Key IDs from the drop-down, and enter a partial key into Search Name to help find the correct key.
7. A challenge code of 6 segments of 5 characters each is offered.
8. Enter the characters from the challenge portion of the dialog into the server’s dialog.
9. Click Next.
10. The server then offers a response code consisting of 12 segments of 5 characters each.
11. Enter these into the corresponding dialog that provides the decryption key.
12. Click OK. The drive is decrypted and added as evidence to the case.

Decrypting SafeBoot Files
SafeBoot is a program that encrypts drives and/or partitions. The encryption key must be available to enter into
the Key field. All recognized partitions are selected by default, up to a maximum of eight. You can unselect any
partition that you do not want to add to the case.
Important: The following important information applies when using SafeBoot Decryption:
If you click Cancel to process the evidence without decrypting, you will not be able to decrypt at a later
time. Also, the evidence cannot be added to the same case a second time. You will have to create a new
case to decrypt and process this evidence.
You must add all partitions and decrypt the encrypted partitions when first adding the evidence to the
case or you will be unable to see them. Encrypted partitions do not display in the Evidence list.
Once the key has been added and the appropriate partitions selected, click OK to return to the Manage
Evidence dialog. Select a time zone from the Time Zone drop-down, then click OK to begin processing.
Decrypting SecureDoc WinMagic AES Files

When a SecureDoc WinMagic AES-encrypted image is added to a case, it is automatically detected as a
SecureDoc image and a dialog will appear asking for credentials. You will need to enter the following
information:
Key File (a browse button is available)
Password
Emergency Disk Folder (a browse button is available)

Click OK to proceed with the decryption process.
Decrypting Guardian Edge Files

When a Guardian Edge-encrypted image is added to a case, it is automatically detected as a Guardian Edge
image and a dialog will appear asking for credentials. The dialog has a drop-down list box with the user names
that have been found to be associated with the image. Select the user name for which you have a password and
enter that password. Enter the password in one of two ways:
Enter it twice with dots appearing for each character (to keep it hidden from on-lookers).
Check the Show in plain text box and enter it once.
Click OK to proceed with the decryption process.
Decrypting an Image Encrypted With

PGP® WDE
You can acquire images from disks that have been protected with PGP® Whole Disk Encryption (WDE). This
section describes the support for, and the process of specifying the credentials necessary to decrypt the image.

Note: Decryption is only possible if an existing credential, such as a user passphrase or a previously-configured
Whole Disk Recovery Token, is available.
PGP® WDE Decryption

Individuals and organizations typically use PGP® Whole Disk Encryption (PGP® WDE) to protect the
information on their laptop computers in case of loss or theft. Encrypted disks prompt for a user’s passphrase
before Windows loads, allowing data to be decrypted on the fly as it is read into memory or encrypted just before
being written to disk. Disks remain encrypted at all times.
Administrators can instruct PGP® WDE devices that are managed by a PGP® Universal™ Server to
automatically secure an encrypted disk to additional credentials based on a company’s central policy. These
could include a WDE Administrator key (for IT support purposes), an Additional Decryption Key (also called a
corporate recovery key) and/or a Whole Disk Recovery Token (“WDRT”). WDRTs are commonly used to reset a
forgotten passphrase and, can also be used by authorized administrators or examiners to decrypt an acquired
image of a PGP® WDE encrypted drive.
To decrypt a PGPWDE Image and add it to a case

1. After creating a case, click Evidence > Add / Remove Evidence > Add > Acquired Images > OK.
2. Browse to the location of the image files and select the first of the set to add to this case.
3. You may enter any user’s boot password or passphrase, or use the Whole Disk Recovery Token
(WDRT) to decrypt a drive or image. Use one of the following methods:
Boot passwords: The users for the drive are displayed in the drop-down list in the PGP® Encryption
Credentials box. Select the user and enter that user’s boot password.
Whole Disk Recovery Token (WDRT): Obtain the WDRT by doing the following:
3a. Log into the PGP® Universal™ Server.
3b. Select the Users tab.
3c. Click on the User Name having a recovery icon for the system being examined.
3d. In the popup dialog in the far right column click the WDRT link to display information about the
WDRT. The WDRT will look similar to this:
ULB53-UD7A7-1C4QC-GPDZJ-CRNPA-X5A
3e. You can enter the key, with or without the dashes, in the Passphrase/WDRT text field as the
credential to decrypt a drive or image. The WDRT can be copied and pasted into the text field to
avoid errors.
3f. Click OK.
4. Verify that the PGP® WDE encrypted image is added to the case Manage Evidence list.

Viewing Decrypted Files
After you have decrypted files, you can view which files have been decrypted.
You can also view the File Properties of the original encrypted file to see the password that was used to decrypt
that file.
To view decrypted files

To use the Overview tab, do the following:
2a. Click the Overview tab.
2b. Expand File Status.
2c. Click Decrypted Files
To use a filter, do the following:
2a. Click the QuickPick icon for Evidence to view all or some of the of the evidence in the case.
2b. Using the Filters drop-down menu, select Decrypted Files.
In the File List, all decrypted files will be displayed.
3. Click on an individual file in the File List to view the file in the File Content pane.
Decrypting Files Viewing Decrypted Files | 185

Chapter 13
Exporting Data from the Examiner
This section discusses how to export data from the Examiner interface and includes the following:
Copying Information from the Examiner (page 186)

Exporting Files to a Native Format (page 188)
Exporting Files to an AD1 Image (page 190)
Exporting an Image to an Image (page 192)
Exporting File List Information (page 194)
Exporting a Word List (page 195)
Exporting Recycle Bin Index Contents (page 195)
Exporting KFF Data (page 196)
Exporting Hashes from a Case (page 196)
Exporting All Hits in a Search to a CSV file (page 197)
Exporting Emails to PST (page 198)
Exporting the Properties Panel (page 199)
Exporting Geolocation Data to KML or KMZ (page 200)
Copying Information from the Examiner

You can use the Copy Special dialog to copy information about the files in a case to the computer clipboard. The
file information can include any or all column items, such as Filename, File Path, File Category etc. The data is
copied in a tab-delimited format.
To copy file information

1. Select the files for the Copy Special task by doing either of the following:
In the File List on any tab, select the files that you want to copy information about.
Right-click the file in the file list.
2. Open the Copy Special dialog in any of these ways:
Select Edit > Copy Special.
Click the Copy Special button on the file list pane.
Click Copy Special.
Exporting Data from the Examiner Copying Information from the Examiner | 186
3. In the Copy Special dialog, select from the following:
Item Description
Choose Columns Choose the column template definition that you want to use for the exported data.
Include Header Row Includes a header row that uses the column headings you selected.
All Highlighted Copies all items highlighted in the current file list.
All Checked Copies all items checked in all file lists. You can check files in multiple lists.
Checked items remain checked until you uncheck them.
Currently Listed Copies all items in the current file list.
All Copies all items in the case. Selecting this option can create a very large TSV or
CSV file, and may exceed the 10,000 item capacity of the clipboard.
4. In the Choose Columns drop-down list, select the column template that contains the file information that
you want to copy.
5. To define a new column settings template click Column Settings to open the Column Settings Manager.
6. Click OK to copy the data to the clipboard.
Exporting Data from the Examiner Copying Information from the Examiner | 187
Exporting Files to a Native Format
You can export files that you find in an investigation to process and distribute to other parties. For example, you
can export encrypted files that you need to decrypt with Password Recovery Toolkit (PRTK). You can also export
Registry files to analyze in the Registry Viewer.
To export items from a case

1. Do either of the following:
In the Examiner, click File > Export
Right-click on a file in the File List pane and click Export
2. In the Export dialog, select from the following export options:
Export Options
File Options Description

Append Item number to Adds the case’s unique File ID to the filename of the exported item.
Filename
Append extension to Uses the file’s header information to add missing file extensions.
filename if bad/absent
Export Children Expands container-type files and exports their contents.
Exclude Slack Space Excludes all slack files from the export.
Children Files
Save HTML view (if Saves applicable files in HTML format.

available)
Export emails using Item Substitutes the Item number in the case instead of the email title to shorten the
number for name file paths.
Export directory as file Creates a file that contains the binary data of a directory that you export.
If you select a folder to export, the Examiner does not export the parent folder or
empty sub-folders.
You can export folders as files, but any empty folders that are not selected to be
exported as files are not created during the export. To work around this issue,
export a folder structure with its children, move up one folder level and mark
Export directory as file and Export children.
Limit Path Length The Limit Path Length option is now off by default. This prevents getting only
partial paths in the export.
Create Manifest files Generates manifest files that contain the details and options that are selected for
the exported data. including headers. The Export Summary File is commonly
called a Manifest file. If you select this option the export creates the manifest file
CSV format. The export saves the file in the same destination folder as the
exported files.
Exporting Data from the Examiner Exporting Files to a Native Format | 188
Export Options (Continued)
File Options Description

Include original path Includes the full path from the root to the file. The export maintains the folder
structure for the exported files.
Export emails as MSG Exports email files into the MSG format for broader compatibility.
Export emails to PST Exports email files to a PST file.
See Exporting Emails to PST on page 198.
Export messages from You can export email messages to a PST file, even if they didn't come from a
email to PST PST file originally. This lets you accomplish the following:
 Export messages from RFC822, NSF, PST, Exchange, and so on to a PST.
 As the opposite of reduction, you can create a new PST file with responsive
messages in it.
This creates a new PST rather than exporting the whole source PST and run-
ning reduction to remove anything non-responsive.
 Convert email archives, such as NSF, to a PST with the same folder and mes-
sage structure.
The Exporting Emails to PST feature requires that you have either Microsoft
Outlook or the Microsoft Collaboration Data Objects (CDO) installed on the same
computer as the processing engine.
See the Important Information in the Release Notes.
Include thumbnails of Includes the thumbnails of the video files that were created during evidence
video files processing or during additional analysis.
Include common video Includes the common video format (MP4) files that were created during evidence
format processing or during additional analysis.
3. Select the items that you want to export from the following options:
Target Item Description

All Checked Selects all items checked in all file lists. You can check files in multiple lists.
All Listed Selects all items in the current file list.
All Highlighted Selects all items highlighted in the current file list. Items remain highlighted
only as long as the same tab is displayed.
All Selects all items in the case.
4. In the Destination Base Path field, enter or browse to and select the location to export the file.
The default path is [Drive]:\case_folder\Report\Export\.
5. Click OK.
Exporting Data from the Examiner Exporting Files to a Native Format | 189
Exporting Files to an AD1 Image
You can export files to an Image. However; you can only export files to the AD1 format, or to their native format.
To export files to their native type see Exporting Files to a Native Format (page 188).
To export images into an image file Exporting an Image to an Image (page 192).
To export a file to an image

1. In the Examiner, do one of the following:
Highlight the items that you want to export.
Check the items that you want to export.
Make the File List pane display the items that you want to export.
2. Click File > Export to Image.
3. In the Create Custom Content Image dialog, select the appropriate option based on your decision in
step one of this procedure Click OK.
4. In the Create Image dialog, under Image Destination(s), click Add.
5. In the Select Image Destination dialog, specify the following information:
Image Options
Option Description
Case Number (Optional) Lets you enter a case number for the data that is to be exported.
Evidence Number (Optional) Lets you enter an evidence number for the data that is to be exported.
Unique Description (Optional) Lets you add a description to the data that is to be exported.
Examiner (Optional) Lets you add the name of the evidence examiner to the data that is to be
exported.
Notes (Optional) Lets you add notes to the data that is to be exported.
Image Destination Only AD1 is supported for unique file(s).

Type
Relative to The image can be saved locally (Relative to This machine), or remotely (Relative to
Remote source machine).
Folder Specify the path and the destination folder for the image on the target computer.
Username Specify the domain and the user name to access the target computer.
Password Specify the password of the user on the target computer.
Image Filename Specify a filename for the image, but do not include an extension.
(Excluding
Extensions)
Image Fragment Specify the image fragment size in MB.

Size
You can save RAW and E01 file types in a single segment by specifying 0 MB.
Exporting Data from the Examiner Exporting Files to an AD1 Image | 190
Image Options (Continued)
Option Description
Compression Specify the compression level to use. 0 represents no compression, 9 represents the
highest compression. Compression level 1 is the fastest to create. Compression level
9 is the slowest to create.
Use AD Encryption Select this option if you want to encrypt the image as it is created.
When exporting data to an image from an encrypted drive, create the image
physically, not logically. A physical image is often required for decrypting full disk
encryption.
AD Encryption supports the following:
Hash algorithm SHA-512.

Crypto algorithms AES 128, 192, and 256.
Key materials (for encrypting the AES key): pass phrases, raw key files, and
certificates.
A raw key file is any arbitrary file whose raw data is treated as the key
material.
Certificates use public keys for encryption and corresponding private keys for
decryption.
6. Click OK.
Exporting Data from the Examiner Exporting Files to an AD1 Image | 191
Exporting an Image to an Image
You can export images into the following types:
AD1 (AD Custom Content)

E01 (EnCase Compatible)
S01 (Smart)
001 (RAW/DD)
To export case data to an image

1. In the Examiner, in the Evidence Items tree pane, select an image to export.
2. Click File > Export to Image.
3. In the Create Custom Content Image dialog, specify if you want to export the selected, highlighted, or
checked items and then click OK.
4. In the Create Image dialog, under Image Destination(s), click Add.
5. In the Select Image Destination dialog, specify the following information:
Image Destination Options
Option Description
Case Number (Optional) Lets you enter a case number for the data that is to be exported.
Evidence Number (Optional) Lets you enter an evidence number for the data that is to be
exported.
Unique Description (Optional) Lets you add a description to the data that is to be exported.
Examiner (Optional) Lets you add the name of the evidence examiner to the data that
is to be exported.
Notes (Optional) Lets you add notes to the data that is to be exported.
Image Destination By default, the image type is AD1. When exporting to an AD1, the image’s
Type file path is added under a root directory. This behavior speeds the process of
gathering data for the AD1, and shortens the path to the AD1 content.
Relative to The image can be saved locally (Relative to This machine), or remotely
(Relative to Remote source machine).
Folder Specify the path and the destination folder for the image on the target
computer.
Username Specify the domain and the user name to access the target computer.
Password Specify the password of the user on the target computer.
Image Filename Specify a filename for the image, but do not include an extension.
(Excluding
Extensions)
Exporting Data from the Examiner Exporting an Image to an Image | 192

Image Destination Options (Continued)
Option Description
Image Fragment Specify the image fragment size in MB.
Size
You can save RAW and E01 file types in a single segment by specifying 0
MB.
Compression Specify the compression level to use. 0 represents no compression, 9

represents the highest compression. Compression level 1 is the fastest to
create. Compression level 9 is the slowest to create.
Use AD Encryption Select this option if you want to encrypt the image as it is created.
When exporting data to an image from an encrypted drive, create the image
physically, not logically. A physical image is often required for decrypting full
disk encryption.
AD Encryption supports the following:
Hash algorithm SHA-512.

Crypto algorithms AES 128, 192, and 256.
Key materials (for encrypting the AES key): pass phrases, raw key
files, and certificates.
A raw key file is any arbitrary file whose raw data is treated as the
key material.
Certificates use public keys for encryption and corresponding private
keys for decryption.
6. Click OK.
7. In the Create Image dialog, choose if you want to Verify Images after they are created.
8. Choose if you want to Precalculate progress statistics. This feature estimates the progress of the
task as it is running.
9. Choose if you want to Add image to case when completed.
10. Specify the Time Zone of the evidence.
11. Click OK.
12. Click Start.
Exporting Data from the Examiner Exporting an Image to an Image | 193

Exporting File List Information
You can use Copy Special functionality to save file list information into a file. You can save this file in TSV, TXT,
CSV, or XML format. TXT files display in a text editor program like Notepad. Files saved in TSV, CSV, or XML
can be opened in a spreadsheet program.
To export file list information to a network/folder/etc you must have rights to access and save information to the
location.
To export File List information

In the Examiner, select File > Export File List Info.
Right-click on a file in the File List pane and select Export File List Info.
2. Select the items to export.
Choose from:
All Highlighted (in the File List View)
All Checked (in the case)
All Listed (in the File List View)
All (in the case)
3. Specify if you want to include a header row in the exported file.
4. From the Choose Columns drop-down, select the column template to use. You can click Column
Settings to create a column template to use for the export.
5. Specify the filename for the exported information.
6. Choose a file type for the exported file.
7. Browse to and select the destination folder for the exported file.
8. Click Save.
Exporting Data from the Examiner Exporting File List Information | 194
Exporting a Word List
You can export the contents of the case index or registry into a word list. You can use this word list as the basis
for a custom dictionary to aid in the password recovery process.
You must have indexed the case to export the word list. If you have not indexed the case, you can click
Evidence > Additional Analysis. In the Additional Analysis dialog, under Search Indexes, select dtSearch
Index, and then click OK.
You can only export Registry Viewer contents into a word list if the Registry Viewer is installed on the computer
where you are running the Examiner.
To export a word list

1. In the Examiner, select File > Export Word List.
2. Select the Registry keys that you want to include in the word list.
3. Click Export.
4. Click Browse Folders and select the filename and location for the exported word list.
5. Click Save.
Exporting Recycle Bin Index Contents

You can export the indexed data from INFO2 files into TXT, TSV, or CSV format.
To export INFO2 files

1. Locate an INFO2 file. In the Examiner you can find them in the Overview tab under OS/File System
Files > Recycle Bin Index.
2. In the File List, highlight the INFO2 files that you want to export.
3. Right-click on the selected files and choose Export Recycle Bin Index Contents.
4. Browse to and select the desired destination folder.
5. Type a filename for the exported data file.
6. In the Save as type drop-down, select the file type to use.
7. Mark Include header row if you want the column headings included in the exported file.
8. Click Save.
Exporting Data from the Examiner Exporting a Word List | 195

Exporting Hashes from a Case
You can export hashes from a case. You can add the hash list into the Known File Filter in the same case to
identify and set the KFF status on files of interest (Alert) or files of no interest (Ignore). You can use the
Disregard status to make it easier to use existing groups, ignoring certain sets in the group that may have Alert
status assigned.
To export hashes from the case

1. In the Examiner, in the File List view, select the files that you want to export the hashes for.
2. Right-click in the list and choose Export File List Info.
3. In the Save As dialog box, in the File name field, enter the name for the exported list.
4. In the Save as type drop-down, select either TSV or CSV.
5. Under File List items to export, select from the following:
All highlighted
All checked
Currently listed
All (In case)
6. Click Choose Columns and select the column settings to use.
If you do not find the correct column setting for this export, click Column Settings to customize a
column setting to include the file properties you want in this export.
You should include MD5 Hash, and it is recommended that you also include SHA1 Hash. It is optional to
include SHA 256 Hash.
7. In the Selected Columns list, double-click on each item to add and remove the columns.
8. Click OK.
9. Click Save.
Exporting KFF Data

You can use the KFF Admin interface to export KFF Data.
See Exporting KFF Data on page 274.
Exporting Data from the Examiner Exporting Hashes from a Case | 196
Exporting All Hits in a Search to a CSV file
After you run a search for terms, words, or predefined patterns, you can export your results to a comma
delimited text file (CSV).
To Export All Hits in a Search to a CSV file

1. Run either a Live Search or an Index Search.
2. From either the Index Search Results window or the Live Search Results window, right click the search
result and click Set Context Data Width.
3. Set the width value. For example, 32.
4. Right-click the search result and click Export to File > All Hits in Search.
5. In the Save As dialog, browse to the destination where you want to save the file.
6. In the File Name field, enter a name for the file.
7. In the Save as type field select Comma Delimited Text File (*.CSV).
8. You can then import the CSV file into a program that supports CSV files such as Microsoft Excel.
Exporting Data from the Examiner Exporting All Hits in a Search to a CSV file | 197
Exporting Emails to PST
You can export email messages to a PST file, even if they didn't come from a PST file originally. This lets you
accomplish the following:
Export messages from RFC822, NSF, PST, Exchange, and so on to a PST.

As the opposite of reduction, you can create a new PST file with responsive messages in it. This creates
a new PST rather than exporting the whole source PST and running reduction to remove anything non-
responsive.
Convert email archives, such as NSF, to a PST with the same folder and message structure.
However, for this option to work, Outlook must be installed on the computer running the Examiner.
Be aware of the following:
You must have Outlook version 2013 or 2016 installed.

To determine if Outlook was installed, the "MAPIX" value under the following registry key was queried:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows Messaging Subsystem
To support "Click To Run" installers for Outlook, the following keys are also queried for the MAPIX
value:
“HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\Office\\ClickToRun\\REGISTRY\\MACHINE\\
Software\\Microsoft\\Windows Messaging Subsystem
"HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\\Microsoft\\Office\\ClickToRun\\REGISTRY\\MACHINE\\
Software\\Wow6432Node\\Microsoft\\Windows Messaging Subsystem.
Emails contained in OST files are automatically exported to a new PST archive.
To export emails to PST

1. In the Export dialog, select Export emails to PST.
2. (Optional) If you want to preserve the folder structure, select Preserve folder structure.
Note: When preserving the folder structure, the export creates a root directory for the email, followed by
the user name associated with that email. The folder and message structure then mirror that of
the emails being exported.
3. Select how you want to organize the exported emails.

Choose from the following export options:
Separate PST per evidence.
Separate PST per custodian
Single PST
PST per mail archive
4. Configure other export options and click OK.
To convert email archives with the same folder and message structure
1. In the Export dialog, select Export messages from email archives to PST.
2. Configure other export options and click OK.
Exporting Data from the Examiner Exporting Emails to PST | 198

Exporting the Properties Panel
You can export the information in the properties panel to one of two options:
CSV
XML and HTML (these are exported at the same time)
To Export the Properties Panel Information to CSV:

1. Right-click anywhere inside the Properties Panel.
2. Select Export to CSV.
3. Select a Destination Folder and create a File Name.
4. Navigate to the newly-created file. When you open it, a Text Import Wizard will open. Be sure to select
the following options:
Delimited
Comma
To Export the Properties Panel Information to XML and HTML:

1. Right-click anywhere inside the Properties Panel.
2. Select Export to XML and HTML.
3. Select a Destination Folder and create a File Name.
4. Navigate to the newly-created file. When you open it, be sure to select the Open the file with the
following style sheet applied option and apply the ADObjectProperties.xslt style sheet. Once you
have applied the stylesheet, the file may open in a web browser.
Exporting Data from the Examiner Exporting the Properties Panel | 199
Exporting Geolocation Data to KML or KMZ
Geolocation data can be exported in order to allow users to view geolocation data from the case in any
application that allows KML imports. For example, Google Earth.
To Export Geolocation Data:

1. Select the files for export from the file pane.
This can be done using either of the following options:
Highlight one or more items (use the columns to sort photos based on attributes)
Select individual files by checking the box
2. Right-click on any of the selected files and click Export File List Info. A window will open, allowing you
to select where to save the files and to determine which type of file you would like to export.
Note: A KMZ file is a compressed KML file.
Be sure to set the Choose Columns dropdown option to Geolocation.

3. Click Save.
To Open Geolocation Data in Google Earth:

1. Open the Google Earth program.
2. Drag and drop the KML or KMZ file onto the program.
The pins will automatically populate on the map and will use the original file name.
3. The Google Earth program will change the icon for the KML or KMZ file to a Google Earth symbol.
Note: The same process can be followed using Google maps; however, the KML or KMZ file will not be
updated with a Google Earth icon.
Exporting Data from the Examiner Exporting Geolocation Data to KML or KMZ | 200
Chapter 14
About Cerberus Malware Analysis
About Cerberus Malware Analysis

Cerberus lets you do a malware analysis on executable binaries. You can use Cerberus to analyze executable
binaries that are on a disk, on a network share, or that are unpacked in system memory.
Cerberus consists of the following stages of analysis
Stage 1: Threat Analysis

Cerberus stage 1 is a general file and metadata analysis that quickly examines an executable binary file
for common attributes it may possess. It identifies potentially malicious code and generates and assigns
a threat score to the executable binary.
See About Cerberus Stage 1 Threat Analysis on page 202.
Stage 2: Static Analysis
Cerberus stage 2 is a disassembly analysis that takes more time to examine the details of the code within
the file. It learns the capabilities of the binary without running the actual executable.
See About Cerberus Stage 2 Static Analysis on page 208.
Cerberus first runs the Stage 1 threat analysis. After it completes Stage 1 analysis, it will then automatically run a
static analysis against binaries that have a threat score that is higher than the designated threshold.
Cerberus analysis may slow down the speed of your overall processing.
Note: This feature is available depending on your product license. Please contact your sales representative for
more information.
Important: Cerberus writes binaries to the AD Temp folder momentarily in order to perform the malware
analysis. Upon completion it will quickly delete the binary. It is important to ensure that your antivirus
is not scanning the AD Temp folder. If antivirus deletes/Quarantines the binary from the temp
Cerberus analysis will not be performed.
Cerberus analyzes the following types of files:
acm com dll exe lex ocx scr tlb

ax cpl dll~ iec mui pyd so tmp
cnv dat drv ime new rll sys tsp
wpc
About Cerberus Malware Analysis About Cerberus Malware Analysis | 201

About Cerberus Stage 1 Threat Analysis
Cerberus stage 1 analysis is a general analysis for executable binaries. The Stage 1 analysis engine scans
through the binary looking for malicious artifacts. It examines several attributes from the file's metadata and file
information to determine its potential to contain malicious code within it. For each attribute, if the condition exists,
Cerberus assigns a score to the file. The sum of all of the file’s scores is the file’s total threat score.
More serious attributes have higher positive scores, such as +20 or +30. Safer attributes have smaller or even
negative numbers such as +5, -10 or -20.
The existence of any particular attribute does not necessarily indicate a threat. However, if a file contains several
attributes, then the file will have a higher sum score which may indicate that the executable binary may warrant
further investigation. The higher the threat score, the more likely a file may be to contain malicious code.
For example, you may have a file that had four attributes discovered. Those attributes may have scores of +10,
+20, +20, and +30 for a sum of +80. You may have another file with four attributes of scores of +5, +10, -10, -20
for a sum of -15. The first file has a much higher risk than the second file.
Cerberus stage 1 analysis also examines each file’s properties and provides information such as its size, version
information, signature etc.
About Cerberus Score Weighting

There are default scores for each attribute of Cerberus Stage 1 threat scoring. However, you can modify the
scoring so that you can weigh the threat score attributes with your own values.
For example, the Bad Signed attribute as a default value of +20. You can give it a different weight of +30.
You must configure these scores before the files are analyzed.
About Cerberus Override Scores

Some threat attributes have override scores. If a file has one of these attributes, instead of the score being the
sum of the other attributes, the score is overridden with a set value of 100 or -100. This is useful in quickly
identifying files that are automatically considered either as a threat or safe. If a bad artifact is found that requires
immediate attention, the file is given the maximum score. If an artifact is found that is considered safe, the file is
automatically given the minimum score.
Score ranges have maximum and minimum values of -100 to 100.
High threat signatures will result in a final score of 100.

Low threat signatures will result in a final score of -100.
Cerberus attributes that have maximum override scores include:
Bad signatures
Revoked signatures
Expired signatures
Packed with known signature
If any of these attributes are found, the score is overridden with a score of +100.
About Cerberus Malware Analysis About Cerberus Stage 1 Threat Analysis | 202
Cerberus Minimum override score includes:
Valid digital signature

If this attribute is found, the score is overridden with a score of -100.
Important: If a file that is malware has a valid digital signature, the override will score the file as -100 (low threat),
even though the file is really malware.
About Cerberus Threat Score Reports

After you have processed evidence with Cerberus enabled, you can view a threat score report for each
executable file in a threat score reports. This report shows the Cerberus score that were calculated during
processing. There are two columns of scores: the weighted score assigned to each attribute (the potential score)
and the actual score given if the attribute was found in the file.
Cerberus Threat Score Report
The report also shows general file properties.
File Information Threat Score Report
Cerberus Stage 1 Threat Scores
The following table lists the threat scores that are provided in a Stage 1 analysis:
Cerberus Stage 1 Threat Score Attributes
Attribute Default Description

Threat
Score
Network +5 The Network category is triggered when a program contains the
functionality to access a network. This could involve any kind of protocol
from high-level HTTP to a custom protocol written using low-level raw
sockets.
Persistence +20 Persistence indicates that the application may try to persist permanently on
the host. For example, the application would resume operation
automatically even if the machine were rebooted.
Process +5 Process indicates the application may start a new a process or attempt to
gain access to inspect or modify other processes. Malicious applications
attempt to gain access to other processes to obfuscate their functionality or
attack vector or for many other reasons. For example, reading or writing
into a process’s memory, or injecting code into another process.
Crypto +6 Crypto is triggered when an application appears to use cryptographic

functionality. Malicious software uses cryptography to hide data or activity
from network monitors, anti-virus products, and investigators.
Protected +10 ProtectedStorage indicates that the application may make use of the
Storage Windows “pstore” functionality. This is used on some versions of Windows
to store encrypted data on the system. For example, Internet Explorer
stores a database for form-filling in protected storage.
Registry +5 Registry is triggered when a target application attempts to use the registry
to store data. The registry is commonly used to store application settings,
auto-run keys, and other data that the application wants to store
permanently but not in its own file.
Security +5 Imports functions used to modify user tokens. For example, attempting to
clone a security token to impersonate another logged on user.
Obfuscation +30 Stage 1 searches for signs that the application is 'packed', or obfuscated in
a way that hinders quick inspection. The Obfuscation category is triggered
when the application appears to be packed, encrypted, or otherwise
obfuscated. This represents a deliberate decision on behalf of the
developer to hinder analysis.
Process +2 Unusual activity in the Process Execution Space header. For example, a
Execution zero length raw section, unrealistic linker time, or the file size doesn't
Space match the Process Execution Space header.
Cerberus Stage 1 Threat Score Attributes (Continued)
Attribute Default Description

Threat
Score
Bad Signed +20 This category is triggered when a binary is cryptographically signed, but
the signature is invalid. A signature is generally used to demonstrate that
some entity you trust (like a government or legitimate company, called a
'signing authority') has verified the authorship and good intentions of the
signed application. However, signatures can be revoked and they can
expire, meaning that the signature no longer represents that the signing
authority has trust in the application.
Embedded Data +10 This category is triggered when an application contains embedded
executable code. While all programs contain some program code, this
category indicates that the application has an embedded 'resource', which
contains code separate from the code which runs normally as part of the
application.
Bad / Bit-Bad +20 This category is triggered when the application contains signatures
indicating it uses the IRC protocol or shellcode signature. Many malware
networks use IRC to communicate between the infected hosts and the
command-and-control servers.
Signed / Bit -20 This category is triggered when a program is signed. A program that is
Signed signed is verified as 'trusted' by a third party, usually a legitimate entity like
a government or trusted company. The signature may be expired or invalid
though; check the 'BadSigned' category for this information.
PE Good -10 Scores for good artifacts in PE headers.
PE Malware +30 Scores for known malware artifacts in PE headers.
Cerberus Stage 1 File Information
The following table lists the threat scores that are provided in a Stage 1 analysis:
File Information from Cerberus Stage 1 Analysis
Item Description
File Size Displays the size of the file in bytes.
Import Count Displays the number of functions that Cerberus examined.
Entropy Score Displays a score of the binaries entropy used for suspected packing or encrypting.
Entropy may be New:

packed
Interesting Displays the name of functions from the process execution space that contributed to
Functions the file’s threat score.
Suspected Packer Attempts to display a list of suspected packers whose signature matches known
List malware packers.
Modules Displays the DLL files included in the binary.
Has Version Displays whether or not the file has a version number.
Version Info Displays information about the file that is gathered from the Windows API including the
following:
CompanyName
FileDescription
FileVersion
InternalName
LegalCopyright
LegalTrademarks
OriginalFilename
ProductName
ProductVersion
Is Signed Displays whether or not the file is signed. If the file is signed the following information
is also provided:
IsValid
SignerName
ProductName
SignatureTime
SignatureResult
Unpacker results Attempts to show if and which packers were used in the binary.
About Cerberus Stage 2 Static Analysis
When you run a stage 1 analysis, you configure a score that will launch a Cerberus stage 2 analysis. If an
executable receives a score that is equal or higher than the configured score, Cerberus stage 2 is performed.
Cerberus stage 2 disassembles the code of an executable binary without running the actual executable.
About Cerberus Stage 2 Report Data

When a stage 2 analysis runs, it returns its results of the file’s functions in the Functional Call Summary section
of the threat score report.
Cerberus Stage 2 Report Data in Threat Scan Report
About Cerberus Malware Analysis About Cerberus Stage 2 Static Analysis | 208
Cerberus Stage 2 Function Call Data
Stage 2 analysis data is generated for the following function call categories:
File Access
Networking functionality
Process Manipulation
Security Access
Windows Registry
Surveillance
Uses Cryptography
Low-level Access
Loads a driver
Subverts API
Misc
File Access Call Categories
Cerberus Stage 2 File Access Function Call Categories
Category Description
File Functions that manipulate (read, write, delete, modify) files on the local file system.
Access
Filesystem.File.Read. This is triggered by functionality which reads executable files from disk.
ExecutableExtension The executable code can then be executed, obfuscated, stored
elsewhere, transmitted, or otherwise manipulated.
FileSystem.Physical. This application may attempt to read data directly from disk, bypassing
Read the filesystem layer. This is very uncommon in normal applications,
and may indicate subversive activity.
FileSystem.Physical. This application may attempt to write data directly to disk, bypassing
Write the filesystem layer in the operating system. This is very uncommon in
normal applications, and may indicate subversive activity. It is also
easy to do incorrectly, so this may help explain any system instability
seen on the host.
FileSystem.Directory. This indicates the application may attempt to create directory.

Create: Modifications to the file system are useful for diagnosing how an
application persists, where its code and data are stored, and other
useful information.
FileSystem.Directory. This indicates an application may try to create a directory in the

Create.Windows: \Windows directory. This directory contains important operating system
files, and legitimate applications rarely need to access it.
FileSystem.Directory. This indicates the application may attempt to recurse through the file
Recursion: system, perhaps as part of a search functionality.
FileSystem.Delete: This indicates the application may delete files. With sufficient
permissions, the application may be able to delete files which it did not
write or even system files which could affect system stability.
FileSystem.File.Delete This indicates the application may try to delete files in the \Windows
.Windows: directory, where important system files are stored. This is rarely
necessary for legitimate applications, so this is a strong indicator of
suspicious activity.
FileSystem.File.Delete This indicates the application may try to delete files in the
. \Windows\System32 directory, where important system files are stored.
System32: This is rarely necessary for legitimate applications, so this is a strong
indicator of suspicious activity.
FileSystem.File.Read. This indicates the application may attempt to read from the \Windows
Windows: directory, which is very uncommon for legitimate applications.
\Windows is where many important system files are stored.
FileSystem.File.Write. This indicates the application may attempt to write to the \Windows
Windows: directory, which is very uncommon for legitimate applications.
\Windows is where many important system files are stored.
Cerberus Stage 2 File Access Function Call Categories (Continued)
FileSystem.File.Read. This indicates the application may attempt to read from the
System32: \Windows\System32 directory, which is very uncommon for legitimate
applications. \Windows\System32 is where many important system
files are stored.
FileSystem.File.Write. This indicates the application may attempt to write to the

System32: \Windows\System32 directory, which is very uncommon for legitimate
applications. \Windows\System32 is where many important system
files are stored.
FileSystem.File.Write. This indicates the application may attempt to write an executable file to
ExecutableExtension: disk. This could indicate malicious software that has multiple ‘stages’,
or it could indicate a persistence mechanism used by malware (i.e.
write an executable file into the startup folder so it is run when the
system starts up).
FileSystem.File. This indicates the program may write compressed files to disk.
Filename.Compressio Compression can be useful to obfuscate strings or other data from
n: quick, automated searches of every file on a filesystem.
FileSystem.File. This indicates the application may write a program to a directory so

Filename.Autorun: that it will run every time the system starts up. This is a useful
persistence mechanism.
Networking Functionality Call Categories
Cerberus Stage 2 Networking Functionality Function Call Categories
Networking Functions that enable sending and receiving data over the or other networks.
functionality
Network.FTP.Get: Describes the use of FTP to retrieve files. This could indicate the
vector a malware application uses to retrieve data from a C&C
server.
Network.Raw: Functions in this category indicate use of the basic networking

commands used to establish TCP, UDP, or other types of
connections to other machines. Programmers who use these build
their own communication protocol over TCP (or UDP or other
protocol below the application layer) rather than using an
application-layer protocol such as HTTP or FTP.
Network.Raw.Listen: Functionality in this category indicates the application accepts

incoming connections over tcp, udp, or other lower-level protocol.
Network.Raw. Functionality in this bucket indicates that the application receives

Receive: data using a socket communicating over a lower-level protocol
such as TCP, UDP, or a custom protocol.
Network.DNS.Lookup. This indicates the application may attempt to resolve the address
Country.XX: of machines in one of several countries. “XX” will be replaced by
the ‘top level domain’, or TLD associated with the lookup,
indicating the application may attempt to establish contact with a
host in one of these countries.
Network.HTTP.Read: The application may attempt to read data over the network using
the HTTP protocol. This protocol is commonly used by malware so
that its malicious traffic appears to ‘blend in’ with legitimate web
traffic.
Network.HTTP. This indicates the application may make an HTTP request which is
Connect.Nonstandard. not a head, get, or post request. The vast majority of web
applications use one or more of these 3 kinds of requests, so this
Request:
category indicates anomalous behavior.
Network.HTTP. Port: Most HTTP connections occur over either port 80 or 443.
Connect.Nonstandard. This indicates the application is communicating with the server
over a non-standard port, which may be a sign that the server is
Port:
not a normal, legitimate web server.
Network.HTTP. HTTP messages are partially composed of key-value pairs of

Connect.Nonstandard. strings which the receiver will need to properly handle the
Header: message. This indicates the application includes non-standard or
very unusual header key-value pairs.
Network.HTTP.Post: This indicates the application makes a ‘post’ http request. ‘post’
messages are normally used to push data to a server, but malware
may not honor this convention.
Cerberus Stage 2 Networking Functionality Function Call Categories (Continued)
Network.HTTP.Head: This indicates the application makes a ‘head http request. ‘head’
messages are normally used to determine information about a
server’s state before sending a huge amount of data across the
network, but malware may not honor this convention.
Network.Connect. This indicates the application may attempt to connect to a

Country.XX: machines in one of several countries. “XX” will be replaced by the
‘top level domain’, or TLD associated with the lookup.
FTP.Put: The application may attempt to send files over the network using
FTP. This may indicate an exfiltration mechanism used by
malware.
Process Manipulation Call Categories
Cerberus Stage 2 Process Manipulation Function Call Categories
Process May contain functions to manipulate processes.
Manipulation
ProcessManageme This functionality indicates the application enumerates all

nt.Enumeration: processes. This could be part of a system survey or other attempt to
contain information about the host.
ProcessManageme This indicates the target application may create multiple threads of
nt.Thread.Create: execution. This can give insight into how the application operates,
operating multiple pieces of functionality in parallel.
ProcessManageme This indicates the application may create threads in a suspended

nt.Thread.Create. state. Similar to suspended processes, this may indicate that the
Suspended: threads are only executed some time after they’re created or that
some properties are modified after they are created.
ProcessManageme This indicates the application may attempt to create a thread in

nt.Thread.Create: another process. This is a common malware mechanism for
‘hijacking’ other legitimate processes, disguising the fact that
malware is on the machine.
ProcessManageme This indicates that the application may create threads in other
nt.Thread.Create. processes such that they start in a suspended state. Thus their
Remote: functionality or other properties can be modified before they begin
executing.
ProcessManageme The application may try to gain access to observe or modify a

nt.Thread.Open: thread. This behavior can give insight into how threads interact to
affect the host.
ProcessManageme This application may attempt to gain access to observe or modify

nt.Process.Open: other processes. This can give strong insight into how the
application interacts with system and what other processes it may
try to subvert.
ProcessManageme This application may attempt to create one or more other processes.
nt.Process.Create: Similar to threads, multiple processes can be used to parallelize an
application’s functionality. Understanding that processes are used
rather than threads can shed insight on how an application
accomplishes its goals.
ProcessManageme Describes functionality to create new processes in a suspended

nt.Process.Create. state. Processes can be created in a ‘suspended’ state so that none
Suspended: of the threads execute until it is resumed. While a process is
suspended, the creating process may be able to substantially modify
its behavior or other properties.
Security Access Call Categories
Cerberus Stage 2 Security Access Function Call Categories
Security Access Functions that allow the program to change its security settings or impersonate other
logged on users.
Security: This category indicates use of any of a large number of security-

related functions, including those manipulating security tokens,
Access Control Entries, and other items. Even without using an
exploit, modification of security settings can enable a malicious
application to gain more privileges on a system than it would
otherwise have.
Windows Registry Call Categories

Cerberus Stage 2 Windows Registry Function Call Categories
Windows Functions that manipulate (read, write, delete, modify) the local Windows registry. This
Registry also includes the ability to modify autoruns to persist a binary across boots.
Registry.Key.Create The application may attempt to create a new key in the registry.
: Keys are commonly used to persist settings and other
configuration information, but other data can be stored as well.
Registry.Key.Delete: Registry.Key.Delete: This application may attempt to delete a key

from the registry. While it is common to delete only keys that the
application itself created, with sufficient permissions, Windows
may not prevent an application from deleting other applications’
keys as well.
Registry.Key.Autoru This indicates the application may use the registry to try to ensure
n: it or another application is run automatically on system startup.
This is a common way to ensure that a program continues to run
even after a machine is restarted.
Registry.Value.Delet This indicates the application may attempt to delete the value
e: associated with a particular key. As with the deletion of a key, this
may not represent malicious activity so long as the application only
deletes its own keys’ values.
Registry.Value.Set: The application may attempt to set a value in the registry. This may
represent malicious behavior if the value is set in a system key or
the key of another application.
Registry.Value.Set. This indicates the application may store binary data in the registry.
Binary: This data could be encrypted, compressed, or otherwise is not
plain text.
Cerberus Stage 2 Windows Registry Function Call Categories (Continued)
Registry.Value.Set. This indicates the application may write plain text to the registry.
Text: While the ‘text’ flag may be set, this does not mandate that the
application write human-readable text to the registry.
Registry.Value.Set. The application may set a value indicating it will use the registry to
Autorun: persist on the machine even after it restarts.
Surveillance Call Categories

Cerberus Stage 2 Surveillance Function Call Categories
Surveillance Usage of functions that provide audio/video monitoring, keylogging, etc.
Driver.Setup: Functionality in this category involves manipulation of INF files,

logging, and other driver-related tasks. Drivers are used to gain
complete control over a system, potentially even gaining control of
other security products.
Driver.DirectLoad: Functionality in this category involves loading drivers. As noted in

‘driver.setup’, drivers represent ultimate control over a host system
and should be extremely trustworthy.
Uses Cryptography Call Categories

Cerberus Stage 2 Uses Cryptography Function Call Categories
Uses Usage of the Microsoft CryptoAPI functions.
Cryptography
Crypto.Hash.Comp This indicates a hash function may be used by the target

ute: application. Hash functions are used to verify the integrity of
communications or files to ensure they were not tampered with.
Crypto.Algorithm.X The “XX” could be any of several values, including ‘md5’, ‘sha-1’, or
X: ‘sha-256’. These represent particular kinds of hashes which the
target application may use.
Crypto.MagicValue: This indicates that the target contains strings associated with
cryptographic functionality. Even if the application does not use
Windows OS functionality to use cryptography, the ‘magic values’
will exist so long as the target uses standard cryptographic
algorithms.
Low-level Access Call Categories
Cerberus Stage 2 Low-level Access Function Call Categories
Low-level Functions that access low-level operating system resources, for example reading sectors
Access directly from disk.
Driver.Setup: Functionality in this category involves manipulation of INF files,

logging, and other driver-related tasks. Drivers are used to gain
complete control over a system, potentially even gaining control of
other security products.
Driver.DirectLoad: Functionality in this category involves loading drivers. As noted in

‘driver.setup’, drivers represent ultimate control over a host system
and should be extremely trustworthy.
Debugging.dbghelp: This indicates use of functionality included in the dbghelp.dll

module from the "Debugging Tools for Windows" package from
Microsoft. With the proper permissions, the functionality in this
library represents a power mechanism for disguising activity from
investigators or for gaining control of other processes.
Misc.SystemRestore: Describes functionality involved in the System Restore feature,

including removing and adding restore points. Restore points are
often used as part of a malware-removal strategy, so removal of
arbitrary restore points, especially without user interaction, may
represent malicious activity.
Debugging. This is triggered if the application tries to determine whether it is

ChecksForDebugger: being debugged. Malicious applications commonly try to
determine whether they’re being analyzed so that they can modify
the behavior seen by analysts, making it difficult to discover their
true functionality.
Loads a driver Call Categories

Cerberus Stage 2 Loads a driver Function Call Categories
Loads a driver Functions that load drivers into a running system.
Subverts API Call Categories
Cerberus Stage 2 Subverts API Function Call Categories
Subverts API Undocumented API functions, or unsanctioned usage of Windows APIs (for example, using
native API calls).
Chapter 15
Running Cerberus Malware Analysis
This chapter includes the following topics about running Cerberus in FTK-based products.
About Reviewing Results of Cerberus (page 221)

Using Index Search with Cerberus (page 224)
Exporting a Cerberus Report (page 224)
Running Cerberus Analysis

Cerberus Analysis consists of two stages of analysis that help you to locate potentially malicious files. You can
enable this analysis when creating a case or using Additional Analysis.
See About Cerberus Malware Analysis on page 201.

Stage 1 is called a threat analysis and quickly examines an executable binary file for common attributes it may
possess. Stage 2 is called static analysis. Static analysis is a disassembly analysis that takes more time to
examine the details of the code within the file.
For more information see About Cerberus Malware Analysis (page 201)
Cerberus first runs a threat analysis. After it completes Stage 1 analysis, it can then automatically run a static
analysis against binaries with a threat score that is higher than a certain threshold.
Cerberus analysis may slow down the speed of your overall processing. Depending on the size of your data set
and the amount of executable binaries that you must examine, it may be advisable to run Cerberus analysis in
two steps after you complete initial case processing. In this case, you can first only run Cerberus analysis stage
1 and then after stage 1 is completed, you can then choose to run Cerberus Analysis stage 2.
By default, you must be a Case Manager to run Cerberus analysis.
Running Cerberus Malware Analysis Running Cerberus Analysis | 219

To run a Cerberus Analysis
When creating a new case In the Case Manager, in the New Case Options dialog, click Detailed
Options.
Select Evidence Processing, then click Cerberus Analysis.
If working an existing case in the Examiner, go to Evidence > Additional Analysis. In the Additional
Analysis dialog, under the section Indexing / Tools, click Cerberus
Analysis.
2. Next to Cerberus Analysis, click Cerberus Options.

3. In the Cerberus Analysis dialog, you can define the weight assigned to each Cerberus stage 1 score.
These Stage 1 scores are designed to identify and score specific malware properties and traits. The
user-defined weights can be saved per case as well as globally in the Evidence Processing templates.
4. In the Cerberus Analysis dialog, you can choose the option Perform Cerberus Analysis stage 2 if stage
1 threshold is greater than n. This option lets you choose to automatically run stage 2 analysis after
stage 1 analysis completes. Do one of the following:
To run stage 1 analysis only Deselect the option to Perform Cerberus Analysis stage 2 if stage 1
threshold is greater than, then only Cerberus Analysis stage 1 is run.
To run both stage 1 and Select the option to Perform Cerberus Analysis stage 2 if stage 1
stage 2 analysis threshold is greater than n.
Specify a threshold for a minimum threat score against which you want
to run the stage 2 analysis.
If a file’s threat score is higher than the threshold value that you set, then
stage 2 is run.If a file’s threat score is lower than the threshold value,
then stage 2 analysis is not run. By default, the threshold automatically
runs stage 2 analysis against files with a threat score greater than +20.
5. Click OK.
6. In the Additional Analysis dialog, click OK.
Running Cerberus Malware Analysis Running Cerberus Analysis | 220

About Reviewing Results of Cerberus
You can use the Examiner to locate executable binaries that have had Cerberus analysis run against them. For
executable binaries to have a Cerberus Score, a Case Administrator must first run a Cerberus Analysis.
The Examiner includes the following Cerberus filters that let you display only files that have had Cerberus run
against them.
Cerberus Score: Lets you limit the results that are displayed in the File List pane to only files that have
had Cerberus Stage 1 analysis run against them.
Cerberus Static Analysis: Lets you limit the results that are displayed in the File List pane to only files that
have had both Cerberus Stage 1 analysis and Cerberus Stage 2 analysis.
Cerberus Filter View
Cerberus Columns
In the File List pane, there are Cerberus columns that display Cerberus results data.
See About Cerberus Stage 1 Threat Analysis on page 202.
The data that the Cerberus filter uses to render the information is also available in columns in the Item List.
These columns can be sorted and filtered.
There is a Column template that is pre-configured with columns for each of the Cerberus Threat Score
Attributes.
See Icons of the File List Tool Bar on page 301.
You can you sort the list of files to see if they have had Cerberus Stage two Static Analysis run, see their threat
score, or to see if they have attributes from a Cerberus stage 1 analysis.
Cerberus Columns
Running Cerberus Malware Analysis About Reviewing Results of Cerberus | 221

Running Cerberus Malware Analysis About Reviewing Results of Cerberus | 222
Reviewing Results of Cerberus
To view files with a Cerberus score
1. In the Examiner, open the Explore tab.
2. In the Evidence Items pane, use Quick Picks to select the evidence.
3. In the Filter drop-down menu, select one of the following:
Cerberus Score: Lets you limit the results that are displayed in the File List pane to only files that
have had Cerberus Stage 1 analysis run against them.
Cerberus Static Analysis: Lets you limit the results that are displayed in the File List pane to only files
that have had both Cerberus Stage 1 analysis and Cerberus Stage 2 analysis.
4. In the File List pane, in the Column Setting drop-down, select Cerberus Results.
The File List pane shows all files that have been analyzed by Cerberus. It displays columns for each
attribute that Cerberus 1 analyzes. If a file contained an attribute, the column cell displays a Y. If the file
did not contain an attribute, the column cell displays an N. You can sort the files by clicking on a column
heading. You can sort the displayed results by clicking a column header.
5. To view more details about the file, select it in the File List pane.
Additional details about the Cerberus analysis are displayed in the File Content viewer in the Natural
tab.
Running Cerberus Malware Analysis Reviewing Results of Cerberus | 223

Using Index Search with Cerberus
The results of Cerberus analysis can be indexed so that you can run a search for them. The indexed information
is an un-tagged version of the Cerberus HTML report. It is appended to the end of the content that is displayed in
the File Content Pane’s Filtered view.
See also Searching Evidence with Index Search (page 411).
To search for a Cerberus result

1. In the Examiner, click Evidence > Additional Analysis.
2. In the Search Indexes section, select k® Text Index.
3. In the Miscellaneous section, select Cerberus Analysis.
4. Click Cerberus Options.
5. Enter a Cerberus stage 2 Threshold and click OK.
6. In the Additional Analysis dialog, click OK.
7. In the Examiner click the Index Search tab.
8. In the Terms field, enter a value from the Cerberus report to search for and click Add. For example
“Uses Cryptography.”
9. Click Search Now.
10. (Optional) In the Indexed Search FIlter Option dialog, you can apply a filter. For example Cerberus
Score.
11. Click OK.
12. In the Indexed Results pane, you can select a search result. The search hit is highlighted and displayed
in the File Content pane.
Exporting a Cerberus Report

You can export Cerberus results to an HTML file.
To export a Cerberus Report

1. In the File List pane, right click a file that has Cerberus results.
2. Click Export.
3. In the Export dialog, under File Options, select Save HTML view (if available).
4. In the Destination base path field, browse to the location where you want to save the export.
5. Click OK.
Running Cerberus Malware Analysis Using Index Search with Cerberus | 224
Chapter 16
Getting Started with KFF (Known File Filter)
Introducing KFF
This document contains the following information about understanding and getting started using KFF (Known
File Filter) with products 6.3 and later. If you are using products version 6.2 and earlier, refer to that version’s
documentation.
Important: AccessData applications versions 6.3 and later use a new KFF architecture. If you are using one of
the following applications version 6.3 or later, you must install and implement the new KFF
architecture:
Forensics products (FTK, FTK Pro, AD Lab, AD Enterprise)
Summation
eDiscovery
See What has Changed in Version 6.3 and Later on page 256.
See What Changed in Version 7.0 on page 258.
The following sections explain how to install and configure the KFF Server and KFF environment.
About KFF (page 227)

Installing the KFF Server (page 231)
Configuring the Location of the KFF Server (page 237)
Migrating Legacy KFF Data from Previous Versions (page 240)
Importing KFF Data (page 243)
Installing KFF Updates (page 253)
Uninstalling KFF (page 252)
KFF Library Reference Information (page 254)
What has Changed in Version 6.3 and Later (page 256)
What Changed in FTK and Lab Version 6.4 (page 257)
What Changed in March of 2018 (page 257)
After you have installed and configured the KFF Server and KFF environment refer to the following chapter on
how to use KFF.
In the FTK, Lab, and Enterprise User Guides: See Using the Known File Filter (KFF) on page 259.
In the eDiscovery Admin Guide: See Using KFF (Known File Filter) on page 147.
In the Summation Admin Guide: See Using D-NIST (Known File Filter) on page 122.
Getting Started with KFF (Known File Filter) Introducing KFF | 225
About the KFF Server and Geolocation
Geolocation (GeoIP) data is used for the Geolocation Visualization feature of several AccessData products.
Important: In versions 6.3 and later, Geolocation data is installed automatically and independently and is no
longer tied to KFF.
Getting Started with KFF (Known File Filter) Introducing KFF | 226
About KFF
KFF (Known File Filter) is a utility that compares the file hash values of known files against the files in your
project. The known files that you compare against may be the following:
Files that you want to ignore, such as operating system or application files
Files that you want to be alerted about, such as malware or other contraband files
The hash values of files, such as MD5, are based on the file’s content, not on the file name or extension. This
helps you identify files even if they are renamed.
Using KFF during your analysis can provide the following benefits:
Immediately identify and ignore 40-70% of files irrelevant to the project.

Immediately identify known contraband files.
Introduction to the KFF Architecture

There are two distinct components of the KFF architecture:
KFF Server - The KFF Server is the component that is used to store and process the KFF data against
your evidence. After you install the KFF Server, you import your KFF data into it.
See Installing the KFF Server on page 231.
KFF Data - The KFF data are the hashes of the known files that are compared against the files in your
project. The KFF data is organized in KFF Hash Sets and KFF Groups. The KFF data can be comprised
of hashes obtained from pre-configured libraries (such as NSRL) or custom hashes that you configure
yourself.
See Components of KFF Data on page 227.
Components of KFF Data
Item Description
Hash The unique MD5 or SHA-1 hash value of a file. This is the value that is compared
between known files and the files in your project.
Hash Set A collection of hashes that are related somehow. The hash set has an ID, status,
name, vendor, package, and version. In most cases, a set corresponds to a
collection of hashes from a single source that have the same status.
Group KFF Groups are containers that are used for managing the Hash Sets that are
used in a project.
KFF Groups can contains Hash Sets as well as other groups.
Projects can only use a single KFF Group. However, when configuring your
project you can select a single KFF Group which can contains nested groups.
Status The specified status of a hash set of the known files which can be either Ignore
or Alert. When a file in a project matches a known file, this is the reported status
of the file in the project.
Getting Started with KFF (Known File Filter) About KFF | 227
Item Description
Library A pre-defined collection of hashes that you can import into the KFF Server.
You can use the following pre-defined libraries:
 NSRL
 For law enforcement users, you can also use Project Vic libraries.
See About Pre-defined KFF Hash Libraries on page 228.
About the Organization of Hashes, Hash Sets, and KFF Groups

Hashes, such as MD5, SHA-1, etc., are based on the file’s content, not on the file name or extension.
You can also import hashes into the KFF Server in .CSV format.
For FTK-based products, you can also import hashes into the KFF Server that are contained in .TSV, .HKE,
.HKE.TXT, .HDI, .HDB, .hash, .NSRL, or .KFF file formats.
You can also manually add hashes.
Hashes are organized into Hash Sets. Hash Sets usually include hashes that have a common status, such as
Alert or Ignore.
Hash Sets must be organized into to KFF Groups before they can be utilized in a case or project.
About Pre-defined KFF Hash Libraries

There are pre-configured hash sets currently available for KFF that come from federal government agencies and
are available in KFF libraries.
See About KFF Pre-Defined Hash Libraries on page 254.
You can use the following KFF libraries:
NIST NSRL
See Importing the NIST NSRL Library on page 248.
For law enforcement users using forensic products, you can also use Project Vic libraries.
See Using Project VIC on page 275.
It is not required to use a pre-configured KFF library in order to use KFF. You can configure or import custom
hash sets. See your application’s Admin Guide for more information.
How KFF Works
The Known File Filter (KFF) is a body of MD5 and SHA1 hash values computed from electronic files. Some pre-
defined data is gathered and cataloged by several US federal government agencies or you can configure you
own. KFF is used to locate files residing within project evidence that have been previously encountered by other
investigators or archivists. Identifying previously cataloged (known) files within a project can expedite its
investigation.
When evidence is processed with the MD5 Hash (and/or SHA-1 Hash) and KFF options, a hash value for each
file item within the evidence is computed, and that newly computed hash value is searched for within the KFF
data. Every file item whose hash value is found in the KFF is considered to be a known file.
Note: If two hash sets in the same group have the same MD5 hash value, they must have the same metadata.
If you change the metadata of one hash set, all hash sets in the group with the same MD5 hash file will be
updated to the same metadata.
The KFF data is organized into Groups and stored in the KFF Server. The KFF Server service performs lookup
functions.
Status Values
In order to accelerate an investigation, each known file can labeled as either Alert or Ignore, meaning that the file
is likely to be forensically interesting (Alert) or uninteresting (Ignore). Other files have a status of Unknown.
The Alert/Ignore designation can assist the investigator to hone in on files that are relevant, and avoid spending
inordinate time on files that are not relevant. Known files are presented in the Overview Tab’s File Status
Container, under “KFF Alert files” and “KFF Ignorable.”
Hash Sets
The hash values comprising the KFF are organized into hash sets. Each hash set has a name, a status, and a
listing of hash values. Consider two examples. The hash set “ZZ00001 Suspected child porn” has a status of
Alert and contains 12 hash values. The hash set “BitDefender Total Security 2008 9843” has a status of Ignore
and contains 69 hash values. If, during the course of evidence processing, a file item’s hash value were found to
belong to the “ZZ00001 Suspected child porn” set, then that file item would be presented in the KFF Alert files
list. Likewise, if another file item’s hash value were found to belong to the “BitDefender Total Security 2008 9843”
set, then that file would be presented in the KFF Ignorable list.
In order to determine whether any Alert file is truly relevant to a given project, and whether any Ignore file is truly
irrelevant to a project, the investigator must understand the origins of the KFF’s hash sets, and the methods
used to determine their Alert and Ignore status assignments.
You can install libraries of pre-defined hash sets or you can import custom hash sets. The pre-defined hash sets
contain a body of MD5 and SHA1 hash values computed from electronic files that are gathered and cataloged by
several US federal government agencies.
Higher Level Structure and Usage
Because hash set groups have the properties just described, and because custom hash sets and groups can be
defined by the investigator, the KFF mechanism can be leveraged in creative ways. For example, the
investigator may define a group of hash sets created from encryption software and another group of hash sets
created from child pornography files and then apply only those groups while processing.
About KFF Data Formats

When importing KFF data, you can import the following file formats:
CSV file format

Forensics products: .HDB, .HKE, .KFF, .XML, .HASH file formats
Forensics products used by law enforcement: Project VIC JSON file format
About the CSV Format

When you import or export KFF data, you can import from or export to a CSV format. When you use the .CSV
format, you use a single .CSV file at a time. The .CSV file can contain hashes, Hash Sets and KFF Groups that
you import or export.
Using the CSV format
Exporting to When you export KFF data using the CSV format, you can export specific pieces
CSV format of KFF data, such as one or more Hash Sets or one or more KFF Groups. The
exported CSV contains the hashes as well as all of the information about any
associated Hash Sets and KFF Groups.
Each export is contained in one .CSV file.
CSV files can be easily viewed and can be manually edited.
Importing When you import a CSV file, the data in the file is data is added to your existing
from CSV KFF data. The CSV file can be a simple file containing only the hashes of files, or
format it can contain additional information about Hash Sets and KFF Groups.
For example, suppose you manually created four Hash Sets and one KFF Group.
That would be the only contents in your KFF Server. Suppose you import a .CSV
file that contains five hash sets and two KFF Groups. They will be added together
for a total of nine Hash Sets and three KFF Groups.
To import .CSV files, you can do either of the following:
 Use the KFF Import feature in your application.
See Using the Known File Feature chapter.
 Use the stand-alone KFF Import Utility.
See Importing KFF Data on page 243.
To view a sample of a .CSV file that contains binaries and Hash Sets and KFF Groups, perform a CSV export
and view the file in Excel. You can also use the format of CSV files that were exported in previous versions.
Installing the KFF Server
About Installing the KFF Server

In order to use KFF, you must first install and configure a KFF Server.
For product versions 6.3 and later, you install a KFF Server by installing Apache Cassandra.
For product versions 5.6 - 6.2, you install a KFF Server by installing the AccessData Elasticsearch.
Where you install the KFF Server depends on the product you are using with KFF.
See Determining Where to Install the KFF Server on page 233.
About KFF Server Versions

The KFF Server (AccessData Elasticsearch Windows Service) may be updated from time to time. It is best to
use the latest version.
Product KFF Server Released Installation Instructions

Version
6.3, 6.4, Apache Cassandra  March 2018 See Determining Where to Install the
6.5, 7.0 (stand-alone update) KFF Server on page 233.
Version 3.11.2
See Downloading the Latest KFF
Installation Files on page 232.
This 3.11.2 version should be installed
over the 3.11.0 version (do not uninstall
3.11.0). This will maintain your KFF
data.
6.3 Apache Cassandra  October 2017 with 6.3 Note: This version is not compatible
versions of with the Java version 8 update 161.
Version 3.11.0 This was fixed with Cassandra
FTK-based products
database 3.11.2
Summation
eDiscovery
About Upgrading from Earlier Versions

If you have used KFF with applications with a previous KFF Server architecture (products 6.2 and earlier), you
can migrate your legacy KFF data to the new architecture.
See Migrating Legacy KFF Data from Previous Versions on page 240.
Getting Started with KFF (Known File Filter) Installing the KFF Server | 231
Process for Installing KFF
The process for installing KFF is as follows:
1. Downloading the Latest KFF Installation Files (page 232)

2. Determining Where to Install the KFF Server (page 233)
3. Installing the KFF Server (page 235)
4. Configuring the KFF Server location:
Configuring the KFF Server Location on AD Lab and AD Enterprise (page 237)
Configuring the KFF Server Location on Summation or eDiscovery (page 238)
5. (Optional) Upgrading or importing KFF data.
See Migrating Legacy KFF Data from versions 5.5 and earlier on page 241.
About Importing KFF Data (page 243)
Importing Pre-defined KFF Data Libraries (page 247)
Downloading the Latest KFF Installation Files

You can download ISO files which has the latest KFF files. Files may be updated from time to time.
To download the latest KFF Installation Files

1. Go to the AccessData Current Releases - Digital Forensics product download page.
You can also download the file from the FTK or AD Lab product download pages.
2. Expand the following:
Known File Filter (KFF) Compatible with 5.6 and up
3. Click the following:
DOWNLOAD Page for Known File Filter (KFF) Compatible with 6.4 and Newer Versions.
4. Click Download Now.
Determining Where to Install the KFF Server
Where you install the KFF Server depends on the application and environment you are running.
For FTK and FTK Pro applications, the KFF Server must be installed on the same computer that runs the
FTK Examiner application.
For AD Lab and AD Enterprise, applications, the KFF Server can be installed on the same computer that
runs the FTK Examiner application or on a different computer. For performance purposes, it is generally
installed on a different computer.
See AD Lab and AD Enterprise on page 233.
For Summation or eDiscovery, the KFF Server may be installed on either the same computer as the
application or on a different computer. For large environments, it is recommended that the KFF Server be
installed on a dedicated computer.
See Summation or eDiscovery on page 234.
After installing the KFF Server, you configure the application with the location of the KFF Server.
See Configuring the Location of the KFF Server on page 237.
AD Lab and AD Enterprise

With AD Lab and Enterprise, you generally install the KFF Server on a different computer than the application.
Special Configuration Steps for KFF

When you install the KFF Server on a different computer than the application you perform special configuration
steps by doing the following:
Configure the KFF Sever location.

See Configuring the KFF Server Location on AD Lab and AD Enterprise on page 237.
Application version 6.3 and later:
During the installation of Cassandra, you must enable and configure Remote Access.
If you installed Cassandra without enabling remote access, you can manually configure Cassandra.
See Manually Configuring Remote Setting for Cassandra on page 239.
Summation or eDiscovery
With Summation or eDiscovery, you may have one of the following environments. The type of environment
determines where and how to configure the KFF Server.
Environment KFF Server Location and Configuration

Single Server All components of the application are installed on a single server.
 You can install the KFF Server on this server or a different remote computer.
 If you install the KFF Server on the same server, no special configuration for
KFF is needed.
 If you install the KFF Server on a remote computer, you must perform special
configuration steps for KFF.
Distributed Components Components of the application are installed on multiple servers. For example,
with Local Processing the MAP component is on one server and other application components, such as
WCF Services and Local Processing are installed on a separate computer.
 You can install the KFF Server on the same server as WCF Services and
Local Processing or on a different remote computer.
 If you install the KFF Server on the same server, no special configuration for
KFF is needed.
 If you install the KFF Server on a remote computer, you must perform special
configuration steps for KFF.
Distributed Processing You have installed the Distributed Processing Manager and Distributed
Manager and Engines Processing Engines.
 You can install the KFF Server on any computer.
 You must perform special configuration steps for KFF.
Dedicated KFF Server For performance, you can install the KFF Server on a dedicated computer.
 You must perform special configuration steps for KFF.
If you do not need to perform special configuration steps, you can use default settings.
Special Configuration Steps for KFF

If needed, when you perform special configuration steps, you must do the following:
Configure the KFF Sever location by editing two application configuration files.
See Configuring the KFF Server Location on Summation or eDiscovery on page 238.
Application version 6.3 and later:
During the installation of Cassandra, you must enable and configure remote access.
Ifyou installed Cassandra without enabling remote access, you can manually configure Cassandra.
Installing the KFF Server
How you install the KFF Server depends on version of the product you are running.
For product versions 6.3 and later, you install the KFF Server by installing Apache Cassandra 3.11.2.
Cassandra Prerequisites
Python 2.7 When you install Cassandra, it will also automatically install Python 2.7.13 if
needed.
Java 8 (64-bit) Important: In order to install Cassandra, you must have 64-bit Java for Windows
version 8. No other version of Java (7 or 9) is currently supported. The
latest version of Java that has been tested with KFF is Java 8 update
192 (64-bit).
Before installing Cassandra, you must install Java 8.
To install Java 8, go to:
https://java.com/en/download/windows-64bit.jsp
If you are using a 32-bit browser, your browser may automatically download the
32-bit version. You must use the 64-bit version.
Important: A previous release of the Cassandra database (3.11.0) that was

released with 6.3 is not compatible with the Java version 8 update 161
or higher. If using Cassandra database 3.11.0, update to 3.11.2.
See About KFF Server Versions on page 231.
Cassandra and Firewalls

During the installation, if you check the box to Enable Remote Access, the installer creates an inbound exception
rule for the port entered in the Cassandra installer (if the rule has not already been created).
The rule has the following attributes:
name = AccessData Cassandra Remote Access Port

direction = in
program = “<install directory>\Cassandra\bin\daemon\prunsrv.exe”
local port = 9042 (or whatever the user entered)
protocol = tcp
If you uninstall Cassandra, the installer checks to see if Enable Remote Access was checked during install, and
if it was, the installer looks for the above firewall rule using the 5 listed attributes, and if it finds the rule, it
removes it from the firewall.
Installing Cassandra
To install Cassandra
1. Select the computer that you want to install Cassandra on.
2. If needed, install 64-bit Java 8.
See Cassandra Prerequisites on page 235.
3. Use one of the following to access AccessData_Cassandra_Installer.exe:
Installation Disk
Download ISO
See Downloading the Latest KFF Installation Files on page 232.
4. Launch Cassandra\AccessData_Cassandra_Installer.exe.
5. If needed, click Install to install Python 2.7 (x64).
6. On the Cassandra installer Welcome page, click Next.
7. Accept the license terms and click Next.
8. Verify or change the the Destination Folder and click Next.
9. If needed, configure Remote Access.
Important: If installing for FTK, do not enable Remote Access. FTK requires a setting of localhost.
9a. Select Enable Remote Access.
9b. In the RPC_Address field, enter the IP address of the computer you are installing on.
For example, 10.10.10.10.
9c. In the Native Transport Port Number field, leave the default 9042.
9d. Click Next.
If you do not enable Remote Access during installation, you can manually configure it later.
10. If you enabled Remote Access, set the User Credentials for the service and click Next.
11. Click Install to perform the installation.
12. Click Finish.
13. If your AccessData application is already open, restart it.
Configuring the Location of the KFF Server
After installing the KFF Server, on the computer running the application, such as Summation, eDiscovery, FTK,
or AD Lab, you configure the location of the KFF Server.
Do one of the following:
Configuring the KFF Server Location on AD Lab and AD Enterprise (page 237)
Configuring the KFF Server Location on Summation or eDiscovery (page 238)
Manually Configuring Remote Setting for Cassandra (page 239)
Configuring the KFF Server Location on AD Lab and AD Enterprise

If running FTK, you use default settings.
If running with AD Lab or AD Enterprise, and if not using default settings, before using KFF, you must configure
the location of the KFF Server.
Important: To configure KFF, you must be logged in with Admin privileges.
To view or edit KFF configuration settings

1. In the Case Manager, click Tools > Preferences > Configure KFF.
2. You can set or view the address of the KFF Server.
If you installed the KFF Server on the same computer as the application, this value will be localhost.
If you installed the KFF Server on a different computer, identify the KFF server.
3. Click Test to validate communication with the KFF Server.
4. Click Save.
5. Click OK.
Getting Started with KFF (Known File Filter) Configuring the Location of the KFF Server | 237
Configuring the KFF Server Location on Summation or eDiscovery
When using the KFF Server with Summation or eDiscovery, two configuration files must point to the KFF Server
location.
Important: If you are upgrading to 6.3 or later from 6.2 or earlier, the syntax of and the port values for the KFF
Server have changed. If the KFF Server is not being recognized, make sure that the two config files
are correct.
See What has Changed in Version 6.3 and Later on page 256.
KFF Server Location scenarios

If one of the following is true, you can use the default settings and the KFF Server location is configured as
“localhost”.
Your Summation or eDiscovery installation is on a single server

Your Summation or eDiscovery installation is on multiple servers, and you install the KFF Server on
the same server that is running WorkManager
If needed, you can verify the settings without changing them.
If one of the following is true, you must manually specify the location of the KFF Server:
If you change the location of your KFF Server

If you install the KFF Server on a different computer than is running WorkManager
If you are using distributed processing
For KFF processing to work correctly in this situation, change the the KFFServerURL setting from “localhost”
to the actual IP address.
Manually Verifying or Configuring the KFF Server Location on products 6.3 and later
1. Configure AdgWindowsServiceHost.exe.config:
1a. On the computer running the work manger service, go to C:\Program
Files\AccessData\Common\FTK Business Services.
1b. Open AdgWindowsServiceHost.exe.config.
1c. Find the line <add key=”KFFServerUrl” value=”localhost:9042” />.
Note: 9042 is the default port for Cassandra.
1d. If needed, change localhost to be the location IP address of your KFF server.
For example, value=”10.10.10.10:9042”
Otherwise, leave as localhost.
1e. Leave the following line unchanged:
<add key=”KFFServerDBType” value=”Cassandra” />
1f. Save and close the file.
1g. If you changed the file, restart the AccessData Business Services Common service.
2. Configure Infrastructure.WorkExecutionServices.Host.exe.config:
2a. On the computer running the work manger service, go to C:\Program
Files\AccessData\eDiscovery\WorkManager.
2b. Open Infrastructure.WorkExecutionServices.Host.exe.config.
2c. Find the line <add key=”KFFServerUrl” value=”localhost:9042” />.
Note: 9042 is the default port for Cassandra.
2d. If needed, change localhost to be the location IP address of your KFF server.
For example, value=”10.10.10.10:9042”
Otherwise, leave as localhost.
2e. Leave the following line unchanged:
2f. Save and close the file.
2g. If you changed the file, restart the AccessData Work Manager service.
3. Migrate or Import your KFF Hash Data.
See About Importing KFF Data on page 243.
Manually Configuring Remote Setting for Cassandra

In some situations Cassandra needs be to configured to enable Remote Access.

During the installation of Cassandra there is the option to Enable Remote Access and then set the
RPC_Address (the IP address of the computer that Cassandra is installed on).
If you set these settings correctly during the installation, no further configuration is needed.
However, if you did not enable remote access or make a change, you can manually configure the remote
settings for Cassandra.
Note: Use an editor that supports YAML files.
To manually configuring remote settings for Cassandra

1. Go to the location that you installed Cassandra.
By default, it is C:\Program Files\AccessData\Cassandra.
2. Open the \conf folder.
3. Edit the cassandra.yaml file.
4. Search for rpc_address:
5. Change the address from local host to the IP or DNS name of the computer running Cassandra.
For example change rpc_address: localhost to rpc_address: 10.10.10.10
6. Search for native_transport_port:
7. Verify that the setting is:
native_transport_port: 9042 (or the port you are using)
8. Save and exit the file.
9. Restart the AccessData Cassandra service.
Migrating Legacy KFF Data from Previous Versions
You can migrate KFF Data from a previous KFF Server architecture to a newer one.
See Migrating Legacy KFF Data from versions 5.6 - 6.2 to 6.4 on page 240.
See Migrating Legacy KFF Data from versions 5.5 and earlier on page 241.
Migrating Legacy KFF Data from versions 5.6 - 6.2 to 6.4

If you have are using applications version 6.3 and later and you previously used KFF with applications versions
5.5 - 6.2, you can migrate the older data from the Elasticsearch KFF Server to the new KFF Server architecture
used in 6.3 and later. To migrate the KFF data, you use the AccessData Has Manager Migration Tool. This tool is
a separate Windows-based application.
Important: Please note the following:
Applications version 6.3 and later can only use the new KFF architecture that was introduced in versions
6.3. If you want to use KFF data from previous versions, you must migrate the data.
If you have NSRL, NDIC, or DHS data in your legacy data, those sets will not be migrated. You must re-
import them using the 6.3 versions or later of those libraries. Only legacy custom KFF data will be
migrated.
You must use the same version of the KFF Migration as the product you are using. If you are using 6.4,
you must use the 6.4 version of the KFF Migration Tool.
You cannot migrate data from 5.5 and earlier directly to 6.3 or later. You must do a two-step migration
process and migrate first to the 5.6-6.2 format.
If you already have data in Cassandra and you migrate from Elasticsearch, if the same hash exists on
bother servers, and one if either one of them has an Alert status, it will be given an Alert status.
Otherwise, data will be migrated with the same values.
Legacy KFF data is migrated to KFF Groups and Hash Sets on the new KFF Server.
You migrate data using the KFF Migration Tool. To use the KFF Migration Tool, you identify the following:
The server where the legacy Elasticsearch KFF data is located.

The server where the legacy Elasticsearch KFF data will be located to (the Cassandra location).
To install the KFF Migration Tool

1. You can install the KFF Migration Tool onto any computer as long as it can access the servers running
Elasticsearch and Cassandra.
2. Use one of the following to access the KFF_Migration_Tool.exe installer:
InstallationDisk:
Run the autorun.exe
Click the Hash Manager Migration Tool.
Download ISO:
Run KFF_Migration\KFF_Migration_Tool.exe
3. Complete the installation wizard.
The default path is Program Files (x86)\AccessData\HashManagerMigration.
You can use the default or enter a new path.
4. The tool is automatically opened after installation.
Getting Started with KFF (Known File Filter) Migrating Legacy KFF Data from Previous Versions | 240
To migrate legacy KFF data
1. Launch the KFF Hash Manager Migration Tool.
2. Enter the location and port of the legacy ElasticSearch KFF data.
For example, if ElasticSearch is on the same computer, you can use the default location of
http://localhost:9200.
If it is on a different computer, enter the IP address and port of the computer. For example, http://
10.10.10.10:9200.
3. Enter the location of the new KFF server (Cassandra database).
For example, if Cassandra is on the same computer, you can use the default location of
localhost. If it is on a different computer, enter the IP address, for example, 10.10.10.10.
4. Click Start Migration.
Migrating Legacy KFF Data from versions 5.5 and earlier

If you have used KFF with applications versions 5.5 and earlier, you can migrate that data from the legacy KFF
Server to the Elasticsearch KFF Server architecture that was used in version 5.6 - 6.2. You cannot migrate data
from 5.5 directly to 6.3 or later. Instead, you must upgrade the legacy to a 5.6 - 6.2 format, then migrate that to
6.3.
Important: Applications version 5.6 - 6.2 can only use the Elasticsearch KFF architecture. If you want to use KFF
data from previous versions, you must migrate the data.
Important: If you have NSRL, NDIC, or DHS data in your legacy data, those sets will not be migrated. You must
re-import them using the 5.6 - 6.2 versions of those libraries. Only legacy custom KFF data will be
migrated.
Legacy KFF data is migrated to KFF Groups and Hash Sets on the new KFF Server.
Because KFF Templates are no longer used, they will be migrated as KFF Groups, and the groups that were
under the template will be added as sub-groups.
You migrate data using the KFF Migration Tool. To use the KFF Migration Tool, you identify the following:
The Storage Directory folder where the legacy KFF data is located.
This was folder was configured using the KFF Server Configuration utility when you installed the legacy
KFF Server. If needed, you can use this utility to view the KFF Storage Directory. The default location of
the KFF_Config.exe file is Program Files\AccessData\KFF.
The URL of the new KFF Server (the computer running the AccessData Elastic Search Windows Service)
This is populated automatically if the new KFF Server has been installed.
To install the KFF Migration Tool

1. On the computer where you have installed the KFF Server, access the KFF Installation disc, and run the
autorun.exe.
2. Click the 64 bit or 32 bit Install KFF Migration Utility.
To migrate legacy KFF data

1. On the legacy KFF Server, you must stop the KFF Service.
You can stop the service manually or use the legacy KFF Config.exe utility.
2. On the new KFF Server, launch the KFF Migration Tool.
3. Enter the directory of the legacy KFF data.
4. The URL of Elasticsearch should be listed.
5. Click Start.
6. When completed, review the summary data.
Importing KFF Data
About Importing KFF Data

You can import hashes and KFF Groups that have been previous configured.
You can import KFF data in one of the following formats:
KFF Data sources that you can import
Source Description
Pre-configured KFF libraries You can import KFF data from the following pre-configured libraries
 NIST NSRL
 Law enforcement users: Project VIC
To import large KFF libraries, use the KFF Import Utility.
See About KFF Data Import Tools on page 243.
See Importing Pre-defined KFF Data Libraries on page 247.
See KFF Library Reference Information on page 254.
Custom Hash Sets and KFF You can import custom hashes from CSV and other file types.
Groups See About the CSV Format on page 230.
You can import custom CSV files either through the application or the KFF
Import Utility.
Other files types can be imported in FTK.
See About KFF Data Import Tools on page 243.
About KFF Data Import Tools

When you import KFF data, you can use one of two tools:
KFF Data Import Tools
The application’s Import The KFF management feature in the application lets you import .CSV files
feature (especially files that only have one KFF status).
For FTK-based forensics products, you can also import custom hashes from the
following file types:
 Delimited files (CSV or TSV)
 Hash Database files (HDB)
 FTK Exported KFF files (KFF)
 FTK Supported XML files (XML)
 FTK Exported Hash files (HASH)
 Project VIC JSON files
To import these kinds of files, use the KFF Import feature in your application.
See Using the Known File Feature chapter.
You can also manually create your own KFF hash set data.
Getting Started with KFF (Known File Filter) Importing KFF Data | 243
KFF Data Import Tools
KFF Import Utility You can import files using the KFF Import Utility.
It is recommended that you use the KFF Import Utility to import files in the
following situations:
 A CSV file that has a mixture of Alert and Ignore statuses.
 Large pre-configured libraries:
NIST NSRL
See Using the KFF Import Utility on page 245.
Important: You must use the same version of the KFF Import Utility as the
product you are using. If you are using 6.4, you must use the 6.4
version of the KFF Import Utility to import the NSRL library into the
KFF Server.
About Default Status Values

When you import KFF data, you configure a default status value of Alert or Ignore. When adding Hash Sets to
KFF Groups, you can configure the KFF Groups to use the default status values of the Hash Set or you can
configure the KFF Group with a status that will override the default Hash Set values.
About Duplicate Hashes

If multiple Hash Set files containing the same Hash identifier are imported into a single KFF Group, the group
keeps the last Hash Set’s metadata information, overwriting the previous Hash Sets’ metadata. This only
happens within an individual group and not across multiple groups.
Getting Started with KFF (Known File Filter) Importing KFF Data | 244
Using the KFF Import Utility
It is important that you use the correct version of the KFF Import Utility with the version of the application you are
using. The KFF Import Utility was modified significantly for 6.3.
Important: You must use the same version of the KFF Import Utility as the product you are using.
If you are using 6.4, you must use the 6.4 version of the KFF Import Utility to import the NSRL library into
the KFF Server.
If you are using 6.3, you must use the 6.3 version of the KFF Import Utility to import the NSRL library into
the KFF Server.
Using the KFF Import Utility versions 6.3 and later
About the KFF Import Utility

Due to the large size of some KFF data, a stand-alone KFF Import utility is available to use to import the data.
This KFF Import utility can import large amounts of data faster then using the import feature in the application.
It is recommend that you install and use the KFF Import utility to import the following pre-configured libraries:
 NIST NSRL
After importing NSRL libraries, these libraries are displayed in the Currently Installed Sets list.
You can also use the KFF Import Utility to remove the NSRL, NDIC, or DHS indexes that you have imported.
Installing the KFF Import Utility versions 6.3, 6.4, and later
You must use the matching version of the KFF Import Utility with your application, for example, 6.3 or 6.4.
To install the KFF Import Utility

1. On the computer where you have installed the KFF Server, access the KFF Installation disc, and run the
autorun.exe.
2. Use one of the following to access the KFF_Import_Utility.exe installer:
Installation Disk:
Run the autorun.exe
Click the Install KFF Import Utility.
Download ISO:
Run KFFImportUtil\KFF_Migration_Tool.exe
4. To import libraries, see See About Importing Pre-defined KFF Data Libraries on page 247.
Getting Started with KFF (Known File Filter) Using the KFF Import Utility | 245
Importing a CSV Using the KFF Import Utility versions 6.3 and later
You can import Hash Sets and KFF Groups by importing a custom CSV file.
See About the CSV Format on page 230.
To import a CSV using the KFF Import Utility

1. Open the KFF Import Utility.
2. Click the Browse .. button and locate the CSV that you want to import.
3. Click Open.
4. (Optional) - Enter package, vendor, version, etc.
5. If you installed Cassandra enabling Remote Access, in the Server address field, you must enter the
computer’s IP that has Cassandra installed on it, even if it is on the same computer as the import utility.
Otherwise, leave it as localhost.
6. Click Import.
7. When complete, click OK.
Verifying a File Using the KFF Import Utility versions 6.3 and later
You can verify imported Hash Sets and KFF Groups to ensure the correct file is being imported.
To verify a file using the KFF Import Utility

1. Open the KFF Import Utility.
2. Click the Browse .. button and locate the file that you want to import.
3. (Optional) - Enter set name, package, vendor, version, and set status.
4. If you installed Cassandra enabling Remote Access, in the Server address field, you must enter the
computer’s IP that has Cassandra installed on it, even if it is on the same computer as the import utility.
Otherwise, leave it as localhost.
5. Click Verify.
6. When complete, the Success window will appear, showing the following details:
Group Count, Set Count, Hash Count, Photo DNA Count
7. If you would like to open the log for further examination of the data, select Yes. If not, select No and the
window will close.
Removing Pre-defined KFF Libraries Using the KFF Import Utility version 6.3 and later
You can remove a pre-defined KFF Library that you have previously imported.
You cannot see or remove existing custom KFF data (your own CSVs or manually entered data).
To remove pre-defined KFF Libraries

1. On the KFF Server, open the KFF Import Utility.
2. Select the library that you want to remove.
3. Click Remove.
Importing Pre-defined KFF Data Libraries
About Importing Pre-defined KFF Data Libraries

After you install the KFF Server, you can import pre-defined NIST NSRL libraries.
Important: In versions 6.3, you must import specific files for these versions. It is recommend that you use the
KFF Import Utility.
After importing pre-defined KFF Libraries, you can remove them from the KFF Server.
Removing Pre-defined KFF Libraries Using the KFF Import Utility version 6.3 and later (page 246)
See the following sections:
Importing the NIST NSRL Library (page 248)
Importing the NIST NSRL Library
To import NSRL data in applications version 6.3, 6.4, 7.0, and later, you can do one of the following:
Download version 2.58 or later RDS files from nist.gov and import them.
See Downloading and Importing the NIST NSRL Files from NIST.ORG on page 248.
Download version 2.54 files from AccessData and import them.
See Downloading and Importing the NIST NSRL Files from NIST.ORG on page 248.
Important: The NSRL library is very large. It can take several hours to import it.
Downloading and Importing the NIST NSRL Files from NIST.ORG

You can download the latest ISO files directly from the NIST.GOV.
After you have downloaded the files, you import them into the KFF Server.
Before importing NSRL data, we recommend that you verify the hashes of the iso files that you downloaded from
NIST. This assures that the data has not been corrupted.
Important: Please note the following:

The complete NSRL library data is contained in a large (3 GB) .ZIP file in the image file. When expanded,
the data is about 14 GB.
You must not have a previous version version of the NSRL library installed. If needed, uninstall the
previous version first.
To download NSRL files from NIST.ORG

1. Go to https://www.nist.gov/software-quality-group/national-software-reference-library-nsrl
2. Click NSRL Download.
3. Click Current RDS Hash Sets.
4. Click and download Modern RDS.
5. Compare and the hashes of your downloaded iso files with the hashes listed at:
https://s3.amazonaws.com/rds.nsrl.nist.gov/RDS/current/version.txt
(This address is case-sensitive)
To prepare NSRL files for importing
1. Mount the RDS ISO file.
2. Create a folder that you can browse to from the Import Utility (for example, RDS_258_modern).
3. Extract the NSRLFile.txt.zip file into that RDS folder.
4. Copy the following files from the ISO image to that same RDS folder:
NSRLProd.txt
NSRLOS.txt
NSRLMfg.txt
5. Create an AppTypes.txt file.

In this file, you can specify application files that you may want to flag as Alert rather than Ignore.
5a. In the same folder as the NSRLFile.txt.zip file, create a text file named AppTypes.txt.
5b. In the file, include the following text:
This is a text file listing the application types (one per line) which should have "Alert"
status set:
Anti-KeyLogger
Computer Investigation
Data Encryption
Disk Wiper
Encryption
Forensic
Forensic Toolkit
Hacker Tool
Keyboard Logger
Steganography
5c. Save and exit the file.
6. Verify that the folder has the following files:
NSRLProd.txt
NSRLOS.txt
NSRLMfg.txt
NSRLFile.txt
AppTypes.txt
To import the NIST NSRL library (2.58 or later)

1. On the KFF Server, launch the 6.3 or later version of the KFF Import Utility.
See About Importing KFF Data on page 243.
2. Do the following:
2a. In the File to Import field, browse to and select the NSRLFile.txt file that you previously extracted.
2b. If you installed Cassandra enabling Remote Access, in the Server address field, you must enter
the computer’s IP that has Cassandra installed on it, even if it is on the same computer as the
import utility. Otherwise, use localhost.
2c. Click Import.
2d. When the import is complete, click OK.
2e. The NSRL library will be listed in the Currently Installed Sets.
Importing the NIST NSRL Library Files from AccessData (v2.54)
You can download version 2.54 files from AccessData and import them.
See About NSRL Library Files Provided by AccessData on page 250.
Important: The NSRL library data is contained in a large (3.75 GB) .ZIP file. When expanded, the data is about
21.7 GB. Make sure that your file system can support files of this size.
About NSRL Library Files Provided by AccessData
You can import the NSRL library into your KFF Server. During the import, two KFF Groups are created:
NSRL_Alert and NSRL_Ignore. In FTK-based products, these two groups are automatically added to the Default
KFF Group.
The NSRL libraries are updated from time to time. The NSRL import feature supports appending new data and
updating existing data when importing a newer version. To import and maintain the NSRL data, you do the
following:
Process for Importing and Maintaining the NIST NSRL Library
1. Import the complete You must first install the most current complete NSRL library. You can later add
NSRL library. updates to it.
To access and import the complete NSRL library, see
Importing the NIST NSRL Library (page 248)
2. Import updates to the When updates are made available, import the updates to bring the data up-to
library date.
See Installing KFF Updates on page 253.
Important: In order to use the NSRL updates, you must first import the complete
library. When you install an NSRL update, you must keep the previous NSRL
versions installed in order to maintain the complete set of NSRL data.
Available NRSL library files (new format)
NSRL Library
Release Released Information
Complete library Mar 2017 For use only with applications version 5.6 and later.
version 2.54 Contains the full NSRL library up through update 2.54.
(source .ZIP file)
Complete library Nov 2014 For use only with applications version 5.6 and later.
version 2.45 Contains the full NSRL library up through update 2.45.
(source .ZIP file)
To install the v 2.54 NSRL library

1. On the computer that you want to be the KFF Server, extract the nsrlsource_2.54.zip file that is at the
root of the ISO.
2. On the computer that you want to be the KFF Server, install the AccessData Cassandra Service.
3. Install the KFF Import Utility version 6.3.
4. Use the KFF Import Utility to import the NSRL library by doing the following:
4a. Launch the KFF Import Utility.
4b. Browse to the NSRLFile.txt that is contained in the nsrlsource_2.54 folder.
4c. Click Open.
4d. Click Import.
4e. When the import is complete, a finished window pops up, click OK.
Uninstalling KFF
You can uninstall KFF application components independently of the KFF Data.
Main version Description

Applications 5.6 For applications version 5.6 and later, you uninstall the following components:
to 6.2
 AccessData Elasticsearch Windows Service (KFF Server) v1.2.7 and later
Note: Elasticsearch is used by multiple features in various applications, use caution
when uninstalling this service or the related data.
 AccessData KFF Import Utility (v5.6 and later)
 AccessData KFF Migration Tool (v1.0 and later)
 AccessData Geo Location Data (v2014.10 and later)
Note: This component is not used by the KFF feature, but with the KFF Server for the
geolocation visualization feature.
The location of the KFF data is configured when the AccessData Elasticsearch Windows
Service was installed. By default, it is located at
C:\Program Files\AccessData\Elacticsearch\Data.
Applications 5.5 For applications version 5.5 and earlier, you can uninstall the following components:
and earlier
 KFF Server (v1.2.7 and earlier)
Note: The KFF Server is also used by the geolocation visualization feature.
 AccessData Geo Location Data (1.0.1 and earlier)
This component is not used by the KFF feature, but with the KFF Server for the geolo-
cation visualization feature.
The location of the KFF data was configured when the KFF Server was installed. You can
view the location of the data by running the KFF.Config.exe on the KFF Server.
If you are upgrading from 5.5 to 5.6, you can migrate your KFF data before uninstalling the
KFF Server.
Getting Started with KFF (Known File Filter) Uninstalling KFF | 252
Installing KFF Updates
From time to time, AccessData will release updates to the KFF Server and the KFF data libraries.
Some of the KFF data updates may require you to update the version of the KFF Server.
To check for updates, do the following:
1. Go to the KFF product download page.

2. Check for updates.
See About KFF Server Versions on page 231.
See Importing the NIST NSRL Library on page 248.
3. If there are updates, download them.
4. Install or import the updates.
Getting Started with KFF (Known File Filter) Installing KFF Updates | 253
KFF Library Reference Information
About KFF Pre-Defined Hash Libraries

This section includes a description of pre-defined hash collections that can be added as AccessData KFF data.
The following pre-defined libraries are currently available for KFF and come from federal government agencies:
NIST NSRL (The default library installed with KFF)

For law enforcement users, you can also use Project Vic libraries.
See Using Project VIC on page 275.
Use the following information to help identify the origin of any hash set within the KFF
The NSRL hash sets do not begin with “ZZN” or “ZN”. In addition, in the AD Lab KFF, all the NSRL hash
set names are appended (post-fixed) with multi-digit numeric identifier. For example: “Password Manager
& Form Filler 9722.”
Once an investigator has identified the vendor from which a hash set has come, he/she may need to consider
the vendor’s philosophy on collecting and categorizing hash sets, and the methods used by the vendor to gather
hash values into sets, in order to determine the relevance of Alert (and Ignore) hits to his/her project. The
following descriptions may be useful in assessing hits.
NIST NSRL
The NIST NSRL collection is described at: http://www.nsrl.nist.gov/index.html. It is composed entirely of hash
sets being generated from application software. So, all of its hash sets are given Ignore status by AccessData
staff except for those whose names make them sound as though they could be used for illicit purposes.
The NSRL collection divides itself into many sub-collections of hash sets with similar names. In addition, many of
these hash sets are “empty”, that is, they are not accompanied by any hash values. The size of the NSRL
collection, combined with the similarity in set naming and the problem of empty sets, allows AccessData to
modify (or selectively alter) NSRL’s own set names to remove ambiguity and redundancy.
Find contact info at http://www.nsrl.nist.gov/Contacts.htm.
Higher Level KFF Structure and Usage

Since hash set groups have the properties just described (and because custom hash sets and groups can be
defined by the investigator) the KFF mechanism can be leveraged in creative ways. For example:
You could define a group of hash sets created from encryption software and another group of hash sets
created from child pornography files. Then, you would apply only those groups while processing.
You could also use the Ignore status. You are about to process a hard drive image, but your search
warrant does not allow inspection of certain files within the image that have been previously identified.
You could do the following and still observe the warrant:
4a. Open the image in Imager, navigate to each of the prohibited files, and cause an MD5 hash value
to be computed for each.
4b. Import these hash values into custom hash sets (one or more), add those sets to a custom group,
and give the group Ignore status.
Getting Started with KFF (Known File Filter) KFF Library Reference Information | 254
4c. Process the image with the MD5 and KFF options, and with AD_Alert, AD_Ignore, and the new,
custom group selected.
4d. During post-processing analysis, filter file lists to eliminate rows representing files with Ignore
status.
Hash Set Categories

The highest level of the KFF’s logical structure is the categorizing of hash sets by owner and scope. The
categories are AccessData, Project Specific, and Shared.
Hash Set Categories
AccessData The sets shipped with as the Library. Custom groups can be created from these sets, but
the sets and their status values are read only.
Project Sets and groups created by the investigator to be applied only within an individual project.
Specific
Shared Sets and groups created by the investigator for use within multiple projects all stored in the
same database, and within the same application schema.
Important: Coordination among other investigators is essential when altering Shared groups in a lab
deployment. Each investigator must consider how other investigators will be affected when Shared
groups are modified.
Getting Started with KFF (Known File Filter) KFF Library Reference Information | 255
What has Changed in Version 6.3 and Later
See What Changed in Version 6.3 on page 256.
See What Changed in FTK and Lab Version 6.4 on page 257.
See What Changed in March of 2018 on page 257.
See What Changed in Enterprise Version 6.5 on page 258.
See What Changed in Version 7.0 on page 258.
What Changed in Version 6.3

With the 6.3 release of eDiscovery, Summation, and FTK-based forensics products, the KFF architecture and
features have been updated. This architecture is used in versions 6.3 and later.
If you used KFF with applications version 6.2 or earlier, be aware of the following changes in the KFF
functionality.
KFF Changes from version 6.2 to 6.3
Item Description
KFF Server KFF Server now runs as a different service.
 In versions 5.6 through 6.2, the KFF Server ran as the AccessData Elastic-
search Windows Service.
 In 6.3 and later, the KFF Server uses the AccessData Cassandra service.
Important: If you are upgrading from 6.2 or earlier, all KFF data must be created
in or migrated into the new KFF Server.
See Migrating Legacy KFF Data from versions 5.6 - 6.2 to 6.4 on page 240.
eDiscovery or In eDiscovery or Summation, there are two configuration files that configure the
Summation KFF Server location of the KFF server.
Configuration Files See Configuring the KFF Server Location on Summation or eDiscovery on
page 238.
The location format and port value in those files have changed.
In 5.6 - 6.2, the following was used:
<add key=”KffElasticSearchUrl” value=”http://localhost:9200” />
In 6.3 it was changed to:
<add key=”KFFServerUrl” value=”localhost:9042” />
Note: The “http://” text is no longer used and Cassandra uses port 9042 instead
of 9200.
There is also a new line:
Getting Started with KFF (Known File Filter) What has Changed in Version 6.3 and Later | 256
KFF Changes from version 6.2 to 6.3
Item Description
Hash Manager Migration If you are upgrading from 5.6 through 6.2, there is a new tool that lets you
Tool migrate custom KFF data to the new KFF Server on 6.3.
See Migrating Legacy KFF Data from versions 5.6 - 6.2 to 6.4 on page 240.
Important: NIST NSRL, NDIC HashKeeper, or DHS library data from 6.2 and
earlier will not be migrated when using the Migration Tool. You must re-import
those using the 6.3 KFF Import Tool.
See About Importing Pre-defined KFF Data Libraries on page 247.
KFF Import Utility This utility has been updated to use the new KFF Server.
If you are upgrading from 5.6 - 6.2, make sure to install and use the new 6.3
version.
See Using the KFF Import Utility on page 245.
NIST NSRL To import NSRL data, you can do either of the following:
 Download version 2.54 files from AccessData and import them.
 Download version 2.58 or later RDS files from nist.gov and import them.
See Importing the NIST NSRL Library on page 248.
Export/Import When you export and import KFF data, the Binary format (Entire Library) is no
longer available. CSV is the only export format supported.
Geolocation data Geolocation data is installed independently and is no longer linked to KFF.
What Changed in FTK and Lab Version 6.4

There is a new verification functionality within the KFF import tool that allows users to verify that all of the
hashes in a given import file are contained in the KFF database. The file types supported for verification
include: CSV, TSV, .Hash, HDB, HKE, .KFF, VIC, XML, NSRL. (12839)
The KFF migration utility allows users to migrate edited 6.3 KFF data to an empty 6.4 KFF database.
(13029)
Note: Locked/Protected sets will not be migrated from 6.3 to 6.4 in KFF. These will need to be imported.
Only the Project VIC and NSRL sets are locked/protected. All other sets in the KFF can be modified and
archived.
NDIC or DHS sets cannot be migrated into the 6.4 version of KFF.
See the FTK and LAB 6.4 Release Notes.
What Changed in March of 2018

A new version Cassandra was released for use as the KFF Server: Version 3.11.2
See About KFF Server Versions on page 231.
See the KFF Release Notes from March 2018 for details.
What Changed in Enterprise Version 6.5
No changes were made and you still use the same KFF Server: Version 3.11.2
What Changed in Version 7.0

No changes were made and you still use the same KFF Server: Version 3.11.2
However, AccessData is no longer distributing NDIC Hashkeeper and DHS libraries.
Chapter 17
Using the Known File Filter (KFF)
This chapter explains how to configure and use KFF and has the following sections:
See Process for Using KFF on page 259.

See About the KFF Admin page on page 260.
See Adding Hashes to the KFF Server on page 262.
See Using KFF Groups to Organize Hash Sets on page 266.
See Enabling a Case to Use KFF on page 269.
See Reviewing KFF Results in the Examiner on page 271.
See Exporting KFF Data on page 274.
Process for Using KFF

To use the KFF feature, you perform the following steps:
Process for using KFF
Step 1. Install and configure the KFF Server.

Step 2. Add and manage KFF hashes on the KFF Server.

See Adding Hashes to the KFF Server on page 262.
Step 3. Add and manage KFF Groups to organize KFF Hash Sets.
Using KFF Groups to Organize Hash Sets (page 266)
Step 4. Enable KFF for a case.

See Enabling a Case to Use KFF on page 269.
Step 5. Review KFF results in the Examiner.

See Reviewing KFF Results in the Examiner on page 271.
Step 6. (Optional) Re-process the KFF data using different hashes.

See Re-Processing KFF Using Additional Analysis on page 273.
Step 7. (Optional) Archive or export KFF data to share with other KFF Servers.
Using the Known File Filter (KFF) Process for Using KFF | 259
About the KFF Admin page
You use the KFF Admin page to configure KFF Data by doing the following:
Import Hashes
Manually manage Hash Sets
Create and manage KFF Groups
Export KFF data
To open the KFF Admin page

From the Case Manager or the Examiner, click Manage > KFF...
The KFF Admin page opens.
If the Configure KFF dialog appears instead, check the following:

The KFF Server is installed.
The application has been configured for the KFF Server.
See Configuring the Location of the KFF Server on page 237.
The KFF Service is running.
In the Windows Services manager, make sure that the AccessData Elasticsearch service is started.
Elements of the KFF Admin page
Pane Element Description

Groups pane Lets you create and manage KFF groups.
See Using KFF Groups to Organize Hash Sets on
page 266.
New Lets you create a KFF Group.

See Creating a KFF Group on page 267.
Edit Lets you edit a KFF Group.

See Managing KFF Groups on page 267.
Delete Lets you delete a KFF Group.

See Managing KFF Groups on page 267.
Export You can share KFF hashes by exporting KFF

groups.
Hash Sets Pane Displays the sets that you have imported or
created.
For example, if you import the NSRL KFF library,
those sets are displayed here.
Once you select a KFF Group in the Groups pane,
only the Hash Sets and Groups that are in that
selected group are listed.
Using the Known File Filter (KFF) About the KFF Admin page | 260
Elements of the KFF Admin page
Pane Element Description

Edit Lets you edit the hashes in a custom Hash Set.
See Using KFF Groups to Organize Hash Sets on
page 266.
Import Lets you import KFF data.

Archive Server Lets you archive all of the custom KFF Groups and
Hash Sets stored in this KFF Server.
Using the Known File Filter (KFF) About the KFF Admin page | 261
Adding Hashes to the KFF Server
You must add the hashes of the files that you want to compare against your evidence data. When adding hashes
to the KFF Server, you add them in KFF Hash Sets.
You can use the following methods to add hashes to the KFF Library:
Migrate legacy KFF Server You can migrate legacy KFF data that is in a KFF Server in applications
data versions 5.5 and earlier.
See Migrating Legacy KFF Data from versions 5.5 and earlier on
page 241.
Import hashes You can import previously configured KFF hashes, for example, from
.CSV, .HDB, .HKE, or .HASH files.
Manually create and manage You can manually add hashes to a Hash Set.
Hash Sets See Manually Managing Hashes in a Hash Set on page 263.
Add hashes from files in your You can add hashes from files in your case.
case See Adding Hashes From Files in Cases on page 264.
Importing KFF Data
Before Importing KFF Data

To understand the methods and formats for importing KFF data, first see About Importing KFF Data (page 243).
This chapter explains how to import KFF data using the KFF Admin page.
Importing KFF Hashes

You can import KFF data from the following:
KFF export files, such as CSV, TSV, HDB, HKE, KFF, HASH
KFF export files, such as TSV, HDB, HKE, KFF, HASH
When importing KFF data, you must enter values for the following fields:
Name
Source Vendor
Version
Package
While the values are required, you can enter whatever values you may want to use to help you organize your
hashes.
Using the Known File Filter (KFF) Adding Hashes to the KFF Server | 262
To import KFF hashes from files
1. Open the Case Manager or the Examiner.
2. Click Manage > KFF.
3. In KFF Admin, click Import.
4. Click Add File.
5. Set the Status: Alert or Ignore.
6. To browse to a file, for the Path, click ...
7. Browse to the path of the file.
8. Use the file type selector to view the types of files that you are looking for (.CSV, HKE, KFF, etc.)
9. Select a file.
10. Click Open.
11. Enter information for the hash set:
12. Click OK.
13. (Optional) Add other files that you want to import.
14. Click Import.
Manually Managing Hashes in a Hash Set

You can manually add, edit, and delete hash values within a custom hash set.
Important: You can manually delete hash values that were imported from NSRL, NDIC HashKeeper, and DHS
libraries. However, this can take one to several hours. Instead of deleting them using the application,
we recommend that you delete them using the KFF Import Utility. See Removing Pre-defined KFF
Libraries Using the KFF Import Utility version 6.3 and later on page 246.
Searching For, Viewing, and Managing Hashes in a Hash Set

Due to the large number of hashes that may be in a Hash Set, a list of hashes is not displayed. (However, you
can export a KFF Group that contains the Hash Set and view the hashes in the export file.)
You can use the KFF Hash Finder to search for hash values within a hash set. You search by entering a
complete hash value. You can only search for one hash within one hash set at a time.
To search for and manage hashes in a hash set

2. Select a Hash Set.
3. Click Edit.
4. To search for a hash, do the following:
4a. In the Hash field, enter the complete hash value that you want to search for.
4b. Click Search.
5. To manually add a hash to a hash set, do the following:
5a. In the Hash field, enter the complete hash value that you want to add.
5b. Click Search to verify if the hash already exists.
5c. If the hash was not found, click Add.
5d. Select the status of the hash:
 Alert
 Ignore
 None
5e. Enter the File Name of the file for the hash.
5f. (Optional) Enter other information about the hash.
5g. Click Save.
6. To manually edit a hash in a hash set, do the following:
6a. In the Hash field, enter the complete hash value that you want to edit.
6b. Click Search to verify that the hash already exists.
6c. If the hash was found, click Edit.
6d. Edit any settings and click Save.
7. To manually delete a hash from a hash set, do the following:
7a. In the Hash field, enter the complete hash value that you want to delete.
7b. Click Search to verify that the hash already exists.
7c. If the hash was found, click Delete.
8. Click Done.
Adding Hashes From Files in Cases

You may identify files that in exist in a case as files that you want to add to your KFF hashes. For example, you
may find a graphics file that you want to either alert for or ignore in this or other cases. Using Examiner, you can
select files, export their file information to CSV, and then Import them as new KFF Hash Sets.
To add hashes from files in a case

1. Open a case in the Examiner.
2. Check one or more files that you want to have an Alert status for. (Only do similar statuses at a time.)
3. Export the file information you want to add hashes for by doing the following:
3a. Click File > Export File List Info.
3b. Browse to a folder and provide a name, such Files_for_KFF_Alerts.
3c. Select a CSV format.
3d. Choose All checked.
3e. Click Save.
3f. (Optional) Repeat the export for files that you want to have an Ignore status for.
4. Import one or more exported File List Info CSV files by doing the following:
4a. Click Manage > KFF.
4b. Click Import.
4c. On the KFF Import Tool, click Add File.
4d. Select the status: Alert or Ignore for the hashes.
4e. Click ... to browse to the file that you exported with the File List Info.
4f. Enter the Source Vendor, Version, and Package.
4g. Click OK.
4h. (Optional) Click Add file and repeat for other files.
4i. Click Import.
5. Add the new Hash Sets to one or more KFF Groups.
Using KFF Groups to Organize Hash Sets
About KFF Groups

KFF groups are containers for one or more Hash Sets. When you create a group, you then add Hash Sets to the
group. KFF Groups can also contain other KFF Groups.
When you enable KFF for a case, you select which KFF Group to use during processing.
Within a KFF group, you can manually edit custom Hash Sets.
About KFF Groups Status Override Settings

When you create a KFF Group, you can choose to use the default status of the Hash Set (Alert or Ignore) or
override it. You do this by setting one of the following Status Override settings:
Alert - All Hash Sets within the KFF Group will be set to Alert regardless of the status of the individual
Hash Sets.
Ignore - All Hash Sets within the KFF Group will be set to Ignore regardless of the status of the individual
Hash Sets.
No Override - All Hash Sets will maintain their default status.
For example, if you have a Hash Set with a status of Alert, if you set the KFF Group to No Override, then the
default status of Alert is used. If you set the KFF Group with a status of Ignore, the Hash Set Alert status is
overridden and Ignore is used.
As a result, use caution when setting the Status Override for a KFF Group.
About Nesting KFF Groups

KFF Groups can contain Hash Sets or they can contain other KFF Groups. When one KFF Group includes
another KFF Group, it is called nesting.
The reason that you may want to nest KFF Groups is that you can use multiple KFF Groups when processing
your data. When you enable KFF for a case, you can only select one KFF Group. By nesting, you can use
multiple KFF Groups.
For example, you may have one KFF Group that contains Hash Sets with an Alert status. You may have a
second KFF Group that contains Hash Sets with an Ignore status. When processing a case, you may want to
use both of those KFF Groups. To accomplish this, you can create another KFF Group as a parent and then add
the other two KFF Groups to it. When processing, you would select the parent KFF Group.
When nesting KFF Groups you must be mindful of the Status Override of the parent KFF Group. When nesting
KFF Groups, the Status Override the highest KFF Group in the hierarchy is used. In most cases, you will want to
set the parent KFF Group with a status of None. That way, the status of each child KFF Group (or their Hash
Sets) is used. If you select an Alert or Ignore status for the parent KFF Group, then all child KFF Groups and
their Hash Sets will use that status.
Using the Known File Filter (KFF) Using KFF Groups to Organize Hash Sets | 266
About the Default KFF Group
A Default KFF Group is automatically created, but by default, has no Hash Sets in it. You cannot rename or
delete the Default KFF Group however, you can add and remove Hash Sets.
The purpose of the Default KFF Group is that you can add the Hash Sets that you most regularly use, and when
you enable the processing of KFF data for a case, you can simply select the Default KFF Group.
If you install NSRL, NDIC HashKeeper, and DHS libraries, they are automatically added to the Default KFF
Group. You can remove them from the Default KFF Group if you wish.
Creating a KFF Group

You create KFF groups to organize your Hash Sets. When you create a KFF Group, you add one or more Hash
Sets to it. You can later edit the KFF Group to add or remove Hash Sets.
To create and configure a KFF group

3. In the Groups pane, click New.
4. Enter a Name.
5. Set the Status Override.
See About KFF Groups Status Override Settings on page 266.
6. In the Available Hash Sets pane, select any hash sets to include in the KFF Group and click << .
7. To nest another KFF Group within it, in the Available Groups pane, select any child KFF Groups and
click << .
8. Click OK.
Viewing the Contents of a KFF Group

In KFF Admin, you can select a KFF Group and in the right Hash Sets pane, view the Hash Sets and child KFF
Groups that are contained in that KFF Group.
Managing KFF Groups

You can edit KFF Groups and do the following:
Rename the group

Change the Override Status
Add or remove Hash Sets and KFF Groups
You can also do the following:
Delete the group

Export the group
To manage a KFF Group
3. Select a group or right-click a KFF Group.
Click Edit.
Click Delete.
Click Export.
Enabling a Case to Use KFF
About Enabling and Configuring KFF

To use KFF in a case, you do the following when you either create a case, add evidence to a case, or run
Additional Analysis:
Process for enabling and configuring KFF
1. (Optional) Create a You can enable KFF when you create a case or add evidence to a case.
new case or add You can also enable KFF for an existing case using Additional Analysis.
evidence to a case.
2. Configure how to When you create a case or or add evidence to a case, you can choose how to
process KFF Ignorable process KFF Ignorable files:
files  Exclude KFF Ignorable Files - By default, KFF will not include Ignorable files
in the processed evidence. They will not be visible in the Examiner nor will
they be in any file counts.
 Enable Include KFF Ignorable Files - You can enable a processing option to
include KFF Ignorable files. Any files that are KFF Ignorable will be included
and visible in the project.
However, Ignorable files can be hidden using filters.
See Enabling and Configuring KFF on page 269.
See Using KFF Filters on page 272.
When you process KFF using Additional Analysis, KFF Ignorable files are still
included in the case’s evidence files.
3. Enable KFF Enable the KFF processing option.

See Enabling and Configuring KFF on page 269.
4. Select a KFF Group When you enable KFF, you select one KFF group to use. You can select an
existing group or create a new group.
A KFF Group can include other KFF Groups. You can select a parent KFF Group
that contains other groups with the sets that you want to use
See Using KFF Groups to Organize Hash Sets on page 266.
Enabling and Configuring KFF

To enable and configure KFF for a new case or new evidence
1. Create a new case or add evidence to a case and open the Evidence Processing options.
(In an existing case, open the Additional Analysis page.)
2. Choose whether or not to include KFF Ignorable files.
By default, KFF Ignorable files will not be included.
To include KFF Ignorable files, do the following:
2a. In the Detailed Options dialog, click the Evidence Refinement (Advanced) tab.
2b. Select Include KFF Ignorable Files.
Using the Known File Filter (KFF) Enabling a Case to Use KFF | 269
2c. Click the Evidence Processing tab.
3. In the Evidence Processing options, select KFF.
4. Do one of the following to select a KFF Group:
In the KFF drop-down menu, select and existing KFF Group that you want to use.
Click ... to open KFF Admin and configure a KFF Group to use and then select it.
See About KFF Groups on page 266.
You can use a KFF Group that you created or use the Default group.
See About the Default KFF Group on page 267.
5. Configure any other processing options.
6. Click OK.
Using the Known File Filter (KFF) Enabling a Case to Use KFF | 270
Reviewing KFF Results in the Examiner
You can view the KFF results in the Examiner. You can use the following tools to view KFF results:
KFF Information in Columns

KFF Filters
KFF file status in the Overview tab.
About KFF Data Shown in the Item List

Depending on the KFF configuration options, you can identify and view files based on their KFF status and
group.
Note: KFF Ignorable files will not be displayed in the File List unless you enabled the Include KFF Ignorable
Files processing option.
There are three possible KFF statuses in the Examiner:

Alert - Files that matched hashes in the template with an Alert status
Ignore - Files that matched hashes in the template with an Ignore status (not shown in the Item List by
default)
See About Enabling and Configuring KFF on page 269.
Unknown - Files that did not match hashes in the template (designated by a blank KFF Status)
Using the KFF Information Columns

You can add the following columns to display KFF data about each file in the File List.
KFF Columns
Column Description
KFF Status Displays the status of the file as it pertains to KFF. The three status options are
Alert, Ignore, or Unknown (blank).
KFF Group Displays the name of the KFF Group that has the matched hash.
Not KFF Ignore... Displays a True status it if is not a KFF Ignorable file or a False status if it is a
KFF Ignorable file.
Using the Known File Filter (KFF) Reviewing KFF Results in the Examiner | 271
Using KFF Filters
You can use filters to filter your evidence based on KFF data. You can use the Filter Manager to build a
Compound filters.
To use the KFF Filters

1. In the Examiner, click the Filter drop-down menu.
2. Select one of the KFF Filters:
KFF Alert Files - Shows all files with an Alert status.
KFF Ignore Files - Shows all files with a KFF Ignore status.
KFF Ignorable files will not be displayed unless you enabled the Include KFF Ignorable Files
processing option.
No KFF Ignore Files - Shows all files except those with a KFF Ignore status.
Using the Overview Tab

You can use the File Status nodes in the Overview tab to filter your evidence based on KFF data.
To use the Overview tab to filter KFF status

2. Expand File Status.
3. Click one of the following KFF nodes:
KFF Alert Files - Shows all files with an Alert status.
KFF Ignorable Files - Shows all files with a KFF Ignore status.
KFF Ignorable files will not be displayed unless you enabled the Include KFF Ignorable Files
processing option.
Using the Known File Filter (KFF) Reviewing KFF Results in the Examiner | 272
Re-Processing KFF Using Additional Analysis
You can process an existing case with KFF using Additional Analysis in the following situations:
After you have processed a case with KFF enabled, you can re-process your data using an updated or
different KFF Group. This is useful in re-examining a project after adding or editing hash sets.
See Adding Hashes From Files in Cases on page 264.
Enabling KFF for a case that was not previously processed using KFF.
To re-process a case using KFF

2. Enable KFF.
In the the drop-down menu, select a KFF Group.
Configure a KFF Group by clicking the ....
4. You can either process files new files in the case or process files that have been processed previously
against KFF.
Mark Recheck previously processed items if you want to processes all existing files with the KFF
Group that you have selected.
5. Click OK.
6. Review the KFF results.
See Reviewing KFF Results in the Examiner on page 271.
Using the Known File Filter (KFF) Re-Processing KFF Using Additional Analysis | 273
Exporting KFF Data
About Exporting KFF Data

You can share KFF Hash Sets and KFF Groups with other KFF Servers by exporting KFF data on one KFF
Server and importing it on another. You can also use export as a way of archiving your KFF data.
You can export data in one of the following way:
Exporting KFF Groups - This exports the selected KFF Groups with any included sub-groups and any
included Hash Sets and hashes to a CSV file.
Exporting KFF Groups

You can share KFF hashes by exporting one or more KFF Groups. Exports are saved in a CSV file.
To export a KFF group

3. Select one or more groups.
4. Click Export.
5. Select the location to which you want to save the exported CSV file.
6. Enter a name for the exported file.
7. Click Save.
Using the Known File Filter (KFF) Exporting KFF Data | 274
Chapter 18
Using Project VIC
This chapter contains information on how to integrate with and use Project VIC.
About Project VIC

Project VIC is a global partnership that uses advanced technology to fight child sexual exploitation and
trafficking. In order to use this feature, you must have an account set up with Project VIC.
Project VIC has compiled information about known online child abuse images. Known image or video files have
unique identifier known as a “hash value.” When you process your evidence data, it is compared to the known
hash values. If a match is found, the file in your evidence is flagged. You can easily see flagged files in the
examiner.
You can also provide information to Project VIC about images that were previously unknown.
About PhotoDNA
Project VIC includes a component called PhotoDNA. This tool compiles a digital signature or fingerprint of
images (known as a “hash”), which can be matched against a database of known child pornography images.
This significantly reduces the time law enforcement officers must spend viewing images, speeding their
determination of whether child victims have already been identified or are currently at risk.
Note: This PhotoDNA feature requires a special law enforcement license. Contact sales for more information.
Without the license, the feature is not enabled.
About Project VIC and KFF

To process and flag Project VIC data, you use the KFF (Known File Filter) Architecture.
The KFF architecture lets you import Project VIC hash values and compare your evidence data against those
hash sets. Files that match hits in Project Vic are flagged so you you can easily identify them.
For general information about KFF, see the following:
Getting Started with KFF (Known File Filter) (page 225)

Using the Known File Filter (KFF) (page 259)
Using Project VIC About Project VIC | 275

About Project VIC and File Categories
When evidence files are flagged by the KFF Server, they are given a VIC category as well as a KFF Status of
Alert.
The categories can vary depending on the country or region in which you are.
For example, in the United States of America, the following categories are used:
Child Abuse Material = 1

Child Exploitive = 2
CGI Animation = 3
Comparison Image = 4
Uncategorized =5
Using Project VIC About Project VIC | 276

Overview of Using Project VIC
To use Project VIC feature, you perform the following steps:
Process for using KFF
Step 1. Download Project VIC hash data.

See Downloading Project VIC Hash Data on page 277.
Step 2. Install and configure the KFF Server.

Step 3. Import Project VIC hash data in the KFF Server.

Importing Project VIC Data (page 278)
Step 4. Create a case, enable Project VIC for the case, and process the case.
See Creating a Case and Enabling Project VIC on page 279.
Step 5. Review the Project VIC results in the Examiner.

See Viewing Project VIC Results in the Examiner on page 280.
Step 6. (Optional) Bookmark your own files to export to Project VIC.

See Bookmarking Files to Export to Project VIC on page 282.
Step 7. (Optional) Export your own files to Project VIC.

See Exporting Bookmarked Files to Project VIC on page 283.
Downloading Project VIC Hash Data

Project VIC data is imported as JSON files. You can use pre-configured data files from Project VIC and you can
also create or use custom JSON files.
If you want to use data from Project VIC, you must contact them and have an account with them in order to
download hash data.
Installing and Configuring the KFF Server

In order to work with Project VIC, you use the KFF infrastructure.
If you have not done so, you must install a KFF Server.
For other information on how to use the KFF infrastructure, see Using the Known File Filter (KFF) (page 259).
Using Project VIC Overview of Using Project VIC | 277

Importing Project VIC Data
You import JSON files into the KFF infrastructure.
Importing KFF Hashes

To import Project VIC hashes from JSON files
3. In KFF Admin, click Import.
4. Click Add File.
5. To browse to a file, for the Path, click ...
6. Browse to the path of the file.
7. Use the file type selector to view the *.json file type.
8. Select a file.
9. Click Open.
10. (Optional) Enter the version of the hash set.
For example, 1.2 or 1.3
11. (Optional) In the Package field enter any information you would like to describe.
12. Select the region of the hash set.
Important: You must select the same region that matches the data that you downloaded from Project VIC.
Otherwise, data may be incorrect.
Important: In this release, only the United States region is supported.
13. Click OK.
14. (Optional) Add other files that you want to import.
15. Click Import.
16. You can view the hash sets and groups to verify that data that you will use in a project.
About Project VIC KFF Groups

Project VIC hash sets must be included in a KFF Group.
If you import Project VIC data, they are imported as KFF Hash Sets. The imported Project VIC hash sets are
automatically placed in a KFF Group named Project VIC - Region which is nested inside a parent group named
Project VIC. When you process a case, you select one, and only one KFF Group to use. The Project VIC KFF
group is the one to generally use unless you use some custom sets.
If you have custom hash sets, you must manually associate them with a KFF Group.
See About KFF Groups on page 266.
Using Project VIC Importing Project VIC Data | 278

Creating a Case and Enabling Project VIC
To use Project VIC in a case, you do the following when you either create a case, add evidence to a case, or run
Additional Analysis:
Process for enabling and configuring Project VIC
1. Create a new case or You can enable Project VIC when you create a case or add evidence to a case.
add evidence to a case. You can also enable Project VIC for an existing case using Additional Analysis.
2. Enable Project VIC You enable Project VIC by enabling the following processing options:
 KFF
 Photo DNA
A law enforcement licence is required for the PhotoDNA option to be avail-
able.
See About PhotoDNA on page 275.
See Enabling and Configuring Project VIC on page 279.
4. Select a KFF Group When you enable Project VIC, you can select the Project VIC KFF group to use
or you can select a custom group if you created one.
Enabling and Configuring Project VIC

To enable and configure Project VIC for a new case or new evidence
1. Create a new case or add evidence to a case and open the Evidence Processing options.
(In an existing case, open the Additional Analysis page.)
2. Select the Forensics Processing profile.
3. In the Evidence Processing options, select KFF.
4. In the KFF drop-down menu, select the Project VIC group.
5. Select PhotoDNA.
Note: A law enforcement licence is required for the PhotoDNA option to be available.
6. (Optional) Configure any other processing options.

7. Click OK.
Using Project VIC Creating a Case and Enabling Project VIC | 279
Viewing Project VIC Results in the Examiner
You can view the Project VIC results in the Examiner. You can use the following tools to view Project VIC
results:
Project VIC Matches under File Status in the Overview tab.

Project VIC Information in columns
Project VIC information in the Graphics tab.
Project VIC information in the Video tab.

You can use a File Status node in the Overview tab to filter your evidence based on Project VIC data.
To use the Overview tab to filter KFF status

2. Expand File Status.
3. Click Project VIC Matches
This shows all files that were flagged as a Project Vic match.
Using the Project VIC and PhotoDNA Information Columns

In any view, you can add the following columns in the File List to display Project VIC data about each file in the
list. You can sort by the columns to easily identify flagged files.
Note: A law enforcement licence is required for the PhotoDNA information to be available.
For general information, see Managing Columns (page 494).
Project VIC and PhotoDNA Columns
Column Description
VIC Category Depending on your region, this is the category as matched with Project VIC hash
data.
VIC Hash Type Identifies if the file was flagged through a SHA1 hash or through PhotoDNA.
PhotoDNA Hash When a file is flagged and categorized, a hash is assigned to it.
The hash value is based on difference from the known image.
You can also use this column to find files that have a PhotoDNA hash but do not
have a VIC category. You can bookmark these files and export them to Project
VIC so that they can be reviewed and categorized.
Bookmarking Files to Export to Project VIC (page 282)
Using Project VIC Viewing Project VIC Results in the Examiner | 280
Project VIC and PhotoDNA Columns
Column Description
Photo DNA Distance A PhotoDNA Distance value is generated that represents how closely it matches
any of the files in Project VIC. (If the image matches more than one item, the
closest score is used).
The PhotoDNA Distance value can range from 0 to 49,000. A value of 0 means
that there is no distance and the photo is a perfect match. Any score higher than
the range means that there is no match and therefore no value is given.
To view the Project VIC data in columns

1. In the Examiner, use the Overview tab, Graphics tab, or Video tab to view the flagged files in your case.
2. Add columns to the File List that display the Project VIC data by doing the following:
2a. Click the Column Settings icon.
2b. Either create or edit a column settings template.
2c. In the Available Columns list, expand All Features.
2d. Select and Add the following columns:
 File Status Features/VIC Category
 File Status Features/VIC Hash Type
 Common Features/PhotoDNA Hash
 File Status Features/PhotoDNA Distance
2e. Click OK.

2f. Select the desired settings and click Apply.
3. You can sort by the columns to easily identify flagged or hashed files.
Using the Graphics Tab

You can use the Graphics tab to view thumbnails of graphics.
For general information, see Examining Graphics (page 324).
To use the Graphics tab to view Project VIC status

1. In the Examiner, click the Graphics tab.
2. Apply the Project VIC columns.
3. Sort the Project VIC and PhotoDNA information columns to easily identify flagged files.
Using the Video Tab

You can use the Video tab to view thumbnails of videos.
For general information, see Examining Videos (page 333).
To use the Video tab to view Project VIC status

1. In the Examiner, click the Video tab.
2. Apply the Project VIC columns.
3. Sort the Project VIC and PhotoDNA information columns to easily identify flagged files.
Using Project VIC Viewing Project VIC Results in the Examiner | 281
Bookmarking Files to Export to Project VIC
You may discover images in your evidence that are not categorized but could be.
Using the Project VIC and PhotoDNA Information Columns (page 280)
You can export the information about those files to Project VIC so that they can be analyzed and categorized.
You do this by creating and exporting bookmarks.
For general information about creating and using bookmarks, see Bookmarking Evidence (page 388).
To create a Project VIC bookmark

1. In the File List view, select the files that you want to add to a Project VIC bookmark.
You can either highlight the files that you want to include, check the boxes of the files that you want to
include, or do nothing to include all files.
2. Right-click on a selected file in the File List view and click the Project VIC icon .
3. Enter in the bookmark information.
See Project VIC Bookmarks Dialog Options on page 282.
4. Click OK.
Project VIC Bookmarks Dialog Options

Options of the Bookmark Information Pane
Field Description
Bookmark Name The name you give the bookmark.
Project VIC Case Number The name you give the bookmark.
Default Project VIC Category You can select a default category for all of the items in the bookmark.
Also, lower in the dialog, you can assign a category for an individual file.
This will override the default for that file.
Contact information Enter your contact information.
Files to Include The files are limited to images and videos.

Specify which files in the File List to include in this bookmark. You can
select one of the following:
 Highlighted Media Files - Includes only the highlighted items.
 Checked Media Files - Includes only the checked items.
 All Listed Media Files- Includes all items in the File List.
Project VIC Category (Optional) You can highlight and assign a category for an individual file.
This will override the default for the bookmark if you set one.
Tags (Optional) You can highlight and tag an individual file if they match a
criteria. The available tags are:
 Infant/Toddler
 S&M/Violent
This tag is included in the exported JSON file.
Using Project VIC Bookmarking Files to Export to Project VIC | 282

Options of the Bookmark Information Pane (Continued)
Field Description
File Comments (Optional) You can enter comments about a file.
Select Bookmark Parent Select the parent bookmark under which you would like to save the
bookmark.
There are two default bookmark parents:
 A Shared tree that is available to all investigators
 A bookmark tree specific to the logged-in-user
Administrators and Case Administrators can see and use all bookmarks
in a case.
If the bookmark is related to an older bookmark it can be added under
the older bookmark, with the older bookmark being the parent, or it can
be saved as a peer.
Exporting Bookmarked Files to Project VIC

You can export the files you bookmarked to a JSON file that can be shared with Project VIC.
To export a Project VIC bookmark

1. Click the Bookmarks tab.
2. Right-click VIC bookmark that you created.
3. Click Export to Project VIC.
4. Browser to a destination folder path.
5. (Optional) Include Media Files.
If you select this option, that actual media files will be exported as well as the JSON file.
6. Click Export.
The files and information are exported to a JSON file.
Using Project VIC Exporting Bookmarked Files to Project VIC | 283

Part 4
Reviewing Cases
This part contains information about reviewing cases and contains the following chapters:
Using the FTK Examiner Interface (page 285)
Exploring Evidence (page 297)
Examining Evidence in the Overview Tab (page 315)
Examining Email (page 320)
Examining Graphics (page 324)
Examining Videos (page 333)
Examining Miscellaneous Evidence (page 339)
Bookmarking Evidence (page 388)
Searching Evidence with Live Search (page 400)
Searching Evidence with Index Search (page 411)
Using the Known File Filter (KFF) (page 259)
Using Project VIC (page 275)
Viewing System Information (page 427)
Using Visualization (page 443)
Customizing the Examiner Interface (page 489)
Working with Evidence Reports (page 499)
Reviewing Cases | 284

Chapter 19
Using the FTK Examiner Interface
About the Examiner

You can use the examiner to locate, organize, and export data. The Examiner interface contains tabs, each with
a specific focus. Most tabs also contain a common toolbar and file list with customizable columns. Additional
tabs can be user-defined.
For example, you can use the following tabs to perform a specific task:
The Overview tab lets you narrow your search to look through specific document types, or to look for
items by status or file extension.
The Graphics tab lets you quickly scan through thumbnails of the graphics in the case.
The Email tab lets you view emails and attachments.
As you find items of interest, you can do the following
Create, assign, and view labels in a sorted file list view.

Use searches and filters to find relevant evidence.
Createbookmarks to easily group the items by topic or keyword, find those items again, and make the
bookmarked items easy to add to reports.
Export files as necessary for password cracking or decryption, then add the decrypted files back as
evidence.
Add external, supplemental files to bookmarks that are not otherwise part of the case.
Tabs of the Examiner
Note: When entering the Examiner and clicking on a tab for the first time, if that tab uses the Thumbnail pane
memory is allocated for displaying graphics and video thumbnails if they are present in the case.
Using the FTK Examiner Interface About the Examiner | 285

Tabs of the Examiner
Option Description
Explore Tab See Explorer Tree Pane (page 297)
Overview Tab See Using the Overview Tab (page 315)
Email Tab See Using the Email Tab (page 320)
Graphics Tab See Using the Graphics Tab (page 324)
Video Tab See Examining Videos (page 333)
Internet/Chat See Examining Internet Artifact Data (page 352)
Bookmarks Tab See Using the Bookmarks Tab (page 395)
Live Search Tab See Conducting a Live Search (page 400)
Index Tab See Conducting an Index Search (page 412)
System Information See Viewing System Information (page 427)
Also, see Menus of the Examiner (page 287)
Miscellaneous types of evidence

See Examining Miscellaneous Evidence on page 339.
Creating Screen Captures in the Examiner

You can capture screen shots within the Examiner interface. You can include the screen captures when creating
reports. You can use screen captures to include information that is not easy to export or include in reports.
See Adding Screen Captures from Examiner on page 509.
Using the FTK Examiner Interface Creating Screen Captures in the Examiner | 286
Menus of the Examiner
When a case is created and assigned a user, the Examiner window opens with the following menus:
Examiner Menus
Menu Description
File See Options of the Examiner File Menu (page 288)
Edit See Options of the Examiner Edit Menu (page 289)
View See Options of the Examiner View Menu (page 290)
Evidence See Options of the Examiner Evidence Menu (page 292)
Filter See Options of the Examiner Filter Menu (page 293)
Tools See Options of the Examiner Tools Menu (page 294)
Manage See Options of the Examiner Manage Menu (page 295)
Help See Options of the Examiner Help Menu (page 296)
Using the FTK Examiner Interface Menus of the Examiner | 287

Options of the Examiner File Menu
Options of the Examiner File Menu
Option Description
Export Exports selected files and associated evidence to a designated folder.
Export to Image Exports one or more files as an AD1 image to a storage destination.
When exporting to AD1 the image's file path is added under a root directory. This
speeds the process of gathering data for the AD1, and for shortening the path to
AD1 content.
Export File List Info Exports selected file information to files formatted as the Column List in CSV, TSV,
and TXT formats.
Export Word List Exports the words from the cases index as a text file. You can use this word list to
create a dictionary in the AccessData PRTK and DNA products.
See Exporting a Word List (page 195)
Export System Exports system information when populated in the System Information tab. This
Information option is grayed out unless System Information has been added to the case.
See Viewing System Information on page 427.
Report Opens the Report Options dialog for creating a case report.
See Creating a Case Report (page 500)
Timeline Report Opens the Timeline Report dialog for creating a Timeline bookmark report.
See Creating a Timeline Bookmark Report on page 395.
Job Summary Report Opens an Evidence History.log report showing a job summary for all processing
done within the case.
Close Closes the Examiner and returns to the Case Manager window.
Exit Closes both the Examiner and Case Manager windows.

Options of the Examiner Edit Menu
Options of the Examiner Edit Menu
Option Description
Copy Special Duplicates information about the object copied as well as the object itself, and
places the copy in the clipboard.
See Copying Information from the Examiner (page 186)

Options of the Examiner View Menu
Options of the Examiner View Menu
Option Description
Refresh Reloads the current view with the latest information.
Filter Bar Inserts the filter toolbar into the current tab. These features are also available from
the Filter menu.
Time Zone Display Opens the Time Zone Display dialog.
Thumbnail Size Selects the size of the thumbnails displayed from the Graphics tab. Select from the
following:
 Large-default
 Medium
 Small
 Tiny
Tab Layout Manages tab settings. The user can lock an existing setting, add and remove
settings, and save settings one tab at a time or all at once. The user can also
restore previous settings or reset them to the default settings.
These options are in the following list:

 Save
 Restore
 Reset to Default
 Remove
 Save All Tab Layouts
 Lock Panes
 Add New Tab Layout
FIle List Columns Specifies how to treat the current File List. Options are:
 Save As Default
 Save All as Default
 Reset to Factory Default
 Reset All To Factory Default
File Content Tabs Specifies the behavior of file content when a different tab is selected. Options are:
Switching  Auto
 Manual
Explore Tree Displays the Explore Tree in the upper-left pane.
Graphics Tree Displays the Graphics Tree in the upper-left pane.
Overview Tree Displays the Overview Tree in the upper-left pane.
Email Tree Displays the Email Tree in the upper-left pane.
Bookmark Tree Displays the Bookmark Tree in the upper-left pane.
Index Searches Displays the Index Search Results pane in the upper-left pane.
Live Searches Displays the Live Search Results pane in the upper-left pane.

Options of the Examiner View Menu (Continued)
Option Description
Bookmark Information Adds the Bookmark Information pane into the current tab.
File List Adds the File List pane into the current tab.
File Content Adds the File Content pane into the current tab.
Email Attachments Displays the attachments to email objects found in the case. Available only in the
Email and Overview tabs.
Properties Inserts the Object Properties pane into the current tab view.
Hex Value Interpreter Displays a pane that provides an interpretation of Hex values selected from the
Hex View pane.
Thumbnails Displays a pane containing thumbnails of all graphics found in the case.
Video View Displays a pane containing thumbnails of all videos found in the case.
Progress Window Opens the Progress dialog, from which you can monitor tasks and/or cancel them.

Options of the Examiner Evidence Menu
Options of the Examiner Evidence Menu
Option Description
Add/Remove Opens the Manage Evidence dialog, used to add and remove evidence. From
Manage Evidence, choose from the following:
Time Zone — Choose Time Zone for evidence item
Refinement Options — Select Evidence Refinement Options
Language Setting — Choose the language of the evidence item
Define and Manage Evidence Groups
Select Case KFF Options
Additional Analysis Opens the Additional Analysis dialog with many of the same processing options
available when the evidence was added. Allows the user to reprocess using
available options not selected previously.
See Using Additional Analysis (page 128).
Process Manually Initiates the processing of items that have been manually carved, using the
Carved Items selected options.
Manage Evidence Opens the dialog where you can create and manage Evidence Groups.
Groups
Import Custom When a Custom Column Settings file has been created, import it into your case
Column File using this tool.
Delete Custom If you have imported or created a Custom Column Settings file, use this tool to
Column Data delete the associated column and its data from the view.
Merge Case Index The processing engine does this automatically and no longer needs user
interaction to select the merge.

Options of the Examiner Filter Menu
Options of the Examiner Filter Menu
Option Description
New Opens the Filter Definition dialog to define a temporary filter.
Duplicate Duplicates a selected filter. A duplicated filter serves as a starting point for
customizing a new filter.
Delete Deletes a selected filter.
On Applies the selected filter globally in the application. The File List changes color to
indicate that the filter is applied.
Import Opens the Windows file manager allowing the user to import a pre-existing filter.
Export Opens the Windows File Manager allowing the user to save a filter.
The name of the filter cannot have any special or invalid characters or the export
will not work.
Tab Filter Allows the selection of a filter to apply in the current tab.

Options of the Examiner Tools Menu
Options of the Examiner Tools Menu
Option Description
Decrypt Files Decrypts EFS and Office files using passwords you enter.
See Decrypting Files (page 165)
Dell Encryption Opens the Dell Encryption Decryption dialog where you enter the decryption
Decryption information.
See Decrypting Dell Encryption Files (Dell Data Protection | Encryption Server)
(page 178)
Send to DNA/PRTK for Uses the integrated DNA/PRTK capabilities to decrypt several types of encrypted
password recovery files.
See Recovering Passwords using the PRTK/DNA Integrated Tool on page 172.
Verify Image Integrity Generates hash values of the disk image file for comparison.
See Verifying Drive Image Integrity (page 103)
Restore Image to Disk Restores a physical image to a disk. If the original drive was on a bootable
partition, the restored image may also be bootable. This feature is disabled for
Case Reviewers.
Mount Image to Drive Allows the mounting of a physical or logical image for read-only viewing. Logically
mounting images allows them to be viewed as a drive-letter in Windows Explorer.
Mounted logical drives now show the user the correct file, even when a deleted file
with the same name exists in the same directory.
See Mounting an Image to a Drive (page 104)
Disk Viewer Opens a hex viewer that allows you to see and search contents of evidence items.
Search Text for a term using Match Case, ANSI, Unicode, Regular Expression or
Search Up instead of down; Search Hex using Search Up. Specify a logical sector
or a cluster.
Other Applications Opens other AccessData tools to complement the investigational analysis.
Recover Processing Restarts processing so jobs that were interrupted can be completed.
Jobs
Visualization Lets you launch the Visualization add on module for the data that you currently
have displayed in the File List Pane. Visualization is only available from the
Explore, Overview, and Email Tabs.
See Using Visualization on page 443.
Execute SQL Executes a user-defined SQL script from within the interface.
Run Python Script Allows you to run any Python script on selected evidence files within a case.
See Python Scripting on page 378.

Options of the Examiner Manage Menu
Options of the Examiner Manage Menu
Tool Type Description

KFF Manage Known File Filter (KFF) Library, sets, and groups.
See Using the Known File Filter (KFF) (page 259).
Labels Manage Local and Shared Labels as well as Label Groups.
See What You Can Do With Labels (page 161).
Carvers Manage Local and Shared Custom Carvers.
See Data Carving (page 78).
Filters Manage Local and Shared Filters.
See Filtering Data to Locate Evidence (page 141).
Columns Manage Local and Shared Columns.
See Customizing File List Columns (page 494).
Indexed Serch Term See Adjusting the Weighting Criteria for an Index Search Term on page 414.
Weights

Options of the Examiner Help Menu
Options of the Examiner Help Menu
Option Description
User Guide To access the latest documentation, download the zip file from www.accessdata.com/
productdocs/ftk/ftk.zip.
Case Folder Opens the folder that contains the case data.
About Provides version and build information, copyright and trademark information, and other
copyright and trade acknowledgements.

Chapter 20
Exploring Evidence
The Explore tab displays all the contents of the case evidence files and drives as the original user would have
seen them.
This chapter includes the following topics:
Explorer Tree Pane (page 297)

File List Pane (page 298)
The File Content Viewer Pane (page 305)
The Filter Toolbar (page 313)
Using QuickPicks (page 314)
Explorer Tree Pane

Lists directory structure of each evidence item, similar to the way one would view directory structure in Windows
Explorer. An evidence item is a physical drive, a logical drive or partition, or drive space not included in any
partitioned drive, as well as any file, folder, or image of a drive, or mounted image.
The Explorer Tree Pane
Exploring Evidence Explorer Tree Pane | 297

File List Pane
About the File List

Displays case files and pertinent information about files, such as filename, file path, file type and many more
properties as defined in the current filter. The files here may display in a variety of colors.
They are as follows:
Black = Default
Grey = Deleted
Pink = Bookmarked or added to a task.
See Bookmarking Evidence on page 388. See on page 94.
Red = Encrypted
The File List view reflects the files available for the current tabbed view and the properties that meet selected
Column templates, limited by any filters that may be applied. In this pane, you can choose which columns to
display, as well as the order of those columns, create Bookmarks, create Labels, Copy or Export File Lists. The
File List pane is included in all default tab views.
The File List Pane
Exploring Evidence File List Pane | 298

Customizing the Colors of the File List
It is possible to customize the colors in the File List. In the File List, lines have alternating colors for ease of use.
It is possible to change both the odd and even lines in the list separately.
Colors can be set for the following states:
Customizable Color Options for the File List
Name Description Entry
Color The color of the odd lines in <BgColor>255, 255, 255</BgColor>

a default state
Alt Color The color of the even lines <BgAltColor>248, 248, 248</BgAltColor>
in a default state
Color Filtered The color of a filtered item <BgColor_Filtered>255, 255, 200</BgColor_Filtered>

in an odd numbered line
Alt Color Filtered The color of a filtered item <BgAltColor_Filtered>248, 248, 200</
in an even numbered line BgAltColor_Filtered>
Color Quick Pick The color applied to a quick <BgColor_QuickPick>248, 255, 248</
pick item in an odd BgColor_QuickPick>
numbered line
Alt Color Quick The color applied to a quick <BgAltColor_QuickPick>228, 244, 228</
Pick pick item in an even BgAltColor_QuickPick>
numbered line
Alt Color Filtered The color applied to a <BgAltColor_Filtered_QuickPick>240, 248, 216</

Quick Pick filtered quick pick item BgAltColor_Filtered_QuickPick>
In order to change the colors, you must add the Entry value to the Preferences.xml file. The colors are based on
RGB values, with the three numbers representing the Red, Green, Blue values in that order.
Note: If you need help knowing what values equal which colors, you can search for RGB values online to find
the information you need. There are over 16 million color combinations, so they are not listed here.
The Entries listed in the table above, once added to the Preferences.xml file, will allow you to customize the
colors in the File List.
To customize the colors in the File List

1. Navigate to the Preferences.xml file at the following path:
AccessData/Products/Forensic Toolkit/6.3/Preferences.xml
2. Type the desired Entry line from the table above into the Preferences.xml file, replacing the default RGB
value (shown) with your desired RGB value.
3. Save and close the Preferences.xml file and restart the program. The File List will now display the
customized color(s).

Using the File List’s Columns
For each evidence item, you can display multiple columns of information about that item.
You can hover over a column’s short name to display a tooltip that shows a more descriptive column long name.
You can sort the list using any column. Click on a column heading in the File List view to sort on that column.
Hold down the Shift key while clicking a different column header to make the newly selected column the primary-
sorted column, while the previous primary-sorted column becomes the secondary-sorted column. There are only
two levels of column sorting, primary and secondary.
To undo a secondary sort, click on a different column header to make it the primary-sorted column.
Column widths in most view panes can be adjusted by hovering the cursor over the column heading borders,
and dragging the column borders wider or narrower.
See Customizing File List Columns (page 494).
A data box displays in the lower-right of the File List View that indicates the total logical size of the currently listed
files.
Using the File List’s Type-Down Control Feature

When you view data in the File List, use can use a type-down control feature to locate information. To use the
type-down control feature, select any file in the file list and then type the first letters of a file. As you continue to
type, the file selector moves to the file list to the closest match to what you type.

Icons of the File List Tool Bar
File List Tool Bar
Checks all of the files in the current list.
Unchecks all of the files in the current list.
Unchecks all of the files in the current case.
Opens the Create New Bookmark dialog.
Opens the Manage Labels dialog.
Apply Label drop-down allows you to select from the list of defined labels and apply
it to a single selected file or a group of files as selected in the Apply Label To drop-
down.
Select Label Target drop-down allows you to specify currently Highlighted,

Checked, or Listed files for the Label you choose from the Apply Label drop-down.
Export File List lets you save selected files to another folder.
Opens the Copy Special dialog.
Opens the Column Settings dialog.

File List Tool Bar (Continued)
Column Templates
Sets the columns to a specific selection from the list of defined column sets.
Some Default Column Templates are:
 Cerberus Results
See Cerberus Columns on page 221.
 eDiscovery
 eDiscovery Mail
 Email
 Explicit Image Detection (EID)
 File Listing
 GeoEXIF, GeoIP, Geolocation - Shows Geolocation-related columns
See Using Geolocation Columns in the Item List on page 485.
 Internet History
See Examining Internet Artifact Data on page 352.
 Normal (default)
 Reports: File Path Section
 Reports: Standard
Displays the selected Time Zone from the local machine.
Opens the Heatmap page.

See Using Visualization Heatmap on page 476.
Opens the Geolocation page.

See Using Visualization Geolocation on page 478.
Opens the Visualization page.

Leave query running when switching tabs (this may affect the performance of other
tabs).
Cancel retrieving row data. This is not a pause button. To retrieve row data after
clicking Cancel, you must begin again. There is no way to pause and restart the
retrieval of row data.
Active spinner indicates Processing activity.
Note: When checking files in a case, these two rules apply:
Checked files are persistent and remain checked until the user unchecks them.
Checked files are per-user; another user or an Administrator will not see your checked files as
checked when viewing the same case.

File List View Right-Click Menu
When you right-click on any item in the File List view, a menu with the following options appears. Some options
are enabled or disabled, depending on the tab you are in, the evidence that exists in the case, the item you have
selected, or whether bookmarks have been created.
File List View Right-Click Menu Options
Option Description
Open Opens the selected file.
Launch in Content Launches the file in the Content Viewer, formerly known as Detached Viewer.
Viewer
Open With Opens the file. Choose either Internet Explorer or an External Program.
Create Bookmark Opens the Create New Bookmark dialog for creating a new bookmark.
See Bookmarking Evidence on page 388.
Create Project VIC See Using Project VIC on page 275.

Bookmark.
Add to Bookmark Opens the Add to Bookmark dialog for adding selected files to an existing
bookmark.
Remove from Removes a file from a bookmark. From the Bookmarks tab, open the bookmark
Bookmark containing the file to be removed, then select the file. Right-click and select
Remove from Bookmark.
Labels Opens the Labels dialog. View assigned Labels, create or delete a Label, Apply a
Labels to file, or Manage Local or Manage Global Labels.
Review Labels Opens the Label Information dialog to display all labels assigned to the selected
file or files.
Mount Image to Drive Allows you to mount an image logically to see it in Windows Explorer, or physically
to view.
See Mounting an Image to a Drive on page 104.
Add Decrypted File Right-click and select Add Decrypted File. Opens the Add Decrypted File dialog.
Browse to and select the file to add to the case, click Add.
View File Sectors Opens a hex view of the selected file. Type in the file sector to view and click Go
To.
Find on Disk Opens the Disk Viewer and shows where the file is found in the disk/file structure.
Note: Find on disk feature won’t find anything under 512 B physical size. Files
smaller than 1500 bytes may reside in the MFT and do not have a start cluster.
Find on disk depends on that to work.

File List View Right-Click Menu Options (Continued)
Option Description
Find Similar Files Opens the Search for Similar Files dialog. The selected file’s hash value is
displayed. Click From File to see the filename the hash is from. The Evidence
Items to Search box shows all evidence items in the case. Mark which ones to
include in the search. Select the Minimum Match Similarity you prefer, and click
Search or Cancel.
Open in Registry Opens a registry file in AccessData’s Registry Viewer. Choose SAM, SOFTWARE,
Viewer SYSTEM, SECURITY, or NTUSER.dat.
Export Opens the Export dialog with all options for file export, and a destination path
selection.
See Exporting Data from the Examiner on page 186.
Export to Image Opens the Create Custom Content Image dialog.

See Exporting Data from the Examiner on page 186.
Acquire to Disk Image Allows you to create a new disk image (001, AFF, E01, or S01) from a disk image in
the case.
Export File List Info Opens the Save As dialog. Choose TXT, TSV, or CSV. The default name is
FileList.TXT.
Copy Special Opens the Copy Special dialog.
Check All Files in Check-marks all files in the current list.

Current List
Uncheck all Files in Unchecks all files in the current list.

Current List
Uncheck All Files in Unchecks all files in the case.

Case
Check/Uncheck All Checks or unchecks all files that are currently highlighted in the list. (Pressing the
Highlighted space bar does the same thing.)
Change “Flag as Change Flag Status of all files as either Ignorable or Not Ignorable according to
Ignorable” Status Selection Options.
Change “Flag as Change Flag Status of all files as either Privileged or Not Privileged according to
Privileged” Status Selection Options.
Re-assign File Change File Category assignment.

Category
View This Item In a Changes the File List view from the current tab to that of the selected tab from the
Different List pop-out.

The File Content Viewer Pane
Displays the contents of the currently selected file from the File List. The Viewer toolbar allows the choice of
different view formats.
The File Content Viewer Pane
You can use CTRL+F to search within the File Content pane.
The File Content pane tab has a Default tab and a Web tab for each of the following tabbed views:
Hex Tab
Text Tab
Filtered Tab
Natural Tab
Properties Tab
Hex Interpreter Tab
Tabs of the File Content Pane
Note: The Find on Disk feature (in File List view, right-click an item) won’t find anything under 512 Bytes
physical size. Also, files smaller than 1500 bytes may reside in the MFT and thus do not have a start
cluster. Find on Disk depends on the start cluster information to work.
Exploring Evidence The File Content Viewer Pane | 305

Note: In the File List view of any tab, a much-greater-than symbol (>>) denotes that the path is not an actual
path, but that the file came from another file or source, such as a zipped, compressed, or linked (OLE)
file, or that it was carved.
The File Content pane title changes depending on which tab is selected at the bottom of the window. The
available tabs are File Content, Properties, and Hex Interpreter. These three tabs default to the bottom left of the
File Content pane in any program tab where it is used.
The three tabs can be re-ordered by clicking on a tab and dragging-and-dropping it to the position in the linear
list where you want it. Click any of these tabs to switch between them. The information displayed applies to the
currently selected file in the Viewer pane.
The Natural Tab

The Natural tab displays a file’s contents as it would appear normally. This viewer uses INSO filters for viewing
hundreds of file formats without the native application being installed.
FIle Content Pane: Natural Tab
Note: When highlighting terms in Natural View, each term throughout the document is highlighted, one term at a
time. When it reaches the limit of highlighting in that window, regardless of which term it is on (first,
second, third, etc.) it stops highlighting. There is no workaround.
Note: Viewing large items in their native applications may be faster than waiting for them to be rendered in the
Examiner viewer.
The Natural View top tab is the only one of the four that has additional tabs that provide for the viewing of Text,
Media, and Web files, in their native application environment.
File Content Pane: Default, Media, and Web Tabs

Natural Tab: Default
The Default tab displays documents or files in a viewer that uses INSO (Inside-Out) Technology,
according to their file type.
Natural Tab: Media
Case audio and video files play using an embedded Windows Media Player.
The Examiner has the functionality to recognize popular mobile phone formats (found in many MPE
images) such as M4A, MP4, AMR, and 3GP. These file types play inside the Media tab as long as the
proper codecs are installed that would also allow those files to play in Windows Media Player.
Natural Tab: Web
The Web view uses an embedded Internet Explorer instance to display the contents of the selected file in
a contained field.
In the Web view, the top-left border of the pane holds two toggle buttons for enabling or disabling HTML
content.
Natural Tab: Web Tab Toggle Buttons
Enable or Disable CSS Formatting. CSS formatting displays any fonts, colors, and layout
from cascading style sheets. HTML formatting not part of a cascading style sheet might
remain. Enabled feature is indicated by a blue background; disabled feature is indicated by a
gray background.
Enable or Disable External Hyperlinks. Enabled hyperlinks in the file will link to active internet
pages. This may not accurately provide data that was available using that link at the time the
image was made, or the evidence was acquired. Enabled feature is indicated by a blue
background; disabled feature is indicated by a gray background.
The Properties Tab

The Properties tab is found in the File Content View, and displays a pane, or window of information about a
selected file. The following figure displays the information contained in the Properties pane. This information
corresponds to the file selected in the File List pane.
The Properties Tab

Properties Pane Components
Option Description
Name The filename of the selected file.
Item Number A number assigned to the item during evidence processing.
File Type The type of a file, such as an HTML file or a Microsoft Word 98 document. The file header
is used to identify each item’s file type.
Path The path from the evidence source down to the selected file.
General Info General information about the selected file:

File Size: Lists the size attributes of the selected file as follows:
 Physical size of the file, including file slack
 Logical size of the file, excluding file slack
File Dates: Lists the Dates and Times of the following activities for that file on the imaged
source:
 Created
 Last accessed
 Last modified
All dates with times are listed in UTC and local times.
File Attributes The attributes of the file:
General:
 Actual File: True if an actual file. False if derived from an actual file.
 From Recycle Bin: True if the file was found in the Recycle Bin. False otherwise.
 Start Cluster: Start cluster of the file on the disk.
 Compressed: True if compressed. False otherwise.
 Original Name: Path and filename of the original file.
 Start Sector: Start sector of the file on the disk.
 File has been examined for slack: True if the file has been examined for slack. False
otherwise.
DOS Attributes:
 Hidden: True if Hidden attribute was set on the file. False otherwise.
 System: True if this is a DOS system file. False otherwise.
 Read Only: True or False value.
 Archive: True if Read Only attribute was set on the file. False otherwise.
 8.3 Name: Name of the file in the DOS 8.3 naming convention, such as [filename.ext].

Properties Pane Components (Continued)
Option Description
Verification Hashes: True if verification hashes exist. False otherwise.
NTFS Information:
 NTFS Record Number: The number of the file in the NTFS MFT record.
 Record Date: UTC time and date record was last modified.
 Resident: True if the item was Resident, meaning it was stored in the MFT and the
entire file fit in the available space. False otherwise. (If false, the file would be stored
FAT fashion, and its record would be in the $I30 file in the folder where it was saved.)
 Offline: True or False value.
 Sparse: True or False value.
 Temporary: True if the item was a temporary file. False otherwise.
 Owner SID: The Windows-assigned security identifier of the owner of the object.
 Owner Name: Name of the owner of that file on the source system.
 Group SID: The Windows-assigned security identifier of the group that the owner of
the object belongs to.
 Group Name: The name of the group the owner of the file belongs to.
NTFS ACL attributes. This is the same functionality that is currently found in Imager.
When there are multiple sets of ACL attributes present, they are now distinguished by
number.
File Content The content information and verification information of the file:
Info  MD5 Hash: The MD5 (16 bytes) hash of the file (default).
 SHA-1 Hash: The SHA-1 (20 bytes) hash of the file (default).
 SHA-256 Hash: the SHA-256 (32 bytes) hash of the file (default).
The information displayed in the Properties tab is file-type-dependent, so the selected file determines what
displays.
The Hex Tab

The Hex tab shows the file content in hexadecimal. It is different from the Hex Interpreter tab at the bottom of the
screen.
The Hex Tab

The bar symbol indicates that the character font is not available, or that an unassigned space is not filled.
File Content Hex View Right-click Menu Options
Select all Show decimal offsets
Copy text Show text only
Copy hex Fit to window
Copy Unicode Save current settings
Copy raw data Go to Offset takes you to a desired offset. You can
select the Hex data to save as a separate file.
Save selection Save selection as carved file lets you manually carve
data from files.
The Hex Interpreter Tab

The Hex Interpreter tab shows interpreted hexadecimal values selected in the Hex tab viewer on the File
Content tab in the Viewer pane into decimal integers and possible time and date values as well as Unicode
strings.
The Hex Interpreter Tab
The Hex Value Interpreter reads date/time stamp values, including AOL date/time, GPS date/time, Mac date/
time, BCD, BCD Hex, and BitDate.
The Hex tab displays file contents in hexadecimal format. Use this view together with the Hex Interpreter pane.
The Hex View tab is also found in the File Content View. This feature helps if you are familiar with the internal
code structure of different file types, and know where to look for specific data patterns or for time and date
information.
To convert hexadecimal values

1. Highlight one to eight continuous bytes of hexadecimal code in the File Content pane > File Content
tab viewer > Hex tab. (Select two or more bytes for the Unicode string, depending on the type of data
you want to interpret and view.)
2. Switch to the Hex Interpreter tab at the bottom of the File Content Viewer > Hex tab, or open it next to,
or below the File Content tab > Hex tab view to see both concurrently.
3. The possible valid representations, or interpretations, of the selected code automatically display in the
Hex Value Interpreter.

Little-endian and big-endian refers to which bits are most significant in multi-byte data types, and describes the
order in which a sequence of bytes is stored in a computer’s memory. Microsoft Windows generally runs as Little
Endian, because it was developed on and mostly runs on Intel-based, or Intel-compatible machines.
In a big-endian system, the most significant bit value in the sequence is stored first (at the lowest storage
address). In a little-endian system, the least significant value in the sequence is stored first. These rules apply
when reading from left to right, as we do in the English language.
As a rule, Intel based computers store data in a little-endian fashion, where RISC-based systems such as
Macintosh, store data in a big-endian fashion. This would be fine, except that a) AccessData’s products image
and process data from both types of machines, and b) there are many applications that were developed on one
type of system, and are now “ported” to the other system type. You can’t necessarily apply one rule and
automatically know which it is.
Little-endian is used as the default setting. If you view a data selection in the Hex Interpreter and it does not
seem correct, you can try choosing the big-endian setting to see if the data displayed makes more sense.
The Text Tab

The Text tab displays the file’s content as text using the code page selected from the View Text As drop-down
menu.
The File Content pane currently provides many code pages from which to choose. When the desired code page
is selected, the Text tab will present the view of the selected file in text using the selected code page language.
The Text Tab
The Filtered Tab

The Filtered tab shows the file’s text created during indexing. The following figure represents content displayed
in the filtered tab. The text is taken from an index created for the current session if indexing was not previously
selected.
The Filtered Tab

The Filter Toolbar
The interface provides a tool bar for applying QuickPicks and Filters to the case.
See also Filtering Data to Locate Evidence (page 141)
The Filter Toolbar
Filter Toolbar Components
Turns the filter on or off. Filtered data is shown in a colored pane to indicate that it is
filtered. In addition, if no filter is applied, the icon is grayed out. When active, or ON,
the Filter button has a light blue background. When inactive, or OFF, the
background is gray.
Opens the drop-down menu listing defined filters. Applies the selected filter.
Opens the Filter Manager.

The Filter Manager allow multiple filters to be selected and applied concurrently.
These are known as Compound filters.
Turns the QuickPicks filter on or off. The QuickPicks filter is used in the Explore tab
to populate the file list with only items the investigator wishes to analyze. When
active, or ON, the QuickPicks button is light blue. When inactive, or OFF, the
background is gray.
Locks or unlocks the movable panes in the application. When the lock is applied,
the box turns grey, and the panes are locked. When unlocked, the box has a light
blue background and blue outline, indicating the panes can be moved.
Exploring Evidence The Filter Toolbar | 313

Using QuickPicks
QuickPicks is a type of filter that allows the selection of multiple folders and files in order to focus analysis on
specific content. The following figure represents the Explore Evidence Items tree with a partially selected set of
folders and sub-folders using the QuickPicks feature.
The QuickPicks filter simultaneously displays open and unopened descendent containers of all selected tree
branches in the File List at once. The colors of the compound icons indicate whether descendants are selected.
The icons are a combination of an arrow, representing the current tree level, and a folder, representing any
descendants.
QuickPicks Icons
Icon Description
A dark green arrow behind a bright green folder means all descendants are selected.
A dark green arrow behind a yellow folder means that although the folder itself is not
selected, some of its descendents are selected.
A white arrow with no folder means neither that folder, nor any of its descendants is
selected.
A white arrow behind a bright green folder means that all descendants are selected,
but the folder is not.
The File List view reflects the current QuickPicks selections. When QuickPicks is active, or on, if no folders are
selected, the File List view shows the currently selected item in the Tree view, including first-level child objects.
When any item is selected, that selection is reflected in the File List view. When QuickPicks is not active, or off,
the File List view displays only items at the selected level in the tree view, with no children.
Exploring Evidence Using QuickPicks | 314

Chapter 21
Examining Evidence in the Overview Tab
Using the Overview Tab (page 315)

The Overview tab provides a general view of a case. You can find the number of items in various categories,
view lists of items and lists of individual files by category, status, and extension. Evidence categories are
represented by trees in the upper-left Case Overview pane of the application.
The Overview Tab
Evidence Groups Container

Evidence items can be assigned to a group when they are added to a case. The Evidence Groups Container
shows at-a-glance which Evidence Groups are in use in a case, and the number of items associated with each.
File Items Container

The File Items container itemizes files by whether they have been checked and lists in an expandable tree view
the evidence files added to the case.
Examining Evidence in the Overview Tab Using the Overview Tab | 315
File Extension Container
The File Extension container itemizes files by their extensions, such as TXT, MAPIMAIL, and DOC and lists
them in a tree view.
The File Extension Container content numbers do not synchronize or match up with the overall number of case
items. This is because case items, such as file folders, do not have extensions and, therefore, are not listed in
the File Extension Container.
File Category Container

File Category container itemizes files by type, such as a word processing document, graphic, email, executable
(program file), or folder, and lists them in a tree view.
The statistics for each category are automatically listed. Expand the category tree view to see the file list
associated with it.
BlackBerry IPD files (the files created on your PC when you back up your BlackBerry device) are recognized and
categorized. Not every BlackBerry device has the same features as all the others, and everyone uses their
device differently so there is no guarantee that every type of data will be available from every set of backup IPD
files. You will most likely see HTML and XML files, Messages, and Pictures/Photos. Address Books, Tasks, and
Calendars will be extracted if available.
File Categories
Archives Archive files include email archive files, ZIP, STUFFIT, THUMBS.DB thumbnail
graphics, and other archive formats.
Databases Database files such as those from MS Access, Lotus Notes NSF, and other database
programs.
Documents Includes recognized word processing, HTML, WML, XML, TXT, or other document-type
files.
Email Includes email messages from Outlook, Outlook Express, AOL, Endoscope, Yahoo,
Rethink, Udder, Hotmail, Lotus Notes, and MSN.
Executables Includes Win32 executable files and DLLs, OS/2, Windows VxD, Windows NT, Java
Script, and other executable formats.
Folders Folders or directories that are located in the evidence.
Graphics Lists files having the standard recognized graphic formats such as TIF, GIF, JPEG, and
BMP, as found in the evidence.
Internet/Chat Files Lists Microsoft Internet Explorer cache and history indexes.
Mobile Phone Data Lists data acquired from recognized mobile phone devices.
Multimedia Lists AIF, WAV, ASF, and other audio and video files as found in the evidence.
OS/File System Files Lists partitions, file systems, registry files, and so forth.
Other Encryption Files Lists found encrypted files, as well as files needed for decryption such as EFS search
strings, Public Keys, Private Keys, and other RSA Keys.
For more information on Decrypting Encrypted Files, See Decrypting Files (page 165).
File Categories (Continued)
Other Known Types A miscellaneous category that includes audio files, help files, dictionaries, clipboard
files, link files, and alternate data stream files such as those found in Word DOC files,
etc.
Note: Other Known Types includes NSF Misc. Note (Calendar, $profile data, and other
miscellaneous files that in the past were shown as HTML), and NSF Stub Note (a link
to the same email or calendar item in another view) sub categories.
Presentations Lists multimedia file types such as MS PowerPoint or Corel Presentation files.
Slack/Free Space Lists files, or fragments of files that are no longer seen by the file system, but that have
not been completely overwritten.
Spreadsheets Lists spreadsheets from Lotus, Microsoft Excel, Quattro Pro, and others, as found in the
evidence.
Unknown Types Lists files whose types are not identified.
User Types Lists user-defined file types such as those defined in a Custom File Identification File.
File Status Container

File Status covers a number of file categories that can alert the investigator to problem files or help narrow down
a search.
The statistics for each category are automatically listed. Click the category button to see the file list associated
with it. The following table displays the file status categories.
File Status Categories
Category Contents Description

Bad Extensions Files with an extension that does not match the file type identified in the file header, for
example, a GIF image renamed as [graphic].txt.
Data Carved Files The results of data carving when the option was chosen for preprocessing.
Decrypted Files The files decrypted by applying the option in the Tools menu.
Note: Decrypted status means the file was decrypted from evidence added to the case in its
original form. The software has had control of the file and knows it was originally
encrypted, that it was contained in the original evidence, and thus, is relevant to the case.
Deleted Files Complete files or folders recovered from slack or free space that were deleted by the owner
of the image, but not yet written over by new data.
Duplicate Items Any items that have an identical hash.
Because the hash is independent of the filename, identical files may actually have different
filenames.
The first instance of a file found during processing is the primary item. Any subsequently
found files, whose hash is identical, is considered a secondary item, regardless of how
many duplications of the same file are found.
Email Attachments Files attached to the email in the evidence.
Email Related All email-related files including email messages, archives, and attachments.
Items
File Status Categories (Continued)
Category Contents Description

Encrypted Files Files that are encrypted or have a password. This includes files that have a read-only
password; that is, they may be opened and viewed, but not modified by the reader.
If the files have been decrypted with EFS, and you have access to the user’s login
password, you can decrypt these files.
Flagged Ignore Files that are flagged to be ignored are probably not important to the case.
Flagged Privileged Files that are flagged as privileged cannot be viewed by the Case Reviewer.
From Recycle Bin Files retrieved from the Windows Recycle Bin.
KFF Alert Files Files identified as likely to be contraband or illicit in nature.
KFF Ignorable Files identified as likely to be forensically benign.
OCR Graphics Files with graphic text that have been interpreted by the Optical Character Recognition
engine.
OLE Sub-items Items or pieces of information that are embedded in a file, such as text, graphics, or an
entire file. This includes file summary information (also known as metadata) included in
documents, spreadsheets, and presentations.
User Decrypted Files you’ve previously decrypted, and then added to the case.
Note: A user can add any file using Add Decrypted File, and it will be set as decrypted by
user. This status indicates that AccessData did not decrypt this file, and cannot guarantee
its validity or that such a file has anything to do with the case.
Cluster Topic Container

Cluster Topic are groups of files created through Document Content Analysis. This feature allows you to group
Email Threaded data and Near Duplicate data together for quicker review. After the application completes the
analysis, the content appears in the Cluster Topic container. The content is organized by the keywords in which
the documents were analyzed and grouped. Documents that do not fit into a Content Topic category are placed
in the UNCLUSTERED category.
Using Document Content Analysis (page 439)
Processing and Displaying Evidence Counts

When you open the Examiner > Overview tab, queries are run to calculate the evidence counts in multiple
categories: Evidence Groups, File Extension, File Category, and Labels. If you have a large case, you can speed
up performance by calculating counts in only one category. You can restrict this in one of two ways:
Through a registry setting

In the Examiner interface
To Restrict Count Updates by Adding a Settings Entry in the Registry

1. Navigate to the following path in the registry to add the settings value:
HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/AccessData/Products/Forensic Toolkit/5.3/Settings/Tabs/Tab7
2. Add the following value:
OverviewUpdateType REG_DWORD 2
Use the data values in the following table to select which category you would like to specify.
Registry Data Values

FILE CATEGORY 2
FILE EXTENSION 3
LABELS 6
EVIDENCE GROUPS 7
To Restrict Count Updates in the Examiner Interface

1. Click on an item within one of the evidence categories that contain evidence counts.
2. Press the Home key on the keyboard.
This will reduce the case overview tree to only the selected item and it’s children. For example, if you
select the Documents category, this will reduce the case overview tree to showing only Documents.
This choice is stored in the settings for the Overview tab.
To Restore Full Count Updates in the Examiner Interface

Click an item in the reduced tree and press the End key on the keyboard to restore the full case
overview tree.
Disabling the Calculation and Display of the Total Logical Size

When viewing evidence in the Examiner, the Total Logical Size (Total LSize) is calculated for different categories
of evidence. To speed up the interface for large cases, you can disable the calculation and display of this value
by adding a registry value.
To Hide the Total Logical Size

1. Navigate to the following path in the registry:
HKLM\SOFTWARE\AccessData\Products\Forensic Toolkit\version
2. Add the following value:
hide_total_logical_size DWORD value 1
To Restore the Total Logical Size

Use the following value:
hide_total_logical_size DWORD value 0
Chapter 22
Examining Email
Using the Email Tab

The Email tab displays email mailboxes and their associated messages and attachments. The display is a coded
HTML format.
The Email Tab
Email Status Tree

The Email Status tree lists information such as the sender of the email, and whether an email has attachments.
They are listed according to the groups they belong to.
Email Archives Tree

The Email Archives tree lists Email related files that are considered containers. Item types include DBX, MBX,
PST/OST, Saved Mail, Sent Mail, Trash, and so forth. The tree is limited to archive types found within the
evidence during processing.
Examining Email Using the Email Tab | 320

Email Tree
The Email tree lists message counts, AOL DBX counts, PST counts, NSF counts, MBOX counts, and other such
counts.
Exchange and PST Emails can be exported to MSG format. In addition, MSG files resulting from an export of
internet email look the way they should.
The Email Tab > Email Items tree view contains two new groups: Email By Date (organized by Year, then by
Month, then by Date, for both Submitted and Delivered); and Email Addresses (organized by Senders and
Recipients, and subcategorized by Email Domain, Display Name, and Email Addresses).
You can also export Tasks, Contacts, Appointments, Sticky Notes, and Journal Entries to MSG files.
Important: If the Mozilla Firefox directory is added as evidence while in use, history, downloads, etc. are
identified as zero-length files.
When an email-related item is selected in the File List, right-click and choose View this item in a different list >
Email to see the file in Email context.
Note: Email data parsed into the new nodes in the Email tree view will only be populated in new cases.
Converted cases will not have this data. To make this data available in older cases, re-process the case in
the new version.
Examining Email Using the Email Tab | 321

Examining Windows 10 Email
It is possible to process and view Email and Contacts for Windows 10 Email.
Note: This software does not parse anything other than Email and Contacts for Windows 10 Email at this time.
Processing Windows 10 Email and Contacts

To Process Windows 10 Email and Contacts:
1. In the Evidence Processing window, select Expand Compound Files.
2. Click on the Expansion Options button. Scroll down and select the Unistore Database (Windows 10
Mail) option.
Viewing Windows 10 Email and Contacts

In the Windows File System, the ESE database is found in the store.vol file within the Unistore DB. This is where
the logical structure for emails, contacts, and other important information is kept.
There are two ways to view Windows 10 Email and Contacts. If you choose to see the full file structure of the
store.vol file, you will need to use the Explore Tab. If you only want to view emails, the Email Tab contains all
emails in the case, including Windows 10 Email.
To View Windows 10 Contacts in the Explore Tab:

1. Process the evidence as described above.
2. Navigate to the Explore Tab.
3. In the Evidence Items pane, navigate to the user’s EmailComms > Comms > UnistoreDB > store.vol
file. Drill down until you see the email folders.
4. To view contacts, open the folder for the email program you are looking for. Expand the IPM.root folder,
then select the Contacts folder. The Contacts will then populate in the File List pane. Select a Contact
from the list to see the information associated with that contact in the File Content pane. Select the
Properties tab to view the various properties associated with the selected contact in Cool HTML.
To View Windows 10 Email in the Explore Tab:

1. Process the evidence as described above.
2. Navigate to the Explore Tab.
3. In the Evidence Items pane, navigate to the user’s EmailComms > Comms > UnistoreDB > store.vol
file. Inside this file will be the various email folders.
4. To view emails, expand the IPM.root folder for the email program you are looking for and select the
Inbox folder. The list of emails will then populate in the File List pane. Select an email to view it in the
File Content pane. Select the Properties tab to view the various properties associated with the selected
email.
Note: If you’d like to see an email in the Email Tab instead of the Explore Tab, right-click on the email and select
View This Item In a Different List > Email.
Examining Email Examining Windows 10 Email | 322

To View Windows 10 Email in the Email Tab:
Windows 10 Email is automatically populated in the existing folders in the email tab.
Exporting Windows 10 Email

Individual emails can be exported as MSG files. When exported, all existing attachments will be included.
Note: If the user has not downloaded the attachment, the content will not be available.
To Export a Windows 10 Email:

1. Right-click on the item you’d like to export and select Export.
2. In the Export window, select the Export emails as MSG option and set a Destination path.
3. Click Ok.
Your email(s) will be exported to the selected destination folder.
Examining Email Examining Windows 10 Email | 323

Chapter 23
Examining Graphics
Using the Graphics Tab (page 324)

Evaluating Explicit Material (page 330)
Using the Graphics Tab

The Graphics tab displays the graphics in a case like a photo-album.
The Graphics Tab
Each graphic file is shown in a thumbnail view. A graphic displays in the Thumbnail view when its thumbnail is
checked in the File Contents pane.
Examining Graphics Using the Graphics Tab | 324

Graphics tab Thumbnails
In the thumbnail viewer, if a graphic is not fully loaded, the following icon is displayed:
In the thumbnail viewer, if a graphic cannot be displayed, the following icon is displayed:
Beneath each thumbnail image is a check box. When creating a report, choose to include all of the graphics in
the case or only those graphics that are checked.
The Evidence Items pane shows the Overview tree by default. Use the View menu to change what displays
here.

About the Graphics Tab Filter
The graphics files that appear on the Graphics Ta are the ones that meet the criteria of the Graphics tab filter that
is applied. You can change the tab filter to view different sets of files.
The Graphics tab has its own tab filter.
See Using Tab Filters (page 145) for more information.
In a new installation, the Graphics tab filter is set to the Graphic Files w/o Dup+Ignore filter by default.
This eliminates the need to sort through a high volume of unrelated images. File types not shown when this filter
is applied include duplicate items, flagged ignore, and KFF ignorable.
See Ignore Highlighted on page 329.
In an upgrade environment, the current tab filter will be the filter that was previously used. You can apply the
Graphics Files w/o Dup+Ignore filter as the default Graphics Tab Filter.
To change the tab filter

1. In the Examiner, navigate to Filter > Tab Filter.
2. In the drop down menu, select a filter to apply to the current tab.
See Using Tab Filters (page 145) for more information.
Stacking Filters in the Graphics Tab

There is a default filter on the graphics tab that filters out duplicates and KFF ignorable files. This filter can be
changed depending on what items you are searching for. See Using Simple Filtering (page 145) for instructions
on how to change and apply tab filters.
You can also add standard filters (such as a Not Bookmarked filter) to pare down the images in the panel to view
only things you haven’t seen or that haven’t been processed already. This can be ideal for investigating large
batches of images. See Using Compound Filters (page 149) for instructions on how to create and apply multiple
filters simultaneously.
See Filtering Data to Locate Evidence (page 141) for more information on using filters.

The Thumbnails Size Setting
The thumbnail settings allow large amounts of graphic data to be displayed for evidence investigation, or larger
thumbnails to show more detail quickly. The investigator does not always need to see details to pick out
evidence; scan the thumbnails for flesh tones, photographic-type graphics, and perhaps particular shapes. Once
found, the graphics can be inspected more closely in the Content Viewer. There are two ways to change the
thumbnails size setting, in the Examiner View menu or with the Thumbnail Size Selector ( ).
To change the Thumbnail Size in the View menu, click View > Thumbnail Size and select a size.
To change the Thumbnail Size with the Thumbnail Size Selector, click and select a size.
Note: The thumbnail pane needs to be sized at least one thumbnail in height for the scrolling feature to work
properly.
Changing the Thumbnail Size

Moving the Thumbnails Pane
The detachable pane feature is especially useful when you undock the thumbnails graphics pane and move it to
a second monitor, thus freeing your first monitor to display the entire data set for the graphics files being
analyzed. You can undock the Thumbnails pane, and expand it across the screen. Then you can open the
Thumbnails Settings sub-menu, and scale the thumbnails down to fit as many as possible in the pane.
Using the Thumbnails Pane

The Graphics tab will automatically load all images in the case. It can load over ten million images for review.
There are three actions available within the Thumbnail pane:
Show Tooltip checkbox

Ignore Highlighted button
Thumbnail Size Selector dropdown

Show Tooltip
When the Show Tooltip checkbox is selected, information about an image is displayed as the mouse hovers over
it. The tooltip displays the following information for the image:
Name
Logical Size
Physical Size
Created
Ignore Highlighted
You can remove unrelated images from the Thumbnails Pane using the Ignore Highlighted button.
Selecting one or more files in the Thumbnails Pane and clicking the Ignore Highlighted button will give the file(s)
a Flagged Ignore status. If the default Graphic Files w/o Dup+Ignore filter is applied, the selected files will no
longer be visible in the Graphics tab. This allows graphics files that are not applicable to the case to be removed
from the Thumbnail Pane.
See About the Graphics Tab Filter on page 326.
To review the files that have been flagged with an ignore marker, navigate to Overview > File Status > Flagged
Ignore.
Thumbnail Size Selector

There is a dropdown box in the Thumbnail Pane that will quickly change the size of the displayed thumbnails.
The following size options are available:
Extra Large
Large
Medium
Small

Evaluating Explicit Material
When explicit material is suspected in a case, the Explicit Image Detection (AID) feature allows for easier
location and identification of those files. When creating the case, there are options for identifying explicit
material.
See Using Explicit Image Detection (page 83) for more information on setting the EID pre-processing options
prior to case creation.
When the pre-processing options are set and applied to evidence as it is processed, in the case you can easily
identify files that fit the criteria you set.
Note: You can also use the Project VIC feature to identify known explicit images. See Using Project VIC on
page 275.
Filtering EID Material

The following tasks can help you use the EID feature.
Create an EID Tab Filter

A Tab Filter must be used here to filter the folders from the Explore tab, but not filter out the Folders’ content from
the Graphics Tab. However, the filter itself must be created first, then the filter must be applied as a Tab Filter.
To create a filter for the EID folders in your case

1. Click the Explore tab.
2. Ensure that Filters are turned off, and the Filter drop-down displays “-unfiltered-”.
3. On the Menu bar, click Filter >New.
4. Create a Filter to include EID Folders that have high scores.
4a. Give the Filter a name that reflects its purpose.
4b. Provide a description with enough information to be helpful at a glance.
4c. Set up rules. Check each rule to include it in the filter.
4d. Mark Live Preview to see the effects of the filter on the current File List.
4e. Choose Match Any, or Match All, to fit your needs, according to the preview.
4f. Click Save > Close.
If you choose to, repeat Steps 3 and 4 for Medium folders with a criteria of 40, then move to Step 5.
5. From the Filter Manager, copy the new filters to the Include list on the top-right side of the view.
6. At the bottom of the dialog, click Apply and Close.
To apply the new filter as a Tab filter

1. Click the Explore tab.
2. Ensure that Filters are turned off, and the Filter drop-down displays “-unfiltered-”.
3. Click Filter >Tab Filter.
Examining Graphics Evaluating Explicit Material | 330

4. In the Tab Filter Selection dialog, click the drop-down to select Explicit images folder (high score) as
created earlier.
5. Click OK.
Change the Column List Settings

To view the Explicit Image Detection (EID) statistics for your case in the File List, do the following:
1. Click the Graphics tab.

2. In the File List, select the default EID column template from the drop-down list, or add the EID columns
to the column template you choose. To customize a Columns Template for EID content, do the
following:
2a. Click Column Settings in the File List toolbar.
2b. In the Manage Column Settings dialog, click New, or highlight an existing template and click Copy
Selected.
2c. In the Column Settings dialog, select the EID-related column headings to add to the template, and
click Add
2d. Make your selections.
2e. Move the selected columns up in the list to make them display closer to the left-most column in the
view, as it best works for you.
3. Click OK
4. From the Manage Column Settings, select the New Column template, and click Apply.
Later, to re-apply this column template, select it from the Column Setting drop-down.
The resulting columns are displayed in the File List view
5. In the File List view, arrange the column headings so you can see the EID data.
6. Click any column heading to sort on that column, to more easily see and evaluate the relevant data.
EID Scoring
Each folder is given a score that indicates the percentage of files within the folder that have an EID score above
50. For example, if the folder contains 8 files and three of them score over 50, the folder score will be 38 (3 is
37.5% of 8). Now, a folder score of 38 does not mean there is no objectionable material in that folder, it only
means that there is not a high concentration of objectionable material found there.
Explicit Image Detection filtering rates pictures according to the presence or absence of skin tones in graphic
files. In addition, it not only looks for flesh tone colors, but it has been trained on a library of approximately
30,000 pornographic images. It assesses actual visual content. This capability increases the speed with which
investigators can handle cases that involve pornography.
Successfully filtered pictures are issued a score between 0 and 100 (0 being complete absence of skin tones,
and 100 being heavy presence of skin tones). A score above 100 indicates that no detection could be made.
When you set filters for analyzing the scored data, you specify your own acceptance threshold limit for images

you may consider inappropriate. Negative scores indicate a black and white, or grayscale image where no
determination can be made, or that some error occurred in processing the file.
Descriptions of EID Scoring Values
EID Value Description

0 to 100 The amount of skin tones detected. 0 = few skin tones detected, 100 heavy skin tones
detected
-1 File not found
-2 License error
-3 Wrong file format
-4 No match found
-5 Folder not found
-6 Unknown error
-7 Cannot load image (e.g., corrupt image)
-8 Not enough information
-9 Face detection profile path is null
-10 Can’t open face detection directory
-11 Face detection file not found
-12 Input classifier not initialized
-13 Init profile failed
-14 File path is empty
-16 Image data is empty
-17 Null matching handle
-18 Missing retrieval result
-100 An unsupported file format
-101 An unsupported black & white image
-102 An unsupported grayscale image
-103 An unsupported monochrome image
-1000 An unknown error
-1001 The EID score function threw an exception
-1002 The EID score function threw an exception

Chapter 24
Examining Videos
The Video tab lets you view detailed information about the video files in your cases.
You can generate thumbnails from video files and display them in the Video Thumbnail pane. This functionality
lets you quickly examine a portion of the contents within video files without having to watch each media file
individually.
See Generating Thumbnails for Video Files (page 334)
The Video tab also includes an embedded media player that lets you view the contents of video files. When you
process the evidence in your case, you can choose to create a common video type for each of the various
videos in your case. These common video types are not the actual video files from the evidence, but a copied
conversion of the media that is generated by AccessData. These features let you view the contents of multiple
video types, in a common resolution, and sampling rate, from within the Examiner’s embedded media player.
See Creating Common Video Files (page 335)
When you process evidence, video thumbnails are created by default. To disable the creation of video
thumbnails, turn off the Create Thumbnails for Videos option in the Evidence Processing options.
Examining Videos | 333

Generating Thumbnails for Video Files
You can generate thumbnail graphics based on the content that exists within video files in your case. Video
thumbnail generation is accomplished during processing. You can either set up video thumbnail generation
when you create a new case, or you can run the processing against an existing case by using the Additional
Analysis dialog.
To generate thumbnails for video files

In the Case Manager, click Case > New. Then, click Detailed Options.
In the Examiner, click Evidence > Additional Analysis > Hashing/Job Options.
2. Check Create Thumbnails for Videos.
3. Click Thumbnail Options.
4. In the Video Thumbnail Options dialog, set from the following:
Option Description
Percent This option generates thumbnails against videos based on the percentage of a videos
total content. For example if you set this value to 5, then at every 5% of the video a
thumbnail is generated.
Interval This option generates thumbnails against videos based on seconds. For example, if you
set this value to 5, then at every 5 seconds within a video, a thumbnail is generated.
5. Click OK.
Generating Video Thumbnails from the Natural Viewer

You can also capture video thumbnails directly from a video viewed in the Natural Viewer. This feature allows
you to find and capture specific information from video you are reviewing. After capturing a video thumbnail, you
can then bookmark that thumbnail for future review.
To capture a video thumbnail from the Natural Viewer

1. From Evidence Explorer, click the Video tab.
2. Highlight the video and click the Natural tab in the File Content pane.
3. Click the Play button ( ).
4. Click the Pause button when you are ready to capture a video thumbnail.
Note: You can navigate through the video using the Rewind and Fast Forward
5. Click Add in the bottom right corner of the Video Thumbnails pane.
The application creates a video thumbnail of the paused frame and places that thumbnail in the Video
Thumbnail pane.
Examining Videos Generating Thumbnails for Video Files | 334

Creating Common Video Files
When you process the evidence in your case or during Additional Analysis, you can choose to create a common
video type for videos in your case. These common video types are not the actual video files from the evidence,
but a copied conversion of the media that is generated and saved as an MP4 file that can be previewed on the
video tab.
Common video files are not created by default.
To create common video files

In the Case Manager, Click Case > New. Then, click Detailed Options.
In the Examiner, click Evidence > Additional Analysis.
2. Check Create Common Video Files.
3. Process or analyze evidence.
Video Formatting Options
4. In the Video Formatting Options dialog, set the following:

Lines of Resolution: Sets the number of vertical lines in the video. The higher it is, the better the
resolution.
Bit Rate: Sets the rate of bits in Kbps measurements. The higher it is, the better the resolution.
5. Click OK.
Examining Videos Creating Common Video Files | 335

Using the Video Tree Pane
The Video tree pane lets you see the multimedia content in a tree view. The content that is displayed in the Video
tab is dependent on a default Tab Filter called Video Tab Filter: Video Thumbnails.
The contents in the Video tree displays the multimedia contents in your case and information about the content
that applies to the requirements of the Tab filter.
For example, in the graphic below, you can see that the case has 46 total multimedia files. 12 of those
multimedia files meet the requirements of the Tab filter and therefore have had video thumbnails generated for
them.
Video Tab: Video Tree Pane
You can use the Video tree pane to navigate and drill down to specific multimedia containers and files. If you
select a file in the tree pane, The Video Thumbnails pane and the File List pane display the content that is
contained in your selection.
Examining Videos Using the Video Tree Pane | 336

Using the Video Thumbnails Pane
The Video Thumbnails pane displays any video thumbnails that you have generated based on your selection in
either the Video tree view or in the File List Pane.
Video Tab: Video Thumbnail Pane
You can use the Video Thumbnail pane to rapidly scan through the visual contents in a video file, without having
to launch and watch the entire video.
In the Video Thumbnails pane, if a thumbnail could not be generated the following icon is displayed:
In the Video Thumbnails pane, beneath the first thumbnail image for a set of videos is a check box. You can
select this check box to check the video file in the Examiner.
Playing a Video from a Video Thumbnail

You can play a video in the File Content Viewer starting from a selection in the Video Thumbnail pane.
For example, if you visually scan the contents of the video thumbnails pane and discover something you need to
investigate in the File Content viewer, rather than watching the entirety of the video, you can select the location
you want to start the video by selecting that thumbnail.
To Play a Video from the Location of a Video Thumbnail

1. In the Video Thumbnails pane, click the thumbnail from which you want to start the video.
2. In the File Content Pane, In the Natural tab, click the Play icon.
The video begins to play from the location that you selected in the Video Thumbnails pane.
Examining Videos Using the Video Thumbnails Pane | 337

The Thumbnail Size Setting
You can change the size of the thumbnails that are displayed in the Video tab of the Examiner.
See The Thumbnails Size Setting (page 327) for information on how to do this.

You can move, float, and dock the thumbnails pane in the Video tab of the Examiner.
See Moving the Thumbnails Pane (page 328) for information on how to do this.
Examining Videos The Thumbnail Size Setting | 338

Chapter 25
Examining Miscellaneous Evidence
This chapter contains information on the following ways to view evidence:
Identifying Processing-Generated Data (page 340)

Relating Generated Files to Original Files (page 340)
Viewing Windows Prefetch Data (page 341)
Viewing Data in Windows XML Event Log (EVTX) Files (page 341)
Viewing IIS Log File Data (page 343)
Viewing Registry Timeline Data (page 345)
Viewing Log2Timeline CSV File Data (page 347)
Identifying Document Languages (page 350)
Examining Internet Artifact Data (page 352)
Examining Mobile Phone Data (page 359)
Android Parsers (page 376)
Python Scripting (page 378)
Viewing Data in Volume Shadow Copies (page 381)
Viewing Microsoft Office and Adobe Metadata (page 381)
About Windows 8 and 10 Keyword Searches (page 382)
Parsing Data Using Belkasoft (page 382)
SQLite Query Builder (page 386)
Examining Miscellaneous Evidence | 339

Identifying Processing-Generated Data
There are some files that get generated during processing. Examples of these files include data broken out from
compound files, EXIF data from images, file metadata, and so on. There is a column called Actual File which can
be used in the File List to designate if the file was in the original data (True) or if it was generated during
processing (False).
Also, when looking at the file name at the bottom of the File List, if the file was generated by FTK, there is an >>
after the parent file name and before the generated file name.
For example, photo.jpg>>photo.exif.html, or mystuff.zip>>pass.doc
See File List Pane on page 298.
You can also use bookmarks to relate generated files with the actual source file in the evidence.
Relating Generated Files to Original Files

Some files in your evidence may not be original files but may have been generated during processing. Examples
of these files include data broken out from compound files, EXIF data from images, file metadata, and so on.
You can use bookmarks to quickly relate generated files with the actual source filed in the evidence. By selecting
the Actual Source File option, the source file will be listed and bookmarked as well. All parent items are
recursively related within the bookmark from the generated item to the actual source file and not just a parent
folder.
See Creating a Bookmark on page 389.
For example, during processing, a DOC file may be generated from a ZIP file. If you bookmark the DOC file and
select the Actual Source File option, the original ZIP file is included in the bookmark as well.
The related items are also shown in the bookmark section of reports.
You can also view information in the File List to identify processing-generated files.
To relate generated files to the original files in bookmarks

1. Right-click a file that was generated during processing.
2. Click either Create Bookmark or Add to Bookmark.
3. On the bookmark dialog, select Actual Source File.
Examining Miscellaneous Evidence Identifying Processing-Generated Data | 340

Viewing Windows Prefetch Data
You can easily view data about Windows prefetch (PF) files. When you select a prefetch file in the File List, the
following application data is displayed in HTML format in the Natural tab of the File Content pane:
The file path of the application executable file

The number of times the application has been run
The last time the application was run
Viewing Data in Windows XML Event Log (EVTX) Files
About Viewing EVTX Log Files

You can view Microsoft Windows XML event log data. You can view event data in HTML format in the Natural tab
of the File Content pane.
You can view event data in one of two ways:
View event data that is contained in Microsoft In the File List, you can see a list of all of the EVTX files. When
Windows XML event log (EVTX) files you view an EVTX log file, in the File Content pane, you can view
the information about all of the events that are contained in that
one file. There can be a lot of data contained in one file.
Expand EVTX log files into separate objects for When you expand EVTX log files, each event is extracted as its
every event record own record. As a result, in the File List, each event is shown as
its own item. Each item has a small amount of data in it but there
can be many individual event records. For example, you may
have 100 EVTX log files, and if you expand them, you can have
over 100,000 individual event records.
When you process evidence, you have the option of expanding

EVTX log files. The options is turned off by default.

If you expand EVTX files into separate event objects, you can
also use the following columns in the File List:
 EVTX Event Channel
 EVTX Event Computer
 EVTX Event Data
 EVTX Event ID
 EVTX Event Level
 EVTX Event Source
 EVTX Event Source Name
 EVTX Event User ID
If you expand data, you will have files are are generated when the data was processed and was not part of the
Examining Miscellaneous Evidence Viewing Windows Prefetch Data | 341

To view EVTX log files

1. In the Examiner, click Overview.
2. In Case Overview, do one of the following:
View by file extension:
 Click File Extension.
 If present, click evtx.
View by file category:

 Click File Category.
 If present, click Windows EVTX Event Log.
3. If your case has any EVTX files, they are displayed in the File List.
4. Click an EVTX file to view the data in the Natural tab.
Some log files may not contain any events and you will only see the heading EVTX Events.
To expand EVTX log files into individual event records

2. Under Miscellany, select Expand Compound Files.
4. Select EVTX.
5. Click OK to save the expansion settings.
6. Click OK to process the evidence to expand EVTX files.
To view individual event records

1. In the Examiner, click Overview.
2. In Case Overview, Click File Category.
3. If present, click Windows EVTX Event.
4. If your case has any event records, they are displayed in the File List.
5. Click an event record to view the data in the Natural tab.
To add EVTX-related columns in the File List

To add EVTX-related columns in the File List, add the EVTX-related columns to a new or existing
column template.
These columns will display data only for the expanded individual events, not for the EVTX log files.
Examining Miscellaneous Evidence Viewing Data in Windows XML Event Log (EVTX) Files | 342
Viewing IIS Log File Data
You can view data that is contained in IIS log files in HTML format in the Natural tab of the File Contents Pane.
You can also process IIS log files so that they are broken into individual records and interspersed with other
items to support timeline analysis. To process IIS log files, there is a new IIS LOG check box in Evidence
Processing Options > Expansion Options. This option is not enabled by default.
You can view IIS log data in one of two ways:
View the log file data In the File List, you can see a list of IIS log files. When you view
a log file, in the File Content pane, you can view the information
that are contained in that one file. There can be a lot of data
contained in one file.
Expand log file data out as individual records When you expand IIS log files, each record is extracted. As a
result, in the File List, each record is shown as its own item.

IIS log files. The options is turned off by default.

If you expand IIS log files into separate records, you can also
use the following columns in the File List:
 c-ip
 cs(Cookie)
 cs(Referer)
 cs(User-Agent)
 cs-bytes
 cs-host
 cs-method
 cs-uri-query
 cs-uri-stem
 cs-username
 s-computername
 s-ip
 s-port
 s-sitename
 sc-bytes
 sc-status
Examining Miscellaneous Evidence Viewing IIS Log File Data | 343

To expand IIS log files into individual records
4. Select IIS Log.
6. Click OK to process the evidence to expand the files.
To add IIS log-related columns in the File List

To add IIS log-related columns in the File List, add the IIS log-related columns to a new or existing
column template.
These columns will display data only for the expanded individual records, not for the IIS log files.
Examining Miscellaneous Evidence Viewing IIS Log File Data | 344

Viewing Registry Timeline Data
You can view registry additional data in HTML format in the Natural tab of the File Contents Pane to support
timeline analysis.
You can process Registry data files so that they are broken into individual records so they are interspersed with
other items to support timeline analysis. To process Registry data, there is a new Registry check box in Evidence
Processing Options > Expansion Options. This option is not enabled by default.
The following registry areas are supported:
SAM:
SAM\Domains\Account\Users
NTUSER.DAT:
Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Explorer\UserAssist\{75048700-EF1F-11D0-9888-
006097DEACF9}\Count
Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Explorer\UserAssist\{5E6AB780-7743-11CF-A12B-
00AA004AE837}\Count
Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Explorer\UserAssist\{CEBFF5CD-ACE2-4F4F-9178-
9926F41749EA}\Count
Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Explorer\UserAssist\{F4E57C4B-2036-45F0-A9AB-
443BCFE33D9F}\Count
Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Explorer\ComDlg32\CIDSizeMRU
Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Explorer\ComDlg32\FirstFolder
Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Explorer\ComDlg32\LastVisitedPidlMRU
Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Explorer\ComDlg32\LastVisitedPidlMRULegacy
Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Explorer\ComDlg32\OpenSavePidlMRU
You can view Registry data in one of two ways:
View the Registry data In the File List, you can view Registry files.
Expand Registry data out as individual records When you expand Registry data, each record is extracted. As a
result, in the File List, each record is shown as its own item.

Registry data. The options is turned off by default.

If you expand Registry data into separate records, you can
also use the following columns in the File List:
 Registry Action Description
 Registry Action Name
 Registry Action Type
 Registry File
Examining Miscellaneous Evidence Viewing Registry Timeline Data | 345

To expand Registry data into individual records

4. Select Registry.
To add Registry-related columns in the File List

To add Registry-related columns in the File List, add the Registry-related columns to a new or existing
column template.
These columns will display data only for the expanded individual records.
Examining Miscellaneous Evidence Viewing Registry Timeline Data | 346

Viewing Log2Timeline CSV File Data
You can view data that is contained in CSV files that are in the Log2timeline format. You can view the data in the
Natural view of the File Content pane.
The individual records from the CSV will be interspersed with other data, giving you the ability to perform more
advanced timeline analysis across a very broad set of data. In addition you can leverage the visualization engine
to perform more advanced timeline based visual analysis.
To process CSV files, there is a new Log2tCSV check box in Evidence Processing Options > Expansion
Options. This option is not enabled by default.
You can view CSV data in one of two ways:
View the original CSV In the File List, you can see a list CSV files. When you select a file, you can view the
files information that is contained in each file in the File Content pane .
Expand log file data When you expand CSV files, each record is extracted. As a result, in the File List, each
out as individual record is shown as its own item.
records
When you process evidence, you have the option of expanding CSV files. The options is
turned off by default.

If you expand CSV files into separate records, you can also use columns to view each
CSV field.
See the table Log2timeline CSV fields (page 349)
To view the un-expanded CSV files

2. Expand File Category.
3. If CSV files exist in your evidence, you can expand Other Known Types > Log2t CSV logs.
A list of Log2t CSV files is displayed in the File List.
4. Click a file to view the un-expanded data.
To expand CSV files into individual records

2. Click Miscellaneous
Examining Miscellaneous Evidence Viewing Log2Timeline CSV File Data | 347

6. Select Log2t CSV.
To add CSV-related columns in the File List

1. In the Examiner, click the Column Settings icon.
2. Either create a new column template or edit an existing one.
3. In the Available Columns list, expand Log2T.
4. Add the desired columns to the template.
5. Click OK.
6. Select the template name you just configured.
7. Click Apply.
This applies the template to the File List.
8. Click Close.
9. In the Overview tab, expand File Category > Other Known Types > Log2t CSV log entry.
A list of Log2t entries is displayed in the File List.
You will see the data in the columns for each record.
These columns will display data only for the expanded individual records, not for the original CSV files.

Log2timeline CSV fields
Log2t Desc A description field, this is where most of the information is stored. This field is the full
description of the field, the interpreted results or the content of the actual log line..
Log2t Extra Additional information parsed is joined together and put here. This 'extra' field may contain
various information that further describe the event. Some input modules contain additional
information about events, such as further divide the event into source IP's, etc. These
fields may not fit directly into any other field in the CSV file and are thus combined into this
'extra' field.
Log2t Filename The full path of the filename that contained the entry. In most input modules this is the
name of the logfile or file being parsed, but in some cases it is a value extracted from it, in
the instance of $MFT this field is populated as the name of the file in question, not the
$MFT itself.
Log2t Format The name of the input module that was used to parse the file. If this is a log2timeline input
module that produced the output it should be of the format Log2t::input::NAME where
name is the name of the module. However other tools that produce l2t_csv output may put
their name here.
Log2t Host The hostname associated with the entry, if one is available.
Log2t Inode The inode number of the file being parsed, or in the case of $MFT parsing and possibly
some other input modules the inode number of each file inside the $MFT file.
Log2t MACB The MACB or legacy meaning of the fields, mostly for compatibility with the mactime
format.
Log2t Notes Some input modules insert additional information in the form of a note, which comes here.
This might be some hints on analysis, indications that might be useful, etc. This field might
also contain URL's that point to additional information, such as information about the
meaning of events inside the EventLog, etc.
Log2t Short The short description of the entry, usually contains less text than the full description field.
This is created to assist with tools that try to visualize the event. In those output the short
description is used as the default text, and further information or the full description can be
seen by either hovering over the text or clicking on further details about the event.
Log2t Source The short name for the source. This may be something like LOG, WEBHIST, REG, etc.
This field name should correspond to the type field in the TLN output format and describes
the nature of the log format on a high level (all log files are marked as LOG, all registry as
REG, etc.)
Log2t SourceType A more comprehensive description of the source. This field further describes the format,
such as "Syslog" instead of simply "LOG", "NTUSER.DAT Registry" instead of "REG", etc.
Log2t User The username associated with the entry, if one is available.
Log2t Version The version number of the timestamp object.

Identifying Document Languages
When processing evidence, you can perform automatic language identification. This will analyze the first two
pages of every document to identify the language that is contained within.
To identify languages, you enable the Language Identification processing option.

After processing is complete, you can add the Language column in the File List in the Examiner.
You can filter by the Language field within review and determine who needs to review which documents based
on the language contained within the document.
If there are multiple languages in a document, the first language will be identified.
This feature is enabled by selecting a new Language Identification processing option. When you enable
Language Identification, you have the following options:
Document Types to process - You can select to process the following file types:
Documents
Presentation
Spreadsheets
Email
The languages to identify - You can select to identify the following:

Basic languages that include English, Chinese, Spanish, Japanese, Portuguese, Arabic, French,
Russian, and Korean.
Extended languages. Performs language identification for 67 different languages. This is the slowest
processing option.
Note: The Language Identification processing option is disabled by default. If you enable it, the basic language
setting and all four document types are enabled by default.
Basic Languages
The system will perform language identification for the following languages:
Arabic
Chinese
English
French
German
Japanese
Korean
Portuguese
Russian
Examining Miscellaneous Evidence Identifying Document Languages | 350

Spanish
If the language to identify is one of the ten basic languages (except for English), select Basic when choosing
Language Identification. The Extended option also identifies the basic ten languages, but the processing time is
significantly greater.
Extended Languages
The system will perform language identification for 67 different languages. This is the slowest processing option.
The following languages can be identified:
Afrikaans Esperanto Latin Scottish Gaelic

Albanian Estonian Latvian Serbian
Amharic Finnish Lithuanian Slovak
Arabic French Malay Slovenian
Armenian Georgian Manx Spanish
Basque German Marathi Swahili
Belarusian Greek Nepali Swedish
Bosnian Hawaiian Norwegian Tagalong
Breton Hebrew Persian Tamil
Bulgarian Hindi Polish Thai
Catalan Hungarian Portuguese Turkish
Chinese Icelandic Quechua Ukrainian
Croatian Indonesian Romanian Vietnamese
Czech Irish Rumantsch Welsh
Danish Italian Russian Yiddish
Dutch Japanese Sanskrit West Frisian

English Korean Scots
Examining Miscellaneous Evidence Identifying Document Languages | 351

Examining Internet Artifact Data
You can examine detailed information about the internet artifact data in your case.
At a basic level, when evidence is processed, internet artifact files are categorized and organized so that you
can easily see them. You can use either of the following to quickly see internet artifact files:
The Overview tab > File Category > Internet/Chat Files

The Internet/Chat tab
Both tabs display the same data.
For example, using these views, you can quickly see the following files:
AOL:
AOL ABY files

AOL Buddy List
AOL User History
Chrome Browser:
Bookmark files
Cookies files
History files
Internet Explorer:
MSIE Cookie Index files
MSIE History files
Microsoft Live Messenger Log files
Mozilla
Address Book files

Cookie Index files
History files
Mozilla Thunderbird email files
Skype
Skype Data
Skype Files
Web-based email providers
Flashmail
Foxmail
Yahoo IM conversation files

mail.ru agent history files (Mra.dbs):
User account information and encrypted account password
From the registry at HKCU\Software\Mail.Ru\Agent\magent_logins3\*\
Parsed contacts and messages from mra.dbs files
Each message contains a plain-text and an RTF version, both UTF16LE.
Contact list from the inbox.ru.xml.
Examining Miscellaneous Evidence Examining Internet Artifact Data | 352

For many of these files, you can view information from the files in the Natural view. For example, you can see an
AOL Buddy List or the contents of a Yahoo IM conversation.
Some internet artifact information is stored in SQLite tables. Most of these tables are viewable in the Natural
view.
About Extensible Storage Engine (ESE) Databases

Extensible Storage Engine (ESE) databases are used by many Microsoft components as well as other programs
to store and retrieve data. Some of these components include:
MS Exchange Server (2000/2003)

MS Exchange Server (2007)
MS Exchange Server (2010)
Active Directory
Windows Live Server
Desktop Search (Vista and Windows 7)
IE 10 Web Data (for example, history, cookies, cache, and so forth)
SRS (Site Replication Service) Template
Windows Help Center
Windows Update
Windows System Update
Windows Server Security
Windows Server WINS
Windows Server DHCP
NT File Replication Service
These ESE databases are expanded when processing evidence (if selected in the Expansion Options) and
displayed in Evidence Groups. Most of the ESE databases appear in File Category > Databases. The exception
is Exchange ESE databases, which appear in File Category > Email.
Internet Explorer version 10 or later also use ESE databases to store data like the internet history, cookies,
cache, and so forth. (See About Expanding Data from Internet Explorer (IE) Version 10 or Later on page 355.)
To expand the ESE Databases into individual records

2. Click Miscellaneous
6. Verify that ESE DB is selected.

About Expanding Google Chrome, Firefox, and IE 9 Data
There are advanced processing options that will expand the basic Google Chrome, Mozilla Firefox, and Internet
Explorer data. You can do the following:
Expand Google Chrome and Mozilla Firefox SQLite tables and IE 9 IE.DAT files to create individual
records.
This provides investigators the ability to bookmark specific records from within the tables. For example, if
you are looking for a specific Top Site record, you can more easily find and bookmark the record you
need.
Reconstruct web pages .
When viewing either Cache or History entries, if enough data is stored in the cache, you can see the
reconstructed web page that was cached when the user was browsing the respective web site.
The following table lists the expanded data that you can view:
Internet Artifact Expanded Data
Browser type Expanded Browser Data

Chrome  Cache Index Data
 Cookies
 Downloads
 History
 Top Sites
 Key Words
 Web Autofill Data
Firefox  Bookmarks
 Cache Index Data
 Cookies
 Favorites
 Form History
 History
Internet Explorer 9  IE Cache Entries
 IE Cookies Entries
 IE History Entries
 IE Download Entries
 MSIE Recovery dat Entries

When viewing the expanded data, you can use the following columns in the File List to display detailed data.
Internet History Columns

 Action URL  Google Profile Address  Opened
 Autofill Name  Google Profile City  Origin URL
 Autofill Value  Google Profile Company Name  Password Element
 Bytes Downloaded  Google Profile Country  Password Value
 Cookie Name  Google Profile Country Code  Rank
 Cookie Path  Google Profile Email Address  Redirects to
 Cookie Value  Google Profile First Name  Start TIme
 Count  Google Profile Last Name  Terms
 Duration  Google Profile Middle Name  This Visit Time
 Encrypted Card Number  Google Profile Phone Number  Types Times
 End Time  Google Profile State  URL
 Expiration Month  Host Key  URL has HTML
 Expiration Time  Last Updated Time  Username Element
 Expiration Year  Last Visit Time  Username Value
 File Path  Name on Card  Visit TImes
 Offline User Email  Zip Code
See Icons of the File List Tool Bar on page 301.
If you expand internet artifact data, you will have files are are generated when the data was processed and was
not part of the original data. There are tools to help you identify generated data.
About Expanding Data from Internet Explorer (IE) Version 10 or Later

Data from Internet Explorer (IE) 10 is stored in a database called WebCacheV01.dat. This file is an ESE
(Extensible Storage Engine) database that points to IE 10’s cached files. When expanded in Examiner, you can
view the following data:
Internet Artifact Expanded Data
Browser type Expanded Browser Data

Internet Explorer 10  IE Web Cache Compatibility Entries
 IE Web Cache Content Entries
 IE Web Cache Cookie Entries
 IE Web Cache DOM Store Entries
 IE Web Cache Download Entries
 IE Web Cache RSS Feed Entries
 IE Web Cache History Entries
 Other Web Cache Entries
This data displays in the Overview tab under Internet/Chat Files or in the Internet/Chat tab.

IE 10 (and later) WebCache Data on a Live System
You cannot expand or display Internet Explorer 10 (or later) WebCache data from a live system. WebCache data
is locked by the Windows operating system and does not display correctly in the Examiner.
About Internet Artifact Processing Options

To expand internet artifact data, you enable processing options either when you add the evidence or later by
using Additional Analysis.
Note: The IE WebCache contains many files and can take additional time to expand. Therefore, IE WebCache
is not selected by default.
Important: Expanding internet artifact data can add a significant amount of data to your evidence.
Internet Artifact Processing Options

Browser Options De fu a lt value
Chrome Expand Compound Files > Chrome Bookmarks unselected by default
Expand Compound Files > Chrome Cache unselected by default
Expand Compound Files > Chrome SQLite unselected by default
Firefox Expand Compound Files > Firefox Cache unselected by default
Expand Compound Files > Firefox SQLite unselected by default
Internet Explorer 9 or Expand Compound Files > Internet Explorer selected by default
earlier Expand Compound Files > IE Recovery unselected by default
This lets you expand IE Recovery data that was
stored when access to a Web site was lost.
Internet Explorer 10 Expand Compound Files > IE WebCache unselected by default
or later
About Viewing Internet Artifact Data

After you have expanded the artifact data, you can view the data in the Examiner. You can view expanded data
in one of the following ways:
Clicking an individual file and viewing the contents in the Natural view.
For most items, you will see the data displayed in a table.
Viewing Reconstructed web pages
For history and cache entries, if enough data exists, the reconstructed web page appears. If enough
data is not available, informational data appears instead.
You can use the URL has HTML column to help you determine which files can be reconstructed.

Adding columns to the File List that displays expanded data.
You can add columns for all of the expanded items that is generated. A sample is listed in the Internet
History Columns table above.
You can view a list of all of the Internet History columns by looking at the Internet History column group in
the column manager.
In the Internet/Chat files folder, the files are organized as follows:
Chrome:
Original Chrome artifact files are stored under the Chrome Browser Files folder
The expanded data is stored under the Chrome Browser Data folder.
Firefox:
Original Firefox artifact files are stored under the Firefox Files folder
The expanded data is stored under the Firefox Browser Data folder.
IE
Original IE artifact files are stored under the Internet Explorer Browser Files folder
The expanded data is stored under the Internet Explorer Browser Data folder.
Expanding Internet Artifact Data

To expand internet artifact data
1. When either adding evidence to a case or performing Additional Analysis, access the processing
options.
2. Select the option to Expand Compound Files.
4. Select one or more of the following options:
Chrome:
 Chrome Bookmarks
 Chrome Cache
 Chrome SQLite
Firefox:
 Firefox Cache
 Firefox SQLite
IE:
 IE Cookie Text
 IE Recovery
 IE WebCache
 Internet Explorer Files
Skype SQLite
See About Internet Artifact Processing Options on page 356.
5. Process your data.

Viewing Internet Artifact Data
To view expanded internet data in the Natural view
1. In the examiner, open one of the following: (Both tabs display the same data.)
Note: Chrome and Firefox SQLite files are also located in Internet/Chat Files.

2. For Chrome files, expand Chrome Browser > Chrome Browser Data.
3. For Firefox files, expand Mozilla Files > Firefox Browser > Firefox Browser Data.
4. For IE files, expand Internet Explorer Browser > Internet Explorer Browser Data.
5. Select a folder, such as Cookies.
6. Click an item in the File List.
The cookie’s data is displayed in the Natural view.
7. Click History.
If possible, the reconstructed web page will be shown. If insufficient data exists, informational data will
be shown instead.
9. You can perform a search for a specific value in the Natural view by clicking CTRL-F.
To view expanded internet data using columns

1. In the examiner, open one of the following: (Both tabs display the same data.)
2. Click the Column Settings icon.
4. In the Available Columns list, expand Data.
For example, to add columns for Chrome or Firefox browser history data, use the following:
URL
Visit TImes
Typed Times
Last VIsit Time
This Visit Time
Duration
6. Click OK.
7. Select the template name you just configured and click Apply.
8. Click Close.
9. Expand Browser > Browser Data for either Chrome or Firefox.
10. Click History.
In this example, you will see the history data in the columns for each record.

Examining Mobile Phone Data
You can examine detailed information about the mobile phone data in your case.
The mobile phone data that you can see comes from the following sources:
AD1 files from AccessData Mobile Phone Examiner

Cellebrite
UFDR report files
See Working with Cellebrite UFDR Images on page 367.
At a basic level, when evidence is processed, mobile phone files are categorized and organized so that you can
easily see them. You can use the Overview tab to quickly view data specific to mobile phones:
The Overview tab > File Category > Mobile Phone

For example, using these views, you can quickly see the following files:
Mobile Phone Data
Bookmark
Call History
Cookie
Powering Event
SMS Messages
Web History
Mobile Phone Files
Cellebrite Files
For many of these files, you can view information from the files in the Natural view. For example, you can see
artifacts for the Call History or the contents of an SMS Message.
Some mobile phone information is stored in SQLite tables. Most of these tables are viewable in the Natural view.
Note: The files listed in the Mobile Phone Data section are specific to the particular mobile phone image you
have processed, and will be different for each mobile phone image.
There are many files found on mobile phones that are not specific to the Mobile Phone file category. This data
could include, but is not limited to, the following file categories:
Archives
Databases
Documents
Folders
Graphics
These files can also be viewed by using the Overview tab.
Examining Miscellaneous Evidence Examining Mobile Phone Data | 359

About Expanding Mobile Phone Data
When viewing the expanded mobile phone data, you can use the following columns in the File List to display
detailed data.
Mobile Phone Columns

App Usage  App Activation Count
 App Active Time
 App Background Time
 App Launch Count
 App Launch Day
 App Name
Bluetooth Device  Bluetooth Device Info
 Bluetooth Device MAC Address
 Bluetooth Device Name
Calendar  Calendar Priority
 Event Category
 Event Description
 Event End Time
 Event Location
 Event Phone Number
 Event Start Time
 Event Status
 Event Summary
 Event Timezone
 Reminder Timestamp
Call History  Call Duration
 Call Number
 Call Time
 Call Type
 Calling Name
 Country Code
 Network Code
 Network Name
 Phone Call Type
Installed Apps  App Category
 App Description
 App GUID
 App Identifier
 App Install Time
 App Name
 App Update Timestamp
 App Vendor
 App Version
 Copyright
 Permissions
 Purchase Date

IP Connection  Cellular Wan
 Connection Adapter
 Connection IP Address
 Connection Status
 Connection Type
 Device IPs
 DNS Addresses
 Domain
 MAC Address
 Router Address
 Service Name
Location  Elevation
 Latitude
 Location Address
 Location Category
 Location Confidence
 Location Country
 Location Description
 Location Name
 Location Type
 Longitude
 Precision
Miscellaneous File Info  Folder Name
 Group
 Item Source
 Local File Path
 Related Account
 Related Application
 Related URL
 Storage Location
 Storage Type
MMS Messages  MMS BCC
 MMS CC
 MMS File Count
 MMS From
 MMS Priority
 MMS Received Timestamp
 MMS Sent Timestamp
 MMS Status
 MMS Subject
 MMS To
Mobile Card  Card Activation Time
 Card Barcode
 Card Description
 Card Expiration Time
 Card Name
 Card Purchase Time
 Card Type

Notification  Notification ID
 Notification Participants
 Notification Status
 Notification Subject
 Notification To
 Notification Type
Password  Password Account
 Password Data
 Password Server
 Password Service
Phone Info  Dictionary Locale
 Dictionary Word
 Event Severity
 Package Name
 Participant
 Participant Email
 Powering Event
 Powering Event Element
 Process
 Type

Phonebook  Address
 Address Type
 Address1
 Address2
 City
 Company
 Email
 First Name
 Home Address
 Home Email
 Home Number
 Last Name
 Last Time Contacted
 Middle Name
 Mobile Number
 Nickname
 Number Type
 Personal Mobile Number
 Phone Number
 Phonebook Item Home Website
 Phonebook Item Name
 Phonebook Item URL
 Phonebook Item Work Website
 Phonebook Label
 State
 Times Contacted
 Title
 Work Address
 Work Email
 Work Mobile Number
 Work Number
 Zip
SMS Messages  SMS From
 SMS From Number
 SMS Service Center
 SMS State
 SMS Text
 SMS Time Received
 SMS Time Sent
 SMS Time Zone of Sender
 SMS To
 SMS To Number
 SMS Type
VoiceMail  VM Duration
 VM From
 VM Name

WiFi  BSSID
 Last Connected
 Last Network
 Network Protocol
 SSID
 Wireless Security Mode
Note Summary
Note Title
Task Time Zone
Viewing Mobile Phone Data

To view expanded mobile phone data in the Natural view
1. In the examiner, open the following:
The Overview tab > File Category > Mobile Phone > Mobile Phone Data
2. Select a folder, such as SMS Messages.
The data is displayed in the Natural view.
4. Click Mobile Phone Files.
5. Click Extraction Summary in the File List.
Details of the original mobile phone extraction will be shown.
6. You can perform a search for a specific value in the Natural view by clicking CTRL-F.
To view expanded mobile phone data using columns

2. Click the Column Settings icon. There are six mobile phone templates available:
Mobile Device Apps
Mobile Device Call Log
Mobile Device Contacts
Mobile Device Events
Mobile Device MMS
Mobile Device SMS
4. In the Available Columns list, expand Mobile Phones.

For example, to add columns for SMS Messages data, use the following:
SMS From
SMS From Number
SMS Service Center
SMS State
SMS Text
SMS Time Received
SMS Time Sent
SMS Time Zone of Sender
SMS To
SMS To Number
SMS Type
6. Click OK.
8. Click Close.
9. Apply the Mobile Device SMS column template.
10. Expand Mobile Phone > Mobile Phone Data.
11. Click SMS Messages.
In this example, you will see the SMS data in the columns for each record.
To view expanded mobile phone data using filters

2. Click the Filter dropdown. There are five mobile phone templates available:
Mobile Phone: Calendar
Mobile Phone: Call History
Mobile Phone: Messages
Mobile Phone: Phonebook
Mobile Phone Files
3. Either apply an existing filter or create a new one.
See Managing Filters on page 54.
4. Once applied, you will see only those items allowable by the selected filter. The File List contents will
also be highlighted yellow, showing a filter is applied.
Standard Messaging Format

The Web (HTML5) tab shows a realistic view of chat conversations. Conversations look more like they do on the
original device, making it easier to view and to export information to third parties without having to append an
explanation for the data.
During processing, be sure to select the All Communications option. This will mark any mobile conversations by
default.

You can find the Web (HTML5) tab in the File Content panel, in the Natural view side tabs. The Web (HTML5)
view is also available on the Index Search Tab.
Important: If a non-text item from a chat was not included in the evidence file, the unavailable item will be listed
along with any relevant information. These could include items such as images, videos, voice
recordings, locations, stickers, emojis, or other attachments.
The viewer has been implemented for the following chat conversations:
Android SMS
Android MMS
Celebrite Chat
FB Messenger (Android)
Hangouts
Instagram (Android)
Kik (Android)
pidgin
Skype
Viber (Android)
WeChat (Android)
WeChat (iOS)
WhatsApp (Android)
WhatsApp (iOS)
XRY Chat
Use the Chat Conversations column setting in the File List to see the most relevant data for these files. The type
of chat will be listed in the Src (Source) column. It is possible to sort using this column to find data from a
particular source.
Applying the Standard Messaging Format
To view the data in Standard Messaging Format

1. Navigate to the Internet/Chat Tab.
2. Navigate to the desired folder in the evidence tree. Select a message in the File List.
3. In the File Content panel, select the Natural Tab at the top. Select the HTML5 Tab on the right side.
The data will display in a similar format to the one used on the original device.
Note: It may be easier to use a different tab for certain types of mobile phone data. The HTML5 Tab is available
on all File Content panels.

Working with Cellebrite UFDR Images
About Expanding Cellebrite Data

To expand Cellebrite mobile phone data, you enable processing options either when you add the evidence or
later by using Additional Analysis.

Expanding Cellebrite Data

To expand Cellebrite data
options.
2. Select the option to Expand Compound Files.
4. Click Clear All.
5. Select the Cellebrite UFDR option.
Working with iOS Backup
About Expanding iOS Backup Data

To expand iOS Backup data, you will need to enable the appropriate processing option either when you add the
evidence or later by using Additional Analysis.
Note: You will need the user’s password in order to open any encrypted backup files. We currently do not
decrypt iOS Backup files.
Expanding iOS Backup Data

To Expand iOS Backup Data:
1. During processing, or in Additional Analysis, open the Evidence Processing window.
2. Check the Expand Compound Files option.
3. Click on the Expansion Options box and check the box for iOS Backup.

Locating iOS Backup Data
To Locate iOS Backup Data:
1. In the Explore Tab, open the evidence and navigate to the Manifest.db file.
2. Select any folder to view iOS Backup evidence.
Important: When looking at iOS Backup files in the Overview Tab, these files will not be classified as Mobile
Phone files. They will be classified as the standard file category for each type of file found on the
phone.
Working with Facebook Messenger (Android)

To expand Facebook Messenger App data on an Android phone, you will need to enable the appropriate
processing option either when you add the evidence or later by using Additional Analysis.
Expanding Facebook Messenger (Android) Data

To Expand Facebook Messenger (Android) Data:
1. During processing, or in Additional Analysis, open the Evidence Processing window.
2. Check the Expand Compound Files option.
3. Click on the Expansion Options box and check the box for Facebook Messenger (Android).
Note: There is a known issue within Facebook that deletes the last names of contacts and substitutes the first
name for the last name. This is a bug within Facebook, but the behavior will persist when exploring
evidence within the Examiner.
Locating Facebook Messenger (Android) Data

To Locate Facebook Messenger (Android) Data:
1. In the Explore Tab, open the phone evidence and navigate to the following path:
[root] > data > com.facebook.orca > databases > threads_db2
2. Open the threads_db2 folder. Select either the Contacts, inbox, or pending folder to view the data.
Important: The pending folder will not always have data in it.
To View Facebook Messenger (Android) Contacts:

1. Navigate to and highlight the Contacts folder, as described above.
2. The File List will show the available contacts. Select a contact, and the associated information for that
contact will appear in the File Content pane.

Note: The Profile URLs shown for Facebook Messenger (Android) contacts are external and unusable
because they require Facebook cookies to work.
To View Facebook Messenger (Android) Conversations:

1. Navigate to the inbox folder, as described above.
2. Select a conversation. It will populate as individual messages in the File List. The entire conversation
will appear in Cool HTML in the File Content pane.
Note: The Attachments Column will contain links, not actual items. These links are external (stored in
the cloud) and will need the Facebook cookies to work, meaning you must be logged in under
the proper Facebook account to view them. The Pending Send Media Attachment Column will
also have a link to the image. But since this image was pending, it might be available some-
where in the evidence.
Facebook Messenger Data Types

The following data types can be extracted from Facebook Messenger on Android:
Contacts
User
First Name
Last Name
Last Update Time
Profile URLs
Message Threads
Timestamp
User
Message
Attachment URLs
Attachments (if the data is present in the image)
Mobile Chat Applications

It is possible to extract the following mobile chat applications:
WeChat for Android
WeChat for iOS
WhatsApp for Android
WhatsApp for iOS

WeChat for Android Data Types
The following data types can be extracted from WeChat Apps on Android. Unless specified otherwise, the data
shows in both the Content Viewer (in CoolHTML) and in the Property Window (attributes).
Device Owner Info

Display Name
Username
Phone
Description (CoolHTML only)

Comment (CoolHTML only)
City
State
Country
Contact Items
Display Name
Username
Note
Country
City
Conversation Items
Create Date
Modify Date
Message Count
Participants
CoolHTML List of all messages

This includes Sent, To, and Message Data (including thumbnails of sticker, picture, and video clip
messages)
Message Items
Create Date
From
To
Message
Displays a thumbnail image in CoolHTML if it is a sticker, picture, or video clip.

Attachment Count

Attachment Items
Attachment items include pictures, video clips, and voice recordings. The picture, audio, or video clip is shown in
the Content Viewer when available.
Note: Audio is compressed and not directly playable.
Original Path (attribute only)
Viber for Android Data Types

The following data types can be extracted from Viber on Android. Unless specified otherwise, the data shows in
both the Content Viewer (in CoolHTML) and in the Property Window (attributes).
Chat Text
Chat Attendees
Shared Location
Shared Location Date and Time
Money Sent
Files Transferred in Chat
Joined Groups and Attendees
Images Shared in Chat
Voice Recording Shared in Chat
Video Recording Shared in Chat
Video Call Duration
Voice Call Duration
Contact List
WeChat for iOS Data Types

The following data types can be extracted from WeChat Apps on iOS. Unless specified otherwise, the data
Contact Names (when available)

Contact Phone Number (when device owner)
Video Thumbnails
Picture Files
Message Contents
Message Dates
Message Sender
Message Recipients

WhatsApp for Android Data Types
The following data types can be extracted from WhatsApp on Android. Unless specified otherwise, the data
Contacts
Display Name
Phone Number
Status
Given Name
Family Name
Nickname
Company
Conversation
Message Count
Participants
Thread ID
Item Description
Sent Date
From
To
Message
Date Created
Date Modified
Message
From
To
Item Description
Date Created
Date Modified
Sent Date
Message
Attachment
Name
File Class
File Size

WhatsApp for iOS Data Types
The following data types can be extracted from WhatsApp on iOS. Unless specified otherwise, the data shows
only in the Content Viewer (in CoolHTML) and not in the Property Window (attributes).
Device Owner Information

App Version (CoolHTML only)
Number of Times Launched (CoolHTML only)
Date of Last Auto Backup (CoolHTML only)
Full Name
Username
User’s What’s App JabberID (CoolHTML only)

Call Sound (CoolHTML only)
Blacklist in Sync (CoolHTML only)
Number of System Bytes Received (CoolHTML only)
Number of System Bytes Sent (CoolHTML only)
Number of VoIP Bytes Received (CoolHTML only)
Number of VoIP Bytes Sent (CoolHTML only)
Number of VoIP Calls Received (CoolHTML only)
Number of VoIP Calls Sent (CoolHTML only)
Date modified (attributes only)
Contact Items
ID (CoolHTML only)
Full Name
First Name
Last name (attributes only)
Nickname
Account (CoolHTML only)

JabberID (CoolHTML only)
Mobile Number
Home Phone
Is Starred
Description (attributes only)
File Class (attributes only)
Group Items
Group Name (CoolHTML only)

Group JabberID (CoolHTML only)
Date Created
Date Modified (attributes only)
Member List (CoolHTML only)
Created By Member (CoolHTML only)
Conversation Items
Conversation Name (CoolHTML only)
Create Date
Message Count
Modify Date
last message time
Participants
Partner (CoolHTML only)

Message Items
Date Sent
Creation Date
Date Modified (attributes only)
From*
To*
Is Outgoing* (CoolHTML only)

Is Starred* (CoolHTML only)
Message Type (CoolHTML only)
Includes Text, Image, File, Audio, Video, VCard, Shared Location, System Message.
Text (CoolHTML only)
Includes audio_file_location, picture_thumbnail, video_thumbnail, shared_map_location_thumbnail, lat,
long, vcard, file*
Message Text (attributes only)
Text Messages Only
Image Width and Height (attributes only)
Longitude and Latitude (attributes only)
Shared Location

Note: The asterisk (*) indicates that a particular item is not included for system messages.

Android Parsers
Android Phone Contacts

To view Android Contacts files:
1. When importing evidence, select the Android Contacts Database option in the Compound File
Expansion Options list.
2a. In the Evidence Tree, drill down to the phone databases and select the contacts database. A list of
all contacts will populate in the File List.
2b. In the Overview Tab, drill down to File Category > Mobile Phone > Mobile Phone Items and
highlight Mobile Phone Items.
3. Select an item in the File List and the File Content panel will display all associated contact information
Android Calendar
To view Android Calendar data:
1. When importing evidence, select the Android Calendar Database option in the Compound File
2. In the Overview Tab, drill down to File Category > Mobile Phone > Mobile Phone Items and highlight
Mobile Phone Items.
3. Select an item in the File List and the File Content panel will display all associated information.
Android Call Log

To view Android Call Log data:
1. When importing evidence, select the Android Call History Log option in the Compound File Expansion
Options list.
2. In the Overview Tab, drill down to File Category > Mobile Phone > Mobile Phone Items > Call and
highlight Call.
Android SMS/MMS
To view Android SMS/MMS data:
1. When importing evidence, select the Android SMS/MMS Database option in the Compound File
Mobile Phone Items.
Examining Miscellaneous Evidence Android Parsers | 376

Support for Gmail on Android
To view Android Gmail data:
1. When importing evidence, select the Android Gmail Database option in the Compound File Expansion
Options list.
Mobile Phone Items.
Support for Kik Files on Android

To view Android Kik data:
1. When importing evidence, select the Kik (Android) option in the Compound File Expansion Options
list.
Mobile Phone Items. If you do not want to see all items together in the File List, you can select from
Chat Conversation, Chat Messenger, or Contact.
Note: Kik items (contacts, messages) will display a title beginning with Kik at the top of the table shown
in the File Content panel. They will also have a Path entry that begins with Kik.
Support for Google Hangouts on Android
Note: Google Hangout databases are named babel#, where # represents a number.
To view the Google Hangout database files:

1. When importing evidence, select the Hangouts (Android) option in the Compound File Expansion
Options list.
2a. In the Evidence Tree, navigate to the databases folder and select a babel database. Select the
database file to see the properties of the database.
2b. In the Overview Tab, drill down to File Category > Mobile Phone > Mobile Phone Items and
highlight Mobile Phone Items. If you do not want to see all items together in the File List, you can
select from Chat Conversation or Chat Message.
Note: Hangouts Items (contacts, messages) will display a title beginning with Hangouts at the top of the
table shown in the File Content panel. They will also have a Path entry that begins with Hangouts.
Examining Miscellaneous Evidence Android Parsers | 377

Python Scripting
The Python Scripting tool allows investigators to run any Python script against evidence and generate results
which can then be added back to the case. For example, Python scripts can be used to parse SQLite databases
that are not currently parsed within the Examiner. Both pre-defined and individually-created parsers can be run
on the evidence files. These parsers, written using Python scripting, are applied to exported evidence files by
using the Python Scripting user interface. The data must be processed externally, but can be included in reports
as if it was parsed within the Examiner.
About the Python Script User Interface

The Python Script user interface facilitates the following actions:
Select which evidence files to parse through the Python script.
Export the selected files to a folder outside of the Examiner.
The export process allows the selected evidence files to be parsed through an external tool by locating
them in a file outside of the case.
Select the Python script(s) to run on the selected files.
Execute the Python script(s) on the files in the exported folder.
(Optional) Create a bookmark inside the Examiner to relate the results to the case and to include the new
data in any reports.
Pre-defined Python Scripts
The following pre-defined Python scripts are included in the Python Script user interface:
EventBasedLogin
Exif2Kmz
SQLiteWizard
SQLite_Data_Carver
Each pre-defined script has a corresponding executable option, for those who prefer to run the EXE file.
Python Processing Options

There are two different options when processing case data using an external Python Script. If the files have not
been exported previously, the Python Script user interface will walk through all of the steps, including the step to
automatically create a bookmark and attach the Python results as supplementary files. If the files have already
been exported, there is an option to run the Python Script on the existing folder containing the exported files;
however, his option does not allow the files to be automatically associated with the bookmark created by the
wizard. They can be attached manually once the bookmark has been created, if desired. This option should not
be used if the files must be related in the final report.
Using the Python Scripting User Interface

The Python Script user interface allows any Python script to be run on selected evidence files within a case,
enabling the custom parsing and processing of evidence not yet supported by the tool. The Python Script user
interface allows results to be attached to case reports by using bookmarks. Multiple scripts can be run
consecutively within the wizard.
Examining Miscellaneous Evidence Python Scripting | 378

To use the Python Script User Interface
1. In the File List, select the desired evidence items to be searched.
2. Perform one of the following steps to open the Python Script Wizard:
Right click on one of the evidence items and select the Run Python Script option.
Open the Tools menu and select the Run Python Script option
3. In the Export Files portion of the wizard, perform the following actions:
3a. Choose which selected items to include.
3b. Enter a destination folder and confirm the processing manager.
3c. Optionally, select any necessary advanced options.
3d. Click Next. The files will be exported to the chosen folder.
Note: If you have already exported the desired files from FTK, you may select Option 2 and run the
script on the existing folder without exporting the files again. However, this option will not allow
you to automatically associate the evidence files with the bookmark created within the Python
wizard. Report result files can still be attached to a bookmark as supplementary files. It is
recommended that you not use Option 2 unless you do not plan to associate evidence files to the
bookmark.
4. Once the Export has completed, the Export Progress portion of the wizard will appear. This window will
show the Export Log, as well as the number of items exported and the error count. If any errors
occurred, a button will appear allowing the user to view the error log. There is also a View Export Folder
button in order to quickly access the exported file(s).
5. The Script Execution portion of the wizard will appear. Perform the following actions:
5a. Select any Python script file to run. There is a drop down option that will automatically populate
with the pre-defined scripts included with the product. The pre-defined scripts will offer both the
compiled executable version as well as the Python script source version (which requires the
Python environment).
5b. Add additional scripts using the Add New button. Once selected, this option will allow users to
browse to the file containing the new Python script and apply it. New scripts will be added
automatically to the drop down list for future use.
5c. To view the selected script in a text editor, click the View Script button.
5d. Enter the Input and Output folders. If the files have been exported using the wizard, the Input
folder will be entered automatically and cannot be changed.
5e. Additional parameters may be added into the appropriate box.
5f. Verify the content in the Final Script Command box. This shows the actual command that will be
executed.
5g. The Python environment verification will run automatically and the results will be displayed. If
desired, use the Re-verify environment button to be sure the right version of Python is installed on
the system.
5h. Click Next to execute the script.
Note: Python must be installed and working prior to beginning this step if a script file (.py) is selected.
Visit www.python.org to install the python environment. If the compiled executable (.exe) version
is selected, the Python environment is not required.
6. This will take you to the Script Progress portion of the wizard. A progress bar with a Pause/Cancel
button will appear while the script is running. Any warnings or errors will appear in the Warnings/Errors
box. If additional input is needed for the script, there is a text box. When prompted, enter the input and
click the Enter button to allow the script to complete. Once the script has completed, click Next.

Note: If you are running scripts in a Python 2 environment you will not be able to interact with the script using
the standard input prompts from the user interface. However, the user interface will allow you to enter
values when prompted in a Python 3 environment.
7. In the Bookmark Creation portion of the wizard, it is possible to create a bookmark in order to include
the Python results in a report. If a bookmark is desired, complete the following steps:
7a. Select the Create Bookmark option.
7b. Enter the desired Name for the bookmark.
7c. Enter any necessary Comments related to the bookmark.
7d. Select a location for the bookmark by choosing a parent folder.
7e. Click the Attach button to attach the Python results as supplementary files in the bookmark.
7f. Select the Associate exported items to this bookmark option to include the original evidence files in
the bookmark. These files will auto-populate using the output file from the script execution step.
7g. If no bookmark is required, select the Do not create a Bookmark option.
7h. Click Next.
8. If the option to create a bookmark was selected, the Bookmark Progress portion of the wizard will
appear. The bookmark creation status will be displayed. When finished, click Next.
9. The Summary portion of the wizard will appear. This will include three sections of data: Export, Script
Execution, and Bookmark. Click Finish.
The bookmark will now be visible in the Bookmarks tab of the Examiner. The Python output files will be
listed in the Supplementary Files panel of the bookmark.

Viewing Data in Volume Shadow Copies
You can examine data that is contained in NTFS Volume Shadow Copies.
See Examining Data in Volume Shadow Copies on page 124.
Viewing Microsoft Office and Adobe Metadata

You can examine metadata from Microsoft Office and Adobe documents. This data is processed by default, but
you must use the following method to view it.
To view Microsoft Office and Adobe Metadata

1. In the examiner, open one of the following:
The Overview tab > File Category > Documents > Adobe Documents
The Overview tab > File Category > Documents > Microsoft Documents
2. In the File List, click the Check all files in the current list icon.
3. Click on the Column Settings icon.
5. In the Available Columns list, expand Office-specific Features or All Features.
For example, to add columns for Adobe metadata, use the following:
All Features
 Meta-data - Date Created
 Meta-data - Date Modified
7. Click OK.
9. Click Close.
10. You will now see the meta-data information in the columns for each record.
When viewing the expanded files, you can use the following columns in the File List to display detailed data
Microsoft Office and Adobe Metadata Columns

Microsoft Office  CreateTime (Content created)
documents  EmbeddedComments (PPT files)
 HiddenColumnsRows (Excel files)
 HiddenWorkSheets (Excel files)
 LastPrinted
 LastSavedTime (Date last saved)
 RevisionNumber
 TotalEditingTime (Word and PPT)
 TrackChanges
 From file Origin properties
Examining Miscellaneous Evidence Viewing Data in Volume Shadow Copies | 381

Microsoft Office and Adobe Metadata Columns
Adobe files  Meta-data - DateCreated
 Meta-data - DateModified
About Windows 8 and 10 Keyword Searches

Windows 8 and Windows 10 have added the ability to perform an advanced search query. These advanced
search query files are now parsed automatically during forensic processing.
Advanced Query Searches are saved by Windows in the Admin > Searches folder. There are two default
searches found in Windows 10. These are the Indexed Locations and Everywhere files.
Parsing Data Using Belkasoft

When you have a Belkasoft license, you are able to parse additional items using an integrated Belkasoft tool.
To use Belkasoft parsing

1. Open the Evidence Refinement dialog either by creating a new case, or navigating to Evidence > Add/
Remove. Add or select the evidence you would like to perform Belkasoft parsing for and select
Refinement Options.
2. Check Expand Compound Files and click the Expansion Options button.
3. Select the Belkasoft All-in-One option in the Compound File Expansion Options dialog.
4. Select the Enable Quin-C compatibility option (located below the scroll window). Click OK.
Important: The Quin-C option is only active in the New Case processing options. If you do not select it at
this time it will be grayed out and unavailable when performing Additional Analysis. Whatever
selection you made during case creation will persist in all subsequent Additional Analysis for the
case.
5. To see the appropriate information in the File List, apply the Chat Messages column settings template,
or add the following columns:
Chat From
Chat To
Chat Message
Belkasoft Parsers
The following file types will be parsed when applying the Belkasoft All-in-One option.
Note: Any items on this list that are able to be parsed by AccessData will be parsed using AccessData software
and not by Belkasoft.
Examining Miscellaneous Evidence About Windows 8 and 10 Keyword Searches | 382

Android File Types Parsed by Belkasoft within AccessData Products
AIM Gettaxi NextPlus Twitter
Android Bitcoin Wallet Gmail Odnoklassniki VKontakte
Android Bitcoin.com Wallet Google Drive OneDrive Viber
Any.do Google Maps Opera Vipole
BBM Google+ Paltalk Voxer
Badoo Grindr Pinterest Wamba
Baidu Hangouts Richnote WeChat
Brosix HeyTell Sina Weibo WhatsApp
Calendar ICQ\Mail.ru Agent (All) Skype chatsync Whisper
Calls IMO Skype (All versions) WifiConnections
ChatON Im+ Slack Xabber
CommFort InstalledApplications Sms Yahoo Mail
Contacts Kakao Talk Snapchat Yahoo! Messenger
Default Mail App KateMobile Swarm Yandex Mail
Dolphin Kik Tango YouMagic
Downloads Line Telegram Zalo
Dropbox LinkedIn Text Plus Zello
Evernote MailRu Mail TextMe eBuddy
Facebook Maxthon Textie ooVoo
Firefox MeetMe Tinder
Foursquare Meow Chat Touch
Fring Mercury Tumbler
Examining Miscellaneous Evidence Parsing Data Using Belkasoft | 383

iOS File Types Parsed by Belkasoft within AccessData Products
Any.do HeyTell Odnoklassniki Uber
Brosix ICQ\Mail.Ru Agent (All) Pokemon GO Viber
Calendar IMO Recents Vipole
Calls Im+ Skype chatsync VoiceMail
ChatON IpConnections Skype (All versions) WhatsApp
Contacts Kakao Talk Sms Whisper
Dropbox Kik Tango WifiConnections
Ebuddy XMS Line Text Plus YahooMail
Evernote LiveMe TextMe Yahoo! Messenger
Fring MailRu Mail Textie Zello
Gettaxi MeetMe Tinder ooVoo
Google Maps Meow chat Touch
Grindr NextPlus Tumblr
Growlr Notes Twitter
Linux FileTypes Parsed by Belkasoft within AccessData Products
ICQ Skype (All versions)
MacOS File Types Parsed by Belkasoft within AccessData Products
AIM Contacts Jitsi Yahoo! Messenger
Apple Mail Google Drive Skype iChat
Brosix ICQ (All versions) Snak

Windows File Types Parsed by Belkasoft within AccessData Products
Adobe Flash Google Drive Psi Vipole
Ares Galaxy ICQ (All versions) QIP Virtus
Brosix Jitsi Shareaza Zello
ChatZilla MySpace IM Skype (All versions) eM Client
EMule Nimbuzz Team Viewer ooVoo
Facebook Opera The Bat!
Gadu-Gadu Outlook TorrentFiles
Gajim Outlook Express Viber
All OS File Types Parsed by Belkasoft within AccessData Products
Bitcoin Core Wallet Jaxx

SQLite Query Builder
Users can create and incorporate SQLite Queries from within the user interface. This allows investigators to
produce an HTML report of an unsupported SQLite database.
Expanding Unsupported SQLite Databases

Investigators can expand unsupported SQLite databases within their evidence files using the SQLite Query
Builder.
Important: To use this feature, the SQLite Databases option must be selected in the Expand Compound Files
portion of the Evidence Processing Options when processing evidence.
To expand SQLite database files

1. Locate the SQLite database files within your evidence files. To do this, filter on the Categories column
using SQLite database as the content.
Note: Some of these files may not have information to query.
2. Determine the number of columns and tables used within the files you would like to expand.
3. Create and save a query for each file to be expanded. For more information, see Creating Queries.
Note: Queries are specific to the file for which they are created. Be sure to name the query something
similar to the name of the original file to make it easy for users to know which query applies to
which file.
4. In FTK, return to the list of SQLite database files. Right click on the file you would like to expand and
select the Run SQLite Query option. The Run Query dialog will open. Enter a Report Name and select
a destination for the report.
5. Select the proper query from the list you have created and saved, and click OK.
6. Navigate to the destination folder and you will see three new files: XHTML, XML, and XSLT. Open the
XHTML file and you will see the contents of the selected SQLite database in table form.
Creating Queries
You can use the following information to create a basic query template. Be sure to replace the information within
brackets with data for the specific SQLite database files you would like to expand.
Note: Queries will only run on a single file and all fields are output as strings, not binary values.
To create a query for expanding SQLite files

1. Open Notepad.
2. Write a simple query: “Select [column(s)] from [table]”
3. Save the query.
Examining Miscellaneous Evidence SQLite Query Builder | 386

Query Options
You can write queries to perform multiple tasks; including, but not limited to, the following functions:
To select all columns in a table

To select specific columns in a table
To include information from two or more tables within the same file
To select all columns in a table

Use the following query:
Select * from [tablename]
To select specific columns in a table

Select [colname1], [colname2], [colname5] from [tablename]
To include information from two or more tables within the same file
Select ‘[table 1]’ as [column(s)] from [table 1]
union
Select ‘[table 2]’ [column(s)] from [table 2]
Viewing SQLite Database Schema Information

It is possible to view the schema HTML file for a SQLite database. When viewed in the File Content panel, tables
showing which data is contained within the selected database will be visible. This can provide insight into
whether a particular Python script should be applied in order to locate more specific data of interest.
To view SQLite database schema.html files:

1. When processing the evidence, select only the SQLite Databases option in the Compound File
Expansion Options.
2. Once the evidence is processed, locate the SQLite database for which you would like to view the
schema.html file. If the path for the database is unknown, perform the following steps:
2a. On the Overview tab, drill down the following path: File Category > Databases > Other Databases
> SQLite Databases.
2b. Select SQLite Databases.
2c. In the File List you will be able to view the path for the desired SQLite database.
3. In the Explore tab, locate and select the SQLite database for which you would like to view the
schema.html file.
4. In the File List, select the appropriate schema.html file.
5. In the File Content pane, the Table Schema information will appear in HTML.
Examining Miscellaneous Evidence SQLite Query Builder | 387

Chapter 26
Bookmarking Evidence
About Bookmarks (page 388)

About Timeline Bookmarks (page 388)
Using the Bookmarks Tab (page 395)
Creating a Bookmark (page 389)
Viewing Bookmark Information (page 395)
Bookmarking Selected Text (page 396)
Adding to an Existing Bookmark (page 397)
Creating Email or Email Attachment Bookmarks (page 398)
Adding Email and Email Attachments to Existing Bookmarks (page 398)
Moving a Bookmark (page 399)
Copying a Bookmark (page 399)
Deleting a Bookmark (page 399)
Deleting Files from a Bookmark (page 399)
About Bookmarks
A bookmark is a group of files that you want to reference in your case. These are user-created and the list is
stored for later reference, and for use in the report output. You can create as many bookmarks as needed in a
case. Bookmarks can be nested within other bookmarks for convenience and categorization purposes.
Bookmarks help organize the case evidence by grouping related or similar files. For example, you can create a
bookmark of graphics that contain similar or related graphic images. The Bookmarks tab lists all bookmarks that
have been created in the current case.
Bookmarks only apply to the case they are created in.
About Timeline Bookmarks

When creating bookmarks, you can also create a Timeline type of bookmark. A Timeline bookmark lets you
show the chronological relationships of the files in your case. When you create a Timeline bookmark, you can
record the Create Date, Accessed Date, and Modified Date for files as individual items. You can then export that
data to a CSV report file. Each action (create, accessed, modified) for each file is a separate item in the report.
Bookmarking Evidence About Bookmarks | 388

When sorted by the date and time, the CSV report file presents a chronological timeline of the actions of the
evidence files in your case.
For example, you can create a bookmark of files that were downloaded from the internet. The report shows
when the files were downloaded (created) and the time interval between then and when they were last
accessed. You can also see if and when the files were modified.
You can also add manual timeline data. Manual timeline data lets you add items to your timeline that may not be
represented by the files in your case. For example, you may have phone logs that show when relevant phone
calls were placed. You can add those phone calls as manual timeline items so that they appear in your report
along with the file information in the case.
You can use the exported CSV file produce you own chronological timeline of the evidence in the case. This can
present a clearer view of how certain events happened which can help investigators communicate to the jurors
and judge on their case.
The CSV report file includes the following data as columns:
The date/time stamp of the file action

The type of file action (Modified, Accessed, Created, or Other)
The Other category is used for manual timeline entries.
The bookmark name
The filename
Any comments that you manually entered for each item
A bookmark can either be a timeline bookmark or a regular bookmark, but not both.
Creating a Bookmark
To create a bookmark
1. In the File List view , select the files that you want to add to the bookmark.
You can either highlight the files that you want to include, check the boxes of the files that you want to
include, or do nothing to include all files.
2. Right-click on a selected file in the File List view and click Create Bookmark.
3. Enter the information about the bookmark.
See Bookmarks Dialog Options on page 391.
4. Click OK.
Note: Applying filters to a group of listed files for bookmarking can speed the process. The All
Highlighted setting does not work in this instance. Enabling this feature would significantly slow
the response of the program. Instead, use either the Checked Files filter, or the All Files Listed
filter.
Bookmarking Evidence Creating a Bookmark | 389

About Empty Bookmarks
You can create bookmarks that contain only the name and location of the bookmark. These are called Empty
Bookmarks. Empty Bookmarks allow you to add “placeholders” while investigating a case. This feature makes it
easy to mark your place and come back to it later. For example, while investigating a fraud case, you notice an
email that may or may not be pertinent to your investigation. Creating an Empty Bookmark allows you to quickly
“save your place” and come back later when you have more time to delve into that evidence.
You can also use Empty Bookmarks to format your Bookmarks tree. This allows you to better organize your
bookmarks. For example, you may be investigating documents, video, graphics, and emails. You could create an
Empty Bookmark called Documents, under which you would place all of your document-related bookmarks.
Then, you would create an Empty Bookmark called Video, under which you would place all of your video-related
bookmarks. Continue creating Empty Bookmarks until you have a manageable Bookmark tree.
There are two ways to create Empty Bookmarks, creating the Empty Bookmark from the Bookmarks tab or in the
Create New Bookmark dialog.
To create an Empty Bookmark from the Bookmarks tab

1. In Evidence Explorer, click the Bookmarks tab.
2. Right-click the bookmark under which to create the Empty Bookmark.
3. Click Create Empty Bookmark.
4. Enter a name for the Empty Bookmark and click OK.
You add and save additional bookmark information to an Empty Bookmark at anytime by using the
Bookmark Information pane.
To create an Empty Bookmark in the Create New Bookmark dialog

1. Create a bookmark. See Creating a Bookmark on page 389.
2. In Files to Include, select None.
3. Save the bookmark.
Bookmarking Evidence Creating a Bookmark | 390

Bookmarks Dialog Options
Options of the Bookmark Information Pane
Field Description
Bookmark Name The name of the bookmark.
Bookmark Comment Comments about the bookmark or its contents. Bookmark Comments
are created in an HTML editor. HTML allows you to format your
comments within the bookmark and for any subsequent reports.
See Bookmark Comments HTML Editor on page 393.
Files to Include Specify which files in the File List to include in this bookmark. You can
select one of the following:
 All Highlighted - Includes only the highlighted items.
 All Checked - Includes only the checked items.
 All Listed - Includes all items in the File List.
 None - Creates an Empty Bookmark.
Timeline Bookmark Select this option to make this a Timeline bookmark. If you select the
Timeline tab, this options is selected automatically.
A bookmark can either be a Timeline Bookmark or a regular bookmark,
but not both.
Select Existing Bookmark Select the parent bookmark under which you would like to save the
bookmark.
A default shared tree for bookmarks available to all investigators is
created, and a bookmark tree specific to the case owner is created.
be saved as a peer.
Comments This lets you configure elements of a standard bookmark.

tab
File Comments You can assign a comment to each file in the bookmark. Comments are
created in an HTML editor. HTML allows you to format your comments
within the bookmark and for any subsequent reports.
Supplementary You can add external, supplementary files associated with the
Files bookmark. Options are:
 Attach: Allows the investigator to add external supplementary files to
the bookmark. The attached files appear in the Supplementary Files
pane and are copied to the case folder.
 Remove: Removes a selected supplementary file from the bookmark.
Bookmarking Evidence Bookmarks Dialog Options | 391

Field Description
Also include If applicable, you can include the following:
 Parent index.dat
The option to include Parent index.dat is only available if you have
selected to bookmark an index entry, for example a cookie. This
option includes the entry’s parent index.DAT file in the bookmark.
 Email Attachments - If one of the items selected is an email with
attachments, this will include all of the attachments that the email
has.
 Parent Email - If one of the items selected is an email attachment
object, selecting this option will include the parent email.
 Exclude Selected OCR Extractions
The Exclude Selected OCR Extractions check box appears only
when OCR- extracted files have been selected when creating a new
or adding to an existing bookmark. If, instead, you have selected
graphic files, and have not selected their OCR counterparts, the
check box for OCR Extractions of selected Graphics will be active
and available.
 Actual Source File
This option lets you include the parent child of a processing-gener-
ated file.
Bookmark Check this item to have the highlighted text in a file automatically
Selection in File highlighted when the bookmark is re-opened. The highlighted text also
prints in the report.
The selected text that will be included displays in the text box below the
check box.
Timeline tab This lets you configure elements of a Timeline bookmark.
Create Date Select this option to record the date and time that the file was created.
Accessed Date Select this option to record the date and time that the file was last
accessed.
Modified Date Select this option to record the date and time that the file was last
modified.
Object Timeline You can assign a comment to each file timestamp in the bookmark.
Comments Comments are created in an HTML editor. HTML allows you to format
your comments within the bookmark and for any subsequent reports.
The timeline comments are shown in the timeline report anchored to
each date, and each date being used will crate a new row in the text
report.
Manual In this section, you can add manual timeline entries that are not available
Timeline Data as items in the File List.
For example, you may have access to phone records and you can add
call histories as individual manual entries.
You enter the date and time of the items and then in the CSV, they are
displayed chronologically with the other items in your bookmark.
Note: Manual items are listed as Other in the report.

Field Description
Manual (Optional) Enter a comment or description to enter a Manual Timeline
Timeline item. Comments are created in an HTML editor. HTML allows you to
Comments format your comments within the bookmark and for any subsequent
reports.
Manual Date Enter the date of the Manual Timeline item.

You can click the arrow to open a calendar.
Manual Time Enter the time of the Manual Timeline item.
Add Click Add to save the Manual Timeline item.

The item is added to the Manual Timeline Entries list.
Remove Highlight a Manual Timeline entry and click Delete to remove it from the
list.
Manual The list Manual Timeline items that you have added.
Timeline Entries
Select Bookmark Parent Select the parent bookmark under which you would like to save the
bookmark.
There are two default bookmark parents:
 A Shared tree that is available to all investigators
 A bookmark tree specific to the logged-in-user
Administrators and Case Administrators can see and use all bookmarks
in a case.
be saved as a peer.
Bookmark Comments HTML Editor

The HTML Editor for Bookmark Comments allows you to format Bookmark Comments using HTML.
Important: You are required to use the HTML Editor when entering Bookmark Comments, with or without
formatting.
To enter Bookmark Comments

1. In Evidence Explorer, click the Bookmarks tab.
2. Highlight (click) a bookmark from the Bookmarks pane.
3. Click the Edit button next to the Comment field.
The HTML Editor appears.
4. Enter and/or format your comments using formatting options. You can also format your comments
directly in HTML by clicking Source. For a brief description of each HTML formatting option, click Help
in the HTML Editor.
5. Click Done in the HTML Editor when finished.

Note: ALWAYS click Done in the HTML Editor to exit the editor and keep your comments. You still need
to save the Bookmark (Save Changes) to keep the comment in the Bookmark.

Viewing Bookmark Information
The Bookmark Information pane displays information about the selected bookmark and the selected bookmark
file. The data in this pane is editable by anyone with sufficient rights.
Select a bookmark in the Bookmarks tree view of the Bookmarks tab, or in the Bookmarks node in the tree of the
Overview tab to view information about a bookmark. The Overview tab view provides limited information about
the bookmarks in the case. The Bookmark tab provides all information about all bookmarks in the case. In the
Bookmark tab, the Bookmark Information pane displays the Bookmark Name, Creator Name, Bookmark
Comment, and Supplementary files. When selected, a list of files contained in the bookmark displays in the File
List. If you select a file from the File List, the comment and selection information pertaining to that file displays in
the Bookmark Information pane.
Bookmarked files display in a different color in the File List pane than non-bookmarked files for easy
identification.
Change any of the information displayed from this pane. Changes are automatically saved when you change the
bookmark selection.
In the File List, bookmarked items display in a different color for easy identification. You may need to refresh the
view to force a rewrite of the screen for the different color to display. Forcing a rewrite would impact the overall
performance of the program.
Creating a Timeline Bookmark Report

After you have created Timeline Bookmarks, you can crate Timeline Bookmark Reports. The reports are in CSV
format. You can specify one or more Timeline Bookmarks for each report. You specify one or more Timeline
Bookmarks for each report. You specify the location and name of the saved CSV report.
See About Timeline Bookmarks on page 388.
To create a timeline Bookmark Report

1. In the Examiner, click File > Timeline > Report.
2. Select one or more Timeline Bookmarks to use for the report.
3. (Optional) Select one of the following
Select All Children - This selects all of the children of the selected bookmarks in the bookmark tree.
Clear All Children - This clears all of the children of the selected bookmarks in the bookmark tree.
4. Click Select to select an output folder.
4a. Select the folder to save the report in.
4b. Specify the name of the report or use the default Timeline Report name.
5. Click Generate to save the report.
Using the Bookmarks Tab

You can use the Bookmark tab to view, create, and edit bookmarks.
Bookmarking Evidence Viewing Bookmark Information | 395

Bookmarking Selected Text
Bookmarked selections are independent of the view in which they were made. Select hex data in the Hex view of
a bookmarked file and save it; bookmark different text in the Filtered view of the same file and save that
selection as well.
To add selected text in a bookmark

1. Open the file containing the text you want to select.
2. From the Natural, Text, Filtered or Hex views, make your selection.
Note: If the file is a graphic file, you will not see, nor be able to make selections in the Text or the
Natural views.
3. Click Create Bookmark in the File List toolbar to open the Create New Bookmark dialog.
4. When creating your bookmark, check Bookmark Selection in File.
5. To save selected content, choose the view that shows what you want to save, then highlight the content
to save.
6. Right-click the selected content. Click Save As.
7. In the Save As dialog, provide a name for the selection and click Save.
The selection remains in the bookmark.
Bookmarking Video Thumbnails

You can bookmark Video Thumbnails by creating a new bookmark or adding to an existing bookmark. By
default, Video Thumbnails that are added to Bookmarks play from the location thumbnail to end of the video. You
can update, change the start/end times, or remove the thumbnail from within the bookmark. You can also export
your video thumbnails to your report.
See Using the Video Thumbnails Pane on page 337.
See About Bookmarks on page 388.
See Adding Bookmarks to a Report on page 502.
Adding a Video Thumbnail to a New or Existing Bookmark

To add a Video Thumbnail to a new or existing Bookmark
1. From the Evidence Explorer, click the Video tab.
2. Right-click the video thumbnail for the Bookmark.
3. Click either:
Create Bookmark. See Creating a Bookmark on page 389.
Add to Bookmark. See Adding to an Existing Bookmark on page 397.
4. Follow the instructions for creating and/or adding to a Bookmark.
Bookmarking Evidence Bookmarking Selected Text | 396

About Updating/Removing Bookmarked Video Thumbnails
Once there are Video Thumbnails in a Bookmark, you can update (change) the Video Thumbnail or remove it.
Note: You cannot add a selection of a video from the Bookmark’s Natural Viewer using the Add Selection
button. To add a video thumbnail to a bookmark, see Adding a Video Thumbnail to a New or Existing
Bookmark (page 396).
To update a Video Thumbnail in a Bookmark

1. From the Evidence Explorer, click the Bookmarks tab.
2. In the Bookmarks pane, navigate to and highlight the Bookmark containing the Video Thumbnail(s).
3. In the File List pane, highlight the video from which the thumbnails were created.
4. In the Bookmark Information > Selections pane, click (highlight) the thumbnail (selection).
5. In the File Content > Natural Viewer, click Play ( ) and then Pause.
6. Click Update Section.

7. Enter a Start and/or End Time.
8. Click OK.
To remove a Video Thumbnail from a Bookmark

1. From the Evidence Explorer, click the Bookmarks tab.
2. In the Bookmarks pane, navigate to and highlight the Bookmark containing the Video Thumbnail(s).
3. In the File List pane, click (highlight) the video from which the thumbnails were created.
4. In the Bookmark Information > Selections pane, click (highlight) the thumbnail (selection).
5. Click Remove Selection.
6. Confirm the change.
Adding to an Existing Bookmark

Sometimes additional information or files are desired in a bookmark.
To add to an existing bookmark

1. Select the files to be added to the existing bookmark.
2. Right-click the new files.
3. Click Add to Bookmark.
4. When available (depending on the type of files you are adding), make selections for Files to Add, Also
Include, OCR Extractions of Selected Graphics, and Bookmark Selection in File.
5. Open the parent bookmark tree.
6. Select the child bookmark to add the file or information to.
7. Click OK.
Bookmarking Evidence Adding to an Existing Bookmark | 397

Creating Email or Email Attachment Bookmarks
When bookmarking an email, you can also add and bookmark any attachments. You can also include a parent
email when you bookmark an email attachment.
To create a bookmark for an email, follow the steps for creating a bookmark. Select the email to include in the
bookmark. Right-click and choose Create Bookmark. Note that by default, the Email Attachments box is
active, but unmarked. If only the parent email is needed, the Email Attachments box should remain unselected.
Complete the bookmark creation normally by naming the bookmark, selecting the bookmark parent, then
clicking OK.
If you need to bookmark only an attachment of the email, select and right-click on the attachment. Choose
Create Bookmark. For more information on creating bookmarks, see, Creating a Bookmark (page 389).
Notice that the Parent Email box is automatically active, allowing you to include the parent email if it is not part of
the selection you have already made. If the Parent Email box is checked, and there is more than one
attachment, the Email Attachments box becomes active as well, allowing you to also include all attachments to
the parent email. To add only the originally selected attachment to the bookmark, do not check the Parent Email
box.
Adding Email and Email Attachments to Existing

Bookmarks
To add an email to a bookmark, select the email to add, then right-click on the email and choose Add To
Bookmark. Note that if emails are selected, but their attachments are not selected, the Email Attachments box
is active, but not marked. If only the parent email is needed, the Email Attachments box can remain unselected.
If you have selected only the attachment, include the attachment’s parent email by marking the Parent Email
box.
One way to be sure to find the exact items you want is to highlight an interesting item in the File List view in one
tab, then right-click on it and select View This Item in a Different List. Click on Email and you are taken to the
Email tab with the selected email highlighted in the File List view, and displayed in the Natural tab in the File
Content pane. In the Email Attachments pane on the right that file is displayed, along with its role; whether it is a
parent email, part of the email thread, or an attachment.
If only an attachment of an email is needed to be added to the bookmark, select the attachment and follow the
instructions for adding to a bookmark.
Bookmarking Evidence Creating Email or Email Attachment Bookmarks | 398

Moving a Bookmark
To move a bookmark
1. From either the Bookmark tab or the Overview tab, select the bookmark you want to move.
2. Drag the bookmark to the desired location and then release the mouse button.
Copying a Bookmark
To copy a bookmark
1. From either the Bookmark tab or the Overview tab, select the bookmark you want to copy.
2. Using the right mouse button, drag the bookmark to the desired location and release the mouse button.
Deleting a Bookmark
To delete a bookmark
1. In the Bookmark tab, expand the bookmark list and highlight the bookmark to be removed.
Press the Delete key.
Right-click on the bookmark to delete, and click Delete Bookmark.
Deleting Files from a Bookmark

To delete files from a bookmark
1. From either the Overview tab or the Bookmarks tab, open the bookmark containing the file you want to
delete.
2. Right-click the file in the Bookmark File List pane.
Select Remove from Bookmark.
Press the Delete key on your keyboard. You will be prompted, “Are you sure you want to delete files
from this bookmark?” Click Yes.
Deleting a file from a bookmark does not delete the file from the case.
Bookmarking Evidence Moving a Bookmark | 399

Chapter 27
Searching Evidence with Live Search
Searching evidence for information pertaining to a case can be one of the most crucial steps in the examination.
An index search gives rapid results, and a live search includes options such as text searching and hexadecimal
searching. You can view search results from the File List and File Contents views of the Search tab.
The Live Search is a process involving a bit-by-bit comparison of the entire evidence set with the search term.
Conducting a Live Search (page 400)

Live Text Search (page 401)
Live Hex Search (page 403)
Live Pattern Search (page 404)
Using Pattern Searches (page 404)
Predefined Regular Expressions (page 407)
Creating Custom Regular Expressions (page 409)
Conducting a Live Search

The live search takes slightly more time than an index search because it involves a bit-by-bit comparison of the
search term to the evidence. A live search is flexible because it can find patterns of non-alphanumeric
characters, including those that are not generally indexed. It is powerful because you can define those patterns
to meet your needs in an investigation.
Note: If a case was originally processed using distributed processing, when a reviewer conducts a live search,
the system will first attempt to use the computer with the distributed processing engine, but if it is not
available, it will use the reviewer’s local computer to conduct the search.
Searching Evidence with Live Search Conducting a Live Search | 400

Live Text Search
A Text search finds all strings that match an exact entry, such as a specific phone number (801-377-5410).
When conducting a Live Text Search, there are no arrows to click for operand selection.
A Live Text Search gives you options such as ANSI, Unicode with UTF-16 Little Endian, UTF-16 Big Endian, and
UTF-8. The latter two are always case-sensitive. You can also choose from a list of other Code Pages to apply to
the current search. In addition, you can select Case Sensitivity for any Live Text Search.
Note: When entering Chinese characters into search, you must have both ANSI and Unicode options selected.
The difference between a Pattern search and a Text search is that a text search searches for the exact typed
text, there are no operands so the results return exactly as typed. For example, a simple Pattern search allows
you to find all strings that match a certain pattern, such as for any 10-digit phone number (nnn-nnn-nnnn), or a
nine-digit social security number (nnn-nn-nnnn).
More complex Pattern searches (“regex”) require specific syntax. See Live Pattern Search (page 404).
Search terms can be entered then exported as XML files, then imported at any time, or with any case. Text files
can be imported and used in Live Search, however the Live Search Export feature supports only XML format.
Note: When importing TXT files that the search of those terms depend on the specific tab your in. (ie If I have a
few hex terms and import the TXT list into Live Search in the Patterns tab), the search is run as a pattern
search and not hex.
To Conduct a Live Text search

1. In the Live Search tab, click the Text tab.
In the Text or Pattern tabs, you can check the character sets to include in the search.
2. If you want to include sets other than ANSI and Unicode, check Other Code Pages and click Select.
3. Select the needed sets.
4. Click to include EBCDIC, Mac, and Multibyte as needed.
5. Click OK to close the dialog.
6. Check Case Sensitive if you want to search specifically uppercase or lowercase letters as entered.
Case is ignored if this box is not checked.
7. Enter the term in the Search Term field.
8. Click Add to add the term to the Search Terms window.
9. Click Clear to remove all terms from the Search Terms window.
10. Repeat Steps 7, 8, and 9 as needed until you have your search list complete.
When you have added the search terms for this search, it is a good idea to export the search terms to a
file that can be imported later, saving the time of re-entering every item, and the risk of errors. This is
particularly helpful for customized pattern searches.
11. In the Max Hits Per File field, enter the maximum number of search hits you want listed per file. The
default is 200. The range is 1 to 65,535. If you want to apply a filter, do so from the Filter drop-down list
in the bar below the Search Terms list. Applying a filter speeds up searching by eliminating items that do
not match the filter. The tab filter menu has no effect on filtering for searches.
12. Click Search.
13. Select the results to view from the Live Search Results pane. Click the plus icon (+) next to a search line
to expand the branch. Individual search results are listed in the Live Search Results pane, and the
Searching Evidence with Live Search Live Text Search | 401

corresponding files are listed in the File List. To view a specific item, select the hit in the search results.
Selected hits are highlighted in the Hex View tab.
14. When a search is running you can click View > Progress Window to see how the job is progressing.
Note: In the progress window, you can Pause, Resume, and Cancel jobs, in addition to closing the
window. (Pause and Resume are the same button, but the label changes depending on
processing activity.)
Note: Mark the Remove when finished check box to take completed jobs off the list for housekeeping
purposes.
15. When processing is complete, return to the Live Search tab to review the results.
Right-click on a search result in the Live Search Results pane to display more options. The available
right-click options are as follows:
Option Description
Create Bookmark Opens the Create New Bookmark dialog.
Copy to Clipboard Opens a new context-sensitive menu. Options are:
 All Hits In Case  All File Stats In Case

 All Hits In Search  All File Stats In Search
 All Hits In Term  All File Stats In Term
 All Hits In File
Export to File Opens a new context-sensitive menu. Options are:
 All Hits In Case  All File Stats In Case

 All Hits In Search  All File Stats In Search
 All Hits In Term  All File Stats In Term
 All Hits In File
Set Context Data Width Opens the Data Export Options window. Allows you to set a context width from 32
to 2000 characters within which it can find and display the search hit.
Export Search Term Select to export a search term list that can be imported into this or other cases.
Delete All Search Deletes all search results from the Live Search Results pane.
Results
Delete this Line Deletes only the highlighted search results line from the Live Search Results pane.
Searching before the case has finished processing will return incomplete results. Wait to search until the case
has finished processing and the entire body of data is available.
Note: Search terms for pre-processing options support only ASCII characters.
Searching Evidence with Live Search Live Text Search | 402

Live Hex Search
Hexadecimal (Hex) format includes pairs of characters in a base 16 numeric scheme, 0-9 and a-f. Hex searching
allows you to search for repeating instances of data in Hex-format, and to save Hex-format data search strings to
an XML file and re-use it in this or other cases.
Click the Hex (Hexadecimal) tab to enter a term by typing it directly into the search field, by clicking the
Hexadecimal character buttons provided, or by copying hex content from the hex viewer of another file and
pasting it into the search box. Click Add to add the hex string to the search terms list.
The instructions for conducting a live search on the hex tab are similar to conducting searches on the Pattern
tab. Remember, when searching for hexadecimal values, a single alphabetic or numeric text character is
represented by hex characters in pairs.
To do a Hex search
1. In the Live Search tab, click the Hex tab.
2. Add Hex search strings using the keyboard or using the Alpha-numeric bar above the Search Terms
box.
3. Click Add to add the term to the Search Terms window.
4. Click Clear to remove all terms from the Search Terms window.
5. Repeat Steps 2, 3, and 4 as needed until you have your search list complete.
6. When you have added the search terms for this search, it is a good idea to export the search terms to a
file that can be imported later, saving the time of re-entering every item, and reduces the risk of errors.
This is particularly helpful for customized pattern searches.
7. In the Max Hits Per File field, enter the maximum number of search hits you want listed per file. The
default is 200. The range is 1 to 65,535. If you want to apply a filter, do so from the Filter drop-down list
in the bar below the Search Terms list. Applying a filter speeds up searching by eliminating items that do
not match the filter. The tab filter menu has no effect on filtering for searches.
8. Click Search.
9. Select the results to view from the Live Search Results pane. Click the plus icon (+) next to a search line
to expand the branch. Individual search results are listed in the Live Search Results pane, and the
corresponding files are listed in the File List. To view a specific item, select the file in the search results.
All search results are highlighted in the Hex View tab.
Searching Evidence with Live Search Live Hex Search | 403

Live Pattern Search
The more complex Live Pattern “Regex” style search can be used to create pattern searches, allowing forensics
analysts to search through large quantities of text information for repeating strings of data such as:
Telephone Numbers
Social Security Numbers
Computer IP Addresses
Credit Card Numbers
In the Live Search tab, click the Pattern tab. Each has different options.
The patterns consist of precise character strings formatted as mathematical-style statements that describe a
data pattern such as a credit card or social security number. Pattern searches allow the discovery of data items
that conform to the pattern described by the expression, rather than what a known and explicitly entered string
looks for.
These pattern searches are similar to arithmetic expressions that have operands, operators, sub-expressions,
and a value. For example, the following table identifies the mathematical components in the arithmetic
expression, 5/((1+2)*3).
Regex Pattern Search Components
Component Example
Operands 5, 1, 2, 3
Operators /, ( ), +, *
Sub-Expressions (1+2), ((1+2)*3)
Value Approximately 0.556
Like the arithmetic expression in this example, pattern searches have operands, operators, sub-expressions,
and a value.
Note: Unlike arithmetic expressions, which can only have numeric operands, operands in pattern searches can
be any characters that can be typed on a keyboard, such as alphabetic, numeric, and symbol characters.
Using Pattern Searches

A pattern search can consists of operands. The search engine searches left to right.
Operators let regular expressions search patterns of data rather than for specific values. For example, the
operators in the following expression enable the search engine to find all Visa and MasterCard credit card
numbers in case evidence files:
\<((\d\d\d\d)[\– ]){3}\d\d\d\d\>
Searching Evidence with Live Search Live Pattern Search | 404

Without the use of operators, the search engine could look for only one credit card number at a time.
Visa and MasterCard Regular Expressions
Example Operands
Operands \–, spacebar space
Operators \, \<, <, ( ), [ ], {3}, \>
Sub-expressions (\d\d\d\d), ((\d\d\d\d)[\– ])
Value Any sequence of sixteen decimal digits that is delimited by three hyphens and bound on
both sides by non-word characters
(xxxx–xxxx–xxxx–xxxx).
As the pattern search engine evaluates an expression in left-to-right order, the first operand it encounters is the
backslash less-than combination (\<). This combination is also known as the begin-a-word operator. This
operator tells the search engine that the first character in any search hit immediately follows a non-word
character such as white space or other word delimiter.
Note: A precise definition of non-word characters and constituent-word characters in regular expressions is
difficult to find. Consequently, experimentation may be the best way to determine if the forward slash less-
than (\<) and forward slash greater-than (\>) operators help find the data patterns relevant to a specific
searching task. The hyphen and the period are examples of valid delimiters or non-word characters.
The begin-a-word operator illustrates one of two uses of the backslash or escape character ( \ ), used for the
modification of operands and operators. On its own, the left angle bracket (<) would be evaluated as an operand,
requiring the search engine to look next for a left angle bracket character. However, when the escape character
immediately precedes the (<), the two characters are interpreted together as the begin-a-word operator by the
search engine. When an escape character precedes a hyphen (-) character, which is normally considered to be
an operator, the two characters (\-) require the search engine to look next for a hyphen character and not apply
the hyphen operator (the meaning of the hyphen operator is discussed below).
The parentheses operator ( ) groups together a sub-expression, that is, a sequence of characters that must be
treated as a group and not as individual operands.
The \d operator, which is another instance of an operand being modified by the escape character, is interpreted
by the search engine to mean that the next character in search hits found may be any decimal digit character
from 0-9.
The square brackets ([ ]) indicate that the next character in the sequence must be one of the characters listed
between the brackets or escaped characters. In the case of the credit card expression, the backslash-hyphen-
spacebar space ([\-spacebar space]) means that the four decimal digits must be followed by either a hyphen or a
spacebar space.
The {3} means that the preceding sub-expression must repeat three times, back to back. The number in the
curly brackets ({ }) can be any positive number.
Finally, the backslash greater-than combination (\>), also known as the end-a-word operator, means that the
preceding expression must be followed by a non-word character.
Sometimes there are ways to search for the same data using different expressions. It should be noted that there
is no one-to-one correspondence between the expression and the pattern it is supposed to find. Thus the
preceding credit card pattern search is not the only way to search for Visa or MasterCard credit card numbers.

Because some pattern search operators have related meanings, there is more than one way to compose a
pattern search to find a specific pattern of text. For instance, the following pattern search has the same meaning
as the preceding credit card expression:
\<((\d\d\d\d)(\–| )){3}\d\d\d\d\>
The difference here is the use of the pipe (|) or union operator. The union operator means that the next character
to match is either the left operand (the hyphen) or the right operand (the spacebar space). The similar meaning
of the pipe (|) and square bracket ([ ]) operators give both expressions equivalent functions.
In addition to the previous two examples, the credit card pattern search could be composed as follows:
\<\d\d\d\d(\–| )\d\d\d\d(\–| )\d\d\d\d(\–| )\d\d\d\d\>
This expression explicitly states each element of the data pattern, whereas the {3} operator in the first two
examples provides a type of mathematical shorthand for more succinct regular expressions.

Predefined Regular Expressions
Many predefined regular expressions are provided for pattern searching.
Examples of Predefined Regular Expressions

 U.S. Social Security Numbers  IP Addresses
 U.S. Phone Numbers  Visa and MasterCard Numbers
 U.K. Phone Numbers  Computer Hardware MAC Addresses
Social Security Number

The pattern search for Social Security numbers follows a relatively simple model:
\<\d\d\d[\– ]\d\d[\– ]\d\d\d\d\>
This expression reads as follows: find a sequence of text that begins with three decimal digits, followed by a
hyphen or spacebar space. This sequence is followed by two more decimal digits and a hyphen or spacebar
space, followed by four more decimal digits. This entire sequence must be bounded on both ends by non-word
characters.
U.S. Phone Number

The pattern search for U.S. phone numbers is more complex:
((\<1[\–\. ])?($|\<)\d\d\d[$\.\–/ ] ?)?\<\d\d\d[\.\– ]\d\d\d\d\>
The first part of the above expression,
((\<1[\–\. ])?($|\<)\d\d\d[$\.\–/ ] ?)?,
means that an area code may or may not precede the seven digit phone number. This meaning is achieved
through the use of the question mark (?) operator. This operator requires that the sub-expression immediately to
its left appear exactly zero or one times in any search hits. This U.S. Phone Number expression finds telephone
numbers with or without area codes.
This expression also indicates that if an area code is present, a number one (1) may or may not precede the
area code. This meaning is achieved through the sub-expression (\<1[\–\. ])?, which says that if there is a “1”
before the area code, it will follow a non-word character and be separated from the area code by a delimiter
(period, hyphen, or spacebar space).
The next sub-expression, ($|\<)\d\d\d[$\.\–/ ] ?, specifies how the area code must appear in any search
hits. The \(|\<) requires that the area code begin with a left parenthesis or other delimiter. The left parenthesis
is, of necessity, escaped. The initial delimiter is followed by three decimal digits, then another delimiter, a right
parenthesis, a period, a hyphen, a forward slash, or a spacebar space. Lastly, the question mark (?) means that
there may or may not be one spacebar space after the final delimiter.
The latter portion of this expression, \<\d\d\d[\.\– ]\d\d\d\d\>, requests a seven-digit phone number with a
delimiter (period, hyphen, or spacebar space) between the third and fourth decimal digit characters. Note that
typically, the period is an operator. It means that the next character in the pattern can be any valid character. To
specify an actual period (.), the character must be escaped ( \ .). The backslash period combination is included in
the expression to catch phone numbers delimited by a period character.
Searching Evidence with Live Search Predefined Regular Expressions | 407

IP Address
An IP address is a 32-bit value that uniquely identifies a computer on a TCP/IP network, including the Internet.
Currently, all IP addresses are represented by a numeric sequence of four fields separated by the period
character. Each field can contain any number from 0 to 255. The following pattern search locates IP addresses:
\<[1-2]?[0-9]?[0-9]\.[1-2]?[0-9]?[0-9]\.[1-2]?[0-9]?[0-9]\.[1-2]?[0-9]?[0-9]\>
The IP Address expression requires the search engine to find a sequence of data with four fields separated by
periods (.). The data sequence must also be bound on both sides by non-word characters.
Note that the square brackets ([ ]) still behave as a set operator, meaning that the next character in the sequence
can be any one of the values specified in the square brackets ([ ]). Also note that the hyphen (-) is not escaped;
it is an operator that expresses ranges of characters.
Each field in an IP address can contain up to three characters. Reading the expression left to right, the first
character, if present, must be a 1 or a 2. The second character, if present, can be any value 0–9. The square
brackets ([ ]) indicate the possible range of characters and the question mark (?) indicates that the value is
optional; that is, it may or may not be present. The third character is required; therefore, there is no question
mark. However, the value can still be any number 0–9.
You can build your own regular expressions by experimenting with the default expressions. You can modify the
default expressions to fine-tune your data searches or to create your own expressions.
Visit the AccessData website, www.accessdata.com, to find a technical document on Regular Expressions.
Searching Evidence with Live Search Predefined Regular Expressions | 408

Creating Custom Regular Expressions
Create your own customized regular expressions using the following list of common operators
Common Regular Expression Operators
Operator Description
. A period matches any character.
+ Matches the preceding sub-expression one or more times. For example, “ba+” will find all
instances of “ba,” “baa,” “baaa,” and so forth; but it will not find “b.”
$ Matches the end of a line.
* Matches the preceding sub-expression zero or more times. For example, “ba*” will find all
instances of “b,” “ba,” “baa,” “baaa,” and so forth.
? Matches the preceding sub-expression zero or one times.
[] Matches any single value within the square brackets. For example, “ab[xyz]” will find “abx,”
“aby,” and “abz.”
- A hyphen (-) specifies ranges of characters within the brackets. For example, “ab[0-3]” will
find “ab0,” “ab1,” “ab2,” and “ab3.” You can also specify case specific ranges such as [a-r],
or [B-M].
” (Back quote) Starts the search at the beginning of a file.
‘ (Single quote or apostrophe) Starts the search at the end of a file.
\< Matches the beginning of a word. In other words, the next character in any search hit must
immediately follow a non-word character.
\> Matches the end of a word. In other words, the last character in any search hit must be
immediately followed by a non-word character.
| Matches the sub-expression on either the left or the right. For example, A|u requires that the
next character in a search hit be “A” or “u.”
\b Positions the cursor between characters and spaces.
\B Matches anything not at a word boundary. For example, will find Bob in the name Bobby.
\d Matches any single decimal digit.
\l Matches any lowercase letter.
\n Matches a new line.
\r Matches a return.
\s Matches any whitespace character such as a space or a tab.
\t Matches a tab.
\u Matches any uppercase letter.
\w Matches any whole character [a-z A-Z 0-9].
^ Matches the start of a line.
Searching Evidence with Live Search Creating Custom Regular Expressions | 409
Common Regular Expression Operators (Continued)
Operator Description
[[:alpha:]] Matches any alpha character (short for the [a-z A-Z] operator).
[[:alnum:]] Matches any alpha numerical character (short for the [a-z A-Z 0-9] operator).
[[:blank:]] Matches any whitespace, except for line separators.
{n,m} Matches the preceding sub-expression at least n (number) times, but no more than m
(maximum) times.
Searching Evidence with Live Search Creating Custom Regular Expressions | 410
Chapter 28
Searching Evidence with Index Search
Searching evidence for information pertaining to a case can be one of the most crucial steps in the examination.
Index Search gives instantaneous results, and Live Search supports modes like text and hexadecimal. Search
results are viewed from the File List and File Contents views in the Search tab.
This chapter details the use of the Index Search feature. It includes the following topics
Conducting an Index Search (page 412)
Using Search Terms (page 413)
Expanding Search Terms (page 413)
Adjusting the Weighting Criteria for an Index Search Term (page 414)
Defining Search Criteria (page 415)
Exporting and Importing Index Search Terms (page 415)
Selecting Index Search Options (page 416)
Viewing Index Search Results (page 417)
Using dtSearch Regular Expressions (page 418)
Documenting Search Results (page 424)
Using Copy Special to Document Search Results (page 425)
Bookmarking Search Results (page 426)
Searching Evidence with Index Search | 411

Conducting an Index Search
The Index Search uses the index to find the search term. Evidence items may be indexed when they are first
added to the case or at a later time. Whenever possible, AccessData recommends indexing a case before
beginning analysis.
Index searches are instantaneous. In addition, in the Index Search Results List, the offset of the data in the hit is
no longer listed in the hit. You will see it when you look at the hit file in Hex view.
Running an Index search on large files or Index Searches resulting in a large number of hits may make the scroll
bar appear not to work. However, it will return when the search is complete. For more information about indexing
an evidence item, see Indexing a Case (page 75).
The Search Criteria pane shows a cumulative total of all listed or all selected terms, based on the And or the Or
operator. The cumulative total displays at the bottom of the Search Terms list. This functionality has been added
to match the way the Search Terms list functioned in previous versions.
Select none, one, several, or all search terms from the list, click either And or Or, then click either All or
Selected to see cumulative results. You can see this feature at work in the figure below.
Important: If you start an index search and then refresh the interface before the search finishes, the search will
cancel and restart. This will cause a sizeable delay when searching in large or very large cases.
The Index contains all discrete words or number strings found in both the allocated and unallocated space in the
case evidence.
You can configure how special characters, spaces and symbols are indexed. This is not done by default,
however. One benefit is that you can easily search on an exact email address using username@isp (the
extension, such as COM or NET, is not included automatically because a period (.) is not indexed.
In addition to performing searches within the case, you can also use the index to export a word list to use as a
source file for custom dictionaries to improve the likelihood of and speed of password recovery related to case
files when using the Password Recovery Toolkit (PRTK). You can export the index by selecting File > Export
Word List.
Note: Performing a search using Unicode only works with Live Search, not Index Search.
UTF encoded documents can be searched using dtSearch.
Note: dtSearch has been updated which changes some of the search functionality and results. The search is
now filtering Windows and Linux executables (EXE, BIN, OCF, and ELF). This may reduce the number of
search results and reduce certain items from being shown in the filtered text. For example, the text in a
header of an application may include “This program cannot be run in DOS mode”. Because it is now
filtered it will not longer show in Filtered text.
Searching Evidence with Index Search Conducting an Index Search | 412

Using Search Terms
Type the word or term in the Search Term field. The term and terms like it appear in the Indexed Words column
displaying the number of times that particular term was found in the data. Click Add or press Enter to place the
term in the Search Terms list, or double-click the term in the indexed words column to add it to the Search Terms
list.
Using Unicode Characters in Search Terms

You can search for Unicode characters when performing a search. For example, you can search for the ö
character.
To add Unicode characters

1. Turn on your keyboard’s Num Lock.
2. In in the Terms field, enter the Unicode.
For example, do the following:
2a. Press and hold down the ALT key.
2b. Using the numeric keypad only, type 148.
2c. Release the ALT key and the character is entered.
Note: For Windows 7 and earlier you can use a 3-digit unicode number. For Windows 8 and higher you must
use a 4-digit number. See http://support.microsoft.com/kb/315684/en-us.
Expanding Search Terms

When performing an Index Search, you can use the Term Browser to build a search using terms that are related
to one or more keywords. You then select which words you want to include in the search.
To expand terms, a third-party lexical database called WordNet ® is used. When you expand terms, you can use
the following lists: Synonyms, Related, Specific, General.
For example, you may start with a keyword of “delete.” By using the Term Browser, it will suggest synonyms,
such as “erase” and “cancel”. It will also suggest related terms, such as “cut,” “deletion,” and “excision”. It will
also suggest general related terms, such as “censor,” “remove,” “take,” and “withdraw.” It will also suggest
specific related terms, such as “strike,” “excise,” “scratch,” and “expunge”. You can select which of those words
to include in your search.
The first time that you use this feature, the WordNet dictionary must be initialized. This is a one-time event and
can take 5-15 minutes for it to complete. You are prompted before the initialization begins.
To search for terms using related words

1. In the Examiner, click Index Search.
2. Enter one or more keywords to the search terms.
3. Select one or more search terms that you want to expand.
Searching Evidence with Index Search Using Search Terms | 413

4. Click Expand Terms.
A list of synonyms is generated.
To add other related words, select the Include Related, Include Specific, and Include General check
boxes.
5. You can add terms to the term list, separated by a comma, and click Expand.
6. Select the words that you want to include in the search.
7. To build a search including the words that you selected, click Add to Search.
Adjusting the Weighting Criteria for an Index Search Term

It is possible to add a weight to index search terms. This allows for an accurate, weighted percentage when the
index search results populate. These terms can be either global or case-specific.
To adjust the weight of an index search term

1. Open the desired case. Navigate to Manage > Indexed Search Term Weights.
2. In the Default Indexed Search Term Weights dialog, add a search term by clicking on the Plus button,
then double-clicking the Term box and typing in your term.
3. Add a weight by double-clicking the Weight box for the desired term and typing in the desired weight.
4. Click OK. The term will now be indexed using the entered weight.
Note: It is possible to add a weight while typing in the search term on the Index Tab. To do this, add :##
to the end of the term. For example, to weight the word Crime at a 15, type in the term as
Crime:15. If you prefer not to use the saved weight for a particular search, type in the term with a
:00 at the end. For example, you would type Crime:00.
To make weighted terms global

Select the Shared option at the top of the Default Indexed Search Term Weights dialog.
To make weighted terms case-specific

Select the Local option at the top of the Default Indexed Search Term Weights dialog.
Searching Evidence with Index Search Adjusting the Weighting Criteria for an Index Search Term | 414
Defining Search Criteria
Refine a search even more by using the Boolean operators AND and OR. You can specify the terms to use in an
index search by selecting specific entries, or by searching against all entries.
You can also use the NOT operator to force the search criteria to exclude terms. To do this, in the Index Search
tab, in the Terms field, type NOT before the term that you want to exclude from the search criteria and then click
Add.
For example, if you do not want to include files with the term “apple” in your search, enter NOT apple into the
search criteria.
The Search Terms list now shows you a cumulative total for the search terms, individually, combined, or total.
You can use the operators All and Selected to see more specific results. This is helpful when refining lists and
terms to limit the results to a manageable number.
You can import a list of search terms to save having to type them multiple times. This is especially helpful when
the list is long, or the terms are complex. When you create a search terms document, each term begins on a new
line, and is followed immediately by a hard return. Save the file in TXT format in any text editor and save it for
future use.
Important: When creating your search criteria, try to focus your search to bring up the smallest number of
meaningful hits per search.
Exporting and Importing Index Search Terms

You can export a list of search terms you have added to the list of search terms to save for later use.
To export a set of search terms

1. Highlight the search terms to export to a file.
2. Click Export.
3. Provide a filename and location for the file (the TXT extension is added automatically).
4. Click Save.
To import a saved search terms file

1. Click Import to import a set of search terms.
2. Select the search terms file you previously saved.
3. Click Open.
Note: An imported term cannot be edited, except to delete a term and re-add it to your satisfaction.
Searching Evidence with Index Search Defining Search Criteria | 415

Selecting Index Search Options
To refine an index search, from the Index Search tab, in the Search Criteria area click Options.
Important: The Search Options, Stemming, Phonic, and Synonym cannot be combined. You may choose only
one at a time.
Index Search Options
Option Result
Stemming Words that contain the same root, such as raise and raising.
Phonic Words that sound the same, such as raise and raze.
Synonym Words that have similar meanings, such as raise and lift.
Index Result Options

Max Files to List Maximum number of files with hits that are to be listed in the results field. You can change
this maximum number in the field. Searches limited in this way will be indicated by an
asterisk (*) and the text “(files may be limited by “Max files to list” option)” which may be
cut off if the file name exceeds the allowed line length. The maximum number of possible
files with hits per search is 65,535. If you exceed this limit, the remaining hits will be
truncated, and your search results will be unreliable. Narrow your search to limit the
number of files with hits.
Note: Limiting the number of files to display does not work with some images. This is
caused by dtSearch counting the chunks of files as individual files that are coming from
the breaking of large unallocated space files into 10MB chunks. Since Those chunks
are combined back into single files, the resulting file count will be less.
Max Hits per File Maximum number of hits per file. You can change the maximum number in this field.
Searches limited in this way will be indicated by an asterisk (*) and the text “(files may be
limited by “Max hits per file” option)” which may be cut off if the file name and this text
together exceed the allowed line length. The maximum number of possible hits per file is
10,000.
Max Words to The maximum number of words to be returned by the search.
Return
Files to Search
All Files Searches all the files in the case.
File Name Pattern Limits the search to files that match the filename pattern.
Operand characters can be used to fill-in for unknown characters. The asterisk (*) and
question-mark (?) operands are the only special characters allowed in an index search.
The pattern can include “?” to match any single character or “*” to match an unknown
number of continuous characters.
For example, if you set the filename pattern to “d?ugl*”, the search could return results
from files named douglas, douglass, or druglord.
To enter a filename pattern:
 Check the File Name Pattern box.
 In the field, enter the filename pattern.
Note: Search by date range is now limited to be between Jan 1, 1970 and Dec 31, 3000.
Searching Evidence with Index Search Selecting Index Search Options | 416
Files to Search (Continued)
Files Saved Beginning and ending dates for the time frame of the last time a file was saved.
Between  Check the Files Saved Between box.
 In the date fields, type the beginning and ending dates that you want to search
between.
Note: Search by date range is limited to be between Jan 1, 1970 and Dec 31, 3000.
Files Created Beginning and ending dates for the time frame of the creation of a file on the suspect’s
Between system.
 Check the Files Created Between box.
 In the date fields, enter the beginning and ending dates that you want to search
between.
Note: Search by date range is now limited to be between Jan 1, 1970 and Dec 31, 3000.
File Size Between Minimum and maximum file sizes, specified in bytes.
 Check the File Size Between box.
 In the size fields, enter the minimum and maximum file size in bytes that you want to
search between.
Save as Default Check this box to make your settings apply to all index searches.
Click Search Now when search criteria are prepared and you are ready to perform the search.
Viewing Index Search Results

Index Search results are returned instantaneously. The Index Search Results pane displays the results of your
query in a tree-type view. The tree expands to show whether the resulting items were found in allocated or
unallocated space. Further, when found in allocated space, the results are separated by file category. They are
then sorted by relevancy, a percentage of the hits found per search term.
Searching Evidence with Index Search Viewing Index Search Results | 417
Using dtSearch Regular Expressions
You can use regular expression searching capabilities in the dtSearch index search tab. This functionality does
not use RegEx++ that is used in the Live Search tab. dtSearch utilizes the TR1 (Technical Report 1) regular
expressions.
Regular expressions in dtSearch provide a powerful syntax for searching for complicated patterns in text, such
as one of several possible sequences of letters followed by a sequence of numbers. Regular expressions can
also be used to express spelling variations of individual words. Regular expression patterns are arbitrary (i.e.,
supplied by the user dynamically) and cannot be pre-indexed.
Regular expression searching in dtSearch is limited to a single whole word. A regular expression included in the
dtSearch box must be quoted and must begin with ##. An example of this is:
Apple and "##199[0-9]" - will find Apple and 1990 through 1999
Apple and "##19[0-9]+" - will find Apple and 190 through 199
However, if you want to look for Apple Pie, you cannot use "##app.*ie" since this is two words. Only letters and
numbers are searchable. You cannot search for any of the non-indexed characters as defined in the Index
Search Settings in the Detailed Options section of a case creation. Also, dtSearch does not store information
about line breaks so any searches that are made that include the beginning of a line or the end of a line will not
work.
Search considerations using the wildcard character "*" in a regular expression does have an effect on search
speed: the closer to the front of a word the expression is, the more it will slow searching. "Appl.*" will be nearly
as fast as "Apple", while ".*pple" will be much slower.
Note: Advanced searching for Social Security Numbers and Credit Card Numbers and other number patterns
can be achieved, however modifications to the dtSearch engine must be made before processing the
case. For more details, see Advanced Searching on page 7 of this paper.?
For more information, see:
Regular Expressions - dtSearch Support. http://support.dtsearch.com/webhelp/dtsearch/regular_.htm

MSDN: TR1 Regular Expressions. http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/bb982727.aspx
TR1 Regular Expressions For Text Patterns
Element Terms
Characters and target sequences are referred to as an Element and can be one of the following:
A literal character typed as the actual letter or number ( a or 1).

A '.' (period) is any single character.
An '*' (asterisk) is a wildcard character.
(a) is a capture group.
\d is a decimal character.
For hex searches, \xhh matches a hex entry (ie - \x0f).
Searching Evidence with Index Search Using dtSearch Regular Expressions | 418
{2} is a repetition character.
A ',' (comma) is a minimum character.
(aa?) is a target sequence.
An alternation character search is 'this|that'.
A concatenation sequence is '(a){2,3}(b){2,3}(c)'.
A back reference is '((a+)(b+))(c+)\3'.
(?:subexpression) matches the sequence of characters in the target sequence that is matched by the
patter between the delimiters.
(?!:subexpression) matches any sequence of characters in the target sequence that does not match the
pattern listed in the subexpression)
A bracket or range expression of the form "[expr]", which matches a value or a range, similar to a "set" in
the Live Pattern Search.
Examples:
"##a" matches the target sequence "a" but does not match the target sequences "b", or "c", and so on.
"##." matches a single character such as "a", "b", and "c",and so on.
"##sal*" matches the target 'sale' and the target "salt' and so on.
"##(a)" capture group, matches the target sequence "a" but does not match the target sequences "b", or
"c", and so on.
"##\d\d\d\d" matches the target sequence of four digits "1234".
"##aa?" or {0,1} matches the target sequence of "aa" and the target sequence of "aaa".
"##ab" matches the target sequence "ab."
"##[b-z]" or range, matches the target sequences "b" and "c" but does not match the target sequences
"a".
"##tom|jerry" matches the target sequence of 'tom' or 'jerry'.
"##\d{4}" or repetition, matches the target sequence of four digits "1234".
"##(?:aa)" or target sequence, matches the target sequence of "aa" and the target sequence of "aaa",
and so on.
Ordinary Character
By entering actual ASCII characters, the search will return that set of characters after the element(s) are
entered. By entering ordinary characters, "##nick", you would find said characters. However, if you wanted to
look for Nick Davis, you could not use "##nick davis" since this is two words.
Single "Any" Character and Wildcard

The use of the any character element can be used if a letter or letters may be different, such as difference in
spelling (example 'marijuana' and 'marihuana'). The wildcard is used to find any combination of characters after
an element is entered.
Examples:
"##(a*)" matches the target sequence "a", the target sequence "aa", and so on.
"##a*" matches the target sequence "a", the target sequence "aa", and so on.
"##(a.)" matches the target sequence "aa", the target sequence "ab", but will not find the target sequence
the target sequence "aaa".
"##a." matches the target sequence "aa", the target sequence "ab", but will not find the target sequence
the target sequence "aaa".
"##.*ick" matches the target sequence "nick", the target sequence "click", and so on.
"##mari.uana" matches the target sequence "marijuana" and the target sequence "marihuana".
Capture Group
A capture group marks its contents as a single unit in the regular expression and labels the target text that
matches its contents. The label that is associated with each capture group is a number, which is determined by
counting the opening parentheses that mark capture groups up to and including the opening parenthesis.
Examples:
"##(ab)*" matches the target sequence "ab", the target sequence 'abab", and so on.
"##(a+)(b+)" matches the target sequence "ab, the target sequence "aab", the target sequence "abb",
and so on.
"##ab+" matches the target sequence "abb" but does not match the target sequence "abab."
"##(ab)+" matches the target sequence "abab" but does not match the target sequence "abb."
"##((a+)(b+))(c+)" matches the target sequence "aabbbc" and associates capture group 1 with the
subsequence "aabbb", capture group 2 with the subsequence "aa", capture group 3 with "bbb", and
capture group 4 with the subsequence "c".
Repetition
Any element can be followed by a repetition count.
Examples:
"##(a{2})" matches the target sequence "aa" but not the target sequence "a" or the target sequence
"aaa".
"##(a{2,})" matches the target sequence "aa", the target sequence "aaa", and so on, but does not match
the target sequence "a".
A repetition count can also take the following form:
"?" - Equivalent to "{0,1}".

Examples:
"a?" matches the target sequence "" and the target sequence "a", but not the target sequence "aa".
"##(aa?)(bbbb?)(c)" matches the target sequence "aabbbbc" and the target sequence "abbbc".
Decimal Character
You can locate any set of decimals by using the '\d" character element in the expression.
Examples:
"##\d\d\d\d" matches the target sequence "1234".

"##\d[3} matches the target sequence "123".
"##\d{3}\d\d\d\d" matches the target sequence '1234567".
Visa and "##\d{4}" will match any files that contain the word 'visa' and any four digits.
Alternation
A concatenated regular expression can be followed by the character '|' and another concatenated regular
expression. Any number of concatenated regular expressions can be combined in this manner. The resulting
expression matches any target sequence that matches one or more of the concatenated regular expressions.
Example:
"##(nick|houston)" matches the target sequence "nick", or the target sequence "houston".
Concatenation
Regular expression elements, with or without repetition counts, can be concatenated to form longer regular
expressions. The resulting expression matches a target sequence that is a concatenation of the sequences that
are matched by the individual elements.
Examples:
"##(a){2,3}(b){2,3}(c)" matches the target sequence "aabbc", the target sequence "aaabbbc".
"##(\d{4}){4}" matches the target sequence of "1234123412341234" (16 digits - no spaces).
Back Reference
A back reference marks its contents as a single unit in the regular expression grammar and labels the target text
that matches its contents. The label that is associated with each capture group is a number, which is determined
by counting the opening parentheses that mark capture groups up to and including the opening parenthesis that
marks the current capture group. A back reference is a backslash that is followed by a decimal value N. It
matches the contents of the Nth capture group. The value of N must not be more than the number of capture
groups that precede the back reference.
Example:
"((a+)(b+))(c+)\3" matches the target sequence "aabbbcbbb". The back reference "\3" matches the text in
the third capture group, that is, the "(b+)". It does not match the target sequence "aabbbcbb".
The first capture group is ((a+)(b+))
The second capture group is (a+)
The third capture group is (b+)
The fourth capture group is (c+)
Bracket or Character Range

A character range in a bracket expression adds all the characters in the range to the character set that is defined
by the bracket expression. To create a character range, put the character '-' between the first and last characters
in the range. Doing this puts into the set all characters that have a numeric value that is more than or equal to the
numeric value of the first character, and less than or equal to the numeric value of the last character.
Examples:
"[0-7]" represents the set of characters { '0', '1', '2', '3', '4', '5', '6', '7' }. It matches the target sequences "0",
"1", and so on, but not "a".
"[h-k]" represents the set of characters { 'h', 'i', 'j', 'k' }.
"[0-24]" represents the set of characters {'0', '1', '2', '4' }.
"[0-2]" represents the set of characters { '0', '1', '2' }.
An individual character in a bracket expression adds that character to the character set that is defined by the
expression. If the bracket expression begins with a "^" then this defines that the expression will consider all
characters except for those listed.
Examples:
"[abc]" matches the target sequences "a", "b", or "c", but not the sequence "d".
"[^abc]" matches the target sequence "d", but not the target sequences "a", "b", or "c".
"[a^bc]" matches the target sequences "a", "b", "c", or "^", but not the target sequence "d".
TR1 Regular Expressions For Number Patterns

If order to achieve dtSearch capability in FTK for search strings such as Social Security Numbers, Credit Card
Numbers, Employee Identification Numbers, Telephone Numbers, and so on, where a period or hyphen is
present, certain steps must be done during the pre-processing phase of the case.
Note: NOTE: Currently, you cannot include search patterns with spaces.
Normal dtSearch strings for credit card numbers or social security numbers
The normal dtSearch wildcard string can be utilized as long as the hyphen is set to be indexed as a space:
Social Security Numbers - === == ====

Returns "123-45-6789"
Will not return "123 45 6789"
Credit Card Numbers (16 digits) - ==== ==== ==== ====
Returns "1234-1234-1234-1234"
Will not return "1234 1234 1234 1234"
Number Patterns
You can use dtSearch TR1 Regular Expression to find number patterns as you can in Live Searches for such
things as Credit Card Numbers, Social Security Numbers, xxxxxxxx. Certain pre-processing options MUST be
completed before this function will work.
Configuring Pre-Processing Options
If you to utilize the dtSearch TR1 Regular Expression functions for looking for number patterns, you must
complete the following pre-processing options:
1. Start a new case.

2. Click Custom processing profile.
3. Click Indexing Options next to dtSearch Text Index.
4. On the Indexing Options dialog window set the following:
For Hyphen Treatments - set to Hyphen
In the Spaces section - remove the period
In the Spaces section - remove the left and right parenthesis
In the Letters section - click Add and in all 4 spaces, type a "." period and repeat for the left and right
parenthesis, then click OK.
5. Process the case.
Examples of TR1 Regular Expressions for Number Patterns

For Credit Card Numbers:
"##(\d{4}[\.\-])(\d{4}[\.\-])(\d{4}[\.\-])(\d{4})"
The first three groups are composed of - (\d{4}[\.\-]). The expression is looking for four digits followed
by a period, or hyphen. This group is repeated three times and followed by the group looking for the
ending 4 digits.
We can shorten that expression by writing it "##((\d{4})[\.\-]){3}(\d{4})".
This will find 1234-5678-1234-5678 or 1234.5678.1234.5678
For Social Security Numbers -
"##(\d{3}[\.\-])(\d{2}[\.\-])(\d{4})".
This will find 123-45-6789 or 123.45.6789

For U.S. Telephone Numbers -
"##(\d[\-\.])?($?\d{3}[\-\.$])?([\-\.]?\d{3}[\-\.])(\d{4})"
This will find:

567-8901
234-567-8901
1-234-567-8901
(234)567-8901
(234)-567-8901
567.8901
234.567.8901
1.234.567.8901
(234)567.8901
(234).567.8901
Documenting Search Results
Once a search is refined and complete, it is often useful to document the results.
Right-click an item in the Search Results list to open the quick menu with the following options:
CreateBookmark: Opens the Create Bookmark dialog. For more information on creating and using
Bookmarks, see Using the Bookmarks Tab (page 395).
Copy to Clipboard: Copies the selected data to the clipboard (buffer) where it can be copied to another
Windows application, such as an Excel (2003 or earlier) spreadsheet.
Note: The maximum number of lines of data that can be copied to the clipboard is 10,000.
Export to File: Copies information to a file. Select the name and destination folder for the information file.
Uses the same criteria as Copy to Clipboard.
Set Context Data Width: Context data width is the number of characters that come before and after the
search hit.
Delete All Search Results: Use this to clear all search results from the Index Search Results pane.
Copy or Export Search Results
Option Description
All Hits in Case Saves all the current search terms’ hits found from the entire case.
All Hits in Search Saves all the search hits found in each search branch.
All Hits in Term (Live search only) saves the instances of individual terms found from the list of search
terms.
For example, if a live search consisted of the list “black,” “hole,” “advent,” and “horizon,”
this option would copy information on each of the terms individually.
All Hits in File Records the instances of the search term in the selected file only.
All File Stats in Case Creates a CSV file of all information requested in the case.
All File Stats in Creates a CSV file of the information requested in the search.
Search
All File Stats in Term (Live search only) Creates a CSV file of the instances of individual terms found from the
list of search terms.
After the information is copied to the clipboard, it can be pasted into a text editor or spreadsheet and saved.
Choose Export to File to save the information directly to a file. Specify a filename and destination folder for the
file, and then click OK
Search results can then be added to the case report as supplementary files.
Important: When exporting Index Search result hits to a spreadsheet file, the hits are exported as a CSV file in
UTF-16LE data format. When opening in Excel, use the Text to Columns function to separate the
Index Search hit values into columns.
Searching Evidence with Index Search Documenting Search Results | 424

Using Copy Special to Document Search Results
The Copy Special feature copies specific information about files to the clipboard.
Method 1 to copy information about the files in your search results

1. Click in the search results list.
2. From the menu bar, select Edit > Copy Special.
Method 2 to copy information about the files in your search results

1. Find that file highlighted in the File List view.
2. Right-click on the desired file.
3. Select Copy Special.
4. Choose the column settings template to use from the drop-down list. Click Column Settings to define a
new column settings template.
4a. Modify the column template in the Column Settings Manager. For more information on customizing
column templates, see Customizing File List Columns (page 494).
4b. Click Apply to return to the Copy Special dialog.
5. Select the customized column template if you created one.
6. Choose whether you want to include the header row in the file.
7. Under File List Items to Copy, select the option that best fits your needs:
All Highlighted to copy only the items currently highlighted in the list.
All Checked to copy all the checked files in the case.
Currently Listed to copy all currently listed items, but no others.
All to copy all items in the case.
8. The dialog states the number of files that your selection contains.
9. Click OK.
Searching Evidence with Index Search Using Copy Special to Document Search Results | 425
Bookmarking Search Results
To keep track of particular search results, add them to new or existing bookmarks. Search results in the file list
can be selected and added to a newly-created bookmark, or added to an existing bookmark as with any other
data.
To create a bookmark from the file list

1. Select the files you want to include in the bookmark.
2. Right-click any of the selected files and select Create Bookmark.
3. Complete the Create New Bookmark dialog.
4. Click OK.
The bookmark appears in the Bookmark tab.
Searching Evidence with Index Search Bookmarking Search Results | 426

Chapter 29
Viewing System Information
About Viewing System Information

You can view system information that contains detailed information about disk images in an easy to read format.
You can view several important pieces of information about the target computer and the users of that computer.
You can view this information in the System Information tab.

Not all attributes are available for all disk images, however, the possible attributes that you can see are:
Applications
Prefetch
User Assist
Installed
Network Information
Network Shares
Network Connections
Wireless Profiles
Owner Information
Recent Files
LNK
NT User
Shortcuts
SAM Users
USB Devices
For details about the attributes, see Available System Information Data (page 430).
Viewing System Information About Viewing System Information | 427

Populating the Data in the System Information Tab
The System Information tab is not populated with data by default. You must extract data during processing.
To extract data and have it populated in the System Information tab

 You must do one of the following:
When adding disk images to a case, select the Generate System Information processing option.
For an existing case, use the Generate System Information option in Additional Analysis.
Viewing System Information

After you have processed a disk image, you can view the system information.
To view system information data

1. Open the Examiner and click the System Information tab.
You can choose one image at a time to review in further detail. On the left hand side, there is a
dropdown list of all of the images that have been processed into the case.
2. Select the disk image that you want to view.
3. Select the nodes that you want to view.
A tree of available attributes from the disk appears in the Categories panel.
On the right side of the tab, there are two panels which display additional information about the node
you select on the left. The upper panel is titled Items and the lower panel is titled Provenance.
The Items panel displays lists of the attributes found within the selected node. For example, when
looking at the Applications node, you may want to review a list of applications frequently used by the
users of the target machine. You can select the node User Assist under the Applications node. Once
you select this node from the tree on the left, in the Items panel you see a list of all of the applications
frequently used by the users of the target machine along with the user that used that application, the
number of times that application had been run, and the last time the application was run.
The Item list allows you to sort any column in either ascending or descending order to assist you in
finding the information you need quickly.
In the Provenance panel, you can find the location of the data selected from the Items panel. Using the
previous example of frequently used applications, you may want to review an application used by a
specific user. From the Items list, you select the application you are interested in, and in the
Provenance panel, you see the location from the target machine from which this information was
obtained.
4. (Optional) In the Provenance panel, you can select the object, right-click, and set a bookmark.
Viewing System Information Populating the Data in the System Information Tab | 428
Exporting System Information Data
You can export the content in the Sytem Information tab into an XML file.
To export system information data

1. From the File Menu, choose Export System Information.
2. In the Export System Information window, choose All images or Selected image. If you are choosing a
specific image, be sure the image for which you would like to export system information is listed and
highlighted in the Disk Images area. Press OK.
3. A Save As window will open. Select the directory and enter a file name for the output file. Press Save.
Note: In order to export system information data, the image must have been processed with the Generate
System Information processing option selected during Add/Remove evidence, and the image must
actually contain system information.
Viewing System Information Exporting System Information Data | 429

Available System Information Data
This section contains information about the possible data available in the System Information tab. All of the data
is collected from one or more sources, where a source can be a single file or a location within the file. Where
possible, the complete source path is shown in the Provenance pane. Below are the details of the data available
for each category and sub-category.
Possible data available in the System Information tab
Category Sub-Category Description

Application Data
Prefetch Each time you turn on your computer, Windows keeps track of the way your
computer starts and which programs you commonly open. Windows saves
this information as a number of small files in the prefetch folder. The next
time you turn on your computer, Windows refers to these files to help speed
the start process.
The prefetch folder is a subfolder of the Windows system folder. The
prefetch folder is self-maintaining, and there's no need to delete it or empty
its contents. If you empty the folder, Windows and your programs will take
longer to open the next time you turn on your computer.
For each prefetch (.PF) file, in the System Information tab displays the
following information:
 Complete path to the application executable
 Number of times the application was run.
 Last time the application was run
User Assist UserAssist is a method used to populate a user's start menu with frequently
used applications. This is achieved by maintaining a count of application
use in each users NTUSER.DAT registry file at sub key:
 Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Explorer\UserAssist
For each UserAssist entry in the registry, the System Information tab
displays the following information:
 Complete path to the application executable
 Number of times the application was run
 Last time the application was run
Viewing System Information Available System Information Data | 430

Possible data available in the System Information tab (Continued)

Installed Applications installed on the Windows system are viewable via the Control
Panel -> Programs and Features. By default the list doesn't show updates
or system components unless the user selects to see them. The information
can come from various places in the registry but the feature uses the
HKLM\SOFTWARE registry file under the sub keys:
 Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Uninstall\
 Wow6432Node\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Uninstall\
Service packs, hot fixes, updates, or system components are not reported.
For each installed application, the System Information tab displays the
 Application name
 Application publisher (if available)
 Path to installed application (if available)
 Date application was installed (if available)
 Size of application install base (if available)
 Application version (if available)
Network Data
Network A network share is a computer resource made available from one host to
Shares other hosts on a computer network. In this feature, it is specifically the
networks that were accessed using the Universal Naming Convention
(UNC). This information is stored in each user's NTUSER.DAT registry file
at sub keys:
 Software\\Microsoft\\Windows\\CurrentVersion\\Explorer\\Map Network
Drive MRU
 Software\\Microsoft\\Windows\\CurrentVersion\\Explorer\\RunMRU
 Software\\Microsoft\\Windows\\CurrentVersion\\Explorer\\MountPoints2
For each installed application, the System Information tab displays the
 UNC Path
 Last connection time


Network A network connection provides connectivity between one computer and the
Connections Internet, a network, or another computer. In every case the connected to
network has an identifying name. Network connections managed by
Windows are stored in the HKLM\SOFTWARE registry file under the sub
key:
 Microsoft\\Windows NT\\CurrentVersion\\NetworkList
For each network connection, the System Information tab displays the
 Profile name
 First time connecting to the network
 Most recent time connecting to the network
 Network name
 Network category (e.g. Domain, Private, Public)
 Gateway MAC address
 Whether it is a wireless network (This is only set if for sure it is a wireless
network)
Wireless A wireless profile is a set of configuration parameters that allow a system to

Profiles connect to a wireless access point. The profiles managed by Windows are
stored in the file C:\ProgramData\Microsoft\Wlansvc\Profiles\Interfaces
For each wireless profile, the System Information tab displays the following
information:
 Profile name
 SSID
 Authentication (e.g. WPA2PSK, WPAPSK, etc.)
 Encryption (e.g. TKIP, AES, none, etc.)
Owner Information Data This is basic data about the installed operating system and comes from the
HKLM\SOFTWARE registry file under the sub key:
 Microsoft\\Windows NT\\CurrentVersion
For each registry value, the System Information tab displays the following
information:
 Name of the registry value
 The contents of the registry value
Recent Files Data


NTUser Many applications store recently used files in the user's NTUSER.DAT
registry file. The specific applications that are extracted are from Microsoft
Office and Adobe Acrobat. The following sub keys are examined:
 Software\Microsoft\Office
 Software\Adobe
 Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Explorer\Map Network
Drive MRU
 Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Explorer\RunMRU
 Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVersion\Explorer\MountPoints2
For each recently used file, the System Information tab displays the
 Application name (i.e. Acrobat, Excel, PowerPoint, Word)
 Absolute path to the recent file
LNK Files LNK is a file extension for a shortcut file used by Microsoft Windows to point
to an executable file. LNK stands for LiNK. Shortcut files are used as a
direct link to an executable file, instead of having to navigate to the
executable, LNK files are stored in each users'
AppData\Roaming\Microsoft\Windows\Recent or Recent directory.
For each LNK file, the System Information tab displays the following
information:
 Absolute path to target file
 Date/Time the target file was created
 Date/Time the target file was last written to
 Date/Time the target file was last accessed
Jump Lists Jump Lists, new in Windows 7, take you right to the documents, pictures,
songs, or web sites you turn to each day. To open a Jump List, just right-
click a program button on the Windows 7 taskbar. (You can also get to
Jump Lists by clicking the arrow next to the program name on the Start
menu.) The files that support this feature are located in each users'
AppData\Roaming\Microsoft\Windows\Recent\AutomaticDestinations
folder.
For each LNK file inside each Jump List, the System Information tab
 Absolute path to target file
 Date/Time the target file was created
 Date/Time the target file was last written to
 Date/Time the target file was last accessed


SAM Users Data The Security Accounts Manager (SAM) HKLM\SAM registry file stores
users' passwords in a hashed format either as a LAN hash or NT hash. To
protect the file, Microsoft introduced the SYSKEY function so the on-disk
copy of the SAM is partially encrypted with a key (usually referred to as the
"SYSKEY").
For each user stored in the SAM registry, the System Information tab
 Name of the user
 SID
 Unencrypted current LAN hash
 Unencrypted previous LAN hash
 Unencrypted current NT hash
 Unencrypted previous NT hash
USB Devices When USB devices are plugged into a computer for the first time, the
Windows operating installs an appropriate driver and stores information
about the device in the registry and the setupapi log file. On subsequent
device connections, various registry keys are updated to reflect the last
connection time. Details about each USB devices are stored in the following
registry locations:
 HKLM\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\\Windows NT\\CurrentVersion\\EMDMgmt
 HKLM\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Enum\USBSTOR
 HKLM\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Enum\USB
 HKLM\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\DeviceClasses\{53f56307-
b6bf-11d0-94f2-00a0c91efb8b}
 HKLM\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Control\DeviceClasses\{53f56308-
b6bf-11d0-94f2-00a0c91efb8b}
 HKLM\SYSTEM\MountedDevices
 HKU\<user sid>\Software\Microsoft\Windows\CurrentVer-
sion\Explorer\MountPoints2
For each USB device, the System Information tab displays the following
information:
 Vendor name
 Vendor id
 Product name
 Product id
 Instance id (very similar to serial number)
 Revision
 First time device was connected
 Last time device was connected
 Last time a user mounted the device
 Drives the device was mounted to
 Volume labels

Chapter 30
Analyzing Document Content
Depending on your license, you can analyze the content of documents in your evidence in the following ways:
Using Document Content Analysis (page 439)

Performing Cluster Analysis (page 441)
Using Entity Extraction (page 435)
Using Entity Extraction
About Entity Extraction

You can extract entity data from the content of files in your evidence and then view those entities.
You can extract the following types of entity data:
Credit Card Numbers
Phone Numbers
Social Security Numbers
The data that is extracted is from the body of documents, not the meta data.
Using entity extraction is a two-step process:
1. Process the data with the Entity Extraction processing options enabled.
You can select which types of data to extract.
2. View the extracted entities in the Examiner.
The following table provides details of the type of data that is identified and extracted:
Entity Extraction Details
Type Examples
Credit Card Numbers in the following formats will be extracted as credit card numbers:
Numbers
Analyzing Document Content Using Entity Extraction | 435

Type Examples
16-digit numbers For example,
used by VISA,  1234-5678-9012-3456 (segmented by dashes)
MasterCard, and  1234 5678 9012 3456 (segmented by spaces)
Discover in the
following formats.
Not:
 1234567890123456 (no segments)
 12345678-90123456 (other segments)
15-digit numbers For example,

used by American  1234-5678-9012-345 (segmented by dashes)
Express in the  1234 5678 9012 345 (segmented by spaces)
following formats.
Notes:
Other formats, such as 14-digit Diners Club numbers, will not
be extracted as credit card numbers
Phone Numbers Numbers in the following formats will be extracted as phone numbers:
Standard 7-digit For example:

 123-4567
 123.4567
 123 4567
Not: 1234567 (not segmented)
Standard 10-digit For example:

 (123)456-7890
 (123)456 7890
 (123) 456-7809
 (123) 456.7809
 +1 (123) 456.7809
 123 456 7809
Not 1234567890 (not segmented)
Note: A leading 1, for long-distance or 001 for international, is

not included in the extraction, however, a +1 is.

Type Examples
International Some international formats are extracted, for example,
 +12-34-567-8901
 +12 34 567 8901
 +12-34-5678-9012
 +12 34 5678 9012
Not 12345678901 (not segmented)

Other international formats are not extracted, for example,
 123-45678
 (10) 69445464
 07700 954 321
 (0295) 416,72,16
Notes:
Be aware that you may get some false positives.
For example, a credit number 5105-1051-051-5100 may also
be extracted as the phone number 510-5100.
Social Security Numbers in the following formats will be extracted as Social Security Numbers:
Numbers
 123-45-6789 (segmented by dashes)

 123 45 6789 (segmented by spaces)
The following will not be extracted as Social Security Numbers:

 123456789 (not segmented)
 12345-6789 (other segments)

Enabling Entity Extraction
To enable entity extracting processing options:
1. You can enable entity extracting processing options at one of two times:
When creating a case or adding new evidence and configuring processing options.
When running Additional Analysis on existing evidence.
Viewing Entity Extraction Data

To view extracted entity data
2. Expand the Document Content node.
3. Expand a Document Content type, such as Credit Card Numbers or Phone Numbers.
4. Click an item to show the file in the File List that contains the extracted data.

Using Document Content Analysis
You can use Document Content Analysis to group document data together for quicker review.
Note: If you activated Document Content Analysis as an Evidence Processing option when you created the
project, Document Content Analysis will automatically run after processing data and will not need to be
run manually.
To perform Document Content Analysis on a new case

1. From Case Manager, click Manage > Evidence Processing Profiles.
2. In the Manage Evidence Processing Profiles dialog, create a new profile or edit an existing profile.
See Configuring Default Processing Options for a Case on page 60.
See Using Processing Profiles on page 61.
3. From the Detailed Options dialog, click the Evidence Processing tab from the left menu and select
Document Content Analysis.
4. (Optional) Click DCA Options and change the Analysis Threshold, if needed, and click OK.
Analysis Threshold — Sets the level of similarity (in a percentage) that is required for documents to
be considered related or near duplicates. The higher the percentage, the more similar the
documents need to be in order to be considered similar.
5. Click Save As and follow the screens to save and/or replace the profile.
To perform Document Content Analysis on an existing case

1. In Evidence Explorer, click Evidence > Add/Remove.
2. From the Manage Evidence dialog, highlight the evidence you want to process using Document Content
Analysis.
3. Click Refinement Options.
4. Select Document Content Analysis and change the DCA options, if needed. See Evidence
Processing Options on page 67.
Filtering Documents by Document Content Analysis

Documents processed with Document Content Analysis can be filtered by the content of the documents in the
evidence. The Cluster Topic container is created in Evidence Explorer in the Overview > Case Overview tab and
is created from data processed with Document Content Analysis. Data included in the Cluster Topic container is
taken from documents, including Word documents, text documents, and PDF documents.
In order for the application to filter the data and display the Cluster Topic container, the following must occur:
Prerequisites for Cluster Topic (page 440)

How Document Content Analysis Works (page 440)
Filtering with Cluster Topic (page 440)
Considerations of Cluster Topic (page 440)
Analyzing Document Content Using Document Content Analysis | 439

Prerequisites for Cluster Topic
Before the Cluster Topic container can be created, the data in the project must be processed by Document
Content Analysis. The data is processed automatically when Document Content Analysis is selected in the
Evidence Processing options or you can process the data manually by selecting Document Content Analysis
in the Refinement Options > Evidence Processing dialog.
Evidence Processing Options (page 67)
Configuring Evidence Refinement (Advanced) Options (page 87)
How Document Content Analysis Works

The application uses an algorithm to cluster the data. The algorithm accomplishes this by creating an initial set
of cluster centers called pivots. The pivots are created by sampling documents that are dissimilar in content. For
example, a pivot may be created by sampling one document that may contain information about children’s books
and sampling another document that may contain information about an oil drilling operation in the Arctic. Once
this initial set of pivots is created, the algorithm examines the entire data set to locate documents that contain
content that might match the pivot’s perimeters. The algorithm continues to create pivots and clusters
documents around the pivots. As more data is added to the project and processed, the algorithm uses the
additional data to create more clusters.
Word frequency or occurrence count is used by the algorithm to determine the importance of content within the
data set. Noise words that are excluded from Document Content Analysis are also not included in the Cluster
Topic pivots or clusters.
Filtering with Cluster Topic

Once data has been processed by Document Content Analysis and categories are created under the Cluster
Topic container, you can view the data in the Overview > File List.
Using the Overview Tab (page 315)
Cluster Topic Container (page 318)

The topics of the categories available are terms created during the Document Content Analysis. Documents
containing these terms are included in the category and are displayed in the File List when selected. Categories
are comprised of two word phrases that occur in the documents. This is to make the category more legible.
The UNCLUSTERED category contains any documents that are not included under a Cluster Topic Container.
Considerations of Cluster Topic

You need to aware the following considerations when examining the Cluster Topic categories:
Not all data will be grouped into categories at once. The application creates categories in an incremental
fashion in order to return results as quickly as possible. Since the application is continually creating
categories, the Cluster Topic container is continually updated.
Duplicate documents are grouped together as they match a specific category. However, if a category is
particularly large, duplicate documents may not be included as part of any category. This is to avoid
Analyzing Document Content Using Document Content Analysis | 440

performance issues. You can examine any duplicate documents or any documents not included in a
category by highlighting the UNCLUSTERED category of the Cluster Topic container.
Cluster Topic results can vary when performed on different databases and/or different computers. This is
due to the analytic behavior of the Document Content Analysis process. Since limits have been set on the
algorithm to allow for efficient collection of data, large amounts of content can thus produce varying
results.
Performing Cluster Analysis

Depending on the license you own (an AD Lab license or a AD Summation license), you can perform an analysis
of files to determine related documents and email threads. If there are files that are similar, one document is
identified as the pivot, and then the other related files are given a score that shows how closely they are related
to the Pivot. If a score is 100, it is a perfect match.
Note: With an FTK, FTK PRO, or AD Enterprise license, you can perform Cluster Analysis on a documents only
using the Document Content Analysis feature.
See Using Document Content Analysis on page 439.
You perform the Cluster Analysis by enabling the Cluster Analysis processing option.
When you enable Cluster Analysis, you have the following options:
Document Types to process - You can select to process the following file types:
Documents
Presentation
Spreadsheets
Email
Similarity Threshold - Determines the level of similarity required for documents to be considered related
or near duplicates.
After processing is complete, you can add the Review Set Pivot and the Distance to Pivot columns in the File List
in the Examiner. You will also use the standard Item # column to identify the Pivot file.
To Perform Cluster Analysis

options.
See Selecting Lab/eDiscovery Options on page 91.
2. Select the option for Cluster Analysis.
3. Click NDA Options.
4. Select the document types to process and the similarity threshold.
Analyzing Document Content Performing Cluster Analysis | 441

To view Cluster Analysis data using columns
1. In the examiner, view the file types that you selected.
2. Click the Column Settings icon.
4. Add the following columns to the template.
Item #
Review Set Pivot
Distance to Pivot
5. Click OK.
6. Select the template name you just configured.
7. Click Apply.
8. Click Close.
The Review Set Pivot shows the Item # of the Pivot file, or the file that other files are compared to.
If a file was identified as being a near duplicate, it will show a Distance to Pivot score. A perfect match
has a score of 100.
Words Excluded from Cluster Analysis Processing

Noise words, such as if and or, are excluded from Cluster Analysis processing. The following words are
excluded in the processing:
a, able, about, across, after, ain't, all, almost, also, am, among, an, and, any, are, aren't, as, at, be,
because, been, but, by, can, can't, cannot, could, could've, couldn't, dear, did, didn't, do, does, doesn't,
don't, either, else, ever, every, for, from, get, got, had, hadn't, has, hasn't, have, haven't, he, her, hers,
him, his, how, however, i, if, in, into, is, isn't, it, it's, its, just, least, let, like, likely, may, me, might, most,
must, my, neither, no, nor, not, of, off, often, on, only, or, other, our, own, rather, said, say, says, she,
should, shouldn't, since, so, some, than, that, the, their, them, then, there, these, they, they're, this, tis,
to, too, twas, us, wants, was, wasn't, we, we're, we've, were, weren't, what, when, where, which, while,
who, whom, why, will, with, would, would've, wouldn't, yet, you, you'd, you'll, you're, you've, your.
Analyzing Document Content Performing Cluster Analysis | 442

Chapter 31
Using Visualization
About Visualization
Visualization is a component that provides a graphical interface to enhance understanding and analysis of files
and emails in a case. You view data based on file and email dates. Visualization provides dashboards with chats
and lists that quickly show information about the data in the specified date range. Visualization helps you identify
files and emails that you label and bookmark as part of your investigation.
Note: The Visualization feature is available as an add-on license. Please contact your AccessData sales
representative for more information.
Visualization can only display data that has an associated date. If a file or an email does not contain a valid
Created, Modified, Last Accessed, Sent or Received date, it is not displayed. For example, carved files do not
have an associated date so they are not displayed in Visualization.
You can also take screen captures of the Visualization pages to have a record of the data.
Visualization supports the following data types:

File Data: You can view file data from either the Explore tab or the Overview tab in the Examiner
interface.
For more information see Visualizing File Data (page 450).
Email Data: You can view email data from the Email tab in the Examiner interface.
For more information see Visualizing Email Data (page 457).
InternetBrowser History: You can view internet browser history data.
For more information see Visualizing Internet Browser History Data (page 469).
Visualization also has the following components:
Using Visualization Heatmap (page 476)
Using Visualization Social Analyzer (page 470)
Using Visualization Geolocation (page 478)
Using Visualization About Visualization | 443

Launching Visualization
To launch visualization
1. Use the Explore, Overview, or Email tabs to specify a set of data.
For example, in the Overview tab, you can view everything under File Extension or drill down to just
DOC files.
2. When you have specified the data that you want to view in the Visualization pane, click the following pie
chart icon:
The data that you have displayed in the File List pane is the data that you can send to the visualization
module.
The visualization module opens in a separate window from the Examiner that you can minimize,
maximize, and select in the Windows task bar.
3. On the time line, specify the date range for the base time line that you want to view data for.
See Setting the Base Time Line on page 448.
Important: The dashboard and data list displays information only for the data that exists in the base time
line. If specified dates have no files, the dashboard displays the text “No Data Series.” To properly
use Visualization, you must specify the base time line that you want to view data for.
Using Visualization Launching Visualization | 444

About the Visualization page
The Visualization page includes three main components:
Time line pane - Provides a time line pane with graphics representing the available data. This is the top
part of the page.
Dashboard - Provides graphical chart panes about the data. This is the middle part of the page.
Data list pane- Provides a list of the data items. The is the lower part of the page.
You can resize each pane.
Using Visualization About the Visualization page | 445

About Visualization Time Line Views
You can use one of the following two time line views:
Basic - The basic view lets you specify a base time line that you want to view data for. For example, you
can select a specific year or month, or you can specify a custom date range. Any data that falls in that
date range will be represented in the charts and data list.
See About the Base Time Line on page 446.
Detailed - The detailed time line view shows a graphical representation of each file or email message. If
you have a lot of data in a given date range, you can narrow your view to days, hours, minutes, and
milliseconds.
See About the Detailed Visualization Time Line on page 463.
About the Base Time Line

The top portion of the visualization page is the time line. The time line displays a graph with a representation of
that data that is visualized. The data is displayed from the oldest date on the left to the most current date on the
right.
The span of the time line is automatically configured based on the dates of the data that you specified for
visualization. For example, if the data that you specified has creation dates that range from 8/15/2003 to 9/11/
2003, it will build a time line with those dates as the start and end.
The vertical gray bars represent where the data files are on the time line. The gold text in the lower left corner of
the time line details the full timespan.
In the Basic time line view, you configure the base time line. The base time line is the specific range of dates that
you want to work with. This may be a smaller date range than the full timespan (dates in yellow).
The base time line is represented by the blue selection box with sliding vertical bars. You can modify the base
time line to be any range within the full timespan.
Important: The dashboard and data list displays information only for the data that exists in the base time line. If
specified dates have no files, the dashboard displays the text “No Data Series.” To properly use
visualization, you must specify the base time line that you want to view data for.
Using Visualization About Visualization Time Line Views | 446

When you first launch visualization, a limited default base time line is specified, starting with the oldest data that
is in the data set. For example, if you are viewing files, the default base time line is the first month starting with
the creation date of the oldest file.
In the example in the graphic shown above, there are four files in the default base time line of one month and
those four files are shown in the list and represented in the dashboard.
In the email visualization, the time line is displayed in weeks, with vertical gray bars representing the emails.
Time Line Selection Tools
Using Visualization About the Base Time Line | 447

Setting the Base Time Line
You adjust the range and the location of the base time line by adjusting the blue selection box. The information in
the visualization dashboard and data list change when you adjust the selection box.
To adjust the full timespan

1. Below the time line, you can zoom in on the view of the total timespan (yellow full timespan bar) by
clicking and dragging the end of the bar.
2. You can also slide the yellow bar left or right to adjust the range.
To adjust the base time line

1. You change the base time line of the data set by adjusting the blue selection box.
2. You can do one of the following options:
Select a period that is on the top of the time line, for example, a specific month like June.
Drag the sliders of the blue selection box to make it bigger or smaller.
Drag the selection box to a different position.
Use the mouse scroll wheel to move the selection box left or right.
Using Visualization About the Base Time Line | 448

Changing the View of Visualization
You can change the way that visualization looks. You can modify the way that bar charts in visualization appear.
You can also change the color scheme of the visualization windows.
Modifying the Bar Chart Displays

You can use the radio buttons below the time line to change the appearance of bar charts in visualization.
Option Description
Log (default) The Log (logarithmic) view makes visualization adjust the bars or lines to raise the low
points and lower the highs so that both are easier to view on a chart. This view smooths
the peaks and valleys in the chart.
Linear The Linear view returns the view from Log to an unadjusted representation of the data.
Changing from the Log view to the Linear view shows more of the variance and spikes in
the data.
Bars (default) The Bars option makes Visualization show evenly-spaced bars to represent the data.
Line The Line view makes Visualization show the data as an unbroken line with peaks and
valleys, representing increases and decreases in the amount of data over time.
Changing the Theme of Visualization

You can modify the appearance of the Visualization windows. You can choose from nine different color schemes.
To change the theme of Visualization

1. In the Case Manager, click Tools > Preferences.
2. In the Preferences dialog, under Theme to use for Visualization, choose from the following:
Office Blue (default)
Metro
Office Black
Office Silver
Vista
Windows 7
Summer
Expression Dark
Transparent
Using Visualization Changing the View of Visualization | 449

Visualizing File Data
The file data dashboard lets you view bar graphs, pie charts, and details about the files in the data set.
When visualizing files data, you can do the following:

Configuring Visualization File Dates (page 450)
Visualizing File Extension Distribution (page 451)
Visualizing File Category Distribution (page 452)
Using the File Data List (page 453)
Configuring Visualization File Dates

When you view file data in the Visualization page, you can view data based on the following file data:
Created date
Modified date
Last accessed date
If a file contains a Created date but not a Modified date, and you change the pane to display the file by Modified
date, the file is no longer displayed in the visualization pane.
If a file’s Created date, Modified date, or Last Accessed date is prior to the year 1985, visualization displays a
dialog box. The dialog box asks you if you want to include the files with these dates in the visualization display. If
you select the option to Do not ask me again, Visualization will remember your preference the next time the
dates precede 1985.
Using Visualization Visualizing File Data | 450

Configuring the file date type
1. On the Visualization page, click the file date type drop-down menu.
2. By default, it displays the Created setting.
3. Select Created, Modified, or Last Accessed.
Visualizing File Extension Distribution

The extension distribution chart lets you view the data for the selected date range.
You can view selected data by the following ways:
File extension counts

File sizes
File counts and sizes are rounded to two decimal places. You can select a bar in the extension distribution chart
to further refine the data that is displayed in the file data list.
You can select an extension in the legend to select or un-select extensions.
File Extension Distribution Pane

Visualizing File Category Distribution
The category distribution chart displays a pie chart of the data set. It is organized according to the categories of
the Overview tab and displays the percentages of each category in the data set. The percentages are displayed
as the nearest whole number. For example: 10%. However, if a section in a category represents less than 1
whole percent, then the percentage is displayed to the hundredth percent. For example,56%.
Visualization Category Distribution Chart

If several categories are displayed very closely together, they may overlap and it can be difficult to read the
percentages. You can click the Show Connectors option to expand the percentages further from the pie chart
and include a connecting line to the pie section that correlates to the percentage.
You can select a category in the pie chart to further refine that data that is displayed in the file data list.
Using the File Data List

The file data list displays detail about the files in the data set. The pane is similar to the File List pane in the
Examiner interface. The information that is displayed in the file data list is generated based on the data that you

refine through the use of the time line pane, the file extension distribution chart, and the categories distribution
chart.
Visualization File Data List
Within the file data list you can sort, group, and sub-group, items according to columns including; ID, Name,
Category, Date, and Size. To sort, drag and drop the desired column heading onto the blue bar. Any column
heading that includes a filter icon can be used to sort the file list data set.
Important: If you want to filter for a specific date, include the day of and the day after. The filter uses midnight as
the time frame. So if you only want files with a date of January 27, 2013, include January 27 and Jan
28. That will include files from midnight on the 27th to midnight on the 28th.

You can perform several actions on selecting the files and then clicking the Mark Selected Items button.
You can do the following:
Label the item

Create a bookmark from the item
Clear a check mark if you have checked it.
Check the item.
You can use the Filter icon on any of the column headings to create custom filters in the file details list.
When you select the filter icon, a filter dialog is displayed that lets you select items that apply to the column
where you add filtering expressions. There are many various was in which you can filter to refine the data that is
displayed.
Note: You can filter and sort by file sizes such as bytes, KB, and MB. However, note that when you enter an
operator to filter by size, you must enter the size according to its byte value. You cannot enter the value in
KB or MB. For example, instead of entering 100 KB, you must enter 102400 for the filter to work properly.
File Data List Filtering Tool

Visualizing Email Data
The email visualization dashboard consists of the following items:
Email Time Line

See Narrowing the Scope with the Email Time Line on page 457.
Mail Statistics Graph
See Viewing Mail Statistics on page 459.
Email Details List
See Using the Email Details List on page 459.
SocialAnalyzer Chart
See Using Visualization Social Analyzer on page 470.
Narrowing the Scope with the Email Time Line

The time line provides an aggregate view of email items sent and received in the data set. You can scale and
refocus the scope of the time line to a specific data range. You can change the scope and scale of the data set
by adjusting the gray slider tool. You can change the focus of the data set by adjusting the blue slider tool.
Visualization Email Date Pane
Using Visualization Visualizing Email Data | 457

See also Setting the Base Time Line (page 448).
Using History Items in the Email Time Line

In the Email Visualization pane, when you alter the selection in the time line, a history item, also called a “bread
crumb,” is added to the top of the time line. Each history item is labeled according to the date range that you
have selected in the time line. You can use these history items to move forward or backward through different
views that you have created.
Visualization History Items

Viewing Mail Statistics
The mail statistics graph displays the sent and received mail statistics in a bar chart. The data contained within
the date range, in the email time line, determines the data that is displayed in the mail statistics graph.
You can select a bar in the statistics graph to further refine the data that is displayed below in the Email details
list.
Visualization Mail Statistics Chart
Using the Email Details List

The email details list displays custodian-level sent and received statistics for email items. The list contains a
column for the custodian's name, a column for the custodian’s sent mail, and a column for the custodian’s
received mail.
You can sort group and subgroup the emails according to the columns including: Sender, Address, Traffic Count,
Sent Mail, and Received Mail. To group the list of emails, you can drag and drop the column headers onto the
table heading of the details list. The list sorts first by the first columns that you drop, and then in the order of any
preceding columns that you drop into the table heading.
Visualization Email Details List

You can use the Filter icon on any of the column headings to create filters in the Email Details List.
When you select the Filter icon, a filter dialog is displayed that lets you select items that apply to the column and
add filtering expressions.
Email Details List Filtering Tool
In visualization, Email addresses that are similar but not exactly the same are displayed as two different
addresses, even though they may be the same address. For example, the quotation marks for 'John Doe' and
“John Doe” are not the same. These slight changes in text can happen from different email servers/software
during email transit, and the program cannot discern duplicate email addresses.

If an email item is sent to multiple recipients, it is counted as a single item in the email details pane. In the Traffic
Details chart, you can see when the same email was sent to multiple recipients. To view specific information
about the recipients of that email item, you can click the Traffic Details button.
You can check specific emails in the examiner from the email details list by selecting the emails and then
choosing one of the Check Selected Items options, Sent, Received, or Both.
When you expand a specific email item, you can run additional functionality. This functionality includes the Social
Analyzer chart. The buttons to open the Social Analyzer chart are located on the right side of a custodian’s email
item in the list.
For more information see the following:

Using Visualization Social Analyzer (page 470)
Analyzing Email Domains in Visualization

Once you have you opened the Social Analyzer pane, you can isolate and examine individual email domains.
Note: Social Analyzer is very graphics-intensive. In order to avoid server issues, you should cull the data with
facets and other filters to isolate the information that you want to examine before viewing it in Social
Analyzer.
To analyze email domains in Visualization mode

1. Open Social Analyzer.
2. Click the domain bubbles to select the domain(s) that you want to view.
3. (optional) If you want to view the top ten domains in terms of received emails. click . Each time you
click this icon, the next top ten bubbles will be selected, and so forth.
4. (optional) You can zoom in and zoom out of the Social Analyzer panel. If you hover over a domain
bubble, the full display name and address, as well as the count, is displayed in the tool tip.
5. You can expand selected email domains and examine individual emails in a domain. See Analyzing
Individual Emails in Visualization on page 461.
Analyzing Individual Emails in Visualization

You can expand email domains to display individual emails and the traffic between those emails.
To analyze individual emails within selected email domains

1. Open Social Analyzer.

bubble, the full DisplayName and address, as well as the count, will be displayed in the tool tip.
5. Click to expand the domain names to display the individual emails.
Posting Email Results Back to the Examiner

After you have identified emails that are relevant to your investigation, you can post them back to the Examiner
for further review. For example, you may drill down to an certain individual that had sent 25 emails to various
domains. You can do the following:
Add the 25 emails to a Label

Add the 25 emails to a Bookmark
Check the 25 emails in the File List
Clear all other checked emails in the File List and check only these 25 emails.
To post email results

1. In the Social Analyzer, identify emails that you want to post.
2. Click Post Results Back.
3. Select the desired option.

About the Detailed Visualization Time Line
You can use the Detailed view of the visualization time line to get a more granular view of the files and emails in
your data set. This helps you use the time line to identify the files and emails that are important in your
investigation. The detailed view provides the following time bands that you can turn on or off to get a more or
less granular view of the files:
Years
Months
Days
Hours
Minutes
Seconds
Milliseconds
Different file types are represented by different colors to assist in identifying relevant files.
Using Visualization About the Detailed Visualization Time Line | 463

Using the Detailed Visualization Time Line
You can use the Detailed view of the time line to get a more granular view of the files and emails in your specified
time line. You can change the Time Line View option to switch between the Basic view and the Detailed view.
Important: Before you launch the Detailed time line view, you must specify a base time line in the basic view that
includes the data that you want to look at. Otherwise, you will only be able to see the files that are in
the default base time line.
To use the detailed visualization time line

1. Select a data set that you want to view.
2. Launch the visualization panel.
See Launching Visualization on page 444.
3. Specify the base time line for the data that you want to view.
4. For the Time Line View, click Detailed.
Understanding How Data is Represented in the Detailed Time Line

In the detailed view, each file, or group of files, is represented with a flag with a circle. Each flag displays the file’s
name, item number, category, size, and date. If you click a flag, the item it represents is selected in the file list
pane at the bottom of the visualization interface.
The color of each flag and circle represents the type of data. For example, the color blue represents Graphics
files. To the right of the time line, there is a Legend that displays what each color represents.
The span of the files depends on the base time line that you selected previously in the basic view.
Using Visualization Using the Detailed Visualization Time Line | 464

About Time Bands
If several items fall within a particular time frame, it can be difficult to see all of them. This is because their flags
can overlap in the limited amount of interface space that is available.
You can manipulate the time line by giving the time line a greater or less granular view by using different time
bands. You can use one or more of the following time bands to change your view:
Years
Months
Days
Hours
Minutes
Seconds
Milliseconds
When you first open visualization, it will determine which time bands to enable based on the date range of the
base time line.
You can choose to display or hide a time band. The bands are displayed at the bottom of the time line. The more
time bands that you turn on, the more granular the data becomes.

For example, suppose you turn on the Year, Month, and Day time bands.
The Year time band is on the bottom, with the Month time band above that, and the Days time band (1-31) is
above that. There are green dots in the bands. The green dots represent files or groups of files. Also in the
example, there is a box in the center of the bands. That box is the view window. The view window is always in
the center of the time line. You will only see the files that are in the view window. You can slide the time line to the
left and right to place files into the view window.
If there are large clusters of files, you can turn on more time bands to get a more granular view of the files.

Modifying the Time Line Using Time Bands and Zoom
You can select different time bands to get a greater or less granular view of your data.
To change the time bands of the detailed time line

1. To display or hide a time band, in the top left corner, click a band to toggle it on or off.
When a band is on, it is shadowed with a dark box.
Be aware that when you change time bands, the focus box of that time band will be centered in the time
line, and there may not be any files in the focus area. You will need to slide the time line to put the green
dots back into the focus area.
2. Slide the time line to place the data in the view window.
You can do one of the following options:
Click the right or left arrows in the upper-right corner.
Click the time line and drag it left or right.
Use the mouse scroll wheel to move it left or right.
3. You can also use the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons (top-right corner) to modify the view.
The zoom feature does not change the time bands or the selected date range. It simply displays more
or less of the data.
Understanding How Grouping Works in the Detailed Visualization Time

Line
If there are more than 500 items that all within a particular time period, the items are grouped together under a
single grouped flag that represents all of the items. Grouping helps you to still use the detailed time line without
having to view an overwhelming amount of data flags in a small amount of space.
You can have the data grouped by the following two methods:
Selected Time - (Default) Items are grouped by a specific time period, for example Days. For example,
you could have 25 items on the 5th, 200 items on the 6th, and 1100 items on the 7th. There would be a
single group for each day.
Fixed Number - Items are grouped into by a maximum group size of 500. Using the previous example, if
there were 1325 total items, they would displayed in three groups of 441 files.
The group flag includes a Details button. Click the Details button to display a list of all of the items that are
grouped under that flag.
You can also click a group to get a more granular view of the files in the group. When you click a group additional
time bands are enabled to give you a more detailed view.
Be aware that multiple flags may be staked vertically. You may need to make the time line pane taller by
dragging the bottom border of the pane down.
Example of grouping

Visualizing Internet Browser History Data
You can view internet browser history files in the detailed visualization timeline. You can view browser history
from the following browsers:
Internet Explorer
Firefox
Chrome
Safari
Opera
In order to view internet browsing history files in the detailed visualization timeline, you must first process the
browser history files. By default, the option to process browser history files is disabled. You must enable the
Process Internet Browser History for Visualization option in either the processing options or additional analysis
options.
To view internet browser history files in the detailed visualization timeline

1. If you have browser history files, in the File List Overview tab, browse to File Category > Internet Chat
Files > browser name > History.
2. Right-click one or more browser history files and select Visualize Browser History...
View browser history files from only one manufacturer at a time.
If the Visualize Browser History... option is grayed-out, then either the file has not been processed
with the Process Internet Browser History for Visualization option enabled, or the file type is not
supported.
If it is a supported file, the detailed visualization timeline is opened.
You may need to adjust the blue selection box to include the data that you want to see.
For information on viewing the visualization timeline, see About the Visualization page (page 445).
Visualizing Other Data

You can process specific file types so that they can be viewed in the visualization timeline.
EVTX files - See Viewing Data in Windows XML Event Log (EVTX) Files (page 341)
IIS Log files - See Viewing IIS Log File Data (page 343)
Registry data files - See Viewing Registry Timeline Data (page 345)
CSV files that are in the Log2Timeline format - See Log2timeline CSV fields (page 349)
Using Visualization Visualizing Internet Browser History Data | 469

Chapter 32
Using Visualization Social Analyzer
About Social Analyzer

The Social Analyzer shows a visual representation of email volume contained in the data set. Social Analyzer
will display all of the email domains in a project, as well as individual email addresses within the email domains.
Social Analyzer Map
The Social Analyzer map displays emails in the data set group by domain name. These domain names appear
on the map in circles called “bubbles.” The larger the bubble, the more emails are contained within that domain.
The bubbles in the map are arranged in a larger sphere according to how many emails were sent to that domain.
The center bubble in the sphere will have the most emails sent from this domain, while domains radiating
clockwise from the center will have fewer and fewer emails in their domain bubble. If you want to examine email
domains with the most sent emails, concentrate on examining the bubbles in the center of the map.
Email data in the Social Analyzer map can be examined on two different levels. On the first level, you can get an
overall view of communications between domains. You can then select domains that you want to examine in a
Using Visualization Social Analyzer About Social Analyzer | 470

more detailed view and expand those domains to view communications between specific email addresses from
the domain. For example, if you search for high email traffic between two domains, you can see which two
domains have the highest amount of traffic between them. Select the two domains, and expand them to view the
email traffic between individual users from those two selected domains.
See Analyzing Email Domains in Visualization on page 474.
See Analyzing Individual Emails in Visualization on page 474.
Elements of the Social Analyzer Map
Element Description
This map presents the overall view of the social analyzer data. The orange
rectangle indicates the area displayed in the main social analyzer map. Black
dots in the overall view show domains that are either selected or communicating.
You can either expand or collapse the overall view by clicking on the triangle in
the upper right corner.
When you select a domain bubble, it is surrounded by a colored double ring. The
ring may be colored blue, black, purple, or red. The different colors allow you to
distinguish between different selected domains, but they do not have any
significant meaning.
Domain bubbles that are not selected, but have sent emails to the selected
domain bubble, are surrounded by a single colored ring that is the same color as
the selected domain bubble. This allows you to easily tell which domains have
been communicating with the selected domain bubble. Domain bubbles that do
not connect to any selected domains are greyed out.
Lines connect other domain bubbles to the selected domain bubble. These lines
represent emails sent to the selected domain from other domains. The more
emails that have been sent to the domain, the thicker the line between domain
bubbles are. You can also see emails sent from the selected domain. Select
Show Reversed Connections in the Social Analyzer panel to show visual
representations of emails sent from the selected domain.
A domain bubble with an orange ring indicates that a domain has been
connected to from another domain multiple times. This allows you to pinpoint
domains that have heavy communication between them.

Accessing Social Analyzer
To navigate throughout the Social Analyzer pane, click and drag inside the pane. Hover over an email domain
bubble to view the total number of emails that were sent from the domain.
Note: Expansion of large datasets may result in slow server speeds and slow rendering the Social Analyzer
visualization data.
To access Social Analyzer

1. Click Project Review.
2. In the Item List panel, click Options > Visualization > Social Analyzer.
Social Analyzer Options Panel

Social Analyzer Options
The following table identifies the tasks that you can perform from the Social Analyzer panel.
Element Description
Applies the visualization graph filters to the Item List grid. Once
Apply Visualization applied, only those items filtered with visualization will appear in
the Item List grid.
Cancels the visualization graph filters and exits out of

Cancel Visualization Visualization.
Refreshes the Social Analyzer pane.

Refresh
Clears the selected bubbles in the Social Analyzer pane.

Clear Selections
Selects the ten bubbles that have been most connected to in the
Select Most Connected Items Social Analyzer pane. Each time you click this icon, the next top
ten bubbles will be selected, and so forth.
Expands selected domains in the Social Analyzer pane. You can

Expand Selected Domains drill down to a second level to examine the email data. See
Analyzing Individual Emails in Visualization on page 474.
Zooms into the Social Analyzer pane. If you are unable to view
Zoom In the social analyzer data, click Zoom In to locate the data. You can
also zoom in by expanding the slider bar located at the bottom of
the Social Analyzer pane, by using the + key on the keyboard, or
by scrolling the mouse wheel up.
Zooms out of the Social Analyzer pane. You can also zoom out
Zoom Out by expanding the slider bar located at the bottom of the Social
Analyzer pane, by using the - key on the keyboard, or by scrolling
the mouse wheel down.
Expands and collapses the overall map of the data set. Dots that
appear in black in the overall map are domains/emails that are
connected to the selected domain/email. The orange rectangle on
the map shows where the expanded location is on the map.

Element Description
View  Show Reversed Connections - Select to show all reversed
connections in the pane. Reversed connections are emails
sent from a particular email or email domain.
 Show Connections - Select to show the connections between
domains in the pane. Connections are emails sent to a particu-
lar email or email domain.
 Preview Connections on Hover - Select to view connections
between domains when you hover over them. This option is
not selected by default to speed rendering of the map.
 Email Display - Display email domains either by the display
name or address.
 Bubble Limit - You can choose a display limit of either 2,500,
5,000, or 10,000 domains. Server issues may occur with larger
display limits.
Stats Displays the statistics of either the first or second level of the
email domain data. You can view:
 The total number of domains, emails, and bubbles in the pane.
 The total number of selected domains, emails, and bubbles in
the pane.
 The total number of domains, emails, and bubbles that have
been expanded.
You can access the second level of data by clicking Expand
Selected Data.
Analyzing Email Domains in Visualization

Once you have you opened the Social Analyzer pane, you can isolate and examine individual email domains.
Note: Social Analyzer is very graphics-intensive. In order to avoid server issues, you should cull the data with
facets and other filters to isolate the information that you want to examine before viewing it in Social
Analyzer.
To analyze email domains in Visualization mode

2. In the Item List panel, click Options > Visualization > Social Analyzer.
bubble, the full display name and address, as well as the count, is displayed in the tool tip.
6. You can expand selected email domains and examine individual emails in a domain. See Analyzing
Individual Emails in Visualization on page 474.
Analyzing Individual Emails in Visualization

You can expand email domains to display individual emails and the traffic between those emails.

To analyze individual emails within selected email domains
2. In the Item List panel, select Options > Visualization > Social Analyzer.
bubble, the full DisplayName and address, as well as the count, will be displayed in the tool tip.
6. Click to expand the domain names to display the individual emails.

Chapter 33
Using Visualization Heatmap
Heatmap allows you to view a visual representation of file categories and file volume within a project. Information
displays in a grid comprised of squares of different colors and sizes. Each color represents a different file
category, and the relative size of the square represents the file volume within the category. You can view each
file category for more details about the files within that category (similar to a file tree) and navigate between file
categories.
You can also switch between viewing the file volume by the physical size of each file and the file count. This
allows you to see any discrepancies in the size of the files. For example, if someone were trying to hide a file by
renaming the file extension, you could easily see the size discrepancy in the heatmap, and then investigate that
particular file further.
To access Heatmap
1. In Forensics products, do the following:
1a. Open the Examiner.
1b. In the File List panel, click (Heatmap).

2. In other products, do the following:
2a. Click Project Review.
2b. In the Item List panel, click Options > Visualization > Heatmap.
Heatmap Panel
Using Visualization Heatmap | 476

Heatmap Options Panel
The following table defines the tasks from the Heatmap panel.
Heatmap Panel Options
Element Description
Cancels the heatmap filters and exits out of Visualization.
Apply the visualization graph filters to the Item List grid. Once applied, only those
items filtered with visualization appear in the Item List grid.
Options
Category  Files - Allows you to view files by the file category. You can view the files in
each category:
By double-clicking that particular file category’s square, or
By clicking the menu from the upper left side and choosing the file cate-
gory that you want to view in the heatmap.
 Folders - Allows you to view files by the folders contained within the project.
You can view the files in each folder:
By double-clicking that particular folder’s square.
By clicking the menu from the upper left side and choosing the folder that
you want to view in the heatmap.
 Extensions - Allows you to view files by the file extension.
Metric  By Size - Allows you to view file types by size of the files. The larger the files,
the larger the represented square in the heatmap.
 By Count - Allows you to view file types by quantity. The more files of a partic-
ular type that are in the project, the larger the represented square in the heat
map.
Using Visualization Heatmap | 477

Chapter 34
Using Visualization Geolocation
About Geolocation Visualization

Geolocation allows you to view a map with real-world geographic location of evidence items that have
geolocation information associated with them. This lets you understand where certain activities/actions took
place.
Geolocation supports the following data types:
Photos with GPS information in the EXIF data. If you have photos in the evidence that have GPS data in
the EXIF data, you can see where those photos were taken.
IP location data after gathering Volatile data (Enterprise license only). When using Forensic products and
processing volatile/RAM data, you can see the lines of communication (both sent and received) between
addresses, showing the location of all parties involved.
Using Geolocation Visualization with Forensics Products to View Security Data (page 486)
Note: When using Forensic products, Geolocation IP address data may take up to eight minutes to
generate, depending upon other jobs currently running in the application.
About Viewing Geolocation Data

When viewing Geolocation data, you can use the following components in Review:
Maps
When viewing geolocation data, you can use any of the following maps:
OpenStreetMaps
Offline Maps (See General Geolocation System Requirements (page 479) and Using Offline Maps
(page 479))
Geolocation Grid
Below the map, you can view a grid that shows details about the items in the map.
See Using the Geolocation Grid on page 484.
Geolocation Data in columns in the Item List
You can view geolocation data for files in the Item List.
See Using Geolocation Columns in the Item List on page 485.
Using Visualization Geolocation About Geolocation Visualization | 478

Important: When you launch the Geolocation view in Review, it will display all relevant files currently in the item
list. You can cull the data using filters and other tools in the item list to limit the data that is displayed
in Geolocation.
General Geolocation System Requirements

As a minimum prerequisite, you must have the following:
Internet access to view web-based maps.

By default, online maps are used to display map data for the Geolocation view.
If you do not have internet access, you can download and use offline maps.
See Using Offline Maps on page 479.
Using Offline Maps

If you do not have internet access, you will not have access to the default online maps. You can download and
use offline maps for Geolocation. You can use the offline maps with either Summation, FTK, Lab, or Enterprise.
For more information, see:

https://support.accessdata.com/hc/en-us/articles/205757007-Geolocation-Maps-for-Offline-Use
Processing Geolocation Data

For Forensic products (FTK, FTK Pro, Lab, and Enterprise)
The File Signature Analysis option must be selected when processing the evidence.
The geolocation data is automatically processed, there is not processing option to select.
For Summation, when you create a project, on the Processing Options tab, under Miscellaneous Options,
you must select the Geolocation option.
See “Evidence Processing and Deduplication Options” in the Admin Guide.
Viewing Geolocation EXIF Data

When your evidence has photos with GPS information in the EXIF data, you can view photo locations.
To view EXIF data in Forensic products (FTK, FTK Pro, Lab, and Enterprise):
1. In FTK, open the Examiner.
2. In the File List panel, click (Geolocation).

3. You can filter the items displayed and see item details.
Using Visualization Geolocation Processing Geolocation Data | 479

To view EXIF data in Summation
2. In the Item List panel, click Options > Visualization > Geolocation.
Geolocation Panel - EXIF data
Using Visualization Geolocation Viewing Geolocation EXIF Data | 480

Using Geolocation Tools
The Geolocation Map Panel

Points of data in a particular area on the map are represented by large dots called clusters. The number on each
cluster show how many points of data (known as pins) are represented by the cluster. Clicking a particular
cluster on the map zooms in on a group of pins.
The general location of the clusters are determined by a central point on the map. The clusters radiate from this
central point. When you zoom in and out of the map, your central point on the map moves as well, and clusters
will shift position on the map. However, as you zoom into a cluster, the cluster rendered will more closely align
itself with the location of the individual pins.
When viewing IP data, the connections between two pins display on the map as lines between clusters/pins. The
width of the lines represent the amount of traffic between two IP address. The thicker the lines, the more traffic
has occurred. Green lines represent traffic originating from the pin and red lines represent traffic entering the pin.
When you select a cluster and zoom in on a particular pin, you can select one or more pins. When a pin is
selected, the outline and shadow of the selected pin turns orange. If you zoom out of the map, the cluster with
one or more selected pins has an orange ring.
Hovering over the cluster displays the following icons:
 Selects all of the pins in a cluster.
 Clears all of the selected pins in a cluster.

The following table describes the Geolocation panel options.
Geolocation Panel
Element Description
After filtering data by selecting one or more pins, this applies the selected
geolocations to the Item List grid. Once applied, only those geolocations filtered
with visualization appear in the Item List grid.
For network data, you will see any communication from those pins to any other
location. This may include one or more items.
If you enter the Geolocation view again, only those geolocation will be displayed
in the map.
To reset the items in the Item List, click the Project Explorer’s Reset and Apply
icons.
Cancels any new geolocation filters and exits out of Visualization

If you previously saved a filter, this will not clear the filter. You must clear filters in
the Item List.
Pins displayed Shows the number of spins that are displayed and the number selected.
Clear Clears and selected pins.
Options
Using Visualization Geolocation Using Geolocation Tools | 481

Geolocation Panel
Element Description
Displays the number of pins selected in the map versus the number of pins
available in the data.
Expands or collapses the overall view map.
Displays the latitude and longitude where the mouse pointer resides. To view the
position of a particular pin, hover the mouse over the pin. To view the exact
coordinates of the pin, select the pin and right-click.
Turns the connections between the pins/clusters either on or off.
Displays all of the pins on the map.
Zooms in or out on the map. A slide bar displays, allowing you to control the
zoom feature.
View All/View Selected
Displays either EXIF data or network connection data. You can also view both
Filter types of data at the same time.
Right-clicking a pin displays more information about the pin.
Detail of Pin

In the pin dialog, you can:
Add any notes

View the exact coordinates and status of the pin
View the IP Address of the pin
Note: To save processing time and to ensure data accuracy, the host name does not populate in the
Geolocation pin. However, the host name does populate in the Item List.
Change the color and shape of the pin
If you make any changes to the pin, a warning icon displays that notifies you that changes were made to
the pin and need to be saved. You can do the following in the pin dialog:
Click to save the changes that you have made to the pin
Click to reset the pin. If changes have been saved previously to the pin, this action resets the pin to
the saved version
Click to close the dialog

Using the Geolocation Grid
When you open Geolocation, you can view a grid that shows details of the items on the map.
The Geolocation Grid shows the following:
Exif: This shows the following Exif data from photos

Capture Data column
File Name column
File Size Coordinate column
When you click an item in the grid, the map will be centered to reflect the location of the selected item.
You can minimize the grid so that the whole map is visible.
Filtering Items in the Geolocation Grid

When you first launch Geolocation, all of the items on the map are shown in the grid.
You can filter the contents of the grid in the following ways.
In the map, if you select a pin, only that item is displayed. You can click (and select) multiple pins.
In the map, if you right-click a cluster and click , that selects all of the pins in a cluster. This will filter
the grid to those clustered pins. You can add multiple clusters to the grid.
In the grid, the columns in the Geolocation Grid can be filtered to cull the items in the grid. For Network
Communication data, the data in the bar chart is filtered as well when columns are filtered.
Using Visualization Geolocation Using the Geolocation Grid | 484

Using Geolocation Columns in the Item List
The data that the Geolocation filter uses to render the information is also available in columns in the Item List.
You can find the following columns in the Item List, depending upon the data that has been collected. These
columns can be sorted and filtered.
See General Geolocation System Requirements on page 479.
Geolocation EXIF Data Columns

When your evidence has photos with GPS information in the EXIF data, you can view data using the following
columns.
Geolocation Columns: EXIF data
Column Display name Description

Geotagged Area Code: Area Code Area code location of geotagged photo or object.
Geotagged City: City City location of geotagged photo or object.
Geotagged Country Code: Country Code: ISO country code location of geotagged photo or object,
such as USA, FRA, MEX, HKG, and EST.
Geotagged Direction: Direction Direction geotagged photo or object.
Geotagged Latitude: Latitude Latitude of geotagged photo or object.
Geotagged Longitude: Longitude Longitude of geotagged photo or object.
Geotagged Postal Code: Postal Code Postal code of geotagged photo or object.
Geotagged Region: Region Regional or State location of geotagged photo or object,

such as NY, DC, IL, FL, and UT.
Geotagged Source: Source Source used to resolve geotagged GPS location to locality
information.
Note: The following columns are not used with exif data: GeoTagAreaCode, MetroCode, or Postal Code.
Using Geolocation Column Templates

When using AD Forensics products, you can use the following Column Templates to help you quickly display
Geolocation-based columns in the File List:
Geolocation - Displays all available Geolocation columns.

GeoEXIF - Displays all columns that contain EXIF-related Geolocation data.
GeoIP - Displays all columns that contain IP-related Geolocation data.
Using Visualization Geolocation Using Geolocation Columns in the Item List | 485
Using Geolocation Visualization with Forensics Products to
View Security Data
Note: This feature is only available with AD forensics productes with a Memory Analysis licesne,
After gathering Volatile data, you can use geolocation to view IP location data to discover where in the world a
computer is communicating. You can view IP locations data when using the following products:
The Geolocation view will display lines that trace internet traffic sent and received between IP addresses,
indicating the physical location of all parties involved. You can drill into geographic regions to see multiple
evidence items. You can then select specific data to post back to the case, where they can view information in
the examiner or include it in reports.
Geolocation Panel - IP Locations To view IP data in Geolocation viewer
Note: For data collected by Geolocation Visualization, the To Domain Name, To ISP, To Netspeed, and To
Organization columns do not populate in the Item Grid. If you require this data, you need to purchase a
MaxMind Premier database license.
Prerequisites for Using Geolocation Visualization to View Security Data

For examining network acquisition and volatile data, enable the Geolocation option in the Web Config file.
To enable this option, contact AccessData’s support.
Also for examining network acquisition and volatile data, you need to generate a text file of your IP
locations and place the text file in the GeoData directory. For more information, contact AccessData’s
support.
Configuring the Geolocation Location Configuration File

When using AD Forensics products, and when working with network acquisition and volatile data, some data
may come from a private network where the physical location of the IP address is not known. For example, you
may need to provide the location of your own network and any satellite offices that you interact with.
Normally you would start with block of IPs in your local network.
Using Visualization Geolocation Using Geolocation Visualization with Forensics Products to View Security Data | 486
To set this information, you need to populate a configuration file for the KFF server.
The filename is iplocations.txt.
Geolocation Configuration Page Options

The table below lists the various Geolocation Configuration Page options.
Geolocation Configuration Page Options
Option Description
Ip Address The IP address. The IP addresses must be written in CIDR format and need to
be IPv4 addresses.
ID
Country Code The two letter country code for a country, such as HK for Hong Kong or US for
the United States.
Country Code 3 The three letter country code for a country, such as RUS for Russia or DEU for
Germany.
Country The full country name, such as United States or Argentina.
Region The state or province of the geolocation data, such as NY for New York or ON for
Ontario.
City The city of the geolocation data, such as Beijing or San Francisco.
Postal Code The postal code or zip code of the geolocation data.
Latitude The latitude of the geolocation data.
Longitude The longitude of the geolocation data.
Metro Code The metro code of the geolocation data.
Area Code The area code of the geolocation data.
Continent Code The continent code of the geolocation data. For example, NA for North America
and AS for Asia.
Source The source of the geolocation information. This field is optional.
Configuring the Location Configuration File Manually

You can manually create and edit the iplocations.txt text file for the KFF server. It has the following requirements:
The text file needs to be saved with the filename iplocations.txt.

The IP addresses must be written in CIDR format and need to be IPv4 addresses.
Each comment line in the file must start with the character #. List only one address/network per line.
The network line must contain the following information in the following order: address (in CIDR format),
Id, CountryCode, CountryCode3, CountryName, Region, City, PostalCode, Latitude, Longitude,
MetroCode, AreaCode, ContinentCode, Source.
The iplocations.txt file must be placed in the Geodata folder of the kffdata folder on the server.
The following is an example of an iplocations.txt file:

#this file goes in the <kffdata>\GeoData directory
#address (in cidr
form),Id,CountryCode,CountryCode3,CountryName,Region,City,PostalCode,Latitude,Longitud
e,MetroCode,AreaCode,ContinentCode,Source
#192.168.0.0/24,1,,USA,United States,Utah,Taylorsville,84129,40.6677,-111.9388,,801,,
#10.10.200.252/30,1,,USA,United States,Utah,Orem,84042,40.2969,-111.6946,,801,NA,
#10.10.200.48/32,1,,USA,United States,Utah,Orem,84042,40.2969,-111.6946,,801,NA,
10.10.200.0/24,1,,USA,United States,Utah,Orem,84042,40.2969,-111.6946,,801,NA,
Viewing Geolocation IP Locations Data

To view IP location data in FTK
2. Click the Volatile tab.
3. In the Volatile tab, click (Geolocation).

Using the Geolocation Network Information Grid

When viewing network acquisition and volatile data connection information, you can now view a grid that
Process Start Time
Machine
User Name
Process Name
Path
Host Name
IP Address
Coordinates
Ports
You can show the communication between multiple pins.
Chapter 35
Customizing the Examiner Interface
About Customizing the Examiner User Interface (page 489)

The Tab Layout Menu (page 490)
Moving View Panels (page 491)
Creating Custom Tabs (page 493)
Managing Columns (page 494)
Customizing File List Columns (page 494)
Creating User-Defined Custom Columns for the File List view (page 495)
Deleting Custom Columns (page 497)
Navigating the Available Column Groups (page 497)
About Customizing the Examiner User Interface

You can use the View menu to control the pane views displayed in each tab. There are several tabs by default,
but you can create an interface view that best suits your needs.
Add or remove panes from the current tab using the View menu. Click View and click the unchecked pane to add
it to the current view, or click a checked item on the list to remove that pane from the current view.
To save the new arrangement

Click View > Tab Layout > Save.
The View menu lets you do the following:
Refresh the current view’s data.

View the Filter Bar
Display the Time Zone for the evidence.
Choose the display size for graphic thumbnails.
Manage Tabs.
Select Trees and viewing panes to include in various tabs.
Open the Progress Window.
Customizing the Examiner Interface About Customizing the Examiner User Interface | 489
The Tab Layout Menu
Use the options in the Tab Layout menu to save changes to tabs, restore original settings, and lock settings to
prevent changes.
The following table describes the options in the Tab Layout menu.
Tab Layout Menu Options
Option Description
Save Saves the changes made to the current tab.
Restore Restores the Examiner window to the settings from the last saved layout. Custom
settings can be restored.
Reset to Default Sets the window to the setting that came with the program. Custom settings will be lost.
Remove Removes the selected tab from the window.
Save All Layouts Saves the changes made to all tabs.
Lock Panes Locks the panes in place so that they cannot be moved until they are unlocked.
Add New Tab Adds a new tab to the window. The new tab will be like the one selected when this
Layout option is used. Customize the tab as needed and save it for future use.
Customizing the Examiner Interface The Tab Layout Menu | 490

Moving View Panels
Move view panes on the interface by placing the cursor on the title of the pane, clicking, dragging, and dropping
the pane on the location desired. Holding down the mouse button undocks the pane. Use the guide icons to dock
the pane in a pre-set location. The pane can be moved outside of the interface frame.
Moving View Panels
To place the view panel at a specific location on the application

1. Place the mouse (while dragging a view pane) onto a docking icon. The icon changes color.
2. Release the mouse button and the panel seats in its new position.
The following table indicates the docking options available:
Docking Icons
Docking
Icon Description
Docks the view panel to the top half of the tab.
Docks the view panel to the right half of the tab.
Docks the view panel to the left half of the tab.
Customizing the Examiner Interface Moving View Panels | 491

Docking Icons (Continued)
Docking
Icon Description
Docks the view panel to the bottom half of the tab.
Docks the view panel to the top, right, left, bottom, or center of the pane. When docked to
the center, the new pane overlaps the original pane, and both are indicated by tabs on the
perimeter of the pane.
Docks the view panel to the top, right, left, or bottom of the tree pane. The tree panes cannot
be overlapped.
Locks the panels in place, making them immovable. When the lock is applied, the blue box
turns grey. This button is found on the toolbar.
Customizing the Examiner Interface Moving View Panels | 492

Creating Custom Tabs
Create a custom tab to specialize an aspect of an investigation, add desired features, and apply filters as
needed to accommodate conditions specific to a case.
To create a custom tab

1. Click on the tab that is most like the tab you want to create.
2. Click View > Tab Layout > Add New Tab Layout.
3. Enter a name for the new tab and click OK. The resulting tab is a copy of the tab you were on when you
created the new one.
4. From the View menu, select the features you need in your new tab.
Note: Features marked with diamonds are mutually exclusive; only one can exist on a tab at a time.
Features with check marks can coexist in more than one instance on a tab.
5. Choose from the following:

Click Save to save this new tab’s settings
Click View > Tab Layout > Save.
Click View > Tab Layout > Save All to save all changes and added features on all tabs.
To remove tabs
1. Highlight the tab to be removed
2. Click View > Tab Layout > Remove.
Customizing the Examiner Interface Creating Custom Tabs | 493

Managing Columns
Shared Columns use the same familiar windows and dialogs that Local Columns use.
To create a Shared Column Template

1. In Case Manager, click Manage > Columns.
The Manage Shared Column Settings dialog opens.
2. Highlight a default Column Template to use as a basis for a Custom Column Template.
3. Click New.
4. Enter a new name in the Column Template Name field.
5. Select the Columns to add from the Available Columns pane, and click Add >> to move them to the
Selected Columns pane.
6. Select from the Selected Columns pane and click Remove to clear an unwanted column from the
Selected Columns.
7. When you have the new column template defined, click OK.
Customizing File List Columns

The Column Settings dialog box allows the modification or creation of new definitions for the file properties and
related information that display in the File List, and in what order. Columns display specific information about, or
properties of, the displayed files.
Column settings are also used to define which file information appears in case reports. Use custom column
settings in defining reports to narrow the File List Properties information provided in the Bookmark and File List
sections.
Additional states have been added to keep track of users’ Label selections. For example, if the user has already
checked a Label name, that filename and path will turn red, and it remains red as long as it remains different
from the original status. Clicking it again will cycle it back to its original status and its color will return to black.
Note: Checking the Label name before choosing Apply Labels To, unchecks the Label name. Choose Apply
Labels To first, then check or select the files to apply the Label to.
Column Settings can be customized and shared.
To define or customize Column Settings

1. From the File List, click Column Settings to open the Manage Column Settings dialog.
From the Manage Column Settings dialog you can do any of the following tasks:
Button Action
New Create a new column template. This option opens a blank template you can use to
create a new template from scratch.
Edit Edit existing custom column templates. Use this option to make changes to an
existing custom column template. You cannot edit default templates.
Customizing the Examiner Interface Managing Columns | 494

Button Action
Copy Copy existing default or custom column templates. Start with the settings in an
Selected existing template to customize it to your exact needs without starting from scratch.
Delete Delete existing custom column templates. You cannot delete default templates
Import Import custom column templates XML files from other cases. Use Import to utilize
a template from another source or that was created after you created your case.
Export Export custom column templates to XML files for others to use. Export a custom
column to use in another system.
Make Shared Case Administrators can Share custom column templates to the database so they
are available to all new cases. Once custom columns are Shared, the Application
Administrator manages them. However, the original remains in the case so the
Case Administrator has full control of it. Case Reviewers do not have sufficient
permissions to create custom column templates.
Apply Apply the selected column template
2. To define column settings using a new or copied template, click New, Edit, or Copy Selected to open
the familiar Column Settings dialog.
3. In the Column Template Name field, type a name for the template.
4. In the Available Columns list, select a category from which you want to utilize a column heading.
You can add the entire contents of a category or expand the category to select individual headings.
You can move any item in the list up or down to position that column in the File List view. The top
position is the first column from left to right.
5. When you are finished defining the column setting template, click OK to save the template and return to
the Manage Column Settings dialog.
6. Highlight the template you just defined, and click Apply to apply those settings to the current File List
view.
Creating User-Defined Custom Columns for the File List view

You can define your own custom columns for use in the File List view. You must first export a file list to a TSV or
a CSV file from a case, then populate the spreadsheet with custom column names and your own data as it
relates to items that are listed by the ObjectID. To add the resulting custom columns to the File List view, you
simply import the TSV or CSV file that you created, add the custom columns to the template, and apply the
template.
If you import a custom column sheet that contains a column that you do not want to import, but you do not want
to delete the column, you can type IGNORE in the first row of the column.
Files saved as TSV or CSV are encoded UTF-8.
To define custom columns for the File List view

1. Open CCExample.CSV in a spreadsheet program. The default path to the file is
C:\Program Files\AccessData\Forensic Toolkit\[version_number]
Use this example file to help you create your own custom columns.

2. In the File List, select the files that you want to add to your custom columns settings template.
3. From the File List, click Export File List .

4. In the Save in text box, browse to and select the destination folder for the exported file.
5. In the File name text box, type the first name of the file, but do not specify the extension.
Note: You can overwrite user created column setting files by giving the column template the same
name as an existing user created template. Be sure you provide a file name that is unique if you
don’t want to overwrite the original or existing column template file.
6. In the Save As type text box, click the drop-down and choose CSV (Comma delimited) (*.CSV)
7. In the File List items to export group box, click All Highlighted.
8. Click Column Settings.
9. In the Column Settings dialog box, ensure that Item Number is in the Selected Columns list. If
desired, you can move it to the top of the list, or remove all other columns headings that are listed in the
Selected Columns list.
10. Click OK.
11. In the Choose Columns drop-down, select the Column Setting you just created or modified.
12. Click Save.
13. Open the CSV file that you just created with the Export File List.
14. Copy the item numbers in the Item Number column.
15. In the opened CCexample.CSV file, paste the item numbers in the OBJECTID column.
16. Edit the column headings the way you want them.
For example, the spreadsheet column, “MyCustomInt:INT” displays as the column heading
“MyCustomInt” in the File List view.
Edit “MyCustomInt” to be whatever you want:
The INT portion allows integer values in the column
MyCustomBool:BOOL column allows true or false values
CustomStr:STRING heading allows text values.
17. Save the CCExample.CSV file with a new name, and in a place where you have rights to save and
access the file as needed.
18. Close the FileList.CSV (or whatever name you gave the Export File List file.
19. On the Evidence menu, click Import Custom Column File.
20. Navigate to the CSV file that you just saved, then click Open.
21. In the “Custom column data imported” dialog box, click OK.
22. On the Manage menu, click Column > Manage Columns, or click Column Settings on the File List
toolbar.
23. Choose a column template to copy, or create a new one.
24. Add the custom column headings to a new or existing template.
25. In the Column Settings dialog box, click OK.
26. In the Manage Column Settings dialog box, select the template that contains the custom headings, and
then click Apply.

Deleting Custom Columns
You can remove and delete custom columns that you have added to any column templates. You can delete
custom columns even if the File List view is turned off.
Note: The data is not deleted; only the custom columns that allowed you to see that specific data are deleted.
To delete custom column data

1. On the Evidence menu, click Delete Custom Column Data.
2. Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
Navigating the Available Column Groups

The Column Settings dialog box groups column settings according to the following:
Available Column Groups

 Common Features  Custom Columns (When a custom col-
umn template has been created or
imported.)
 Disk Image Features  Email Features
 Entropy Stats  File Status Features
 File System Features  Mobile Phones (When an MPE AD1 or
other cell phone image has been pro-
cessed.)
 ZIP-specific Features  Office-specific Features
 Cerberus Static Analysis Features  Microsoft IIS Internet Server
 Log2t  Internet Data
 Geolocation  All Features
Within each grouping, you can choose from a list of various column headings that you want to add. You can also
delete selected columns or arrange them in the order you want them to appear in the File List view.
To view the name, short name, and description of each available column
1. On the Manage menu, click Columns > Managed Shared Columns.
Select a category.
Open a category and select an individual column setting name.
3. Do either of the following:
Click Add >> to move your selection to the Selected Columns list.
Double-click your selection to add it to the Selected Columns list.
4. Do either of the following.
Use standard Windows column sizing methods to resize the column margins, thereby allowing you to
read each description.
 Click anywhere in the Select Columns list box, and then hover over a column description to see the
entire description.
5. Click OK.

Note: The following information may be useful when navigating or viewing Available Columns and Groups.
When you view data in the File List view, use the type-down control feature to locate the information you
are looking for. Sort on the Filename column, then select the first item in the list.
Type the first letter of the filename you are searching for. As you continue to type, next filename that
matches the letters you have typed will be highlighted in the list.
If at some point you see the file you are looking for displayed in the list, simply click on it. You may type
the entire file name for the exact name to be fully highlighted in the list.
A new column has been added, “Included by Filters” within the All Features group. This column tells you
which filter caused a file to display in the File List pane. The Included by Filters column is not sortable.
In the past, the “Processed” column was able to display only two states, Yes, and No. It has been
changed to display different states, such as the following:
P = Default (may be a null value)
C = Complete
Note: M = User’s manually carved items

Chapter 36
Working with Evidence Reports
You can create a case report about the relevant information of a case any time during or after the investigation
and analysis of a case. Reports can be generated in different formats, including HTML and PDF. The PDF report
is designed specifically for printing hard copies with preserved formatting and correct organization. The HTML
report is better for electronic distribution.
Creating a Case Report (page 500)

Adding Case Information to a Report (page 501)
Adding Bookmarks to a Report (page 502)
Adding Graphics Thumbnails and Files to a Report (page 504)
Adding a File Path List to a Report (page 506)
Adding a File Properties List to a Report (page 507)
Adding Registry Selections to a Report (page 508)
Adding Screen Captures from Examiner (page 509)
Selecting the Report Output Options (page 510)
Creating a Load File (page 511)
Viewing and Distributing a Report (page 514)
Modifying a Report (page 515)
Exporting and Importing Report Settings (page 515)
Writing a Report to CD or DVD (page 516)
Working with Evidence Reports | 499

Creating a Case Report
You can use the Report Wizard to create a report. The the settings that you specify in the Report Wizard are
persistent, and remain until they are changed by the user. You do not need to click OK until all the report creation
information is entered or selected. If you inadvertently close the Report Wizard, you can re-open it by clicking
File > Report.
To Create a Case Report

1. In the Examiner, click File > Report to run the Report Wizard.
2. Define your requirements for the following:
Option Description
Case Information See Adding Case Information to a Report (page 501)
Bookmarks See Adding Bookmarks to a Report (page 502)
Graphics See Adding Graphics Thumbnails and Files to a Report (page 504)
Videos See Adding a Video to a Report (page 505)
File Path List See Adding a File Path List to a Report (page 506)
File Properties See Adding a File Properties List to a Report (page 507)
ListSee
Registry See Adding Registry Selections to a Report (page 508)

Selections
3. When you have completed defining the report, click OK to open the Report Output options dialog.
See Selecting the Report Output Options (page 510)
Working with Evidence Reports Creating a Case Report | 500

Adding Case Information to a Report
The Case Information dialog lets you add basic case information to a report, such as the investigator and the
organization that analyzed the case.
For information about other items you can define for a report, See Creating a Case Report (page 500).
To Add Case Information to a Report

2. In the left pane, under Report Outline, highlight Case Information to display the Case Information
options in the right pane.
You can select the Case Information check box to include a case information section in the report. You
can deselect the Case Information check box to exclude a case information section from the report.
3. In the Default Entries pane, deselect any entries that you do not want to include in the report.
If you inadvertently remove a default entry that you require, close and reopen the case to have the
default entries displayed again.
4. Double-click the Value field to enter information.
5. Add and remove entries with the Add and Remove buttons under the Default Entries section.
6. Provide a label (Name) and a value (Information) for the included entries.
7. (Optional) Select the Include File Extensions option to include a file extensions list and count in the
File Overview portion of the report.
The list of file extensions appears in the report under Case Information, after File Items and File
Category, and before File Status. The File Extensions List can be very long and may span many pages.
If you intend to print the report, this may not be desirable.
Working with Evidence Reports Adding Case Information to a Report | 501

Adding Bookmarks to a Report
The Bookmarks dialog lets you create a section in the report that lists the bookmarks that were created during
the case investigation. Each bookmark can have a unique sorting option and a unique column setting.
To add Bookmarks to a Report

2. In the left pane, under Report Outline, highlight Bookmarks to display the Bookmarks options in the
right pane.
You can select the Bookmarks check box to include bookmarks in the report. You can deselect the
Bookmarks check box to exclude bookmarks from the report.
3. In the right pane, click Filter to open the filters list.
4. Select one the filters from the list. The empty line at the top of the list lets you apply no filter to the
bookmarks.
5. Select the options to indicate which bookmarks you want to include. Choose Shared and/or User
bookmarks by group, or individually.
6. For each bookmark you choose to include, you can choose options from the Bookmark section on the
right. Options include:
Include email attachments
 Thissetting applies to all email children, not only common attachments.
 Selecting this setting activates the Export Options button.
Export files & include links

 Selecting this setting activates the Export Options button.
Export Cerberus analysis html files

Include thumbnail for each object
7. Choose a Thumbnail Arrangement option for each bookmark or bookmark group as follows:
Number of thumbnails per row
Include all thumbnails at end of each bookmark section
Group all file paths at the end of thumbnails
8. Specify if you want to export the bookmarked files and include links to them in the report when it is
generated.
9. Specify if you want to include graphic and video thumbnails that may be part of any bookmarks. If you
want to create links to original files in the report, choose both to export the original files and to include
graphic and video thumbnails when the report is generated.
10. In the Report Options dialog, click Bookmarks.
11. Click Sort Options and do the following:
Click the plus (+) to add a criterion, or click minus (-) to delete a criterion.
Click the down arrow button on the right side of each line to open the drop down of available sort
columns.
Click OK to save the selected Sort Options and close the dialog.
Note: The sort options you see are determined by the Columns Template you have selected
For more information on customizing columns, see Customizing File List Columns (page 494).
Working with Evidence Reports Adding Bookmarks to a Report | 502

12. Specify if you want to apply all settings for this bookmark to child files.
Bookmark Export Options

The Bookmark Export Options dialog contains the following three options:
Link to exported email attachments and filter out attachments in bookmark

When selected, this option creates links to exported email attachments and filters out the attachments
in the bookmark.
Include re-constructed web pages
When selected, this option exports all of the files necessary to view re-constructed web pages. The
files are stored in the Report_Files folder in a sub folder called reconstructedpage.
Export selections as their own file
When selected, this option saves each bookmark selection as an individual file.
Working with Evidence Reports Adding Bookmarks to a Report | 503

Adding Graphics Thumbnails and Files to a Report
The Graphics section in the Report Options dialog lets you define whether-or-not to create a section in the report
that displays thumbnail images of the case graphics. You can also link the thumbnails to a full sized version of
the original graphics if desired.
To add graphics thumbnails and files to a report

2. In the left pane, under Report Outline, highlight Graphics to display the Graphics options in the right
pane.
You can select the Graphics check box to include graphics in the report. You can deselect the
Graphics check box to exclude graphics from the report.
3. To apply a filter to any included graphics files in a report, click Filter and select a filter to apply to the
graphics.
4. To export and link full-sized graphics in the report, click the Export and link full-size graphics to
thumbnails option.
5. Select one of the following options
Include checked graphics only
Include all graphics in the case
6. To sort the graphics by name or by path, click Sort Options. In the Sort Options dialog, use the Plus (+)
and Minus (-) buttons to add and remove sort options. Click the drop-down arrow on the right side of the
line to select either Name or Path.
7. Specify the number of graphics thumbnails to display per row and choose whether-or-not to Group all
filenames at end of report.
Working with Evidence Reports Adding Graphics Thumbnails and Files to a Report | 504
Adding a Video to a Report
The Video section in the Report Options dialog lets you define lets you define whether-or-not to create a section
in the report that displays the thumbnail images and/or the rendered MP4 files of the case videos. You can also
choose to include a link to the original full sized version of the video. These thumbnails and MP4 videos are
created during evidence processing or during additional analysis.
See Generating Thumbnails for Video Files (page 334).
See Creating Common Video Files (page 335).
To add video thumbnails and files to a report

2. In the left pane, under Report Outline, highlight Videos to display the Video options in the right pane.
You can select the Videos check box to include videos in the report. You can deselect the Videos check
box to exclude videos from the report.
3. To apply a filter to any included video files in a report, click Filter and select a filter to apply to the
videos.
4. To export and link the original videos in the report, click the Export and link original videos option.
5. To include a link to the rendered MP4 videos that were created during evidence processing or during
additional analysis, check Export rendered videos.
6. To include the thumbnails of the videos in the report that were created during evidence processing or
during additional analysis, check Export rendered thumbnails.
7. Select one of the following options
Include checked videos only
Include all videos in the case
8. To sort the videos by name or by path, click Sort Options. In the Sort Options dialog, use the Plus (+)
and Minus (-) buttons to add and remove sort options. Click the drop-down arrow on the right side of the
line to select either Name or Path.
9. Specify the number of video thumbnails to display per row in the Rendered Thumbnail Arrangement
group box.
10. Click Columns. In the Manage Column Settings dialog, select the Settings Template to copy or edit.
For detailed information on creating and modifying Columns Templates, see Customizing File List
Columns (page 494).
Working with Evidence Reports Adding a Video to a Report | 505

Adding a File Path List to a Report
The File Paths dialog lets you create a section in the report that lists the file paths of files in selected categories.
The File Paths section displays the files and their file paths; it does not contain any additional information.
To add a File Path List to a Report

2. In the left pane, under Report Outline, highlight File Path to display the File Path options in the right
pane.
You can select the File Path check box to include a file path section in the report. You can deselect the
File Path check box to exclude a file path section from the report.
3. Select a filter from the Filter drop-down, to apply a filter to the items you want to include a file path list.
You can leave the filter option empty to not apply a filter.
4. Select from the Available Categories list to include the category or categories in the report by dragging
the category to the Selected Categories list.
5. To also export and link to the selected files in the File Path list, select the check-boxes box next to the
items in the Selected Categories box.
If you do not select a check-box Selected Categories list, the File Path is included in the report, but the
files themselves are not exported and linked to the File Path in the report.
Working with Evidence Reports Adding a File Path List to a Report | 506
Adding a File Properties List to a Report
The File Properties dialog lets you create a section in the report that lists the file properties of files in selected
categories. Several options let you make the File Properties List in the report as specific or as general as you
want it to be.
To Add a File Properties List to a Report

In the left pane, under Report Outline, highlight File Properties to display the File Properties options in
the right pane.
You can select the File Properties check box to include a file properties section in the report. You can
deselect the File Properties check box to exclude a file properties section from the report.
2. Either click the Filter drop-down arrow and selecting the desired filter, or choose no filter by selecting
the blank entry at the top of the filter drop-down list.
3. Drag and drop the categories that you want to include from the Available Categories window into the
Selected Categories window.
4. Check a category in the Selected Categories window to export related files and link them to the File
Properties list in the report.
Checking an item automatically selects the files and folders under it. If you do not want to include all
sub-items, expand the list and select and deselect each item individually.
5. In the Report Options dialog, click File Properties.
6. In the File Properties options area, click Columns.
7. In the Manage Column Settings dialog, select the Settings Template to copy or edit.
For detailed information on creating and modifying Columns Templates, see Customizing File List
Columns (page 494).
8. When you are done defining the columns settings, click OK.
You might want to define how the data is sorted, according to column heading. In the File List view you
are limited to a primary and secondary search. In the Report wizard, you can define many levels of
sorting.
9. In the Report Options dialog, click File Properties.
10. In the File Properties options area, click Sort Options and do the following:
Click the plus (+) to add a criterion, or click minus (-) to delete a criterion.
Click the down arrow button on the right side of each line to open the drop down of available sort
columns.
Click OK to save the selected Sort Options and close the dialog.
Note: The sort options you see are determined by the Columns Template you have selected
For more information on customizing columns, see Customizing File List Columns (page 494).
Working with Evidence Reports Adding a File Properties List to a Report | 507
Adding Registry Selections to a Report
If your drive image contains Registry files, you can include them in your report.
When creating a Report that includes Registry files, a DAT extension is being added to the link. If the link does
not open in the report, it can be exported and opened in Notepad.
To Add Registry Selections to a Report

In the left pane, under Report Outline, highlight Registry Selections to display the registry selections
options in the right pane.
You can select the Registry Selections check box to include a Registry Selections section in the
report. You can deselect the Registry Selections check box to exclude a Registry Selections section
from the report.
2. In the Registry File Types window, check the file types for which you want to include headings for in your
report.
3. In the right window, check the registry file paths that you want included in your report.
4. Mark the box Include user generated reports (if any) if you have generated Registry Reports using
Registry Viewer, and you want to include them in this report.
Note: User-generated reports must exist in the case before generating the report, otherwise, this option
is disabled. These reports are generated in Registry Viewer and can be collected from the
Registry data found on the source drive.
5. Mark the box Select Auto Reports, to view and select which registry reports to include in the report
from those that were generated automatically based on the registry reports selection in Case Manager
> Case > New > Detailed Options > Evidence Refinement.
Note: If you did not select this option during pre-processing, this option is disabled in the Report
Options dialog.
Working with Evidence Reports Adding Registry Selections to a Report | 508

Adding Screen Captures from Examiner
You can now capture screen shots within the Examiner interface. You can include the screen captures when
creating reports. You can use screen captures to include information that is not easy to export or include in
reports, such as:
The contents of the Natural view (File Content pane)
The contents and information in the File List
The contents of visualization pages
These UI elements can include information that is useful as evidence, but there is no way to present it outside of
the UI.
When you create a screen capture, the following occurs:
The file is saved in the case folder under a Screenshots sub-folder. (Do not manually rename the
captured files, otherwise the Report dialog will not find them.)
The file is saved in the original size and in a smaller size that may be needed to fit in a report.
The name and description of the file is saved in the database so that they can be displayed in the Report
Options dialog.
To create a screen capture

1. In the Examiner, click the screen capture icon.
2. Click and drag the + cursor to select the area that you want to capture.
3. In the Screen Capture Info dialog, give the screen capture file a name.
4. Enter a description.
This is recorded with the filename in the database.
5. Click Save.
6. To cancel a screen capture, click Esc.
To include a screen capture in a report

2. In the Report Options, click Screen Capture.
3. Select the screen captures that you want to include in the report.
4. (Optional) You can edit the description of the files, but not the filename.
5. Configure the other options for the report.
When the report is created, the image files are copied to the report folder.
Working with Evidence Reports Adding Screen Captures from Examiner | 509
Selecting the Report Output Options
The Report Output dialog lets you select the location, language, report formats, and other details of the report.
You can also recreate the directory structure of exported items.
To select the report output options

1. When you have completed defining the report, from the Report Options dialog, click OK to open the
Report Output options dialog.
2. Type the destination folder name for the saved report, or use the Browse button to locate and select a
location.
3. Use the drop-down arrow to select the language for the written report. Available languages are as
follows:
Arabic (Saudi Arabia) Chinese (Simplified, PRC)

English (United States) German (Germany)
Japanese (Japan) Korean (Korea)
Portuguese (Brazil) Russian (Russia)
Spanish (Spain, Traditional Sort) Swedish (Sweden)
Turkish (Turkey)
4. Indicate the formats for publishing the report. You can choose any or all of the output formats.
To view a report made in any of the supported formats, you must have the appropriate application
installed on your computer. Options are as follows:
PDF (Adobe Reader) HTML (Windows Web Browser)

XML (Windows Web Browser) RTF (Rich Text Format: Most Text Editors)
WML (Unix Web Browser) DOCX (MS Office Word 2007)
ODT (Open Document Interchange: Sun Microsystems OpenOffice Documents)
Load File
Note: Some report output formats require J#, either 1.1 or 2.0. If you select RTF format, for example, and J# is
not installed, you will see an error.
5. Under Export Options do the following:

Check the Use object identification number for filename to shorten the paths to data in the report.
Links are still created for proper viewing of the files.
The unique File ID numbers, when used in a report, keep the pathnames shorter. This makes burning
the report to a CD or DVD more reliable.
Check the Append extension to filename if bad/absent box to add the correct extension where it is
not correct, or is missing.
Working with Evidence Reports Selecting the Report Output Options | 510
6. Under HTML Report Customization, choose from the following:
If you wish to use your own custom graphic or logo, mark the Use custom logo graphic box, then
browse to the file and select it. Use GIF, JPG, JPEG, PNG, or BMP file types.
Ifyou wish to use a custom CSS file, mark the Use custom CSS box. Select the folder where the
custom CSS files have been saved. Click OK. The folder you selected displays in the “Use Custom
CSS” text box.
7. Click OK to run the report.
If the report folder you selected is not empty, you will see the following error message:
Choose to Delete or Archive the contents of the folder, or to Cancel the report. Delete the contents of
the current destination folder, or change to a different destination folder, then recreate the report or
import it if you saved it during creation.
Creating a Load File

It is possible to create a load file, which enables you to export data from an existing or new case and import it
into litigation document management applications such as AccessData Summation and eDiscovery.
To Create a Load File

2. In the left pane, under the Report Outline, select the check boxes for the options you would like to
include in your load file. Be sure to highlight each item selected and fill out the appropriate information.
You can add information to these areas using the methods described in the previous segments. When
finished, press OK.
3. In the Report Output dialog, enter the path to the Report Folder. This is where your report will be
located.
4. Select the appropriate Language and Time Zone.
5. Select the correct Export Option. Options include:
Use object identification number for filename
 This setting makes it so the object identification number used in the existing or new case is
also used as the filename in the load file.
Append extension to filename if bad/absent
 Selecting this setting will append the correct or assigned filename to a file if none is present or
if the current one is bad.
6. In the Formats area, check the box next to Load File and click the Options button.
7. In the Load File Export Options dialog, enter a Load File Name.
8. Select a Format for your load file. Options include:
Browser Briefcase
 This option generates an HTML format that provides links to the native documents, images,
and text files. You can have multiple links for image, native, and text documents. You can also
work with production sets exported previously in iBlaze Browser Briefcase format. This allows
you to have greater control over the production set.
CaseVantage
 Thisoption generates a DII file specifically formatted for use with the AD Summation
CaseVantage program.
Concordance
 This option generates a DAT file that can be used in Concordance.
EDRM
Working with Evidence Reports Creating a Load File | 511

 This option generates an XML file that meets the EDRM v1.2 standard.
Generic
 This option generates a standard delimited text file.
iCONECT
 This option generates an XML file formatted for use with the iConect program.
Introspect
 This option generates an IDX file specifically formatted for use with the Introspect program.
Relativity
 This option generates a DAT file that can be used in Relativity.
Ringtail (MDB)
 This option generates a delimited text file that can be converted to be used in Ringtail.
Summation eDII
 This option generates a DII file specifically formatted for use with the AD Summation iBlaze or
Enterprise programs.
Note: If you are outputting a Concordance, Relativity, or Generic load file, and include rendered images, you will
also get an OPT and LFP file in the export directory.
9. Choose an Encoding option for your load file from the following:
ANSI
UTF-8
UTF-16
10. If you are creating a Concordance, Generic, Introspect, or Relativity load file, you need to specify the
following options:
Choose whether to Include a Header Row by clicking on the checkbox.
Select the Multi-Entry Separator.
Select the Field Mapping.
Select the Text Identifier.
Select the Newline.
11. For the Browser Briefcase, CaseVantage, EDRM, iConect, Ringtail, or Summation eDII options, select
only the Multi-Entry Separator.
12. In the Available Fields pane, select the options you want to appear in your report. Highlight each field
you would like to include and click the >> button to move it to the Selected Fields pane. If you would
like to change the order of appearance for these items in the report, highlight the item you would like to
move in the Selected Fields pane and click on the Up or Down button until it is in the right place.
13. The Files To Include tab contains the following three options:
Export Native Files
When selected, this option allows you to export the emails contained in PST/NSF in one of three
different ways:
 OUtput a reduced version of the original PST/NSF file
 Output messages as individual HTML/RTF files
 Output messages as individual MSG files
Export Rendered Images

When selected, this option allows you to select how rendered images appear in the load file. You can
export using one or both of the following options:
 Use existing image
Working with Evidence Reports Creating a Load File | 512

 Use SWF image
You can also select the File Format and Page Size for displaying these images.
Export Text
When selected, this option allows you to choose the Export Priority from the following options:
 Export extracted text over OCR text
 Export OCR text over extracted text
 Export both extracted text and OCR text
14. When finished selecting these options, click OK in both the Load File Export Options and Report Output
dialogs.
15. The progress of load file generation will appear in the Data Processing Status dialog. Once the load file
is generated, you can find it in the folder entered in Step 3. This folder will contain the load file as well as
the original files for any items included in the report.
Note: Best results occur when you select the Summation defaults and the Enable Standard Viewing feature
during processing when creating the case.
Customizing the Report Graphic

When you select HTML as an output format, you can add your own graphic or logo to the report.
To add your own graphic or logo

1. In the Examiner, click File > Report to open the Report wizard.
2. From the Report Options dialog, after you are done making selections for the Report Outline, click OK.
3. In the Report Output dialog, under Formats, mark HTML. This activates the HTML Report
Customization options.
4. Under HTML Report Customization, mark Use custom logo graphic.
5. Click the Browse button to open the Windows Explorer view and browse to the graphic file to use for
the report. The file format can be JIF, JPG, JPEG, PNG, or BMP.
6. Click Open.
7. When all Report options have been selected, click OK.
The progress bar dialog indicates the progress of the report.
Note: When selected, the finished HTML and/or PDF reports open automatically.
You can process only one set of reports at a time. If you select the options to create several different
report formats before clicking OK to generate the report, all will process concurrently. However, if you
start that process and then decide to create a new report, you will not be able to until the current report
is finished generating.
If you start another report too soon, you will be prompted to wait, if you chose to create either HTML or
PDF format for the report, it will automatically open when creation is complete. Otherwise, to view the
report, click Yes when prompted.
Working with Evidence Reports Customizing the Report Graphic | 513

Using Cascading Style Sheets
The formatting of reports can be customized with Cascading Style Sheets (CSS). Reports stores a file path you
select (default or custom) to the folder containing the custom CSS files. When CSS is not selected, Reports use
the default settings.
For reports to utilize the cascading style sheets, three CSS files are necessary, and must all be located in the
specified CSS folder:
Common.CSS
Bookmarks.CSS
Navigation.CSS
The original CSS files are found in the following path if no changes were made to the default:
C:\Program Files\AccessData\Forensic Toolkit\<version>\bin\ReportResources

Copy the *CSS files to a different directory before making changes to any of these files. Do not make changes to
the original files.
To utilize the customized CSS files, click Use custom CSS, and select the path to the folder where the
customized CSS files are stored.
When CSS is selected, Reports checks for those files in the specified directory. If any of the three files is missing
you are notified and the report does not proceed.
Note: The UI option consists of a check box and a text path string. The path string points to the path directory
that contains the three needed CSS files.
Note: The UI options settings are persistent per Windows login user. Thus, your selections will be persistent
across the Case List for the currently authenticated user.
Important: In versions, the cascading style sheets have been updated for a better user experience. Updates
include persistent highlighting on the navigation tree (so examiners know which item they are
viewing) and better organization of data within the report.
However, if you have created personalized templates in previous versions, you will need to re-create
them for 5.1.
Viewing and Distributing a Report

The report contains the information that you selected in the Report Wizard. When included in the report, files
appear in both raw data and in the report format.
To view the report outside of Examiner

1. Browse to the report file
2. Click on the report file:
Click on index.htm to open an HTML document in your Web browser.
Click on the file [report].PDF to open the report in a PDF viewer.
Working with Evidence Reports Viewing and Distributing a Report | 514

Modifying a Report
Modify the report by changing the report settings, and recreating it. Add the new evidence or change report
settings to modify the report to meet your needs.
Change the report settings for each report as needed.
All previously distributed reports should be retracted to keep all recipients current.
Note: If you want to keep a previous report, save the new report to a different folder that is empty.
Exporting and Importing Report Settings

Report settings are automatically saved whenever you generate a report. You can export the settings that you
used as an XML file. You can then later import and reapply those same settings to use with new reports that you
generate.
To export report settings

2. In the Report Options dialog box, click Export.
3. In the Export Sections dialog, select the sections that you want to export.
4. Click OK.
5. Click Browse to select a folder to save the settings.
6. You can accept the default name for the report settings file, or you can type a name for the settings file.
An XML extension is automatically added when the report is created.
7. Click Save for each item you have selected in the Report Outline list.
8. Click OK.
To import saved settings for a new report

2. In the Report Options dialog, click Import.
3. Browse to a settings XML file that you want to apply, and select it.
4. Click Open to import and apply the settings file to your current report.
Working with Evidence Reports Modifying a Report | 515

Writing a Report to CD or DVD
You can write a report to a CD or DVD, depending on the report’s size. It is recommended that you select Use
object identification number for filename, in the Report Output options dialog. This option keeps paths
shorter, so they do not exceed the limits of the media format.
After you create the report, write only the contents from the root of the report folder, and not the report folder
itself. The autorun automatically launches the report’s main page (index.htm) using the default browser when the
CD is read on a Windows computer.
Note: The following information pertains to burning reports to a CD or DVD.
When burning some reports to a CD, some Registry Viewer Auto Reports links may be broken, where
they work when viewing on the computer. To avoid this issue, make sure that longer Joliet filenames are
enabled when burning report to a CD.
To launch the report, the computer must be configured to automatically execute autorun files.
If you burn the folder that contains the report to the CD or DVD, the autorun will not be at the root of the
disk, and will not work properly.
To prevent broken links to report files, use File Item numbers instead of names to keep paths short, and /
or use the Joliet file naming to allow longer file paths.
Working with Evidence Reports Writing a Report to CD or DVD | 516

Part 6
Reference
This part contains additional reference information and contains the following appendices
Working with Windows Registry Evidence (page 518)
Supported File Systems and Drive Image Formats (page 527)
Recovering Deleted Material (page 530)
Managing Security Devices and Licenses (page 532)
Configuring a Multi-box Setup (page 551)
AccessData Distributed Processing (page 554)
Reference | 517
Chapter 37
Working with Windows Registry Evidence
This appendix contains information about the Windows Registry and what information can be gathered from it for
evidence. It includes the following topics:
Understanding the Windows Registry (page 518)

Windows XP Registry Quick Find Chart (page 523)
Understanding the Windows Registry

For forensic work, registry files are particularly useful because they can contain important information such as
the following:
Usernames and passwords for programs, email, and Internet sites

A history of Internet sites accessed, including dates and times
A record of Internet queries (i.e., searches performed on Internet search engines like Google, Yahoo,
etc.)
Lists of recently accessed files (e.g., documents, images, etc.)
A list of all programs installed on the system
AccessData Registry Viewer allows you to view the contents of Windows operating system registries. Unlike the
standard Windows Registry Editor, which only displays the current system’s registry, Registry Viewer lets you
examine registry files from any Windows system or user. Registry Viewer also provides access to a registry’s
protected storage, which contains passwords, usernames, and other information not accessible from within
Windows Registry Editor.
The files that make up the registry differ depending on the version of Windows. The tables below list the registry
files for each version of Windows, along with their locations and the information they contain.
Working with Windows Registry Evidence Understanding the Windows Registry | 518
Windows 9x Registry Files
The following table describes each item on the Windows 9x registry files.
Windows 9x Registry Files
Filename Location Contents

system.dat \Windows  Protected storage for all users on the system. Protected Storage is an
access-restricted area of the registry that stores confidential user infor-
mation including usernames and passwords for Internet web sites, email
Internet passwords for Microsoft Outlook or Outlook Express, and a
record of queries (i.e., searches performed on Internet search engines
like Google, Yahoo, etc.), including the time and date when they were
performed.
 Lists installed programs, their settings, and any usernames and pass-
words associated with them.
 Contains the System settings.
user.dat \Windows  MRU (Most Recently Used) list of files. MRU Lists maintain
a list of files so users can quickly re-access files. Registry
If there are multiple user Viewer allows you to examine these lists to see what files
accounts on the system, have been recently used and where they are located. Regis-
each user has a user.dat file try Viewer lists each program’s MRU files in order from most
located in recently accessed to least recently accessed.
\Windows\profiles\user  User preference settings (desktop configuration, etc.).
account
Windows NT and Windows 2000 Registry Files

The following table describes each item in the Windows NT and Windows 2000 registry files.
Windows NT and Windows 2000 Registry Files

NTUSER.DAT \Documents and  Protected storage for all users on the system. Protected Storage is an
Settings\[user account] access-restricted area of the registry that stores confidential user infor-
If there are multiple user
passwords for Microsoft Outlook or Outlook Express, and a record of
accounts on the system,
Internet queries (i.e., searches performed on Internet search engines like
each user has an ntuser.dat Google, Yahoo, etc.), including the time and date when they were per-
file. formed.
 All installed programs, their settings, and any usernames and passwords
associated with them.
 User preference settings (desktop configuration, etc.).
default \Winnt\system32\config System settings.
SAM \Winnt\system32\config User account management and security settings.
SECURITY \Winnt\system32\config Security settings.
software \Winnt\system32\config All installed programs, their settings, and any usernames and
passwords associated with them.
system \Winnt\system32\config System settings.
Windows XP Registry Files
The following table describes each item in the Windows XP registry files.
Windows XP Registry Files

NTUSER.DAT \Documents and  Protected storage for all users on the system. Protected Storage is an
Settings\[user account] access-restricted area of the registry that stores confidential user infor-
If there are multiple user
passwords for Microsoft Outlook or Outlook Express, and a record of
accounts on the system,
Internet queries (i.e., searches performed on Internet search engines like
each user has an ntuser.dat Google, Yahoo, etc.), including the time and date when they were per-
file. formed.
 All installed programs, their settings, and any usernames and passwords
associated with them.
 User preference settings (desktop configuration, etc.)
default \Winnt\system32\config System settings.
SAM \Winnt\system32\config User account management and security settings.
SECURITY \Winnt\system32\config Security settings.
software \Winnt\system32\config All installed programs, their settings, and any usernames and
passwords associated with them.
system \Winnt\system32\config System settings.
The logical registry is organized into the following tree structure:
The top level of the tree is divided into hives. A hive is a discrete body of keys, subkeys, and values that is rooted
at the top of the registry hierarchy. On Windows XP systems, the registry hives are as follows:
HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT (HKCR)
HKEY_CURRENT_USER (HKCU)
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE (HKLM)
HKEY_USERS (HKU)
HKEY_CURRENT_CONFIG (HKCC)
HKEY_DYN_DATA (HKDD)
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE and HKEY_USERS are the root hives. They contain information that is used to
create the HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT, HKEY_CURRENT_USER, and HKEY_CURRENT_CONFIG hives.
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE is generated at startup from the system.dat file and contains all the configuration
information for the local machine. For example, it might have one configuration if the computer is docked, and
another if the computer is not docked. Based on the computer state at startup, the information in
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE is used to generate HKEY_CURRENT_CONFIG and HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT.
HKEY_USERS is generated at startup from the system User.dat files and contains information for every user on
the system.
Based on who logs in to the system, the information in HKEY_USERS is used to generate
HKEY_CURRENT_USER, HKEY_CURRENT_CONFIG, and HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT.
Keys and sub-keys are used to divide the registry tree into logical units off the root.
When you select a key, Registry Editor displays the key’s values; that is, the information associated with that
key. Each value has a name and a data type, followed by a representation of the value’s data. The data type tells
you what kind of data the value contains as well as how it is represented. For example, values of the
REG_BINARY type contain raw binary data and are displayed in hexadecimal format.
Possible Data Types

The following table lists the Registry’s possible data types.
Registry Data Types
Data Type Name Description

REG_BINARY Binary Value Raw binary data. Most hardware component information is stored as
binary data and is displayed in hexadecimal format.
REG_DWORD DWORD Value Data represented by a number that is 4 bytes long (a 32-bit integer).
Many parameters for device drivers and services are this type and are
displayed in binary, hexadecimal, or decimal format. Related values are
REG_DWORD_LITTLE_ENDIAN (least significant byte is at the lowest
address) and REG_DWORD_BIG_ENDIAN (least significant byte is at the
highest address).
REG_EXPAND_SZ Expandable A variable-length data string. This data type includes variables that are
String Value resolved when a program or service uses the data.
REG_MULTI_SZ Multi-String A multiple string. Values that contain lists or multiple values in a format
Value that people can read are usually this type. Entries are separated by
spaces, commas, or other marks.
REG_SZ String Value A text string of any length.
REG_RESOURCE_LI Binary Value A series of nested arrays designed to store a resource list used by a
ST hardware device driver or one of the physical devices it controls. This
data is detected by the system and is displayed in hexadecimal format
as a Binary Value.
REG_RESOURCE_ Binary Value A series of nested arrays designed to store a device driver’s list of
REQUIREMENTS_LIS possible hardware resources that it, or one of the physical devices it
T controls, can use. This data is detected by the system and is displayed
in hexadecimal format as a Binary Value.
REG_FULL_RESOUR Binary Value A series of nested arrays deigned to store a resource list used by a
CE_ physical hardware device. This data is displayed in hexadecimal format
DESCRIPTOR as a Binary Value.
REG_NONE None Data with no particular type. This data is written to the registry by the
system or applications and is displayed in hexadecimal format as a
Binary Value.
REG_LINK Link A Unicode string naming a symbolic link.
REG_QWORD QWORD Value Data represented by a number that is a 64-bit integer.
Additional Considerations
If there are multiple users on a single machine, you must be aware of the following issues when conducting a
forensic investigation:
If there are individual profiles for each user on the system, you need to locate the USER.DAT file for the
suspects.
If all the users on the system are using the same profile, everyone’s information is stored in the same
USER.DAT file. Therefore, you will have to find other corroborating evidence because you cannot
associate evidence in the USER.DAT file with a specific user profile.
On Windows 9x systems, the USER.DAT file for the default user is used to create the USER.DAT files for
new user profiles. Consequently, the USER.DAT files for new profiles can inherit a lot of junk.
To access the Windows registry from an image of the suspect’s drive, you can do any of the following:
Load the suspect’s drive image and export his or her registry files to view them in Registry Editor.
Mount a restored image as a drive, launch Registry Editor at the command line from your processing
machine, export the registry files from the restored image, then view them in a third-party tool.
Note: The problem with this method is that you can only view the registry as text. Registry Editor
displays everything in ASCII so you can’t see hex or binary values in the registry.
Use Registry Viewer. Registry Viewer integrates seamlessly with the Examiner to display registry files
within the image and create reports.
Important: Registry Viewer shows everything you normally see in live systems using the Windows Registry
Editor. However, unlike Registry Editor and other tools that use the Windows API, Registry Viewer
decrypts protected storage information so it displays values in the Protected Storage System Provider
key (PSSP). Registry Viewer also shows information that is normally hidden in null-terminated keys.
Seizing Windows Systems

Information stored in the registry— Internet Messenger sessions, Microsoft Office MRU lists, usernames and
passwords for internet Web sites accessed through Internet Explorer, and so forth—are temporarily stored in
HKEY_CURRENT_USER. When the user closes an application or logs out, the hive’s cached information is
pulled out of memory and written to the user’s corresponding USER.DAT.
Note: Passwords and MRU lists are not saved unless these options are enabled.
Important: Because normal seizure procedures require that there be no alteration of the suspect’s computer in
any way, you must be able to articulate why you closed any active applications before pulling the plug
on the suspect’s computer. Sometimes it is better to simply pull the plug on the computer; other times,
it makes more sense to image the computer in place while it is on. It may depend on what is the most
important type of data expected to be found on the computer.
For example, Windows updates some program information in the registry when the changes are
made. Other information is not updated until a program is closed. Also, if the computer’s drive is
encrypted and you cannot decrypt it or don’t have the Key or password, you may have no choice
except to image the live drive.
The Registry Quick Find Chart shown below gives more information.
Windows XP Registry Quick Find Chart
The following charts describe common locations where you can find data of forensic interest in the Windows
Registry.
System Information
Windows XP Registry System Information
Information File or Key Location Description

Registered Owner Software Microsoft\Windows NT\ This information is entered during
CurrentVersion installation, but can be modified later.
Registered Software Microsoft\Windows NT\ This information is entered during
Organization CurrentVersion installation, but can be modified later.
Run Software Microsoft\Windows\Current Programs that appear in this key run
Version\Run automatically when the system boots.
Logon Banner Software Microsoft\Windows\Current This is a banner that users must click
Message Version\Policies\System\Legal through to log on to a system.
NoticeText
Mounted Devices System MountedDevices Database of current and prior mounted
devices that received a drive letter.
Current Control Set System Select Identifies which control set is current.
Shutdown Time System ControlSetXXX\Control\Windows System shutdown time.
Event Logs System ControlSetXXX\Services\Eventlo Location of Event logs.
g
Dynamic Disk System ControlSetXXX\Services\DMIO\ Identifies the most recent dynamic disk
Boot Info\Primary Disk Group mounted in the system.
Pagefile System ControlSetXXX\Control\ Location, size, set to wipe, etc.
Session Manager\Memory
Management
Last User Logged In Software Microsoft\Windows NT\ Last user logged in - can be a local or
CurrentVersion\Winlogon domain account.
Product ID Software Microsoft\Windows NT\
CurrentVersion
O\S Version Software Microsoft\Windows NT\
CurrentVersion
Logon Banner Title Software Microsoft\Windows\Current User-defined data.
Version\Policies\System\Legal
NoticeCaption
Logon Banner Software Microsoft\Windows\Current User-defined data.
Message Version\Policies\System\Legal
NoticeCaption
Time Zone System ControlSet001(or002)\Control\ This information is entered during
TimeZoneInformation\Standard installation, but can be modified later.
Name
Working with Windows Registry Evidence Windows XP Registry Quick Find Chart | 523
Networking
Windows XP Registry Networking Information

Map Network Drive NTUSER.DA Software\Microsoft\Windows\ Most recently used list of mapped
MRU T CurrentVersion\Explorer\Map network drives.
Network Drive MRU
TCP\IP data System ControlSetXXX\Services\ Domain, hostname data.
TCPIP\Parameters
TCP\IP Settings of a System ControlSetXXX\Services\ IP address, gateway information.
Network Adapter adapter\Parameters\TCPIP
Default NTUSER.DA Software\Microsoft\Windows Current default printer.
Printer T NT\CurrentVersion\Windows
Default NTUSER.DA \printers Current default printer.
Printer T
Local Users SAM Domains\Account\Users\ Local account security identifiers.
Names
Local Groups SAM Domains\Builtin\Aliases\ Local account security identifiers.
Names
Profile list Software Microsoft\Windows NT\ Contains user security identifiers (only
CurrentVersion\ProfileList users with profile on the system).
Network Map NTUSER.DA Documents and Browser history and last-viewed lists
T Settings\username attributed to the user.
User Data
Windows XP Registry User Data

Run NTUSER.DAT Software\Microsoft\Windows\ Programs that appear in this key run
CurrentVersion\Run automatically when the user logs on.
Media Player NTUSER.DAT Software\Microsoft\Media This key contains the user's most
Recent List Player\Player\ RecentFileList recently used list for Windows Media
Player.
O\S Recent NTUSER.DAT Software\Microsoft\Windows\ MRU list pointing to shortcuts located in
Docs CurrentVersion\Explorer\ the recent directory.
RecentDocs
Run MRU NTUSER.DAT \Software\Microsoft\Windows\ MRU list of commands entered in the
CurrentVersion\Explorer\RunMR “run” box.
U
Open And Save As NTUSER.DAT \Software\Microsoft\Windows\ MRU lists of programs\files opened with
Dialog CurrentVersion\Explorer\ or saved with the “open” or “save as”
Boxes MRU ComDlg32 dialog boxes.
Current Theme NTUSER.DAT Software\Microsoft\Windows\ Desktop theme\wallpaper.
CurrentVersion\Themes
Windows XP Registry User Data (Continued)

Last Theme NTUSER.DAT Software\Microsoft\Windows\ Desktop theme\wallpaper.
CurrentVersion\Themes\Last
Theme
File Extensions\ NTUSER.DAT Software\Microsoft\Windows\ Identifies associated programs with file
Program CurrentVersion\Explorer\ extensions.
Association FileExts
User Application Data
Windows XP Registry User Application Data

Word User Info This information is entered during
Software\Microsoft\office\
NTUSER.DAT version\Common\UserInfo installation, but can be modified later.
Word Recent Docs Microsoft word recent documents.
NTUSER.DAT version\Common\Data
IE Typed URLs Data entered into the URL address bar.
Software\Microsoft\
NTUSER.DAT Explorer\TypedURLs
IE Auto- Complete Web page auto complete password-
\Software\Microsoft\Internet
Passwords NTUSER.DAT Internet Explorer\IntelliForms encrypted values.
IE Auto-Complete Lists Web pages where auto complete
\Software\Microsoft\Protected
Web Addresses NTUSER.DAT Storage System Provider was used.
IE Default Default download directory when
Software\Microsoft\Internet
Download Directory NTUSER.DAT Explorer utilizing Internet Explorer.
Outlook Temporary Location where attachments are stored
Attachment Software\Microsoft\office\ when opened from Outlook.
Directory NTUSER.DAT version\Outlook\Security
AIM IM contacts, file transfer information,
Software\America Online\AOL
Instant Messenger\ etc.
NTUSER.DAT CurrentVersion\Users\username
Word User Info This information is entered during
NTUSER.DAT version\Common\UserInfo installation, but can be modified later.
ICQ IM contacts, file transfer information,
NTUSER.DAT \Software\Mirabilis\ICQ\* etc.
MSN Messenger IM contacts, file transfer information,
Software\Microsoft\MSN
Messenger\ListCache\.NET etc.
NTUSER.DAT MessngerService\*
Kazaa Configuration, search, download, IM
NTUSER.DAT Software\Kazaa\* data, etc.
Yahoo IM contacts, file transfer information,
NTUSER.DAT Software\Yahoo\Pager\ Profiles\* etc.
Google Client
Software\Google\NavClient\
History NTUSER.DAT 1.1\History
Adobe Acrobat, Photo deluxe, etc.
NTUSER.DAT Software\Adobe\*
Chapter 38
Supported File Systems and Drive Image
Formats
This appendix lists the file systems and image formats that are analyzed. It includes the following topics:
File Systems (page 527)

Whole Disk Encrypted Products (page 528)
Hard Disk Image Formats (page 528)
CD and DVD Image Formats (page 529)
File Systems
The following table lists AccessData identified and analyzed file systems.
Identified and Analyzed File Systems

 FAT 12, FAT 16, FAT 32  NTFS
 Ext2FS  HFS, HFS+
 Ext3FS  CDFS
 Ext4FS  exFAT
 ReiserFS 3  Windows 8 and Server 2012 ReFS
 VxFS (Veritas File System)  Windows 10
Supported File Systems and Drive Image Formats File Systems | 527
Whole Disk Encrypted Products
The following table lists identified and analyzed Whole Disk Encryption (WDE) decryption products (these all
require the investigator to enter the password, AccessData forensic products don’t “crack” these).
Recognized and Analyzed Whole Disk Encryption Formats

 AFF (Advanced Forensic Format)  Utimaco Safeguard Easy
 PGP®  Utimaco SafeGuard Enterprise
 Dell Encryption  Guardian Edge
 SafeBoot  EFS
 JFS  LVM
 VMWare  LVM2
 UFS1  UFS2
 Apple FileVault  Apple FileVault 2
Hard Disk Image Formats

The following table lists identified and analyzed hard disk image formats.
Supported Hard Disk Image Formats

 Encase, including ‘incomplete’ Tableau-  SnapBack
created files
 Safeback 2.0 and under  Expert Witness
 Linux DD  ICS
 Ghost (forensic images only)  SMART
 AccessData Logical Image (AD1)  MSVHD (MS Virtual Hard Disk)
 DMG (Mac)  Lx0, Lx01
Supported File Systems and Drive Image Formats Whole Disk Encrypted Products | 528
CD and DVD Image Formats
The following table lists identified and analyzed CD and DVD image formats.
Identified and Analyzed CD and DVD File Systems and Formats

 Alcohol (*.mds)  IsoBuster CUE
 PlexTools (*.pxi)  CloneCD (*.ccd)
 Nero (*.nrg)  Roxio (*.cif)
 ISO  Pinnacle (*.pdi)
 Virtual CD (*.vc4)  CD-RW,
 VCD  CD-ROM
 DVD+MRW  DVCD
 DVD-RW  DVD-VFR
 DVD+RW Dual Layer  DVD-VR
 BD-R SRM-POW  BD-R
 BD-R SRM  BD-R DL
 HD DVD-R  HD DVD-RW DL
 SVCD  HD DVD
 HD DVD-RW  DVD-RAM,
 CD-ROM XA  CD-MRW,
 DVD+VR  DVD+R
 DVD+R Dual Layer  BD-RE
 DVD-VRW  BD-ROM
 HD DVD-R DL  BD-R RRM
 BDAV  Virtual CD (*.vc4)
 HD DVD-RAM  DVD+RW
 CD-R  VD-R
 SACD  DVD-R Dual Layer
 DVD-ROM  BD-R SRM+POW
 DVD-VM  BD-RE DL
 DVD+VRW 
Supported File Systems and Drive Image Formats CD and DVD Image Formats | 529
Chapter 39
Recovering Deleted Material
You can find deleted files on supported file systems by their file header.
This appendix includes the following topics:
FAT 12, 16, and 32 (page 530)

NTFS (page 531)
Ext2 (page 531)
Ext3 (page 531)
HFS (page 531)
FAT 12, 16, and 32

When parsing FAT directories, deleted files are identified by their names. In a deleted file, the first character of
the 8.3 filename is replaced by the hex character 0xE5.
The file’s directory entry provides the file’s starting cluster (C) and size. From the size of the file and the starting
cluster, the total number of clusters (N) occupied by the file are computed.
The File Allocation Table (FAT) is examined and the number of unallocated clusters are counted, starting at C
(U). The recovered file [min (N, U)] clusters starting at C are then assigned.
If the deleted file was fragmented, the recovered file is likely to be incorrect and incomplete because the
information that is needed to find subsequent fragments was wiped from the FAT system when the file was
deleted.
If present, the long filename (LFN) entries are used to recover the first letter of the deleted file’s short filename. If
the LFN entries are incomplete or absent, it uses an exclamation mark (“!”) as the first letter of the filename.
The volume free space for deleted directories that have been orphaned are searched with a meta-carve process.
An orphaned directory is a directory whose parent directory or whose entry in its parent directory has been
overwritten.
Recovering Deleted Material FAT 12, 16, and 32 | 530

NTFS
The Master File Table (MFT) is examined to find files that are marked deleted because the allocation byte in a
record header indicates a deleted file or folder. It then recovers the file’s data using the MFT record’s data
attribute extent list if the data is non-resident.
If the deleted file’s parent directory exists, the recovered file is shown in the directory where it originally existed.
Deleted files whose parent directories were deleted are shown in their proper place as long as their parent
directory’s MFT entry has not been recycled.
Ext2
Nodes that are marked deleted are searched for. The link count is zero and the deletion timestamp is nonzero.
For each deleted inode, the block pointers are processed and blocks are added to the deleted file. However, if an
indirect block is marked allocated or references an invalid block number, the recovered file is truncated at that
point because the block no longer contains a list of blocks for the file that the application is attempting to recover.
The filenames for files deleted on ext2 systems are not recovered. Instead, deleted files are identified by inode
number because ext2 uses variable-length directory entries organized in a linked list structure. When a file is
deleted, its directory entry is unlinked from the list, and the space it occupied becomes free to be partially or
completely overwritten by new directory entries. There is no reliable way to identify and extract completely
deleted directory entries.
Ext3
Deleted files from ext3 volumes are not recovered because ext3 zeroes out a file’s indirect block pointers when it
is deleted.
HFS
Deleted files from HFS are not recovered.
Recovering Deleted Material NTFS | 531

Chapter 40
Managing Security Devices and Licenses
This appendix includes information AccessData product licenses, Virtual CodeMeter activation, and Network
License Server configurations.
Installing and Managing Security Devices

AccessData products require a licensing security device that communicates with the program to verify the
existence of a current license.
You must install the security device software and drivers before you can manage licenses with LicenseManager.
This section explains installing and using the CodeMeter Runtime software and the License Manager.
Installing the Security Device

AccessData products require a licensing security device that communicates with the program to verify the
existence of a current license. The device is a WIBU-SYSTEMS (Wibu) CodeMeter (CmStick). This USB device
requires specific software to be installed prior to connecting the devices and running your AccessData products.
You will need the WIBU-SYSTEMS CodeMeter Runtime software with a WIBU-SYSTEMS CodeMeter
(CmStick), either the physical USB device, or the Virtual device.
Store the CmStick or dongle in a secure location when it is not in use.
Installing the CodeMeter Runtime Software

When you purchase a product, AccessData provides a USB CmStick with the product package. To use the
CmStick, you must first install the CodeMeter Runtime software, either from the shipping disc or from the setup
file downloaded from the AccessData Web site.
Note: The CodeMeter software is automatically installed as part of the FTK suite.
To download the CodeMeter installer from the AccessData web site

1. Go to the AccessData download page at:
http://www.accessdata.com/product-download.
2. On the download page, click CodeMeter.
3. Click Download Page.
Managing Security Devices and Licenses Installing and Managing Security Devices | 532
5. Save the installation file to your download directory or other temporary directory on your drive.
To install CodeMeter
Launch the installer from the FTK installer by doing the following:
1a. Launch the FTK installer Autorun.exe file.
1b. Click Other Products.
1c. Click Install License Manager.
Launch the installer from the download by doing the following:
1a. Navigate to, and double-click the installation file.
2. Wait for the Preparing to Install processes to complete.
3. In the Welcome dialog, click Next.
4. Read and accept the License Agreement
5. Enter User Information.
6. Click Next.
7. Select the features you want to install.
8. Click Next.
9. Click Install.
10. Click Finish.
11. Click OK.
CodeMeter Error
If you are not using NLS for your security device configuration, after clicking No, you will see the following
additional message.
Security Device Not Found
To remedy, click OK, then install the correct CodeMeter Runtime software, and connect the CmStick or run
License Manager to generate your Virtual CmStick. Then, restart FTK.
Managing Security Devices and Licenses Installing and Managing Security Devices | 533
Installing LicenseManager
LicenseManager lets you manage product and license subscriptions using a security device or device packet
file.
You can can access the LicenseManager installer from the Web or from the FTK installer.
To download the LicenseManager installer from the AccessData web site

1. Go to the AccessData download page at:
http://www.accessdata.com/product-download.
2. On the download page, click LicenseManager.
3. Click Download Page.
5. Save the installation file to your download directory or other temporary directory on your drive.
To install LicenseManager
Launch the installer from the FTK installer by doing the following:
1a. Launch the FTK installer Autorun.exe file.
1b. Click Other Products.
1c. Click Install License Manager.
Launch the installer from the download by doing the following:
1a. Navigate to, and double-click the installation file.
2. Wait for the Preparing to Install processes to complete.
3. Click Next on the Welcome screen
4. Read and accept the License Agreement.
5. Click Next.
6. Accept the default destination folder, or select a different one.
7. Click Next.
8. In the Ready to Install the Program dialog, click Back to review or change any of the installation
settings. When you are ready to continue, click Install.
9. Wait while the installation completes.
10. If you want to launch LicenseManager after completing the installation, mark the
Launch AccessData LicenseManager check box.
11. Select the Launch AccessData LicenseManager check box to run the program upon finishing the
setup. The next section describes how to run LicenseManager later.
12. Click Finish to finalize the installation and close the wizard.
Managing Security Devices and Licenses Installing LicenseManager | 534

Starting LicenseManager
To launch LicenseManager
1. Launch LicenseManager by clicking the LicenseManager icon on your desktop.
When starting, LicenseManager reads licensing and subscription information from the installed and
connected WIBU-SYSTEMS CodeMeter Stick, or Keylok dongle.
Note: If using a Keylok dongle, and LicenseManager either does not open or displays the message,
“Device Not Found”
2. Verify the correct dongle driver is installed on your computer.

3. With the dongle connected, check in Windows Device Manager to make sure the device is recognized.
If it has an error indicator, right click on the device and choose Uninstall.
4. Remove the dongle after the device has been uninstalled.
5. Reboot your computer.
6. After the reboot is complete, and all startup processes have finished running, connect the dongle.
7. Wait for Windows to run the Add New Hardware wizard. If you already have the right dongle drivers
installed, do not browse the internet, choose, “No, not this time.”
8. Click Next to continue.
9. On the next options screen, choose, “Install the software automatically (Recommended)
11. When the installation of the dongle device is complete, click Finish to close the wizard.
12. You still need the CodeMeter software installed, but will not need a CodeMeter Stick to run
LicenseManager.
Note: If using a CodeMeter Stick, and LicenseManager either does not open or displays the message,
“Device Not Found”
13. Make sure the CodeMeter Runtime 4.20b software is installed. It is available at www.accessdata.com/
support. Click Downloads and browse to the product. Click on the download link. You can Run the
product from the Website, or Save the file locally and run it from your PC. Once the CodeMeter Runtime
software is installed and running, you will see a gray icon in your system tray.
14. Make sure the CodeMeter Stick is connected to the USB port.
If the CodeMeter Stick is not connected, LicenseManager still lets you to manage licenses using a security
device packet file if you have exported and saved the file previously.
To open LicenseManager without a CodeMeter Stick installed

1. Click Tools > LicenseManager.
LicenseManager displays the message, “Device not Found”.
2. Click OK, then browse for a security device packet file to open.
Note: Although you can run LicenseManager using a packet file, AccessData products will not run with a packet
file alone. You must have the CmStick or dongle connected to the computer to run AccessData products
that require a license.

Using LicenseManager
LicenseManager provides the tools necessary for managing AccessData product licenses on a WIBU-
SYSTEMS CodeMeter Stick security device, a Keylok dongle, a Virtual Dongle, or in a security device packet
file.
LicenseManager displays license information, allows you to add licenses to or remove existing licenses from a
dongle or CmStick. LicenseManager, and can also be used to export a security device packet file. Packet files
can be saved and reloaded into LicenseManager, or sent via email to AccessData support.
In addition, you can use LicenseManager to check for product updates and in some cases download the latest
product versions.
LicenseManager displays CodeMeter Stick information (including packet version and serial number) and
licensing information for all AccessData products. The Purchase Licenses button connects directly to the
AccessData website and allows you to browse the site for information about products you may wish to purchase.
Contact AccessData by phone to speak with a Sales Representative for answers to product questions, and to
purchase products and renew licenses and subscriptions.
The LicenseManager Interface

The LicenseManager interface consists of two tabs that organize the options in the LicenseManager window: the
Installed Components tab and the Licenses tab.
The Installed Components Tab

The Installed Components tab lists the AccessData programs installed on the machine. The Installed
Components tab is displayed in the following figure.
The following information is displayed on the Installed Components tab:
LicenseManager Installed Components Tab Features
Item Description
Program Lists all AccessData products installed on the host.
Installed Version Displays the version of each AccessData product installed on the host.
Newest Version Displays the latest version available of each AccessData product installed on the host.
Click Newest to refresh this list.
Product Notes Displays notes and information about the product selected in the program list.
AccessData Link Links to the AccessData product page where you can learn more about AccessData
products.
The following buttons provide additional functionality from the Installed Components tab:
LicenseManager Installed Components Buttons
Button Function
Help Opens the LicenseManager Help web page.

LicenseManager Installed Components Buttons (Continued)
Button Function
Install Newest Installs the newest version of the programs checked in the product window, if that
program is available for download. You can also get the latest versions from our website
using your Internet browser.
Newest Updates the latest version information for your installed products.
About Displays the About LicenseManager screen. Provides version, copyright, and trademark
information for LicenseManager.
Done Closes LicenseManager.
Use the Installed Components tab to manage your AccessData products and stay up to date on new releases.
The Licenses Tab

The Licenses tab displays CodeMeter Stick information for the current security device packet file and licensing
information for AccessData products available to the owner of the CodeMeter Stick, as displayed in the following
figure.
The Licenses tab provides the following information:
LicenseManager Licenses Tab Features
Column Description
Program Shows the owned licenses for AccessData products.
Expiration Date Shows the date on which your current license expires.
Status Shows these status of that product’s license:
 None: the product license is not currently owned
 Days Left: displays when less than 31 days remain on the license.
 Never: the license is permanently owned. This generally applies to Hash Tables and
Portable Office Rainbow Tables.
Name Shows the name of additional parameters or information a product requires for its license.
Value Shows the values of additional parameters or information a product contained in or
required for its license.
Show Unlicensed When checked, the License window displays all products, whether licensed or not.
The following license management actions can be performed using buttons found on the License tab:
License Management Options
Button Function
Remove License Removes a selected license from the Licenses window and from the CodeMeter Stick or
dongle. Opens the AccessData License Server web page to confirm success.
Refresh Device Connects to the AccessData License Server. Downloads and overwrites the info on the
CodeMeter Stick or dongle with the latest information on the server.
Reload from Device Begins or restarts the service to read the licenses stored on the CodeMeter Stick or
dongle.

License Management Options (Continued)
Button Function
Release Device Click to stop the program reading the dongle attached to your machine, much like
Windows’ Safely Remove Hardware feature. Click this button before removing a dongle.
This option is disabled for the CodeMeter Stick.
Open Packet File Opens Windows Explorer, allowing you to navigate to a .PKT file containing your license
information.
Save to File Opens Windows Explorer, allowing you to save a .PKT file containing your license
information. The default location is My Documents.
Finalize Removal Finishes the removal of licenses in the unbound state. Licenses must be unbound from the
CmStick or dongle before this button takes effect.
View Registration Displays an HTML page with your CodeMeter Stick number and other license information.
Info
Add Existing License Allows you to bind an existing unbound license to your CodeMeter Stick, through an
internet connection to the AccessData License Server.
Purchase License Brings up the AccessData product page from which you can learn more about AccessData
products.
About Displays the About LicenseManager screen. Provides version, copyright, and trademark
information for LicenseManager.
Done Closes LicenseManager.
Opening and Saving Dongle Packet Files

You can open or save dongle packet files using LicenseManager. When started, LicenseManager attempts to
read licensing and subscription information from the dongle. If you do not have a dongle installed,
LicenseManager lets you browse to open a dongle packet file. You must have already created and saved a
dongle packet file to be able to browse to and open it.
To save a security device packet file

1. Click the Licenses tab, then under License Packets, click Save to File.
2. Browse to the desired folder and accept the default name of the .PKT file; then click Save.
Note: In general, the best place to save the .PKT files is in the AccessData LicenseManager folder. The
default path is C:\Program Files\AccessData\Common Files\AccessData LicenseManager\.
To open a security device packet file

1. Select the Licenses tab.
2. Under License Packets, click Open Packet File.
3. Browse for a dongle packet file to open. Select the file and click Open.
Adding and Removing Product Licenses

On a computer with an Internet connection, LicenseManager lets you add available product licenses to, or
remove them from, a dongle.

To move a product license from one dongle to another dongle, first remove the product license from the first
dongle. You must release that dongle, and connect the second dongle before continuing. When the second
dongle is connected and recognized by Windows and LicenseManager, click on the Licenses tab to add the
product license to the second dongle.
Removing a License
To remove (unassociate, or unbind) a product license
1. From the Licenses tab, mark the program license to remove.
This action activates the Remove License button below the Program list box.
2. Click Remove License to connect your machine to the AccessData License Server through the
internet.
3. When you are prompted to confirm the removal of the selected licenses from the device, click Yes to
continue, or No to cancel.
4. Several screens appear indicating the connection and activity on the License Server, and when the
license removal is complete, the following screen appears.
5. Click OK to close the message box.
Another internet browser screen appears from LicenseManager with a message that says, “The
removal of your licenses from Security Device was successful!” You may close this box at any time.
Adding a License
To add a new or released license
1. From the Licenses tab, under Browser Options, click Add Existing License.
The AccessData LicenseManager Web page opens, listing the licenses currently bound to the
connected security device, and below that list, you will see the licenses that currently are not bound to
any security device. Mark the box in the Bind column for the product you wish to add to the connected
device, then click Submit.
2. An AccessData LicenseManager Web page will open, displaying the following message, “The
AccessData products that you selected has been bound to the record for Security Device nnnnnnn
within the Security Device Database.
“Please run LicenseManager’s “Refresh Device” feature in order to complete the process of binding
these product licenses to this Security Device.” You may close this window at any time.
3. Click Yes if LicenseManager prompts, “Were you able to associate a new product with this device?”
4. Click Refresh Device in the Licenses tab of LicenseManager. Click Yes when prompted.
You will see the newly added license in the License Options list.
Adding and Removing Product Licenses Remotely

While LicenseManager requires an Internet connection to use some features, you can add or remove licenses
from a dongle packet file for a dongle that resides on a computer, such as a forensic lab computer, that does not
have an Internet connection.
If you cannot connect to the Internet, the easiest way to move licenses from one dongle to another is to
physically move the dongle to a computer with an Internet connection, add or remove product licenses as
necessary using LicenseManager, and then physically move the dongle back to the original computer. However,

if you cannot move the dongle—due to organization policies or a need for forensic soundness—then transfer the
packet files and update files remotely.
Adding a License Remotely

To remotely add (associate or bind) a product license
1. On the computer where the security device resides:
1a. Run LicenseManager.
1b. From the Licenses tab, click Reload from Device to read the dongle license information.
1c. Click Save to File to save the dongle packet file to the local machine.
2. Copy the dongle packet file to a computer with an Internet connection.
3. On the computer with an Internet connection:
3a. Remove any attached security device.
3b. Launch LicenseManager. You will see a notification, “No security device found”.
3c. Click OK.
3d. An “Open” dialog box will display. Highlight the .PKT file, and click Open.
3e. Click on the Licenses tab.
3f. Click Add Existing License.
3g. Complete the process to add a product license on the Website page.
3h. Click Yes when the LicenseManager prompts, “Were you able to associate a new product with this
dongle?”
3i. When LicenseManager does not detect a dongle or the serial number of the dongle does not
match the serial number in the dongle packet file, you are prompted to save the update file,
[serial#].wibuCmRaU.
3j. Save the update file to the local machine.
4. After the update file is downloaded, copy the update file to the computer where the dongle resides:
5. On the computer where the dongle resides:
5a. Run the update file by double-clicking it. ([serial#].wibuCmRaU is an executable file.)
5b. After an update file downloads and installs, click OK.
5c. Run LicenseManager.
5d. From the Licenses tab, click Reload from Device to verify the product license has been added to
the dongle.
Removing a License Remotely

To remotely remove (unassociate, or unbind) a product license
1a. Run LicenseManager.
1b. From the Licenses tab, click Reload from Device to read the dongle license information.
1c. Click Save to File to save the dongle packet file to the local machine.
2. Copy the file to a computer with an Internet connection.
3. On the computer with an Internet connection:
3a. Launch LicenseManager. You will see a notification, “No security device found”.

3b. Click OK.
3c. An “Open” dialog box will display. Highlight the .PKT file, and click Open.
3d. Click on the Licenses tab.
3e. Mark the box for the product license you want to unassociate; then click Remove License.
3f. When prompted to confirm the removal of the selected license from the dongle, click Yes.
3g. When LicenseManager does not detect a dongle or the serial number of the dongle does not
match the serial number in the dongle packet file, you are prompted save the update file.
3h. Click Yes to save the update file to the local computer.
3i. The Step 1 of 2 dialog details how to use the dongle packet file to remove the license from a
dongle on another computer.
3j. Save the update file to the local machine.
4. After the update file is downloaded, copy the update file to the computer where the dongle resides.
5a. Run the update file by double-clicking it. This runs the executable update file and copies the new
information to the security device.
5b. Run LicenseManager
5c. On the Licenses tab, click Reload from Device in LicenseManager to read the security device and
allow you to verify the product license is removed from the dongle.
5d. Click Save to File to save the updated dongle packet file to the local machine.
6. Copy the file to a computer with an Internet connection.
Updating Products
You can use LicenseManager to check for product updates and download the latest product versions.
Checking for Product Updates

To check for product updates, on the Installed Components tab, click Newest. This refreshes the list to display
what version you have installed, and the newest version available.
Downloading Product Updates

To install the newest version, mark the box next to the product to install, then click Install Newest.
Note: Some products are too large to download, and are not available. A notification displays if this is the case.
To download a product update

1. Ensure that LicenseManager displays the latest product information by clicking the Installed
Components tab. Click Newest to refresh the list showing the latest releases, then compare your
installed version to the latest release.
If the latest release is newer than your installed version, you may be able to install the latest release
from our Website.
2. Ensure that the program you want to install is not running.
3. Mark the box next to the program you want to download; then click Install Newest.

4. When prompted, click Yes to download the latest install version of the product.
4a. If installing the update on a remote computer, copy the product update file to another computer.
5. Install the product update. You may need to restart your computer after the update is installed.
Purchasing Product Licenses

Use LicenseManager to link to the AccessData Web site to find information about all our products.
Purchase product licenses through your AccessData Sales Representative. Call 801-377-5410 and follow the
prompt for Sales, or send an email to [email protected].
Note: Once a product has been purchased and appears in the AccessData License Server, add the product
license to a CodeMeter Stick, dongle, or security device packet file by clicking Refresh Device.
Sending a Dongle Packet File to Support

Send a security device packet file only when specifically directed to do so by AccessData support.
To create a dongle packet file

1. Run LicenseManager
2. Click on the Licenses tab.
3. Click Load from Device.
4. Click Refresh Device if you need to get the latest info from AD’s license server.
5. Click Save to File, and note or specify the location for the saved file.
6. Attach the dongle packet file to an e-mail and send it to:
[email protected].

Virtual CodeMeter Activation Guide
Introduction
A Virtual CodeMeter (VCM) allows the user to run licensed AccessData products without a physical CodeMeter
device. A VCM can be created using AccessData License Manager, but requires the user to enter a
Confirmation Code during the creation process.
The latest revision of this guide can be found at:

http://accessdata.com/downloads/media/VCM_Activation_Guide.pdf
Preparation
Contact your AccessData sales rep to order a VCM confirmation code.
Install CodeMeter Runtime 4.10b or newer (available on the AccessData download page).
Install the latest release of License Manager (available on the AccessData download page).
The following steps are to be run on the system where you want to permanently attach the VCM.
Note: Once created, the VCM cannot be moved to any other system.
AD Lab WebUI and eDiscovery administrators, please also follow steps outlined under in Additional
Instructions for AD Lab WebUI and eDiscovery (page 545) in order to enable VCM licensing on the
AccessData License Service.
Setup for Online Systems

To setup a Virtual CodeMeter
1. Unplug any AccessData dongles you currently have connected.
2. Launch License Manager.
Note: When creating a VCM on Windows Server 2003 or 2008, please refer to the special set of steps
written for those platforms. See Creating a Virtual CM-Stick with Server 2003/2008 Enterprise
Editions (page 544).
3. Select Create A Local Virtual CMStick

4. Click OK.
The Confirmation Code Required dialog appears.
5. Enter your confirmation code.
6. Click OK, AccessData License Manager will automatically synchronize with the License Server over the
Internet.
7. Click OK when the update completes. License Manager will then create the VCM on your system.
8. At this point, AccessData License Manager now displays a serial number for the VCM on the Licenses
tab and the VCM can now operate in a similar way to a hardware CodeMeter device.
Managing Security Devices and Licenses Virtual CodeMeter Activation Guide | 543
Setting up VCM for Offline Systems
You can setup a Virtual CodeMeter on a system that is not connected to the internet (offline). You must also have
one machine that connects to the internet to perform certain steps. This section details what to do on which
machine.
Perform these steps on the Online system

Note: When creating a VCM on Windows Server 2003 or 2008 Enterprise Edition, please refer to the
special set of steps written for those platforms. See Creating a Virtual CM-Stick with Server 2003/
2008 Enterprise Editions (page 544).
3. Select Create Empty Virtual CMStick (offline).

4. Click OK.
5. The resulting dialog prompts you to save the *.wibucmrau file. Enter a name and path for the file, then
click Save.
6. Transfer the *.wibucmrau to the Online system.
Perform these steps on the Online system

9. Select Create Activation File (online).
10. Click OK.
11. In the Confirmation Code Required dialog, enter your confirmation code and click OK.
12. AccessData License Manager will automatically synchronize with the License Server over the internet.
Data synchronized from the server will be written to the *.wibucmrau file. Click OK when the update
completes.
13. Transfer *.wibucmrau back to the offline system.
Perform these steps on the Offline system

16. Select Create Activate Virtual CMStick (offline).
17. Click OK.
18. The resulting dialog prompts you to browse to the location of the newly updated *.wibucmrau file.
Locate the file, then click Open. License Manager creates the VCM on your system.
19. 19.At this point, AccessData License Manager should now display a serial number for the VCM on the
“Licenses” tab and the VCM can now operate in a similar way to a hardware CodeMeter device.
Creating a Virtual CM-Stick with Server 2003/2008 Enterprise Editions

This section contains special instructions for using a VCM with Windows Server 2003 or 2008 Enterprise
Editions. Complete each section in order.
To Create an Empty CodeMeter License Container
1. On the Server 2003/2008 machine, unplug any CodeMeter devices.
2. Open the CodeMeter Control Center. Make sure the window on the License tab is, empty indicating that
no licenses are currently loaded.
3. Select File > Import License.
4. Browse to the License Manager program files directory.
32 bit systems: C:\Program Files\AccessData\LicenseManager\
64 bit systems: C:\Program Files (x86)\ AccessData\LicenseManager\
5. Highlight the TemplateDisc5010.wbb file, then click Import.
6. Click the Activate License button.
7. When the CmFAS Assistant opens, click Next.
8. Select Create license request, and click Next.
9. Confirm the desired directory and filename to save .WibuCmRaC. (Example: Test1.WibuCmRaC)
10. Click Commit.
11. Click Finish.
To Copy to another machine

1. Copy the new .WibuCmRaC to another machine that is not running Windows Server 2003/2008
Enterprise.
Note: The destination system must have an active internet connection.

4. Select Create Activation File (online).
5. Click OK.
6. In the Confirmation Code Required dialog enter your confirmation code and click OK.
7. AccessData License Manager will automatically synchronize with the License Server over the internet.
Data synchronized from the server will be written to the *.wibucmrau file. Click OK when the update
completes.
To Finish the activation on the Windows Server 2003/2008 Enterprise system

1. Copy the activated .WibuCmRaC file to the Server 2003/2008 machine.
2. On the Server 2003/2008 machine, unplug any CodeMeter devices.
3. Open the CodeMeter Control Center. Make sure the window on the License tab empty indicating that no
licenses are currently loaded.
4. Select File > Import License.
5. Browse to the location where the activated .WibuCmRaC is stored. Click Import.
6. AccessData License Manager now displays a serial number for the VCM on the Licenses tab and the
VCM can now operate in a similar way to a hardware CodeMeter device.
Additional Instructions for AD Lab WebUI and eDiscovery

This section provides additional information for enabling the Web User Interface to recognize a VCM.
To enable AD Lab WebUI and eDiscovery to use VCM
1. Open Registry Editor.
2. Navigate to the following key:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\AccessData\Products
Add the following DWORD registry string to the key and set the value to 1:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\AccessData\Products | EnableACTTest
The AccessData License Service will know to expect a VCM when EnableACTTest is set to “1.”
Virtual CodeMeter FAQs

Q: How do I get a Virtual CodeMeter (VCM)?
A: Contact your AccessData product sales representative. They will provide you with a VCM confirmation code.
Q: How do VCMs work?
A: A VCM operates in almost exactly the same way as a hardware CodeMeter device, except that they exist as
a file stored on the hard disk. During activation, the VCM file (named with a WBB extension) is tied to the
hardware of the system using unique hardware identifiers. Those unique identifiers make VCMs non-portable.
When AccessData License Manager is launched, it will automatically load the VCM and display its license
information. From there, you can refresh, remove, add existing licenses, etc just the same you would with a
hardware security device.
Q: Are VCMs supported on virtual machines (VM)?
A: No. Due to the fact that virtual machines are portable and VCMs are not, VCMs are not supported on virtual
machines. Currently it is recommended to use AccessData Network License Service (NLS) to license systems
running as virtual machines. CLICK HERE for more information.
Q: Does the AccessData Network License Service (NLS) support VCMs?
A: The current release of NLS does not support using VCM as a network dongle. AccessData is considering this
support for a future release.
Q: How can I “unplug” a VCM?
A: If you want to prevent License Manager from automatically loading the VCM you can "unplug" it by stopping
the CodeMeter Runtime Service server and then moving (cut and paste) the WBB file to a new location
(renaming the file does not suffice). By default the WBB file is located at:
32 bit systems:
C:\Program Files\CodeMeter\CmAct\
64 bit systems:
C:\Program Files (x86)\CodeMeter\CmAct\
Q: I have activated a VCM on my system, but now I need to activate it on a different system. What should I do?
A: Since a VCM is uniquely tied to the system on which it is activated, it cannot be moved to any other system. If
you need to activate a VCM on a different system, you need to contact your AccessData Sales Representative.
Q: What if I need to reinstall Windows, format my drive, change my system's hardware, or back up my VCM in
case of a disaster? Will the VCM still work?
A: The VCM can be backed up by simply copying the WBB file to a safe location. It can be restored by copying
the WBB file to the CmAct folder. The VCM cannot be restored without a WBB file. If you do not have a backup
of your WBB file, you will need to get a new confirmation code from your AccessData Sales Representative.
Q: My AccessData product does not seem to recognize the license stored on a VCM. What am I doing wrong?
A: VCMs are supported by the following versions of AccessData products:
FTK 1.81.6 and newer

FTK 3.1.0 and newer
PRTK 6.5.0 and newer
DNA 3.5.0 and newer
RV 1.6.0 and newer
eDiscovery 3.1.2 and newer
AD Lab 3.1.2 and newer
AD Enterprise 3.1.0 and newer
MPE+ 4.0.0.1 and newer
Ensure that the version of the product you are running support VCMs. If the version you are running is listed as
supported, verify that according to License Manager, the release date of the version you are running falls before
the expiration date of the license.
Network License Server (NLS) Setup Guide
Introduction
This section discusses the installation steps and configuration notes needed to successfully setup an
AccessData Network License Server (NLS).
Note: Click on this link to access the latest version of this guide:
Network License Server (NLS) Setup Guide.
Preparation Notes
CodeMeter Runtime 3.30a or newer must be installed on all Client and Server systems
AccessData License Manager must be used to prepare the network dongle. The system running License
Manager must have internet access and have CodeMeter Runtime installed.
The current release of NLS supports the following versions of Windows:
Windows XP 32/64 bit
Windows Server 2003 32/64 bit
Windows Vista 32/64 bit
Windows Server 2008 R1 32/64 bit
Windows 7 32/64 bit
Windows Server 2008 R2 64 bit
Setup Overview
To setup NLS
1. Download the latest release of NLS located in the utilities section of the AccessData download page.
2. Extract contents of ZIP to a folder of your choice.
3. On the NLS server system, run through the NLS Installation MSI and accept all defaults.
4. Prepare network dongle:
4a. Provide the serial number to AD Support and request to have the “Network Dongle Flag” applied.
4b. Migrate any additional licenses to the network dongle
4c. Refresh the network dongle device using AccessData License Manager.
5. Launch the AccessData product on the NLS client system.
6. Enter the NLS server configuration information:
 IP address or hostname of NLS server system
Port 6921
7. Click, OK.
If you encounter any problems, please read the notes below for troubleshooting information.
Managing Security Devices and Licenses Network License Server (NLS) Setup Guide | 548
Network Dongle Notes
AccessData License Manager 2.2.6 or newer should be installed in order to manage licenses on the
network dongle.
Network dongles can hold up to 120 physical licenses. Each License has a capacity to hold thousands of
sub licenses (i.e. Client count or worker count).
Contact AccessData Technical Support to have your CodeMeter device flagged as a Network Dongle
(required for NLS).
NLS Server System Notes

Make sure the CodeMeter device is flagged as Network Dongle (i.e. License Manager will show the serial
as “1181234N”. To have this flag set on your CodeMeter device, please contact AccessData Technical
Support).
Server system must be configured to allow incoming and outgoing traffic on TCP port 6921.
A web interface to view and revoke licenses all licenses is accessible at
http://localhost:5555
This page can be reached only from a web browser running locally on the NLS server system.
A Network Dongle cannot be used to run AccessData products locally unless the NLS server is running
locally.
Some versions of Windows may not find a local NLS server when the DNS hostname of the server is
provided. In those cases, it is recommended to use a static IP address.
When using the NLS across domains, users must have permissions to access resources on both
domains (either by dual-domain membership or cross-domain trust).
When running NLS on Windows Server 2008, Terminal Services must be installed and accepting
connections. If Terminal Services is not configured it will not open the port and share out the licenses
correctly.
The name of the service according to Windows is “AccessData Network License Service.”
NLS Client System Notes

When launched, any NLS client application that needs to lease a license from the NLS server will
automatically check for the following values within the Windows Registry.
NetDonglePath: The IP address or DNS hostname of the system hosting the Network License Server
service which is found in the following registry key on the client system:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\AccessData\Products\Common
NetDonglePort: The TCP port number through which the client and server systems have been
configured to use. This value is located in the same key as NetDonglePath.
uniqueId: In order to lease a license from the server, the client system must first posses a unique
identification value. This value is automatically generated by applications such as FTK, PRTK, or
DNA. (Registry Viewer and FTK 1.x cannot be used setup initial client NLS configuration at this time.)
You can find the each client system’s uniqueId by inspecting the following registry key:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\AccessData\Shared
The Client system must be configured to allow all incoming and outgoing traffic on TCP port 6921.
The following products support the ability to lease a license from a NLS server:
FTK 2.2.1 and newer
FTK 1.81.2 and newer
FTK Pro 3.2 and newer
PRTK 6.4.2 and newer
DNA 3.4.2 and newer
Registry Viewer 1.5.4 and newer
AD Enterprise 3.0.3 and newer
AD Lab 3.0.4 and newer
AD Lab Lite 3.1.2 and previous
Mobile Phone Examiner 3.0 and newer
Explicit Image Detection (EID) Add-on
Glyph Add-on
Use AccessData License Manager (ver. 2.2.4 or newer) to migrate licenses off other devices and onto a
network device.
When running AccessData products on Windows Vista, 7, or Server 2008 you must choose Run as
administrator at least once in order to lease a license from a NLS server.
If the NLS client application is having trouble leasing a license either from the NLS server, AccessData
recommends that you reset the licensing configuration to default.
To reset the licensing configuration, delete and recreate the NLS registry key located at:
HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\AccessData\Products\Common
Chapter 41
Configuring a Multi-box Setup
Configuration for a Multi-box Setup

A multi-box setup is a configuration where all components are not installed or contained on the same computer.
For example, you may have the database installed on a separate computer from the application, or the
application and the database are installed on one computer and the case files are stored on a different computer.
Some configuration changes must be performed manually by the system administrator to properly configure a
multi-box installation. Please note that a multi-box setup requires that all computers be in the same domain.
Configuration Overview
The following steps are required before you can perform multi-box case back ups and restoration.
Create a service account common to all systems involved. See Create a Service Account on page 551.
Share the case folder and assign appropriate permissions. See Share the Case Folder on page 552.
Configure the database services to run under service account. See Configure Database Services on
page 552.
Share back up destination folder with appropriate permissions. See Share the Backup Destination Folder
on page 553.
Note: When prompted to select the backup destination folder, always use the UNC path of that shared folder,
even when the backup destination folder is local.
Each of these items is explained in detail later in this chapter.
Create a Service Account

To function in a distributed configuration, all reading and writing of case data should be performed under the
authority of a single Windows user account. Throughout the rest of this document, this account is referred to as
the “service account.”
Choose (or create) a domain user account that will function as the service account. Verify that the chosen
domain user has local administrator privilege on both the Examiner host system and the database host system.
To verify the domain user account privileges

1. Open the “Local Users and Groups” snap-in.
2. View the members of the Administrators group.
Configuring a Multi-box Setup Configuration for a Multi-box Setup | 551

3. Ensure that the account selected earlier is a member of this group (either explicitly or by effective
permissions).
4. Perform this verification for both the examination and the database host systems.
Share the Case Folder

On the system hosting the Examiner, create a network share to make the main case folder available to other
users on the network. The case folder is no longer assigned by default. The user creating the case creates the
case folder. It is that folder that needs to be shared.
For this example, it is located at the root of the Windows system volume, and the pathname is:
C:\FTK-Cases.
To share the case folder

1. Before you can effectively share a folder in Windows you must make sure that network file sharing is
enabled. Windows XP users should disable Simple File Sharing before proceeding. Windows Vista/7
users will find the option in the Sharing and Discovery section of the Network and Sharing Center. If you
encounter any issues while enabling file sharing, please contact your IT administrator.
2. Open the Properties dialog for the case folder.
3. Click the Sharing tab to share the folder.
4. Edit the permissions on both the Sharing and Security tabs to allow the one authoritative user Full
Control permissions.
5. Test connectivity to this share from the database system:
5a. Open a Windows Explorer window on the system hosting the database.
5b. Type \\servername\sharename in the address bar, where “servername” = the hostname of the
Examiner host system, and “sharename” = the name of the share assigned in Step 1.
For example: If the name of the system hosting the Examiner is ForensicTower1 and you named
the share “FTK-Cases” in Step #1 above, the UNC path would be \\forensictower1\FTK-Cases.
5c. Click OK. Check to see if the contents of the share can be viewed, and test the ability to create
files and folders there as well.
Configure Database Services

To ensure access to all the necessary resources, the services upon which the database relies must be
configured to log on as a user with sufficient permissions to access those resources.
To configure the database service(s) to Run As [ service account ]

1. On the database server system, open the Windows Services Management console:
1a. Click Start > Run.
1b. Type services.msc.
1c. Press Enter.
2. Locate the following services:
Oracle
OracleTNS Listener service listed as OracleFTK2TNSListener or
OracleAccessDataDBTNSListener (Found on Oracle System)

OracleServiceFTK2 (Found on Oracle System)
PostgreSQL
postgresql-x64-9.0
or
postgresql-x86-9.0
3. Open the properties of the service and click the Log On tab.
4. Choose This account.
5. Click Browse to locate the service account username on the local system or domain. Ensure that “From
this location” displays the appropriate setting for the user to be selected. Note that “Entire Directory” is
used to search for a domain user account, while the name of your system will be listed for a workgroup
system user.
6. In the object name box, type in the first few letters of the username and click Check Names. Highlight
the desired username. Click OK when finished.
7. Enter the current password for this account and then enter it again in the Confirm Password box. Click
Apply and then OK.
8. Repeat Steps #3-8 for each database service.
9. Restart database service(s) when finished.
Share the Backup Destination Folder

Using the same steps as when sharing the main case folder, share the backup destination folder. Use the UNC
path to this share when performing backups. For a two-box backup to work correctly, you must use a single UNC
path that both the examiner, and the database application have read/write access to.
Test the New Configuration

To test the new configuration
1. Launch the Case Manager and log in normally.
2. Select (highlight) the name of the case you want to backup.
2a. Click Case > Back up.
2b. Select a back up destination folder.
Note: The path to the backup location must be formatted as a UNC path.
The Data Processing window opens, and when the progress bar turns green, the backup is complete. If the Data
Processing window results in a red progress bar (sometimes accompanied by “Error 120”), the most likely cause
is that the database service does not have permission to write to the backup location. Please double check all
the steps listed in this document.

Chapter 42
AccessData Distributed Processing
Distributed Processing allows the installation of the Distributed Processing Engine (DPE) on additional
computers in your network, allowing you to apply additional resources of up to three additional computers at a
time to the processing of your cases.
Distributed Processing may not help reduce processing times unless the number of objects to be processed
exceeds 1,000 times the number of cores. For example, on a system with eight cores, the additional distributed
processing engine machines may not assist in the processing unless the evidence contains greater than 8,000
items.
This appendix includes the following topics
See Distributed Processing Prerequisites on page 554.

See Installing Distributed Processing on page 556.
See Configuring Distributed Processing on page 558.
See Using Distributed Processing on page 560.
Distributed Processing Prerequisites

Before installing the AccessData (AD) Distributed Processing Engine, the following prerequisites must be met (if
you are not familiar with any one of these tasks, contact your IT administrator):
The following software must be installed:

Evidence Processing Engine installed on the local examination machine.
CodeMeter Runtime software and either a USB or a Virtual CmStick.
(For more information regarding the CmStick, see (page 532).)
Database either on the same computer, or on a second computer.
KFF Library.
McAfee Virus Scan must have an exception added for processes added to and run from the Temp
Directory.
The Windows Temp directory must be set as default.
A New user account that is a member of the Administrators group on the examiner machine. If you are
installing on a Microsoft network with a Domain Controller, this is easily accomplished. Make a note of the
user account, domain or workgroup, and the IP address of each machine.
A familiarity with UNC paths. UNC paths are required whenever a path statement is needed during
installation and configuration of the DPE, and when the path to the Case Folder, or the path to the
Evidence Folder is required.
AccessData Distributed Processing Distributed Processing Prerequisites | 554

The UNC format is \\[machine name or IP address]\[pathname]\[casefolder].
Allinvolved machines must be on the same domain and have a shared service account.
See Create a Service Account on page 551.
A familiarity with the Windows Services.msc to ensure appropriate Login rights for the DPE, and for
restarting the service, if necessary.
A familiarity with IP addresses and how to find them on a computer.
A knowledge of the case folder path. The case folder must be shared for DPE to access it and write to it
as it processes case data.
Using PostgreSQL with Distributed Processing

When using PostgreSQL, please note the following:
If the computer has fewer than 16 cores ( < 16), then in the PostgreSQL configuration file, set the
max_connections to 60 per computer.
For example, if there are 4 computers in the Distributed Processing Model in which every computer
has fewer than 16 cores, then set max_connections to 240 (60*4).
If the computer has 16 or more cores ( >= 16), then in the PostgreSQL configuration file, set the
max_connections to 125 per computer. For example, if there are 4 computers in the Distributed
Processing Model in which 3 computers are 8 core (<16) and 1 computer is 16 core (>=16), then set
max_connections to 245 (60*3 + 125*1).
If there is just one computer in the Distributed Processing Model, the max_connections should be no
less than 100.
AccessData Distributed Processing Distributed Processing Prerequisites | 555

Installing Distributed Processing
Important: Do not install the Distributed Processing Engine on the examiner machine. The install required the
installation of the local Evidence Processing Engine on that machine.
Installing the Distributed Processing Engine on the examination machine disables both processing
engines.
Remedy: If you have already installed both the Evidence Processing Engine and the Distributed
Processing Engine on a single machine, you must:
a) stop the processes
b) uninstall from both the examination machine and the Evidence Processing Engine machines
c) restart your machine
d) install on the examination machine.
e) start the Evidence Processing Engine again
To install AccessData Distributed Processing

1. Install the Distributed Processing Engine (AccessData Distributed Processing Engine.EXE) on the
computers that are to participate in case processing, (record the IP address of each one for use when
configuring the DPE on the examination machine).
The DPE install file can be found on the installation disc in the following path:
[Drive]:\FTK\AccessData Distributed Processing Engine.EXE
If you do not know the IP address of the machine you are installing on, do the following:
1a. Click Start on the Windows Startbar.
1b. Click Run.
1c. Enter cmd.EXE in the Run text box.
1d. If the prompt is not c:\>, type c: and press Enter.
At the new prompt, type cd\ and press Enter.
The resulting prompt should be c:\>.
1e. At the c:\> prompt, type ipconfig /all.
1f. From the resulting information, locate the Ethernet adapter Local Area Connection, and find the
associated IP address. That is what you will need when you configure the Distributed Processing
Engine.
Note: AccessData recommends that you write down the IP addresses for all machines on which the
DPE will be installed.
1g. At the prompt, type exit and press Enter to close the cmd.EXE box.
Note: The domain listed here is not necessarily the correct one to use in installation. To find the correct
domain or workgroup name, right-click My Computer (On Vista or Server 2008, click Computer),
click Properties > Computer Name. The Domain or Workgroup name is listed midway down the
page. Please make a note of it for future use.
2. If a Security Warning appears, click Run to continue.

3. If you want to stop the install, click Cancel on the Preparing to Install screen.
4. Click Next on the Welcome screen to continue the install.
5. Read and accept the License Agreement.
AccessData Distributed Processing Installing Distributed Processing | 556

7. Accept the default destination folder (recommended), or click Change to specify a different destination
folder.
9. Enter the credentials to be used for running the service.
User name: This user account must be a member of the Administrators group on the DPE machine,
and must also have access to both the case folder, and the evidence folder. If this user account is not
a member of the Administrators group, or if you are not sure, check with your IT services
department.
While it is not generally necessary on a domain, it is recommended that whether you are on a domain
network, a non-domain network, or a workgroup network, you create this same user account with the
same password as a member of the Administrators group on all machines involved. This acts as a
fail-safe in case the domain server goes down.
Domain: The name of the domain all related computers are on. If a non-domain or workgroup
network is in place, use the local DPE’s machine name or IP address in place of the domain name
for this step in the installation.
Password: This user account’s password for authenticating to the domain, or to the machine on the
non-domain network or workgroup. The password must be the same for this user account on each
machine.
The figure below illustrates the user name and password setup.
The components on the top row of the figure can be all on one machine, all on separate machines, or on
any combination of machines. The key is that the administrator account and password (or user account
in the Administrators group—it can be any name as long as the correct permissions are assigned, and
the same name/password combination is used on each machine) must exist on all the machines related
to the DPE installation, including the examination and database machines, and on both the Case Folder
machine and on the Evidence Folder machine. This means physically going to those machines and
adding the correct user accounts manually.
10. When you have finished adding the User Credentials, click Next to continue.
11. Click Install when the Ready to Install the Program screen appears.
12. Wait while the AccessData Distributed Processing Engine files are copied into the selected path on the
local machine.
13. The default path is:
[Drive]:\Program Files\AccessData\Distributed Processing Engine\<Version>.
14. Click Finish to complete the install and close the wizard.
If the service fails to start

1. Leave the Retry/Quit dialog open and launch the Services (services.msc) dialog from the run
command.
2. Open the Properties dialog for the AccessData Processing Engine Service.
3. Click the Log On tab.
4. Verify that the logon credentials used have full Administrative rights.
5. Save the settings and exit the Properties dialog.
6. Stop and start the service manually.
7. Click Retry on the installer screen.
AccessData Distributed Processing Installing Distributed Processing | 557

Configuring Distributed Processing
Once the AccessData Distributed Processing Engine is installed on the non-examination machines, configure
Distributed Processing to work with the local Processing Engine.
For more information, see

https://support.accessdata.com/hc/en-us/articles/211517937-Configuring-Distributed-Processing-in-FTK-AD-
Enterprise-AD-Lab
To configure Distributed Processing to work with the local Lab Processing Engine
1. In Case Manager, click Tools > Processing Engine Config.
2. In the Configuration tab, enter the appropriate information in each field, according to the following
guidelines:
Hostname/IP: Enter the IP address of the computers where the Distributed Processing Engine is
installed. The computer name can also be used if the name can be resolved.
Port: The default port is 34097. This is the port the processing host will use to communicate with the
remote processing engines.
Add: Adds the computer and port to the list. You can add up to three remote processing engines (for
a total of 4 engines). When the maximum number of DPE machines is reached, the Add button will
become inactive.
Remove: Removes a processing engine from the list of available engines. The localhost engine
cannot be removed.
Enable: Enables the engine for use by the processing host. Until implemented, each engine you add
will be set to enabled (Disabled = False) by default. When implemented, you will be able to change
the selected computer’s status from Disabled to Enabled.
Disable: Makes the engine unavailable for use in processing. When implemented, you will be able to
change the selected computer’s status from Enabled to Disabled. The disabled remote engine will
remain on the list, but will not be used.
Disabled = True: Displays for that engine in the DPE list.
Maintain UI performance while processing: Allows you to decide whether processing speed or UI
performance is more important.
Note: This will slow processing, and when selected, applies to all Remote DPEs.
3. When all DPE machines have been added to the Processing Engine Configuration dialog, click Close.
If you have not yet configured the Distributed Processing Engine on the remote computers, or if you have, but it
is not working properly, you will see a warning.
To correct this
1. On the remote computer having the Distributed Processing Engine installed, click Start.
1a. Right-click My Computer.
1b. Click Manage.
1c. Under System Tools, click Local Users and Groups.
1d. Click Groups.
1e. Double-click Administrators.
1f. Verify that the user account name that was used in installation is in this group.
1g. Click OK to close this dialog.
AccessData Distributed Processing Configuring Distributed Processing | 558

2. Under Local Users and Groups, click Users.
2a. Find the user account name in the list, and double-click it.
2b. Mark the box User cannot change password.
2c. Mark the box Password never expires.
2d. Click Apply.
2e. Click OK.
Under Services and Applications, click Services.
If you already closed the Computer Management dialog, launch the Services (services.msc) dialog
from the Run command on the Start menu.
3a. Open the Properties dialog for the AccessData Processing Engine Service.
3b. In the General tab, find Startup Type. If it says Automatic, proceed to the next step. If it says
anything else, click the drop-down on the right side of the text box and select Automatic from the
list. Click Apply and proceed to the next step.
3c. Open the Log On tab.
3d. Verify that the Log On information is set to the user name, domain or DPE machine name, and
password that matches the user account you just verified (should be the one that was entered
during installation).
3e. Click OK.
4. Right-click on the AccessData Processing Engine Service.
5. Click Stop to stop the service.
6. Click Start to re-start the service manually.
7. Click Retry on the installer screen.
8. Ensure that the user name provided during installation is a member of the Administrators account.
AccessData Distributed Processing Configuring Distributed Processing | 559

Using Distributed Processing
To utilize the Distributed Processing Engine when adding evidence to a case
1. Make sure the case folder is shared before trying to add and process evidence.
2. Enter the path to the case folder in the Create New Case dialog in UNC format.
3. Click Detailed Options, and select options as you normally would.
4. Click OK to return to the New Case Options dialog.
5. Mark Open the case and then click OK to create the new case and open it.
6. The new case is opened and the Manage Evidence dialog is automatically opened. Click Add. Select
the evidence type to add. Select the evidence file to add and then click Open.
7. The path to the evidence is designated by drive letter by default. Change the path to UNC format by
changing the drive letter to the machine name or IP address where the evidence file is located,
according to the following syntax:
\\[computername_or_IP_address]\[pathname]\[filename]
8. Leave the remaining path as is.
9. Click OK.
Note: If a case was originally processed using distributed processing, when a reviewer conducts a live search,
the system will first attempt to use the computer with the distributed processing engine, but if it is not
available, it will use the reviewer’s local computer to conduct the search.
Checking the Installation

When you have completed the installation, open the Task Manager on the remote computer, and keep it open
while you add the evidence and begin processing. This will allow you to watch the activity of the
ProcessingEngine.EXE in the Processes tab.
The Distributed Processing Engine does not activate until a case exceeds approximately 30,000 items. When it
does activate, you will see the CPU percentage and Memory usage increase for the ProcessingEngine.EXE in
Task Manager.
AccessData Distributed Processing Using Distributed Processing | 560

Monitoring Distributed Processing
In the Lab infrastructure, it is possible to set up multiple distributed processing engines, or DPEs. These engines
can be monitored using the Processing Engines Monitor tool. This tool allows users to manage one or more
distributed processing engines dynamically, allowing for instant clarity on what each engine is working on.
To access the Processing Engines Monitor:

1. Navigate to one of the following paths:
Case Manager > Tools > Processing Engine Config
Examiner > View > Progress Window > Engine Monitor
When opened, user must select a processing manager to show in the UI. If using only a single manager,
it will automatically populate.
2. Click on the Status tab.
About the Status Tab

The Status tab will display the Host Name/IP, Status (connected or disconnected), and Job Count for all existing
processing engines. It is possible to view current connection data by clicking the Refresh Now button. To set up
automatic refreshing, choose a duration in the Status Auto Refresh drop down menu.
Select an engine to populate data in the Engine Details pane. When selected, the following data will display:
Case ID
Evidence
Job Type
Processes
Job Path
To refresh this information, click the Refresh Now button.
AccessData Distributed Processing Monitoring Distributed Processing | 561

FTK Ug PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FTK Ug PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FTK Ug PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Forensic Toolkit

AccessData Legal Information

AccessData Trademarks and Copyright Information

AccessData Certified Examiner® (ACE®) Discovery Cracker® MPE+ Velocitor™

AD AccessData™ Distributed Network Attack® Password Recovery Toolkit®

AD eDiscovery® DNA® PRTK®

AD RTK™ Forensic Toolkit® (FTK®) Registry Viewer®

Third party acknowledgements:

www.accessdata.com anytime to find the latest releases of our products.

Mailing Address and General Phone Numbers

AccessData Mailing Address, Hours, and Department Phone Numbers

Corporate Headquarters: AccessData Group, Inc.

Voice: 801.377.5410; Fax: 801.377.5426

General Corporate Hours: Monday through Friday, 8:00 AM – 5:00 PM (MST)

State and Local Voice: 800.574.5199, option 1; Fax: 801.765.4370

Federal Sales: Voice: 800.574.5199, option 2; Fax: 801.765.4370

Corporate Sales: Voice: 801.377.5410, option 3; Fax: 801.765.4370

Training: Voice: 801.377.5410, option 6; Fax: 801.765.4370

Accounting: Voice: 801.377.5410, option 4

AccessData Support Portal

800-658-5199 (North America)

NOTE: Emergency support is available on weekends:

Saturday and Sunday 8:00am – 6:00pm MST via [email protected]

Contact Information for Professional Services

AccessData Professional Services Contact Information

Contact Method Number or Address

International: +1.801.377.5410, option 7

Part 1: Introducing Forensic Toolkit® (FTK®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

Chapter 1: Introducing AccessData® Forensic Toolkit® (FTK®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Chapter 2: Getting Started with the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Part 2: Administrating Forensic Toolkit® (FTK®) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34

Chapter 3: FTK Application Administration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Part 3: Case Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Chapter 4: Creating and Configuring New Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

Chapter 5: Managing Case Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Chapter 6: Working with Evidence Image Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Chapter 7: Introducing FTK Case Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Chapter 8: Working with Static Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Chapter 9: Working with Live Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Chapter 10: Filtering Data to Locate Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Chapter 11: Working with Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Chapter 12: Decrypting Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

Chapter 13: Exporting Data from the Examiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Chapter 14: About Cerberus Malware Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Chapter 15: Running Cerberus Malware Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 17: Using the Known File Filter (KFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

Chapter 18: Using Project VIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275

Part 4: Reviewing Cases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284

Chapter 19: Using the FTK Examiner Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285

Chapter 20: Exploring Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297

Chapter 21: Examining Evidence in the Overview Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315

Chapter 22: Examining Email . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320

Chapter 23: Examining Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324

Chapter 24: Examining Videos . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

Chapter 25: Examining Miscellaneous Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339

Chapter 26: Bookmarking Evidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388

Chapter 27: Searching Evidence with Live Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400

Chapter 28: Searching Evidence with Index Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Chapter 29: Viewing System Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427